Mercedes Gla Suv 2023 October h247 Mbux Owners Manual 1

GLA
Owner's Manual +
Did you know?
In order to meet all needs, your operator's manual is available to you in various formats.
In addition to this PDF, the following options are open to you:
Digital – in the vehicle Digital – on the Internet

Discover the Operator's Manual in the multimedia system You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz
under "Vehicle". Begin with quick start, discover highlights homepage.
and useful tips.
Digital – as an App
Vehicle document wallet The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge
Here you can find comprehensive information about oper‐ in familiar App stores.
ating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in
printed form.
Apple® iOS AndroidTM

Front passenger airbag warning
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be
struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with

an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE COMPONENTS OF THE VEHICLE:
yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life for the
vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notes in this Owner's Manual. Failure R Digital Owner's Manual
to do so may lead to personal injury or damage to the vehicle. R Printed Owner's Manual
R Service Booklet
THE STANDARD EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR VEHI‐
CLE MAY VARY AND DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS: R Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
R Supplementary documents
R Model
R Order
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in
R National version the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.
R Availability
In individual cases, your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. For right-
hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.
MERCEDES-BENZ THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INTRODUCE

CHANGES IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS:
R Design
R Equipment
R Technical features
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that
your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version.
Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
COPYRIGHT
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and
used on other websites.
GLA - Owner's Manual
Contents
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.
Symbols 7 Opening and closing 185 MBUX multimedia system 514
Quick start and Tips 9 Seats and stowing 215 Maintenance and care 670
At a glance 76 Light and sight 271 Breakdown assistance 694
Digital Owner's Manual 96 Climate control 290 Wheels and tyres 724
General notes 99 Driving and parking 304 Technical data 748
Display messages and warning/indicator

Occupant safety 133 Driver's display 476 833
lamps
Children in the vehicle 155 MBUX Voice Assistant 502 Index 918
Symbols
Symbols
Symbols
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols: # Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic

& WARNING
Danger due to not observing the warning notices Display Display in the central display
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia
health or life, or the health or life of others. system
# Observe the warning notices. 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia
system
* Indicates a cause
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental
notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsi‐
ble behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE
Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material
damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your
vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information

that could be helpful to you.
8
Quick start and Tips
Quick start and Tips

Children in the vehicle 10 ENERGIZING Packages 17 At the filling station 31
MULTIBEAM LED 11 Driving Assistance package 18 Preparing for a holiday 42
Radio 12 Parking Package 19 Luggage and loading 47
High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2

Wi-Fi hotspot 13 20 Ice and snow 55
or 3)
High-voltage battery direct current charg‐

Connecting a mobile phone 14 21 Help in the event of a breakdown 62
ing (mode 4)
MBUX Interior Assistant 15 Destination entry navigation 22 Expert tips 71
MBUX Voice Assistant 16 New multimedia system features 23

Quick start and Tips Children in the vehicle
Children in the vehicle
Safe transportation of children in the vehicle R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys‐
tems on the front passenger seat (/ page 162)
# Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 158) R Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
(/ page 178)
# Important warning notices (/ page 159)
# Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 162)
# Recommended child restraint systems (/ page 166)
# Child safety locks for the rear side windows (/ page 182)
# Suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system
(/ page 156) # Child safety locks for the rear doors (/ page 180)
# Approval categories for child restraint systems (/ page 165)
# Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

(/ page 170)
R Fitting the ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 175)
# Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems

(/ page 171).
R (/ page 175) Fitting the i-Size child restraint system on the rear
seat
# Fastening a Top Tether belt (/ page 177)
# Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

(/ page 171)
R Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff
(/ page 164)
10
Quick start and Tips MULTIBEAM LED
MULTIBEAM LED
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the weather and the situation on the
road and provide advanced functions for improving the illumination of the
road.
THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R Active headlamps (/ page 275)

R Cornering light (/ page 275)
R Motorway mode (/ page 275)
R City lighting (/ page 276)
R Off-road light (/ page 276)
# Activating or deactivating MULTIBEAM LED:

R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
R Select Settings.
R Select Lights.
R Select MULTIBEAM LED.
R Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
11
Quick start and Tips Radio
Radio
Operating radio R Select è.

R Enter a station name or frequency.
# To switch to radio: R Select a station.
R Briefly press © on the multimedia system display.
# To store radio stations:
R Tap on Þ.
# To set the frequency band: R Tap on Þ.
R Briefly press © on the multimedia system display. R Select f.
R Tap on Þ.
# To set the traffic information service volume increase:
R Select a frequency band or a favourite.
# To set a radio station: R Tap on Z.
R Briefly press © on the multimedia system display. R Select System.
R Tap on Þ. R Select Audio.
R Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio R Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
station.
R Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.
# To call up the radio station list:
R Tap on Þ.
R Select 4.
# To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

R Tap on Þ.
12
Quick start and Tips Wi-Fi hotspot
Wi-Fi hotspot
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot R Security key

The connection is established by entering the security key displayed on
GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE: the multimedia system.
R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

The multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communica‐
tion devices such as a smartphone or tablet PC.
The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device
is used for the data connection.
Data volumes must be purchased via the Mercedes me Portal.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in
all countries.
R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the
multimedia system.
The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Acquired package
is used for the data connection.
OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A CONNECTION:
R QR code
The connection is set up by scanning the QR code shown on the multi‐
media system.
R NFC
The connection is set up by placing the mobile communication device in
the NFC interface of the vehicle.
13
Quick start and Tips Connecting a mobile phone
Connecting a mobile phone
Connecting a mobile phone

# Activating Bluetooth®:
R Make sure that the mobile phone Bluetooth® is switched on.
R Tap on © on the central display or media display.
R Select Settings.
R Select System.
R Select Internet and Bluetooth.
R Activate Bluetooth®.
# Searching for a mobile phone:

R Tap on © on the central display or media display.
R Select Phone.
R Select Z.
R Select Devices.
R Select Devices.
R Select Connect new device.
# Authorising a mobile phone:

R Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.
14
Quick start and Tips MBUX Interior Assistant
MBUX Interior Assistant
Using the MBUX Interior Assistant The Assistant enhances comfort by automating functions inside the vehi‐
cle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle.
If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of R INFOTAINMENT
the multimedia system can be operated contact-free The Assistant facilitates operation of the Infotainment functions.
The Assistant recognises driver and front passenger interactions.
One application example is switching the reading light on or off.
THE ASSISTANT SUPPORTS VEHICLE AND INFOTAINMENT FUNCTIONS AT
THREE INTERACTION LEVELS:
R INTELLIGENT
The Assistant recognises vehicle occupants and objects automatically
and activates functions.
R REACTIVE
The Assistant recognises the natural body language of a vehicle occu‐
pant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation. Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger
R CONTACTLESS # Move your hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror.
The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand move‐ The reading light is switched on or off.
ment or pose.
THE ASSISTANT OFFERS FUNCTIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING:
R SAFETY
The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint sys‐
tems.
R COMFORT
15
Quick start and Tips MBUX Voice Assistant
MBUX Voice Assistant
Operating the MBUX Voice Assistant

YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOW‐
ING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT:
R Telephone
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation
R Radio and media
R Vehicle functions
R Online functions
EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE VOICE COMMANDS:
R To operate the phone: Call my father.

R To manage e-mails: Show me my new e-mails.
R To operate the navigation: Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japa-
nese, in South London.
R To operate the radio: Which station am I currently listening to?
R To operate media: Play a similar track.
R To operate climate control: My feet are cold.
R To operate vehicle functions: Open the window.
R To call up the weather: Will it be sunny tomorrow?
R To ask a general knowledge question: Who painted the picture "The
Scream"?
16
Quick start and Tips ENERGIZING Packages
ENERGIZING Packages
Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

# To start an ENERGIZING programme:
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
R Select Comfort.
R Select ENERGIZING COMFORT.
R Select a programme and start with ;.
# To configure an ENERGIZING programme:

R Select a programme.
R Select Settings.
R Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.
# To start Power Nap:

R Select Power Nap.
R Select ; for the desired seat.
# To start a training programme:

R Select Training.
R Select a programme and start with ;.
R To activate fragrancing for training, select Air freshener.
# To start Tips:
R Select Tips.
R Select an area of the body and start with ;.
17
Quick start and Tips Driving Assistance package
Driving Assistance package
Functions of the Driving Assistance Package # Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 420)
# Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent)

The Driving Assistance Package contains various functions that assist you
when driving. For this purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and radar sensors # Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 437)
to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
The following functions are included in the Driving Assistance Package,
depending on country-specific availability:
# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 408)
# Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 414)
# Route-based speed adaptation (country-dependent) (/ page 415)
# Active Brake Assist (/ page 422)
# Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 418)
18
Quick start and Tips Parking Package
Parking Package
Functions of the Parking Package # Trailer Manoeuvring Assist: Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you
when reversing with a trailer. The reversing camera monitors the articula‐
Depending on country-specific availability, your vehicle may be equipped with tion angle between the vehicle and the trailer and adjusts it to a speci‐
various functions to assist you with parking and manoeuvring. For this pur‐ fied value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your speed
pose, your vehicle uses cameras and ultrasonic sensors to monitor the vehicle (/ page 462).
surroundings.
Depending on the equipment version, the following systems and functions are
part of your Parking Package:
# Reversing camera: monitors the area to the rear of the vehicle and dis‐
plays this in the driver display (/ page 442).
# 360° camera: a system comprising four cameras which cover the imme‐
diate vehicle surroundings and display this in the driver display
(/ page 446).
# Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: an electronic parking assistance system

which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and the distance to
obstacles in the vicinity using ultrasound (/ page 450).
# Active Parking Assist: an electronic parking assistance system which

assists you when parking or exiting a parking space by changing gear,
accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle (/ page 453).
19
Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
Starting and ending the charging process
# More notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 359)
# Overview of the charging cable control panel (/ page 366)
20
Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)
High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)
DC charging (mode 4)
Starting and ending the charging process
# Further notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 359)
# Overview of the charging cable control panel (/ page 366)
21
Quick start and Tips Destination entry navigation
Destination entry navigation
Entering a navigation destination Select a POI category, e.g. j or enter a POI name or POI category in the
input line.
# Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. If search results are displayed, limit them with Filter, for example by
The home screen is shown. search position or the desired travel time.
R Select Contacts.
# Select Navigation.
Requirements:
# Select ª. A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system and contacts
SELECT THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR DESTINATION ENTRY: have been downloaded.
The contact contains a navigable address.
R Enter a POI, an address or a three-word address in the input line. R Enter the geocoordinates as latitude and longitude in the input line.
Online search results for POIs (if available) may contain additional infor‐
Example 1: 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes, seconds and com‐
mation, for example opening times and prices. The information is provi‐
pass direction)
ded by an online map service.
Example 2: 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
You can find further information about 3-word addresses at: http://
+what3words.com
R Select a destination on the map.
R Select a destination suggestion.

R Select Favourites.
Requirements: Requirements:
The Navigation option is switched on in the user settings for Suggestions. The destinations have been saved as favourites.
The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show

R Select Received destinations.
destination suggestions. Requirements:
R Select Previous destinations. There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.
Select a previous destination. The destinations have been sent to the vehicle.
You can save the destination as a favourite .
R Select POIs.
22
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features
New multimedia system features
Information about the telephone menu THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED:
R Call lists
R Contacts
R Messages
R Device manager
USING CALL LISTS

If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists from
the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
mobile phone THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
2 Bluetooth® device name of the other currently connected mobile phone/of
the mobile phone R Making calls from the call list
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network R Opening contacts on the call list
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone MESSAGES
5 Options In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send
6 Messages them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. In addition, you can conven‐
7 Calls up my devices iently use the read-aloud function during the journey.
8 Numerical pad
DEVICE MANAGER
9 Starts contact search In the device manager, you can connect your mobile phone with the multime‐
TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW dia system.
Via the telephone menu you can use the functions in connection with your
You have the option of using your mobile phone alone in single telephone
mobile phone.
mode or together with another mobile phone in two phone mode.
23
USING CONTACTS
If you permit the multimedia system to access the contacts in your mobile
Information about navigation
phone, you can use these in the vehicle. You can store up to 8,000 contacts.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU VIA THE CONTACTS

MENU:
R Making telephone calls (calling a contact)

R Navigation
R Composing messages with the help of the MBUX voice assistant
R Additional options
The contacts from your mobile phone can be downloaded automatically or

manually. 1 Navigation module (reduced view)
Route guidance active:
CONDUCTING A CALL
When conducting a call, additional functions are available apart from making, The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the
accepting or rejecting a call. For example, you can switch between calls, con‐ zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay
duct a call with several participants or conference calls. £ Ends the current route guidance
Tapping opens the navigation module and displays the route overview
It is also possible to accept or reject waiting calls. If you receive a call while (/ page 576)
already in a call, a message is displayed.
2 Sets map orientation Ä and map type
DURING A CALL YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: 3 Calls up the telephone menu
4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
R Microphone off
5 Calls up entertainment applications
R Fade in the numerical pad to send DTMF tones 6 Elevation and map scale (/ page 594)
R Add a call 7 Navigation window shows the next manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the
R Hands-free mode to transfer the call to the front or rear passenger com‐ route monitor (zoomed in view)
partment Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming
R Privacy mode to transfer the call to the telephone or headphones driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays,
3D images at motorway exits, online content
24
When you switch on the multimedia system or after selecting ©, the digital Lane recommendations are shown during route guidance on multi-lane roads.
map is shown. When driving on a motorway, service facilities on the route ahead can be
shown and used for route guidance.
The navigation system offers many options for destination entry, route plan‐
ning and route guidance. The traffic situation is taken into account during The Live Traffic Information service takes the current traffic situation into
route guidance. When using route guidance with augmented reality, additional account. The map can show the current traffic flow, traffic incidents or warning
information can be shown in a camera image before a turning manoeuvre. messages, e.g. before the end of traffic jams that pose a risk.
Services and apps help you reach the destination quickly, safely and in com‐
fort. Hazardous situations on public roads are detected automatically by the vehicle
via Car-to-X-Communication or these can be reported by the driver. The early
After tapping on navigation module 1 start destination entry via ª in the warning makes it possible to adapt your driving characteristics in good time.
route overview. You can enter the POI, address or contact as the destination Accidents, broken-down vehicles, weather hazards or a vehicle with activated
on-board or search online using a map service. Or you select a previous desti‐ hazard warning lights are shown on the map.
nation. The destination can be stored here as a favourite or be saved as an
address for home and work. When the Allow destination suggestions option is For route guidance with augmented reality, information objects such as arrows
indicating a turn, street names and house numbers are shown in a video image
switched on, the vehicle makes suggestions based on your visited navigation
during the driving manoeuvre or at traffic lights.
destinations. If external destinations and routes are received from apps or
services, these are also available. The map shows map data from the database or from an online map service. In
small map scales, buildings are shown as realistic images. The online map
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR ROUTE PLANNING, FOR
update service makes possible the updating of the map data.
EXAMPLE:
Weather information and data from other services can be shown on the map.
R Route options:
Multi-storey car parks with the corresponding equipment, deliver data about
e.g. avoid or use toll roads, tunnels, unpaved roads or areas the current occupancy and about parking charges, for example.
R Intermediate destinations
R Alternative routes The options offered vary depending on the country, vehicle equipment and
available services.
R Commuter route
R Automatic filling station and service station search
You can record and save routes then select or share them with a USB device.
25
NAVIGATION MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW) WITH ROUTE OVERVIEW

Information on radio
Example: route guidance is active

1 Enters an address or POI
2 Destination and time of arrival
beneath that the current distance to the destination and the chequered
flag 1 Active frequency band
3 Alternative routes 2 Station name or set frequency
4 Searches for parking 3 Settings
5 Switches traffic information display on or off 4 Additional options
6 Makes settings for View, Messages & tones and Route 5 Switches on traffic reports
6 Station list
7 Search
Using the radio menu you can play a multitude of radio stations and use the
Internet Radio TuneIn. Search for your preferred stations and save these as
favourites or in station lists.
% The function of TuneIn Internet radio is country-dependent.
Radio text: this function shows you the station name, the track and the artist
for the song currently playing, for example.
26
DAB: with the DAB function, graphically formatted extra information about a C Media search
station can be shown, e.g. logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, D Controls playback
news or also service information.
E Timeline
Traffic announcements: Traffic messages can be displayed by pressing .. Using the Media application, you can set and use the audio and video func‐
tions of your multimedia system. You can listen to music or look at videos, for
example.
Information on media
USB: Using the USBmenu, you can play back your own audio or video data
from a data storage medium connected by USB.
Bluetooth®: Using the Bluetooth menu, you can connect Bluetooth® audio
equipment with the multimedia system and play back the available tracks on
the audio equipment. Connecting the device can be conveniently handled in
the device manager, so you can complete all settings with just a few clicks.
Online music: The Online music menu allows you to access music streaming
services.
Notes on comfort
1 Album cover
2 Active media source The Comfort menu makes all the functions available that contribute to your
3 Track and artist comfort when driving or taking a break.
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback SEAT COMFORT
list The Seat menu allows you to flexibly adjust the contours of the seats to your
5 Random playback needs by adjusting the side bolsters and lumbar support independently. You
6 Repeat can save these settings in your Mercedes me profile, so they can be called up
7 Settings each time you drive. With the Seat kinetics function, you can start a pro‐
8 Additional options gramme that causes slight modifications of the seat position when you are
driving. These modifications promote a healthy back.
9 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward
A Additional categories
B Playlists and categories
27
MASSAGE DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE THE FOLLOWING MENUS ARE AVAILABLE:

In the Massage menu you will find the massage programmes that are available
for your vehicle. By selecting the desired programme you start it directly and it R Energy flow
runs for a period of approximately ten minutes, depending on the programme Visualisation of the energy flow in the vehicle
selected. With the High intensity function you can increase the effect of the R Consumption
massage programme. Display of the current and average consumption values of the vehicle
AMBIENT LIGHT R Vehicle
In the Ambient light menu you can set the colour and brightness for your ambi‐ Display of vehicle data
ent lighting. Using the Link zones function, the ambience, accent and impres‐ R Engine
sion zones can be regulated separately so that you can set the lighting of your
Display of engine data such as current power and torque
vehicle individually.
R Drive
Display of current data of various drive elements such as current, voltage
Information about smartphone integration and temperature
Using the Smartphone Integration menu, various applications are available that
can bring the functions of your mobile phone to the multimedia system dis‐ Information about vehicle info
play. Operation can by carried out via the touchscreen or voice control, for
example. You can have important vehicle information displayed in the Info menu. At a
glance you will have an overview of vehicle and engine data or current con‐
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration sumption values, for example. In addition, you can call up the Digital Owner's
to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Manual via the Owner's Manual menu item.
Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐
tooth® with the multimedia system. VEHICLE DATA
THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE SHOWN, FOR EXAMPLE:
Use Android Auto for mobile phones with the Android operating system and
use Apple CarPlay® with your iPhone®. The full functionality of Android Auto R Activity of the acceleration and brake pedal
and Apple CarPlay® is only possible with an Internet connection. R Activity of the suspension strut
R Wheel angle
Information on AMG Performance R G-force display for the linear and lateral acceleration
Using the AMG Performance menu, you can call up information about the per‐
formance of your vehicle.
28
ENGINE DATA R Using the web browser to surf the Internet

THE FOLLOWING DATA IS SHOWN:
You require a user account, and have to connect your vehicle with the user
R Transmission oil temperature
account, in order to be able to use services.
R Engine/coolant temperature
R Performance
% If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehi‐
R Torque cle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.
R Boost pressure
CONSUMPTION DATA Please not that the available features are country-dependent.
Depending on your driving style, this display shows the current and average
fuel consumption. Together with the displays of vehicle and engine data, you
can adapt your driving style to be as efficient and economical as possible. Information on settings
In the Settings you can set the basic configuration for your multimedia system
Information about In-Car Office and the vehicle. You have access to all functions in this menu, from switching
the driver assistance systems on and off to display and language settings.
Using the In-Car Office menu you can connect your online services with the
multimedia system. THE SETTINGS ARE STRUCTURED IN THE FOLLOWING MENUS:
R Assistance
YOU THEN HAVE MULTIPLE OPTIONS AVAILABLE:
R Vehicle
R Organising your meetings and telephone conferences. R Lights
R Managing your e-mails and appointments. R System
R Have navigation to the location for a meeting.
ASSISTANCE MENU
With the Assistance menu you have direct access to the driver assistance sys‐
Information about Mercedes me Apps tems which are installed in your vehicle and can either switch these on or off,
or configure according to your wishes.
VARIOUS SERVICES AND ONLINE FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE VIA THE
APPS MERCEDES ME MENU: VEHICLE MENU
HERE YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Managing Mercedes me services
R Using the dashcam R Automatic folding in of the outside mirrors when parking the vehicle
29
R Automatic adjustment of the seat and steering wheel, for comfortable

entry and exit from the vehicle
R Automatic activation of the 360° camera when selecting reverse gear
LIGHT MENU
All the light settings can be carried out in the Lights menu. You can activate or
deactivate the Intelligent Light System here, set for how long your vehicle
should remain lit after parking or unlocking or switch the function off.
SYSTEM MENU
All important settings for the multimedia system can be carried out in the Sys-
tem menu.
YOU CAN CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Setting the system language

R The configuration of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
R Setting of time and date
30
Quick start and Tips At the filling station
At the filling station
Refuelling the vehicle & WARNING

Risk of injury from fuels
& WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes
Fuels are highly flammable.
or clothing.
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐ # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
ded.
# Keep children away from fuel.
# Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the sta‐
tionary heater and keep switched off during filling. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the follow‐
ing:
# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse

them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do

not induce vomiting.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact

with fuel.
31
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. Vehicles with a petrol engine:
# Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. system, the engine and the emission control system.
# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into # Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine
the vehicle again during the refuelling process. fuel.
Petrol can contain up to 25 Vol.‑% ethanol by volume.

& WARNING
# See the information label in fuel filler flap for compatible fuels.
Risk of fire from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Further information about compatible fuels can be obtained at a quali‐
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is fied specialist workshop.
lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
Throughout Europe you can also find the compatibility labels on the
While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
may overheat without warning.
NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:
# Never refuel using petrol.
R Diesel
# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
R Petrol with metallic additives
If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:
# Do not switch on the vehicle.
32
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL:
* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
system, the engine and the emission control system.
# Only refuel with sulphur-free diesel fuel.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, only refuel with
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content below 50 ppm.
# Vehicles without a diesel particulate filter: only refuel with

* NOTE
diesel fuel with a sulphur content below 500 ppm.
Do not refuel diesel-engined vehicles with petrol
NEVER REFUEL WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS: IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL:
R Petrol R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
R Marine diesel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
R Heating oil the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
R Pure biodiesel or vegetable oil
R Petroleum or kerosene

33
* NOTE
Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling
pump:

1 Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap
* NOTE 3 Tyre pressure table
Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle 4 Fuel type
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. 5 QR code for rescue card
Requirements % Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel filler flap opens
automatically after the fuel tank has been vented (/ page 355).
R The vehicle is unlocked.
R Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel tank was vented before # Press on the centre rear of fuel filler flap 1.
refuelling (/ page 355).
# Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.
Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. # Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the infor‐
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place
mation label in the fuel filler flap.
and refuel.
34
% Vehicles with diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for Refilling AdBlue®
refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being filled, your vehicle is
* NOTE
equipped with an incorrect fuelling protector. This function may
Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
be deactivated in some countries due to local conditions. For
more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. # AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® tank.

% Vehicles with diesel engine: do not run the fuel tank empty. # Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.
When the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 l
diesel before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE
% Vehicles with diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diam‐ Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage
eter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from # After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank.
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being filled, your vehicle is # Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the
equipped with an incorrect fuelling protector. This function may vehicle.
more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Requirements
# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages R The vehicle is unlocked.
audibly.
# Close fuel filler flap 1. THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR IN ORDER IN THE DRIVER DISPLAY
WHEN THE ADBLUE® TANK REQUIRES REFILLING:
R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
reserve range. Add at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining dis‐
tance displayed has been driven. Add at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
35
R Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. # Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and remove it.
The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed
displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it
% You can also place the AdBlue® filler cap in the filler cap holder in
will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up at least the dis‐
the hinge arm of the fuel filler flap.
played quantity of AdBlue®.
R Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not
possThe AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Top REFILLING ADBLUE®
up at least the displayed quantity of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and Mercedes-Benz recommends that you top up AdBlue® at a pump. If no AdBlue®
wait approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle. pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue® with a canister.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the driver display Service.
% The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style

and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate
from the calculated range.
OPENING THE ADBLUE® FILLER CAP
# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canister 4.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister 4

until hand-tight.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-
tight.
# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 4.

The filling process stops when the AdBlue® container is completely full.
# Press on the centre of the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
36
AdBlue® refill canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially Topping up the windscreen washer system
emptied.
# Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and AdBlue® refill canister 4 in & DANGER
reverse order. Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
the charging process
# Replace the AdBlue filler cap® 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
engages.
tem is under high voltage.
# Close fuel filler flap 1.
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds. process.
% If it was no longer possible to start the vehicle due to the empty & WARNING
AdBlue® tank, it takes up to 60 seconds for topping up to be Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
detected.
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING
# Start the vehicle. SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.

% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehi‐ R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating flu‐
cle. ids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the

bonnet closed and call the fire service.
37
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to moving parts ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust
system.
Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:
# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out
# Switch off the vehicle. next to the filler opening.
# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐
nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
# Remove jewellery and watches.
# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING
Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
ment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Remove cap 1 by the tab.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component # Top up the washer fluid.
parts described in the following.
38
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades SERVICE INDICATOR
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched
on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before

changing the wiper blades.
MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION # Remove protective film 1 from the service indicators on the tips of the
# Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. newly fitted wiper blades.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐ When the colour of the service indicators changes from black to yellow,
bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 283). replace the wiper blades.
The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
% The time until the colour changes varies depending on the usage
% Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace conditions.
them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.
# Observe the information about the service indicator. Checking the engine oil level using the driv‐
er's display
Requirements
R The engine has been warmed up.

R The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
R The engine is running at idle speed.
39
R The bonnet is closed. R For engine oil level, switch on vehicle
Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driv‐ # Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
ing style and even longer with an active driving style.
R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not
Driver display: connected.
4 Service
The engine oil level is shown. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER'S DIS‐ R Engine oil level System currently inoperative
PLAY:
R Engine oil level Measuring now…: the engine oil level cannot be deter‐
# Close the bonnet.
mined yet.
Information on washing the vehicle in a car

Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
wash
#
R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level
on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the
& WARNING
engine oil level is correct.
Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing
the vehicle
R Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while pay‐
ing attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has
# Add 1 l of engine oil.
been fully restored.
R Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil
level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":
# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
40
R the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.

* NOTE R the blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
Damage from automatic braking
R the windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHI‐
R the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
CLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:
wise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
R Active Brake Assist R for car washes with a conveyor system:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC - neutral i is engaged.
R HOLD function - If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make
R Active Parking Assist sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is other‐
wise automatically engaged.
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
towing or in the car wash.
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen
and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
NOTE noise.
*
Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is
suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the

underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular

the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH,

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

R the HOLD function is switched off.
R the 360° Camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
41
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday
Preparing for a holiday
Notes on adjusting the lights when driving & WARNING

abroad Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. The legal requirements are also
an accident.
met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.
On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tyres # Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.
& WARNING MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
R Summer tyres: 3 mm
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any
damaged tyres immediately. # For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐
bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for

the minimum tread depth is reached.
CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT

LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A
LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 729).
42
R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.

% Remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest
R Check the valve caps.
compartment for a new safety vest. Otherwise, it may cause
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across unintentional slipping or make removing difficult.
the entire width. Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres
4 mm.
Removing the safety vest
1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
7 Class 2 safety vest
There is a high-visibility waistcoat compartment on the door shelves of all The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
doors for storing a high-visibility waistcoat. vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2. REPLACE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
# Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest. R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty
# Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and place it in the safety vest R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
1. R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to
# Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the lower edge of the armrest into the sunlight.
safety vest compartment. Ensure that the loop 2 hangs out so that it is
easy to reach.
43
DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY: The first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located in the load compartment on the left
in the stowage net or under the load compartment floor, depending on the
R Please contact your local waste disposal company. respective vehicle version.
Removing the warning triangle

Map data update overview
As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a
negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation
experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-
Benz.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP

DATA:
The warning triangle is secured to the underside of the load compartment
floor. R Online map update
R Updates from the Mercedes me Portal
# Open the load compartment floor 1.
R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
# Remove warning triangle 2. Additional costs can be incurred in this process.
Depending on the vehicle version, the warning triangle may be located in the ONLINE MAP UPDATE
loading sill under the load compartment floor. REQUIREMENTS:
R Mercedes me connect is available.

First-aid kit (soft sided) overview R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R The Online Map Update service is available for your region.
R The service has been activated.
% The Online Map Update service is only available in certain coun‐

tries.
44
Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update. - The service is available and has been activated.
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the
European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved.
% If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using
The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle the data of the digital map.
is switched on.
Multimedia system:
UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL
The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª
your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/
Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car
> Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage
medium.
After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your
vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the
map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has
been restarted, the updated map data is used.
Entering a POI or address Example: entering a POI or address

Requirements: 1 Input line with current entry
2 Deletes an entry
R For the online search:
3 Selects previous destinations
- There is an Internet connection.
4 Displays and selects additional destination searches
- Mercedes me connect is available.
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
6 Search result
- The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have 7 Deletes the last character entered
accepted the terms of use.
8 Hides the keypad
- Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
9 Switches to handwriting recognition (/ page 534)
A Sets the written language
45
B Switches to digits and special characters Searching for radio stations using station
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
names or frequency entry
If available, selecting the p symbol starts the MBUX Voice Assistant.
Multimedia system:
# Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order. 4 © 5 Þ Radio
The search results are displayed in a list. # Select è.
# Enter a station name or frequency.

% Online search results for POIs may contain additional informa‐
tion, for example opening times and ratings. The information is # Select a station.
provided by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all countries.
THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN 1:
R Town, street, house number or street, town

R Postcode
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
R Town, POI name
R Contact name
R Geo-coordinates (/ page 567)
R Three-word addresses from what3words (/ page 567)
Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search.
# Hide the keyboard with a.
# Select the destination in the list.

The following menu shows the selected destination with the address
information and a corresponding map section.
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
46
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading
Luggage and loading
Attaching a roof luggage rack * NOTE

Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐
& WARNING ble clearance height
Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged.
well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. # Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as # If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
drive in.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving # Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
style.
structures or other carrier systems into account.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data"
section.
47
* NOTE
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved
roof luggage racks & WARNING
The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body
# When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama sliding parts in the sweep of the seat.
sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the & WARNING
vehicle interior. Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
NOTES ON DRIVING WITH ROOF LOAD The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
even while the vehicle is in motion.
R Distribute the roof load and vehicle load evenly, and place heavy objects
at the bottom. Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
(/ page 242) . with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
intended and could cause additional injury.
R Drive carefully, avoiding abrupt starting, braking and steering as well as
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be
fast cornering.
restrained by the seat backrest.
R When transporting a roof load and with a fully laden or fully occupied
vehicle, select one of the drive programs ; and A. These are con‐ # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
figured for good stability (/ page 333). backrest are engaged before every trip.
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof railing. Vehicles without movable rear bench seats: if a seat backrest in the rear
passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri‐
# Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
fication indicator will be visible.
Vehicles with movable rear bench seats: if the centre seat backrest in the
rear passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock
48
verification indicator will be visible. The outer seat backrests lock automati‐ FOLDING THE CENTRE SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS
cally when they are not folded down.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold
the backrest back into place.
Requirements
R The area into which the seat backrest is folded is clear.

R To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: the centre seat backrest has
been unlocked.
R The armrest on the second row of seats is folded back and the cup hold‐ # Pull release catch 3 for seat backrest 2 forwards.
ers are empty.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.
FOLDING THE LEFT AND RIGHT SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARDS

You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards. Folding back the rear seat backrest
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
parts in the sweep of the seat.
# If necessary, fully insert the seat backrest head restraints (/ page 231).
# Pull release lever 1.
49
& WARNING
Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
restrained by the seat backrest. # Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat Vehicles without a movable rear bench seat: if a seat backrest in the rear
backrest are engaged before every trip. passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
tion indicator 2 or 3 will be visible.
Vehicles with a movable rear bench seat: if the centre rear seat backrest is
* NOTE
not engaged and locked in place, red lock verification indicator 3 will be visi‐
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the
ble. The outer seat backrests will lock automatically when they are not folded
seat backrest
down.
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the
seat backrest is folded back.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back
the seat backrest.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
50
Opening or closing the stowage space under Folding the ball neck out and in
the load compartment floor
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.
If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be # Always engage the ball neck as described.
flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in
direction.
& WARNING
# Always close the load compartment floor before a journey. Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not
OPENING been properly engaged.
There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!
# Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unob‐
structed.
# Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards.
* NOTE
Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
# Pull handle 1 upwards. fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer
hitch, retract the ball neck.
# Lift the load compartment floor up using handle 1.
CLOSING
# Fold the load compartment floor down and then press handle 1 down
until it engages.
51
# Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper.
hitch itself may be damaged in the process. Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
# Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching
approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fix‐
ture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is per‐
mitted.
# When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the

information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing
eye."
FOLDING THE BALL NECK OUT

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in
a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check
lock message will appear on the driver's display.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased
or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Keep the swivel range clear.
52
FOLDING THE BALL NECK IN OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT INDICATORS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐
PLAY:
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 900)

R Display messages (/ page 834)
Overview of tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 242).
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.

The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench

seat)
# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly
behind the bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the driver display will
disappear.
53
Overview of the front storage compartments
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always 1 Stowage spaces in the doors
retain all objects within. 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with a multimedia and USB connec‐
tion
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction. 3 Storage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port
4 Glove compartment
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in
such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage

spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
54
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow
Ice and snow
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and & WARNING

tyres Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to damaged tyres On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any # Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
damaged tyres immediately. surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.
MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐



55

R Check the valve caps. * NOTE
Damage to vehicle body or suspension components caused by fit‐
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across
ted snow chains
the entire width.
On 4MATIC vehicles, if you fit snow chains on the rear wheels, you can
damage vehicle body or suspension components.
4 mm.
# On 4MATIC vehicles, only fit snow chains on the front wheels.
Setting the speed limit for winter tyres

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Winter tyre limit R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations.
You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service
# Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
Centre.
SETTING A SPEED R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically
# Select Winter tyre limit. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the
same quality standard.
# Select a speed.
R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist
Notes on snow chains when snow chains are fitted.
& WARNING % You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyres
Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains (/ page 408).
If you have fitted snow chains to the rear wheels, they may drag against
the vehicle body or chassis components.
% You can deactivate ESP® to start off (/ page 398). This allows
# Never fit snow chains on the rear wheels.
the wheels to spin, achieving increased tractive power.
# Only fit snow chains on the front wheels in pairs.
56
Notes on windscreen washer fluid Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be
triggered erroneously.
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 812).
RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:
R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit

& WARNING
‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it
comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze con‐
system. tainer.
# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.
next to the filler opening.
Topping up the windscreen washer system

* NOTE
Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen & DANGER
washer fluid Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the charging process
the exterior lighting. During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
# Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for
use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. # Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
process.
* NOTE
Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind‐
screen washer fluids.
57
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ment
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR: e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
R You may come into contact with hot gases. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating flu‐ parts described in the following.
ids.

& WARNING
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
bonnet closed and call the fire service. Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it
comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust
system.
& WARNING # Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out
Risk of injury due to moving parts next to the filler opening.
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.
# Switch off the vehicle.

58
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. SERVICE INDICATOR
# Top up the washer fluid.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
& WARNING
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before # Remove protective film 1 from the service indicators on the tips of the
changing the wiper blades. newly fitted wiper blades.
When the colour of the service indicators changes from black to yellow,
MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION replace the wiper blades.
# Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐ conditions.
bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 283).
% Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace

# Observe the information about the service indicator.
59
Switching the stationary heater/ventilation & WARNING

on/off via the operating unit Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust
gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases # When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poison‐ R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flamma‐
ous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This ble materials.
is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater
example.
exhaust pipe unhindered.
# Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flam‐
without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages. mable materials.
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from
snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.
* NOTE
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary venti‐
wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. lation operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the bat‐
tery.
# After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer

period of time.
Requirements
R The fuel tank is at least Õ full.
60
# Set the desired temperature using the w button.
# Press button 1.
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
THE COLOURS OF THE INDICATOR LAMP HAVE THE FOLLOWING MEAN‐
INGS:
R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.

R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.
61
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown
Help in the event of a breakdown
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning Removing the fire extinguisher

lights
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other
vehicle occupants.
# Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
# Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

# Press button 1.
THE HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS WILL SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY IF:
R the airbag has been deployed.

R the vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a
standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard
warning light system using button 1.
# Pull the tab 1 upwards.
# Fold tab 1 down.
62
# Remove fire extinguisher 2.
Removing the safety vest

3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
There is a high-visibility waistcoat compartment on the door shelves of all vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
doors for storing a high-visibility waistcoat.
REPLACE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2.
# Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest. R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty
R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
# Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and place it in the safety vest R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to
1.
sunlight.
# Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the lower edge of the armrest into the
safety vest compartment. Ensure that the loop 2 hangs out so that it is
easy to reach. DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:
R Please contact your local waste disposal company.

% Remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest
unintentional slipping or make removing difficult.
Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.
63
Removing the warning triangle QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-
pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to
quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the rout‐
ing of the electric lines) in compact form.
You can find further information at: https://rk.mb-qr.com/de/#rescue-sticker
The warning triangle is secured to the underside of the load compartment

floor. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V bat‐
# Open the load compartment floor 1. tery
# Remove warning triangle 2. STARTING ASSISTANCE/PREPARATION FOR CHARGING
# Secure the vehicle with the electric parking brake.
Depending on the vehicle version, the warning triangle may be located in the
loading sill under the load compartment floor. # Shift the transmission to position j.
# Switch the vehicle and all electrical consumers off.
First-aid kit (soft sided) overview # Open the bonnet.
The first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located in the load compartment on the left
respective vehicle version.
64
# Slide the cover 1 of the positive terminal 2 on the jump-start connec‐ Plug-in hybrid: if the vehicle has been jump-started, the electric drive system
tion point in the direction of the arrow. may not be available for around 30 minutes.
STARTING ASSISTANCE Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Connect the jump lead to the positive terminal of your vehicle.
CHARGING THE 12 V BATTERY
# Connect the jump lead to the positive terminal of the donor battery. # Connect the charging cable to the positive terminal of your vehicle.
# Run the engine of the assisting vehicle at idling speed. # Connect the charging cable to the positive terminal of the charger.
# Connect the jump lead to the negative terminal of the donor battery. # Connect the charging cable to the negative terminal of the charger.
# Connect the jump lead to the earth point 3 of your vehicle. # Connect the charging cable to the earth point 3 of your vehicle.
# Start the engine of your vehicle. # Start the charging procedure.
# Let the engine run for a few minutes.
When the charging procedure has been completed:
# Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch on an electrical consumer in
your vehicle, e.g. the rear window heating or lights. # Disconnect the charging cable from the earth point 3 of your vehicle.
# Disconnect the charging cable from the negative terminal of the charger.
When the starting assistance has been completed:
# Disconnect the charging cable from the positive terminal of your vehicle.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the earth point 3 of your vehicle.
# Disconnect the charging cable from the positive terminal of the charger.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the negative terminal of the donor bat‐
tery. # After removing the charging cables, close the cover 1 of the positive
terminal 2.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the positive terminal of your own vehicle.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the positive terminal of the donor bat‐
tery.
# After removing the jump leads, close the cover 1 of the positive termi‐
nal 2.
65
Notes on electrical fuses * NOTE

Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
& WARNING Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to mal‐
Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines function.
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can
with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.
enter the fuse box.
This could result in a fire. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is
# Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses contain‐ positioned correctly on the fuse box.
ing the correct amperage.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a
* NOTE
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:
Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
systems or their functions being considerably restricted. R All electrical consumers are switched off.
# Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respec‐ R The vehicle is switched off.
tive specified fuse rating.
THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle,
recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 721)
to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 722)
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment R Fuse box in the centre of the load compartment (/ page 723)
(/ page 721).
66
Notes on flat tyres R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 739).
& WARNING % (/ page 745)The emergency spare wheel is only available in

Risk of accident due to a flat tyre certain countries.
A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as steering
and braking.
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a
tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are
# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult
wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ a qualified specialist workshop.
cialist workshop.
YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A
WHEEL:
Run-flat tyres:
R Jack
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended
tyres (run-flat tyres). R Chock
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILA‐
BLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:
R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the
MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (/ page 699). sticker affixed to the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the
TIREFIT kit (/ page 700).
R (/ page 629)Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 in the load compartment.
for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a
breakdown .
67
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be loca‐

ted in other positions in the load compartment.
% When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately

secured.
1 Tyre sealant bottle

2 Tyre inflation compressor
Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other
places under the load compartment floor.
% YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE POWER CATEGORY

(LK) AND/OR ELECTRICAL DATA ON THE BACK OF THE TYRE
THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS: INFLATION COMPRESSOR:
R Jack R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

R Gloves
R Wheel wrench AT A DISTANCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1 M TO THE TYRE INFLA‐
TION COMPRESSOR AND APPROXIMATELY 1.6 M ABOVE THE
R Centring pin
GROUND, THE FOLLOWING SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS APPLY:
R Folding chock
R Ratchet for jack R Emission sound pressure level LPA 83 dB(A)
R Sound power level LWA 91 dB(A)
Storage location of the TIREFIT kit (not plug-

in hybrid) The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. In the event
of a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The TIREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.
68
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the & WARNING

ground Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOW-STARTED OR TOWED AWAY IS HEAV‐
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods.
IER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN OCCUR:
R the towing eye may become detached.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE BATTERY IS DISCHARGED:
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
R the vehicle cannot be started
# Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be
R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission cannot be mass.
shifted to position i or j.
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the transmission can‐ must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
not be shifted to position i or if the display does not show any‐
# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found
thing, transport the vehicle (/ page 717). A towing vehicle with
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 810).
lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or
front passenger door; the transmission otherwise automatically shifts to
* NOTE position j.
Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over # Fit the towing eye (/ page 718).
long distances
# Fasten the towing device.
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high
speeds or over long distances.
# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. * NOTE

Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar
# A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded. # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
69
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 194).

* NOTE
# Do not activate the HOLD function. Damage due to excessive tractive power
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 213). If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the
vehicles could be damaged.
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 426).
# Pull away slowly and smoothly.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift to position i.
# Release the electric parking brake.
& WARNING
Risk of accidents due to restricted safety-related functions during
towing
SAFETY-RELEVANT FUNCTIONS ARE RESTRICTED OR NO LONGER
AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R The vehicle is switched off.

R The brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
R The power supply or the on-board electrical system is defective.
If your vehicle is being towed, considerably more force may be required

for steering and braking.
In addition, important vehicle display messages cannot be seen if the

driver display is faulty.
# Use a tow bar.
# Before towing, ensure that the driver's display is operational

and the steering can move freely.
70
Quick start and Tips Expert tips
Expert tips
Additional functions of buttons & WARNING

OPENING AND CLOSING THE WINDOWS USING THE AIR-RECIRCULATION Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
BUTTON (CONVENIENCE CLOSING/OPENING) ence closing
When air-recirculation mode is activated, the side windows close automati‐ When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
cally, for example, before entering a tunnel. When the air-recirculation mode is could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows.
deactivated, the side windows move back to their original position.
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor
the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
& WARNING are in the closing area.
Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
ence closing
# To close the windows: press and hold the g button until the win‐
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
dows start to move.
could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. The windows close and air-recirculation mode switches on.

the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
71
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS

& WARNING Multimedia system:
Risk of entrapment from the convenience opening feature 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z
During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or # Select Radio announcements.
become trapped between the side window and window frame.
The traffic information is switched on or off.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side
windows.
Useful vehicle functions
# If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the W
button in the door to open the side windows. NOTES ABOUT THE AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVE REAR WINDOW WIPER
The side windows stop. THE REAR WINDOW WIPER WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE ACTIVE IF THE FOL‐
LOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET AT THE SAME TIME:
# To continue closing the side windows, pull on the W button.
R The front windscreen wiper is switched on
R Reverse gear is engaged
# To reopen closed windows: press and hold the g button until the
windows start to move. STORING THE PARKING POSITION OF THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE
The windows move back to their original position and air-recirculation MIRROR USING THE MEMORY BUTTON
mode switches off. Requirements:
Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof closes or opens simulta‐ R Reverse gear has not been engaged.
neously.
IF BODY PARTS BECOME ENTRAPPED IN THE SLIDING SUNROOF:

# To stop: press the 3 button.
# To open: pull the 3 button back.

RESETTING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SETTINGS
# Press and hold the Ã button on the front control panel for four sec‐
onds.
The climate control settings will be reset to the basic settings.
72
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 1. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
R The system detects that there is no moisture on the windscreen when
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking posi‐
the air conditioning system is switched on.
tion using button 2.
R The state of charge and the voltage of the battery are sufficient.
# Press the V button. R The battery temperature is within the range that is suitable for the sys‐
tem.
# Confirm immediately using button 2 to store the setting.
R The system does not detect a steep gradient.
R The bonnet is closed.
% No more than three seconds may pass between the V button
and button 2 being pressed. The mirror adjustment will be can‐
CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC ENGINE START:
celled after three seconds.
R The vehicle is rolling.
R The brake system requires a running engine.
Tips for on the move R The outside temperature has exceeded the range that is suitable for the
system.
VEHICLE CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP OR START
R The atmospheric air pressure has exceeded the range that is suitable for
CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP: the system.
R The ECO start/stop function is switched on. R Engine diagnostics require a running engine.
R The brake system does not require a running engine. R The transmission oil temperature has exceeded the range that is suitable
for the system.
R The outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the sys‐
tem. R The temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range.
R The atmospheric air pressure is within the range that is suitable for the R The system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air condition‐
system. ing system is switched on.
R The engine is at normal operating temperature. R The state of charge of the battery is too low.
R Engine diagnostics are not active. R The battery temperature has exceeded the range that is suitable for the
system.
R The engine speed is within the range that is suitable for the system.
R The transmission oil temperature is within the range that is suitable for
the system.
R The temperature in the vehicle interior is within the set range.
73
Good to know Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make
an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
DEACTIVATING THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY
INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the
KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization via THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that key. Activate the function of MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:
the key so that all of its functions are available once again.
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call
You can also deactivate the key's function to reduce the key's energy con‐ system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete
sumption if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time. failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be trans‐
mitted.
# Press and hold the key button ß. The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the
availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
# With the key button ß pressed, immediately press key button Ü
gency call centre.
twice in quick succession.
The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can
The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly, and then again for be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is
longer.
switched on.
R G: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
% YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE
KEY:
R Press any button on the key. % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loud‐
speakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are
R Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage
faulty.
compartment(/ page 311).
YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐
TEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency R A corresponding message will also appear in the driver dis‐
call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and play.
the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
an accident site in places that are difficult to access.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically

(/ page 640) or manually (/ page 640).
74
EMERGENCY GUIDE
In the event of an accident or breakdown, the emergency guide shows safety
notes on the central display.
THESE INCLUDE, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Recommended actions when leaving the vehicle

R Procedure for safely removing seat belts in the event of an accident
whereby the vehicle comes to rest on its roof
THE EMERGENCY GUIDE IS ACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R Occupant protection system has been triggered

R An emergency call is made
R Certain breakdown situations
% The availability as well as the scope of the emergency guide can

vary depending in the country and vehicle equipment.
Back to Contents 75
At a glance
At a glance
Cockpit 77
Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) 80
Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 82
Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen

85
cockpit)
Overhead control panel 88
Door operating unit and seat adjustment 90
Emergencies and breakdowns 93

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Left-hand-drive vehicles
77
At a glance Cockpit
78
At a glance Cockpit
1Steering wheel gearshift paddles 346 AGlove compartment 54 IAdjusts the steering wheel 235
2Combination switch 274 BStorage compartment 54 ý Switches the steering wheel

J 236
heater on/off
3Driver's display 500 CCup holder 259
KControl panel:
4DIRECT SELECT lever 340 Dc Active Parking Assist 455

Driver's display 500
5ü Start/stop button 310 EStowage space

Cruise control or variable limiter 406
è ECO start/stop function 323 FDYNAMIC SELECT button 336

I Active Distance Assist
411
DISTRONIC
6Central display 8 Controller for volume and
G
switching sound on/off
LDiagnostics connection 119
7Climate control systems 294
Ü Switches the MBUX multime‐
dia system on/off MOpens the bonnet 676
8£ Hazard warning light system 62
Control panel for the MBUX multi‐ N! Electric parking brake 385
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator H
9 139 media system
lamps
OLight switch 272
79
At a glance Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)
Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)
Left-hand-drive vehicles
80
At a glance Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)
1Driver display: 2Central display: 5q Reduces recuperation 327
õ Operational readiness 496 Plug-in hybrid settings 553 6± Increases recuperation 327
Power availability display 496 Energy flow display 554 6 Depressurises and refills the
7 31
fuel tank
Power meter 497 & Switches immediate pre-
3 300
entry climate control on/off
Trip computer
A Sets pre-entry climate con‐
4 299
ECO Assist 328 trol for departure time
81
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
Standard driver display
82
83
16 Restraint system 902 Ap Petrol engine: reduced power 338 IR Rear fog light 273
2# Electrical fault 906 Bÿ Coolant temperature 906 Jï Trailer hitch 905
3#! Turn signal lights 274 CCoolant temperature display K! ABS 911
H Mercedes-Benz emergency D; Engine diagnostics 906 L% Diesel engine: preglow

4 916
call system
EÚ System error 904 h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
M 916
5L Distance warning 911 tem
æ Reserve fuel with fuel filler
F 906 NÙ Power steering (yellow)
6_ Drive system: reduced power 904 flap location indicator 905
! Electric parking brake (yel‐ GFuel level Ù Power steering (red) 905
7 909
low)
HK High beam 274 Oå ESP® OFF 911
8! Electric parking brake (red) 909
L Low beam 272 ÷ ESP® 911
9J Brakes (yellow) 909
T Side lights 272 Pü Seat belt 902
Brakes (red) 909
84
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit)
Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit)
Widescreen cockpit driver display
85
86
1#! Turn signal lights 274 A; Engine diagnostics 906 JJ Brakes (yellow) 909
2ï Trailer hitch 905 Bå ESP® OFF 911 Brakes (red) 909
3# Electrical fault 906 ÷ ESP® 911 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler
K 906
flap location indicator
4Ù Power steering (yellow) 905 C% Diesel engine: preglow
LFuel level
Ù Power steering (red) 905 D_ Drive system: reduced power 904

MK High beam 274
56 Restraint system 902 Ep Petrol engine: reduced power 338

L Low beam 272
6ü Seat belt 902 Fÿ Coolant temperature 906

T Side lights 272
7L Distance warning GCoolant temperature display

911
NR Rear fog light 273
! Electric parking brake (yel‐
8! ABS 911 H 909
low) H Mercedes-Benz emergency
O 916
call system
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐ I! Electric parking brake (red)
9 916 909
tem
87
At a glance Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
88
At a glance Overhead control panel
1Sun visors u Switches the rear interior 3 Opens/closes the panorama

5 281 9 207
lighting on/off sliding sunroof
p Switches the left-hand read‐
2 281
ing lamp on/off p Switches the right-hand 3 Opens/closes the roller sun‐
6 281 207
reading lamp on/off blind
| Switches automatic interior
3 281
lighting control on/off 7; me button 629 AInside rear-view mirror 287
c Switches the front interior 8G SOS button 629

4 281
lighting on/off
89
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment
Door operating unit and seat adjustment
90
91
V Operating the memory func‐ 7Í Operating the outside mirrors 286 EAdjusting the head restraints 230
1 240
tion
8q Opens/closes the tailgate 197 Adjusting the seat backrest incli‐
2Adjusts the seats electrically
F 220
223 nation
W Opens/closes the right side
w Switching the seat heating 9 203 GAdjusting the seat height 220
3 233 window
on/off
W Opens/closes the rear right Adjusts the seat cushion inclina‐
s Switching the seat ventilation A 203 H 220
4 234 side window tion
on/off
S Child safety lock for the rear Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft posi‐
B 182 I 220
W Opens/closes the rear left side windows tion
5 203
side window
COpens the door 191 JAdjusts the seat cushion length 220
W Opens/closes the left side
6 203
window
ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehi‐
D 192
cle
92
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
Emergencies and breakdowns
93
94
1Safety vests 43 7Tow-starting or towing away 69 DFirst-aid kit (soft sided) 44
2Fire extinguisher 62 8Flat tyre 67 EFuel filler flap with:
3; me button 629 9B-pillar with: information label on fuel type 31
G SOS button 629 QR code for accessing the rescue information label on tyre pressure 730
64
card
4£ Hazard warning light system 62 QR code for accessing the rescue

ATow-starting or towing away 69 64
card
5Starting assistance 64
BWarning triangle 44
To check and top up operating flu‐

6 812 CTIREFIT kit 700
ids
Back to Contents 95
Digital Owner's Manual
Digital Owner's Manual

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual 97

Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual
5 Open Digital Owner's Manual
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehi‐
cle and the multimedia system.
# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
R Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side).
R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations
with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
1 Menu
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driv‐
2 Search
er's display.
3 Back
R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.
4 Contents section
You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, suchas warning notes, can be
expanded and collapsed.
quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:
Driver's display: call up brief information as display messages in the driver's

display
MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system
Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Owner's Man‐
ual in the home screen
97
Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.
Back to Contents 98
General notes
General notes
Declarations of conformity and notes on

Protection of the environment 100 112 Implied warranty 126
driving in different countries
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 102 Diagnostics connection 119 QR code for rescue card 127
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 103 Qualified specialist workshop 121 Data storage 128
Touch-sensitive control elements 105 Vehicle registration 122 Copyright 132
Mercedes me App 106 Correct use of the vehicle 123
Operating safety 107 REACH regulation 124
Fitting the licence plate onto the front Notes for persons with electronic medical
111 125
licence plate bracket aids
General notes Protection of the environment
Protection of the environment
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE engine.
Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal
driving style # Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehi‐
operate the vehicle.
cle in front.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
protect the environment. Please observe the following recommenda‐
tions on operating conditions and personal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of
its maximum engine speed.
Operating conditions:
# Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
ECO start/stop function.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for
once you no longer need them).
an economical driving style.
# Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental
protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
100
General notes Protection of the environment
PLUG-IN HYBRID
Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the
high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the envi‐
ronment.
# Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a qualified special‐

ist workshop.
101
General notes Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU COUNTRIES ONLY:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly
disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles
Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established

for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of
charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle
and conserving resources.
For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehi‐
cles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz
website for your country.
102
General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE * NOTE

Environmental damage caused by not using recycled recondi‐ Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems
tioned components from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts AIRBAGS AND SEAT BELT TENSIONERS, AS WELL AS CONTROL
with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the UNITS AND SENSORS FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, MAY BE
implied warranty is valid as for new parts. INSTALLED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE:
# Recycled reconditioned components and parts from R doors
Mercedes‑Benz AG. R door pillars
R Sill
R Seats
R Cockpit
R Instrument display
R Centre console
R lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these

areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts,
tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system)
103
General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal

quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts
that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability,
safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibil‐
ity for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been
officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.
Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they
comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the
approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the
vehicle's general operating permit.
THIS WILL BE THE CASE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general
operating permit was granted.
R Other road users could be endangered.
R The emissions or noise levels get worse.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 810) when
ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.
104
General notes Touch-sensitive control elements
Touch-sensitive control elements
In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped WHEN USING TOUCH-SENSITIVE USER INTERFACE SURFACES, OBSERVE
with touch-sensitive control elements. THE FOLLOWING POINTS TO AVOID OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS:
THESE ARE LOCATED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE: R Do not affix stickers orsimilar objects on the surfaces
R Do not attach a smartphone‑ or other holders to the surface of the cen‐
R Roof and door operating unit
tral display.
R Climate control
R Protect the surfaces against moisture and wet conditions.
R Steering wheel
R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (/ page 691).
R MBUX multimedia system
In addition to a symbol, some touch-sensitive control elements also feature

The control elements feature touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. These integrated indicator lamps. Ensure that the symbol of the control element is
surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or trigger pressed during use.
functions, forexample.
In the touchscreen area, haptic acknowledgement is relayed through the

touch-sensitive surface, forexample in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or a
change in user interface surface structure.
HAPTIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT IS RELAYED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐

TIONS, FOREXAMPLE:
R When pressing a button on the user interface surface

R When scrolling in a list or table
R When reaching a new area on the user interface surface, e.g. a pop-up
window
105
General notes Mercedes me App
Mercedes me App
Notes about the on-demand feature # Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle.
The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notifi‐
You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via cation also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.
Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.
Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Activating on-demand feature using

Mercedes me
Requirements
R The vehicle has a wireless connection.

R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
ORDERING AND ACTIVATING ON-DEMAND FEATURE

# Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping bas‐
ket in the Mercedes me Store.
# Complete the order.

The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.
SPEEDING UP ACTIVATION
# Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
106
General notes Operating safety
Operating safety
If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is ren‐
& WARNING dered invalid.
Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any
required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system
failures. & WARNING
Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot
# Always have the prescribed service‑ and maintenance work or parts of the exhaust system
any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop.
If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite.
# When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the

& WARNING
underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.
Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to elec‐
tronic components # In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flam‐
Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can mable material.
impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked
components or safety-relevant systems.
# If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.
# You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or

their software.
# Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.
107
PLUG-IN HYBRID
* NOTE Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and at least one electric motor. The
Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts energy supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the high-
to the vehicle underbody or suspension components voltage on-board electrical system.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR, THERE IS A
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE:
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved

road
R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed
bump or pothole
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension

components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged
in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no
longer absorb the resulting force as intended.
If the underbody panelling is damaged, flammable materials such as

leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the
underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into con‐
tact with hot parts of the exhaust system.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali‐

fied specialist workshop.
or
# If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull

over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention
to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
108
The components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked

& DANGER with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electri‐
Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged compo‐ cal system are orange.
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high volt‐
age. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-
board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may
be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components
may cause a fire.
In the event of an accident or impact to the underbody, components of

the high-voltage on-board electrical system may be damaged although Example
the damage is not visible.
High-voltage components which can become very hot are marked with a sepa‐
# Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board rate warning sticker:
electrical system.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-

board electrical system components have been modified or
damaged.
# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-

board electrical system.
# After an accident, do not touch any components of the high- vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise than vehicles
voltage on-board electrical system. with combustion engines.
# After an accident, have the vehicle transported away. When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road
users due to the significantly reduced noise generated.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which
replaced if necessary. serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective device is
prescribed by law.
The exterior noise of the sound generator (AVAS) is perceptible at low speeds
in the vehicle interior and is not a malfunction.
109
VEHICLES WITH A 48 V ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-
voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high
voltage.
Example
If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or
touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the
damage may not be visible.
# Never perform modifications to component parts of high-volt‐

age components.
# Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage com‐

ponents.
# Never touch component parts of high-voltage components

after an accident.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage compo‐

nents. These components are marked with a high voltage label:
110
General notes Fitting the licence plate onto the front licence plate bracket
Fitting the licence plate onto the front licence plate bracket
The information label can be found on the licence plate bracket, either
embossed or in sticker form.
* NOTE
Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the
licence plate on the front licence plate holder
If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate
holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction
or fail.
Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the
front licence plate holder:
# Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder

without advertising media or other holders.
# Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above

or to the side of the licence plate adapter.
111
General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries
Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries
Electromagnetic compatibility texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web
address:
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-
checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation
conformity/en_GB/index.html
UN-R 10.
Country-specific information for regulatory

radio components
NOTES WHEN CROSSING NATIONAL BORDERS
You must observe the radio regulatory provisions for the country in which you
are currently driving when operating the vehicle.
WIRELESS VEHICLE COMPONENTS

Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognize the EU manu‐
facturer's declaration of conformity:
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
FOR ISRAEL ONLY:

It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component
that could affect the wireless specifications of the device, including software
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle
changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect
and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the
the device to an external antenna, without first obtaining approval from the
vehicle:
Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.
The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless com‐
ponents installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full
112
FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY: Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not
cause interference in properly approved systems.
FOR JAMAICA ONLY:

All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle
and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the FOR NIGERIA ONLY:
vehicle:
The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment
installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory require‐
ments. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the fol‐
lowing web address:
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-
conformity/en_GB/index.html
Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is
permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission
FOR COUNTRIES OF THE EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION ONLY:
FOR BRAZIL ONLY: The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby
declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the
technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information
from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
113
FOR UKRAINE ONLY: declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product:
2. a)
Description:
The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby Jack
declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the
technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information Type, number:
from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
Jack B) A 240 580 00 18
C) A 639 580 02 18
ONLY FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNIZE
THE EU MANUFACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: D) A 639 580 03 18
CE Declaration of Conformity
E) A 910 580 00 00
Copy and translation of the original Declaration of Conformity:
F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00
EC Declaration of Conformity
G) A 247 580 01 00, A 293 580 01 00
1.
H) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00
The signatory, as a representative
Manufacture year: 2022
Manufacturer:
Fulfils all relevant conditions
BRANO a.s.
Directive No. 2006/42/EC
747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,
b)
Czech Republic
Description and intended use:
ID No.: 64-387-5933
The sole intended use of the jack is raising the specified vehicle in accordance
VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933 with the operating instructions affixed to the jack.
114
3. Manufacturer:
Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications BRANO a.s.
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, 74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, Czech Republic
DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435,
ID No.: 64-387-5933
The technical documentation of the product is stored at the manufacturer's
plant. Representative for compilation of the technical documentation: Director VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933
of the Technical Department Brano a.s.
declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product:
4.
2. a)
Hradec nad Moravicí
Description:
City
Jack
5.
Type, number:
14/03/2022
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
Date
B) A 240 580 00 18
Dipl. Engineer Michal Koberský
C) A 639 580 02 18
[Signature]
D) A 639 580 03 18
Director SBU-CJ
E) A 910 580 00 00
UKCA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00
Copy and translation of the original Declaration of Conformity:
G) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00
UK Declaration of Conformity
Manufacture year: 2022
1.
Fulfils all relevant conditions
The signatory, as a representative
Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008
115
b) 55-080 Pietrzykowice
Description and intended use: Poland (1)
The sole intended use of the jack is raising the specified vehicle in accordance Hereby declare that the product
with the operating instructions affixed to the jack.
Electric air pump (2)
3.
Models: (3)
Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications
A0005838505 A0005839205
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL
8451.15, MBN 10435, complies with all essential requirements of the directives listed opposite (4)
The technical documentation of the product is stored at the manufacturer's 2006/42/EC (EC Machinery Directive)
plant. Representative for compilation of the technical documentation: Director
of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 2014/30/EU (EC EMC Directive)
2000/14/EG & 2005/88/EG (EC noise emissions)

4. Hradec nad Moravicí 5. 04/07/2022 [Signature]
Dipl. Engineer Michal Kober‐
2011/65/EU & 2015/863/EU (RoHS)
ský
City Date Director SBU-CJ

Authorised person for the compilation of technical documentation according
to Annex VII A of Directive 2006/42/EC
Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k.

TIREFIT kit
Dominik Gschwender (5)
FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES ONLY:
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: ul. Fabryczna 20B
EU Declaration of Conformity CE 55-080 Pietrzykowice
We, Poland
Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k. Applied harmonised standards (6)
ul. Fabryczna 20B DIN EN 60204-1: 2019-06
116
DIN EN 60335-1: 2020-08 We,
DIN EN 1012-1: 2011-02 Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k.
DIN EN 55012: 2010-04 ul. Fabryczna 20B
DIN EN 50498: 2011-04 55-080 Pietrzykowice
EN 50498:2010 Poland
DIN EN ISO 12100:2011-03 Herby declare that the product model:
DIN EN ISO 3744:2011-02 Electric air compressor
DIN EN ISO 2151:2009-01 A0005838505 A0005839205
DIN EN ISO 4871:2009-11 Is in conformity with the requirements of following regulations:

DIN EN ISO 13732-1:2008-12 Supply of Machinery (safety) Regulations 2008
Other technical standards and specifications applied Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
None (7) Noise Emission in the Environment by Equipment for use Outdoors Regulations
2001
Pietrzykowice, 06.07.2021
The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
[Signature, D. Gschwender]
Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012
Dominik Gschwender, general management
Ref. No. Title Edition/date
Note: this declaration loses its validity if technical or operational changes are
made without the consent of the manufacturer. EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery – Electri‐ 2019-06
cal equipment of machines
FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:

EN 60335-1 Household and similar electri‐ 2020-08
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: cal appliances
UKCA - Declaration of conformity UKCA
117
Ref. No. Title Edition/date Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k. [signature D. Gschwender]
ul. Fabryczna 20B
EN 1012-1 Vehicles, boats and internal 2011-02
55-080 Pietrzykowice
combustion engines – Radio
disturbance characteristics Poland
EN 50498 Electromagnetic compatibility 2011-04 Date and location 06.07.2021, Pietrzykowice Dominik Gschwender, Chief Executive Officer
(EMC) – Product family stand‐
ard for aftermarket electronic Note: This declaration loses its validity if technical or operational changes are
equipment in vehicles
made without the consent of the manufacturer.
EN ISO 12100 Safety of machinery – General 2011-03
principles for design UK Importers Names and Address:
EN ISO 3744 Acoustics – Determination of 2011-02 Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics UK Limited

sound power levels and
sound energy levels of noise Delaware Drive
sources using sound pressure
Tongwell
EN ISO 2151 Acoustics – Noise test code 2009-01
for compressors and vacuum
pumps Milton Keynes
EN ISO 4871 Acoustics – Declaration and 2009-11 MK15 8BA

verification of noise emission
values of machinery and
equipment (ISO 4871:1996)
EN ISO 13732-1 Ergonomics of the thermal 2008-12

environment – Methods for
the assessment of human
responses to contact with
surface
I hereby declare that the equipment named above has been designed to com‐
ply with the relevant sections of the above referenced specifications and is in
accordance with the requirements of the Regulations
118
General notes Diagnostics connection
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for

example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out & WARNING
vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
be connected in a qualified specialist workshop. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.
& WARNING This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the into the driver's footwell.
function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and con‐ pedals.
nect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre. # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
top of one another.
119
General notes Diagnostics connection
Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to

* NOTE emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to
Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnos‐ the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection
tics connection during the main inspection.
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.
# Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a

considerable distance.
Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance
trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 316).
CONNECTING AND USING ANOTHER DEVICE WITH THE DIAGNOSTICS

CONNECTION CAN HAVE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system

R Permanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.
120
General notes Qualified specialist workshop
Qualified specialist workshop
A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This
particularly applies to safety-critical work.
ALWAYS HAVE THE FOLLOWING WORK CARRIED OUT ON YOUR VEHICLE

AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP:
R Safety-critical work
R Service and maintenance work
R Repair work
R Modifications as well as installations and conversions
R Work on electronic components
R Plug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system
R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-volt‐
age component of the 48 V on-board electrical system
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service centre.
121
General notes Vehicle registration
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections
on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result
of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz

has your registration data.
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT YOUR VEHICLE HAS NOT YET BEEN REGISTERED IN

YOUR NAME IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.

R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or

vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for
example.
122
General notes Correct use of the vehicle
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise cer‐
tain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IN PARTICULAR WHEN DRIV‐

ING YOUR VEHICLE:
R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements

and further supplementary documents
R technical data for the vehicle
R Traffic rules and ‑regulations of the country you are currently in
R Motor vehicle laws and safety standards of the country you are currently
in
R Radio regulatory requirements of the country you are currently in
123
General notes REACH regulation
REACH regulation
For EU and EFTA countries only:
The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a
duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).
Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs

from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances.
According to supplier information and internal product information, there are
SVHCs known to Mercedes‑Benz AG that are found in individual components
of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.
FURTHER INFORMATION CAN BE OBTAINED AT THE FOLLOWING

ADDRESSES:
R https://reach.mercedes-benz.com/de/home/
R https://reach.mercedes-benz.com/en/home/
124
General notes Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, com‐ This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charg‐
pletely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids ing point, for example.
such as cardiac pacemakers. R vehicle components carrying live voltage
In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for exam‐
the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with ple.
permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area
ONLY HAVE REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE WORK IN THE AREA OF THE FOL‐
around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats,
LOWING COMPONENTS CARRIED OUT AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST
depending on the vehicle equipment.
WORKSHOP:
FOR THIS REASON, THE FOLLOWING CAN OCCUR IN ISOLATED CASES,
R vehicle components carrying live voltage
DEPENDING ON THE AIDS USED:
R transmission aerials
R Medical aids malfunctioning R multimedia system and sound system
R Adverse health effects
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in
doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continu‐
ing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning,
Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems
and/or maintaining a distance from the components.
Plug-in hybrid
WHEN CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY, KEEP A DISTANCE OF AT

LEAST AN ARM'S LENGTH BETWEEN THE MEDICAL AID AND THE FOLLOW‐
ING COMPONENTS:
R the power supply equipment
125
General notes Implied warranty
Implied warranty
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating
instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating
instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied war‐

ranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
# Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on

proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle
damage.
126
General notes QR code for rescue card
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-
pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to
quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the rout‐
ing of the electric lines) in compact form.
You can find further information at: https://rk.mb-qr.com/de/#rescue-sticker
127
General notes Data storage
Data storage
Data processing in the vehicle LEGAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING THE DISCLOSURE OF DATA
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are generally obliged to provide the
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS authorities with data stored by the manufacturer upon request and to the
Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data extent required. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a
they receive, generate themselves or exchange with each other, forexample criminal offence.
from vehicle sensors. Some control units are required for the safe operation of
State authorities are themselves authorised to read out data from the vehicle
your vehicle. For example, some assist you when driving, suchas driver assis‐
in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework. In the case of an
tance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.
accident, information that can help with an investigation can be taken from the
The following section provides general information about data processing in airbag control unit, forexample.
the vehicle. Additional information regarding which vehicle data is collected,
OPERATIONAL DATA IN THE VEHICLE
saved and transmitted to third parties and for what purpose can be found in
To operate the vehicle, control units process data.
the information directly related to the relevant functional characteristics in the
respective Owner's Manual. This information is available online and digitally, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING DATA, FOREXAMPLE:
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
R Vehicle status information suchas the speed, longitudinal acceleration,
PERSONAL DATA lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat
A unique vehicle identification number identifies every vehicle. Depending on belts display
the country, this vehicle identification number can also be used to determine
R Ambient conditions, suchas temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
the identity of the vehicle keeper, e.g.by the authorities. There are also other
ways of tracing data collected from the vehicle back to the keeper or driver,
suchas the license plate number. Generally, this data is volatile and will not be stored beyond the period of
operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units,
The data generated or processed by control units may therefore be attributa‐ forexample, vehicle keys, often contain data memories. Their use permits the
ble to a person or, in certain circumstance, become attributable to a person. temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the
Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and
inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, location, route or use technical events or faults.
patterns.
128
DEPENDING ON THE TECHNICAL EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your
STORED: request as part of repair or maintenance work.
R Operating status of system components, suchas fill levels, tyre pressure CONVENIENCE AND INFOTAINMENT FUNCTIONS
or battery status You can store the vehicle's convenience and individual settings and change or
R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, suchas lights or reset them at any time.
brakes
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOW‐
R System reactions in special driving situations, suchas an airbag deploy‐ ING SETTINGS, FOREXAMPLE:
ment or the intervention of stability control systems
R Information on events leading to vehicle damage R Seat and steering wheel positions
R Suspension tuning and climate control settings
In certain cases, storing data that would have otherwise been temporary may R Individual settings, suchas interior lighting
be required. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction,
forexample. Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle info‐
tainment functions yourself.
If you make use of services, e.g.repair services, maintenance work,– the stored
operating data can be read out and used together with the vehicle identifica‐ DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOW‐
tion number – if necessary. Service network employees suchas workshops and ING DATA, FOREXAMPLE:
manufacturers, and third parties suchas breakdown services can read out the
data. The same is true in the event of warranty claims and quality assurance R Multimedia data, suchas music, films or photos for playback in an inte‐
measures. grated multimedia system
R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free
In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the
system or an integrated navigation system
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The selected operating data document
the vehicle's or individual components' technical conditions, help with fault R Entered navigation destinations
diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To R Data about the use of Internet services
that end, these data, particularly information about component loads, techni‐
cal events, malfunctions and other faults, may be transmitted to the manufac‐
This data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in
turer along with the vehicle identification number. Furthermore, the manufac‐
the vehicle or on a device connected to the vehicle, suchas a smartphone, USB
turer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses
flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered this data yourself, you can
operational data from the vehicle, e.g. for recalls. This data can also be used to
delete it at any time.
review the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.
129
This data is transmitted only from the vehicle to third parties at your request. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
This applies in particular when you use online services per your selected set‐ Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are
tings. described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's
Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection
SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION (E.G. ANDROID AUTO OR APPLE CARPLAY®) information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of
If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can connect your smartphone or online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, suchas the man‐
another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them using the ufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, pro‐
control elements integrated into the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart‐ cessed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclu‐
phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simul‐ sively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a
taneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integra‐ legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when
tion, thisincludes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle sta‐ consent has been given.
tuses. For more information, please consult the vehicle Owner's Manual/info‐
tainment system. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, acti‐
vated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services,
This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, suchas naviga‐ suchas an emergency call system.
tion or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smart‐
phone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The THIRD PARTY SERVICES
type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services
being used. The settings you can make, if any, depend on the specific app and are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's
your smartphone's operating system. data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac‐
turer has no influence on the content exchanged.
Online services For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the
service provider in question for information about the type, extent and pur‐
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION pose of the collection and use of personal data.
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be
exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network
connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or Data protection rights
by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a
smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connec‐ Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your
tion. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are enti‐
the manufacturer or by other providers. tled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection
and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's
website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and
130
service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manu‐
facturer and its data protection officers.
At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a

fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
131
General notes Copyright
Copyright
Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehi‐
cle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with
updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Back to Contents132
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
Brief overview of most important points 134
Information on the automatic functions of

142
the restraint system
Purpose and function of the restraint sys‐

146
tem
Seat belts 153
Airbags 154
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points
Brief overview of most important points
Basic information R Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Owner's
Manual using the keyword directory.
MAKE SURE THAT THE FOLLOWING PREREQUISITES IN PARTICULAR
HAVE BEEN MET SO THAT THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING SUBJECTS, AMONG OTHERS, ARE
ARE ABLE TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED LEVEL OF PROTECTION: NOT PROVIDED IN THE CHAPTER "OCCUPANT SAFETY":
R Sit correctly (/ page 135). R Children in the vehicle (/ page 156)
R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 136). R Driving and driving safety systems (/ page 391)
- Function of the ü seat belt warning lamp (/ page 138). R Stowage areas (/ page 242)
- Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 138).
DEFINING GENERIC TERMS CLEARLY
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp has gone out after the self-test
(/ page 137). IN THIS OWNER'S MANUAL, THE FOLLOWING GENERIC TERMS ARE USED:
R The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of R Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions
the front passenger airbag (/ page 139). which help to minimise, as much as possible, the stresses on and conse‐
quences for vehicle occupants during an accident.
FOR CLEAR UNDERSTANDING
R Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the
The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions
vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially com‐
and behaviours that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.
ing into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and air‐
THE INFORMATION IS STRUCTURED AS FOLLOWS: bags, for example, are components of the restraint system.
R Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in
R The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provi‐ the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 156).
ded with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system
and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occupants. BE DILIGENT
R Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of
safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and func‐ protection, it is essential that your posture is correct and that the seat belt is
tions of the restraint system. correctly fastened.
134
Bear in mind that negligence when adjusting your sitting position and fastening
the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make sure that & WARNING
all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their seat belts Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
properly before starting every journey (/ page 135). If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot provide
its intended protective function.
Information on the correct seat position Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following.
The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint # Put the seat in the correct position.
system to provide the intended level of protection.
# Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take partic‐
The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and ular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the
the additional protection provided by the airbag. abdomen.
A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly perfectly upright and a cor‐ # Observe the following information.
rectly fastened seat belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it is
deployed.
IN ORDER FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED
Keep space considerations in mind when choosing a seat. With the seat in the LEVEL OF PROTECTION, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
correct, nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof.
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly (/ page 216).
When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet
over the centre of your shoulder.
R Keep your distance from the airbags, especially the front airbags. Set the
driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while mak‐
ing sure the seat belt is fastened correctly.
R If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should main‐
tain an sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of
them.
R Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle
occupants and an airbag.
R If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct
position of the driver's seat (/ page 216).
135
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the
driver's airbag to fully deploy. & WARNING
R Assume a nearly upright sitting posture, with your buttocks positioned as Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and the seat If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended pro‐
backrest. tective function.
Your back must lie as flatly and as firmly as possible against the seat
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for
backrest.
example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direc‐
R While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or tion suddenly.
side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air‐
bags. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts
R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
supported by the seat cushion
Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other‐
wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. & WARNING
R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 136). Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not
used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a
Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly suitable additional restraint system.
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can # Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint
only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. system.
Observe the following information on the correct seat position and posture
(/ page 135).
EACH VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES IN

PARTICULAR:
R The seat belt must not be twisted.

R The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet
over the centre of your shoulder.
136
R The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed
under your arm or behind your back.
R The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible.
In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips
and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt
across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
R After being tightened, the shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly
against the body.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle
objects. 1 of the corresponding seat.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used * NOTE
by one of the vehicle's occupants. Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled
person and the seat. When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue
of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the
If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side,
chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 156) e.g. the seat belt tensioner.
Observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, lug‐
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
gage or loads (/ page 242).
Fastening seat belts Function of the restraint system warning lamp

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few
seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.
seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system
are then functional.
137
A MALFUNCTION HAS OCCURRED IN THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM IF:

& DANGER
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up or is lit contin‐ Risk of fatal injury due to malfunctioning automatic high-voltage
uously when the vehicle is switched on emergency shutoff
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeat‐ In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system
edly during a journey may not be deactivated as intended.
You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged compo‐
If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the 6 restraint
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
system warning lamp lights up continuously.
# Have the automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system # After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or
not deploy as intended in an accident.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately specialist workshop.
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function of the seat belt warning lamp

Plug-in hybrid: if the restraint system is malfunctioning, the automatic high
voltage emergency shutoff may not function. The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that
all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
When the driver and the front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt
warning goes out.
Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.
138
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐

tor lamps (front-passenger airbag)
When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you
for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.
THE STATUS OF THE REAR SEAT BELT CAN BE RECOGNISED BY THE COL‐
OUR OF THE SYMBOL IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:
R Grey: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is not engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the corresponding seat.
R Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special
buckle of the corresponding seat. sticker affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front passenger side
Every vehicle occupant must always fasten their seat belt correctly (/ page 156).
before starting a journey.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front
R Red: a vehicle occupant in the rear passenger compartment has released passenger airbag.
the seat belt buckle using the release button and may not be properly
secured. If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is fitted on
it, you must make sure both before, and also during the journey, that the sta‐
If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear, the rear seat belt status tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the situation.
display appears again.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
139
The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the

& WARNING front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
front passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the % If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the informa‐
system. tion in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 156)
# Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no & WARNING
objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
seat. The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into
and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too
close to the cockpit.
AFTER THE SELF-TEST, YOU CAN DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG AS FOLLOWS: IF THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT IS OCCUPIED, ALWAYS ENSURE
THAT:
R Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up
continuously. R the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is cor‐
The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ rect and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
dent. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
passenger seat. R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger R the person is seated correctly.
seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.
R Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of
up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF
the front passenger airbag is correct.
indicator lamps go out.
140
MALFUNCTION OF THE AUTOMATIC FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG SHUTOFF NOTES ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system SEAT
warning lamp light up simultaneously.
& WARNING
In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint
Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag
system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be
Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
Disabling or enabling the front passenger air‐ to the CHILD can occur.
bag
Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 162).
passenger airbag according to the situation.
This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or

child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger airbag.
Information on the child restraint system

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the
vehicle" (/ page 156).
141
Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system
Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system
Function of the automatic front passenger air‐

bag shutoff
A PERSON ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT MUST OBSERVE THE FOL‐
LOWING INFORMATION:
R Sit correctly (/ page 135).

R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 136).
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front
passenger airbag according to the situation.
STATUS OF THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG IN RELATION TO THE STAT‐
MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: URE OF THE PERSON:
R The status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the R Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps"(/ page 139). continuously.
R When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
the vehicle-specific information (/ page 162). dent. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front
passenger seat.
R Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF
indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. Observe
the following information on the correct seat position (/ page 135).
Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear
seat.
142
SYSTEM LIMITS
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG MAY OTHERWISE BE DISABLED BY MIS‐
TAKE, FOR EXAMPLE, IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATION: protection)
R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement
a vehicle armrest. pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the
PRE-SAFE® CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDEPEND‐
seat surface.
ENTLY OF EACH OTHER:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
* NOTE R Closing the side windows.
Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
passenger seat is unoccupied
R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a
IN AN ACCIDENT, THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM more favourable seat position.
MAY DEPLOY UNNECESSARILY ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SIDE IF:
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on,
R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mecha‐
nism of a person's hearing.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the
front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place. * NOTE

Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to
the seat and/or the object.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front
passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
front passenger seat is occupied.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are
reversed.
143
You will need to perform certain settings yourself.

Overview of the automatic measures after an
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest accident
slightly backwards.
The seat belt pre-tensioning releases. DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND SEVERITY OF THE ACCIDENT, AND
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES
CAN BE IMPLEMENTED, FOR EXAMPLE:
Seat belt adjustment function R automatic braking (post-collision brake) (/ page 144)
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front R activating the hazard warning lights
seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until R triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 74)
somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.
R switching off the engine
This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more
belts correctly. (/ page 310). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you
may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the
R switching off the fuel supply
multimedia system (/ page 144).
R Plug-in hybrid: switching off the hybrid system and high-voltage on-
board electrical system
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment R unlocking the vehicle doors
via the multimedia system R lowering the side windows
R displaying the emergency guide in the central display (/ page 75)
Multimedia system: R switching on the interior lighting
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection
# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Function of the post-collision brake after an
accident
Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the
severity of a further collision or even avoid it.
144
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic brak‐

ing. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is
automatically applied.
THE DRIVER CAN CANCEL AUTOMATIC BRAKING BY TAKING THE FOLLOW‐

ING ACTIONS:
R braking more strongly than automatic braking

R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force
145
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system
Purpose and function of the restraint system
Overview of deployment situations (restraint R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
system) The installation location of an airbag is identified by the symbol AIRBAG

IN PARTICULAR ENSURE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO ENABLE THE (/ page 154).
COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO DEPLOY THEIR PROTEC‐
Observe the information on how the restraint system works (/ page 146).
TIVE POTENTIAL:
R Seat correctly (/ page 135).

R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 136).
Information on how the restraint system
- Function of the seat belt warning lamp (/ page 138). works
- Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 138). How the restraint system functions depends on the severity of the impact
R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up after the self- detected and the apparent type of accident.
check (/ page 137).
For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment
R The indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG display the correct status of
situations" (/ page 146).
the front passenger airbag (/ page 139).
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are
DEPENDING ON THE DETECTED DEPLOYMENT SITUATION, THE COMPO‐ determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various
NENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN BE ACTIVATED OR DEPLOYED points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/
INDEPENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER: deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in
good time at the start of the collision.
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indi‐
R Knee airbag: frontal impact cation of airbag deployment.
R Side airbag: side impact
The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed.
This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected
146
and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be IF THE SEAT BELT TENSIONERS ARE TRIGGERED OR AN AIRBAG IS
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid DEPLOYED, YOU WILL HEAR A BANG, AND A SMALL AMOUNT OF POWDER
vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in suffi‐ MAY ALSO BE RELEASED:
ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
R The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment sit‐ R In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may
uation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma
by a correctly worn seat belt. or other pulmonary conditions.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the
vehicle occupant. window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
POTENTIAL PROTECTION PROVIDED BY EACH AIRBAG:

Information on the limited protection provi‐
Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
R
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
ded by the restraint system
R Window airbag: head RISK DUE TO THE INCORRECT BEHAVIOUR OF VEHICLE OCCUPANTS
R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN
PARTICULAR:
Vehicles with AMG Performance seat: the side airbag provides possible pro‐ R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 135).
tection for the ribcage.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag gen‐
erally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the
airbag deploying.

specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a
seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.
147
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have anchorage
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the
moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. seat belt tensioners.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no
objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
and door.
position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.
& WARNING
RISK DUE TO OBJECTS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR
Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag
EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the
PARTICULAR:
correct deployment of the airbag.
R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 135).
The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even
R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.
or coat hooks.
# Always stow and secure objects correctly.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their
clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. # Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects
are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG (/ page 154)

symbol.
148
RISK DUE TO FITTING ACCESSORIES RISK DUE TO PETS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR
Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones
or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on WARNING
&
the door, on the side window or on the side trim. Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must
be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could
Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, press buttons or switches, for instance.
in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
AN ANIMAL MAY:
WARNING R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example

&
Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users
Due to unsuitable protective covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an
occupants as they are designed to do. accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehi‐
# You should only use protective covers that have been cle occupants.
approved for the corresponding seat by Mercedes-Benz. # Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suit‐

In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could able animal carrier.
be restricted due to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
correct status of the front passenger airbag (/ page 139).
149
RISK DUE TO MODIFICATION, DAMAGE OR WEAR TO THE COMPONENTS

OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM & WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
& WARNING SEAT BELTS CANNOT PROVIDE PROTECTION IN THE FOLLOWING

Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system SITUATIONS:
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations R the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty,
are made to the restraint system. bleached or dyed
# Never alter the parts of the restraint system. R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
R modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt
# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component anchorage or seat belt retractor
parts or their software.
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabili‐ glass splinters.
ties, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been accident, for example.
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to func‐
tion as intended.
# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt,
seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and
seat belt retractor.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and
clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an acci‐

dent at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
150
The seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit a differ‐
ent multipoint seat belt, for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint sys‐ & WARNING
tem cannot provide the intended level of protection. Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or
Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be openings in the seat backrest.
incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are
These openings have no function.
damaged.
# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

& WARNING
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to modified seat belt systems # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a
If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat qualified specialist workshop.
backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an acci‐
dent.
RISK DUE TO COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM WHICH HAVE
# Only use the standard three-point seat belt. ALREADY BEEN DEPLOYED
# Never modify the seat belt system. specialist workshop after an accident.
& WARNING
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components
Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to
it, the airbag can no longer function as intended. # Do not touch the airbag parts.
# Never modify the cover of an airbag. # Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop as soon as possible.
# Do not attach any objects to the cover.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol

(/ page 154).
151
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.
# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in

order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt ten‐
sioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their intended protective func‐
tion.
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners

immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
152
Occupant safety Seat belts
Seat belts
Releasing the seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt
back with the seat belt tongue.
* NOTE
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in
the door or in the seat mechanism.
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.
153
Occupant safety Airbags
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1 Knee airbag
2 Driver's airbag
3 Front passenger airbag
4 Window airbag
5 Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol.
Observe the information in "Overview of deployment situations"

(/ page 146).
Back to Contents154

Brief overview of most important points 156
Important safety notes 158
Suitable child restraint systems for the

165
transport of children
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint

170
systems
Securing the child restraint system 174
Child safety locks 180
Occupant presence reminder 184

Children in the vehicle Brief overview of most important points
Brief overview of most important points
Safely transporting children in the vehicle LEFT/RIGHT REAR SEAT (PREFERRED SEATS)
PREFERRED SECURING SYSTEM:
® ISOFIX mounting bracket (/ page 170)
° or i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 171)
¯ and secure Top Tether additionally if present(/ page 177).
ALTERNATIVE SECURING SYSTEM:
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 178)
¯ Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN TRANSPORTING CHILDREN: of the child restraint system (/ page 177).
R Never leave children unattended in the vehicle (/ page 159).

The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are
R Secure children younger than twelve or of a height lower than 1.50 m on approved: U, UF, i-U, IUF. Observe the other alternatives for use (/ page 170).
the seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved
child restraint system (/ page 165) and secure small children in a rear‐ FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
ward-facing child restraint system. SECURING SYSTEM:
R Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions. 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 178)
156
Children in the vehicle Brief overview of most important points
BE SURE TO OBSERVE:
R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the
front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 139).
The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are
approved: U(*), UF. Observe the other alternatives for use (/ page 171).
(*) rearward-facing child restraint systems only in combination with automatic

airbag shutoff
CENTRE REAR SEAT

SECURING SYSTEM:
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 178)
The following belt-secured child restraint systems within the Universal cate‐
gory are approved: U, UF. Observe the other alternatives for use (/ page 178).
157
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes
Important safety notes
Basic information THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS USED IN THIS OWN‐
BE DILIGENT ER'S MANUAL. A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS, FOR EXAMPLE:
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint sys‐
tem may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child R a baby car seat
carefully before every journey. R a rearward-facing child seat
R a forward-facing child seat
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle
occupant. R a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster
seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
TO IMPROVE PROTECTION FOR CHILDREN YOUNGER THAN
TWELVE YEARS OLD OR UNDER 1.50 M IN HEIGHT, MERCEDES-BENZ REC‐ OBSERVE LAWS AND LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
OMMENDS YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in
the vehicle.
R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this
Mercedes-Benz vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the
valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at
R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and
a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
size of the child.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fit‐
ted: SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS IN THE VEHICLE
- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings: (/ page 170) ONLY USE THE FOLLOWING SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT
- i‑Size securing rings: (/ page 171) SYSTEMS:
- Securing with the vehicle seat belt: (/ page 171) R the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or i-Size securing rings
R the vehicle's seat belt system
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally R the Top Tether anchorages
safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz
strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.
158
Simply attaching to the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings or i‑Size securing - Fitting an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system on the rear seat
rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system (/ page 175).
incorrectly. - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
(/ page 178).
When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-
Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child
for the child and child restraint system (/ page 175). restraint system.
Important warning notices & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in
ALWAYS SECURE A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CORRECTLY
the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can
& WARNING become detached.
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child
restraint system The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended.
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.
The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike
# Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instruc‐ vehicle occupants.
tions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
# Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instruc‐
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system tions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child transported unused in the vehicle.
restraint system.
# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover

designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
R Always observe the vehicle-specific information.
159
DO NOT MODIFY THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM AVOID DIRECT SUNLIGHT
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts
an increased risk of injury. could heat up.
# Never modify a child restraint system. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic
parts of the child restraint system.
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for
this child restraint system by the child restraint system's man‐ # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not
ufacturer. exposed to direct sunlight.
# Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.

ONLY USE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE IN PROPER WORKING
CONDITION
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sun‐
light, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
& WARNING # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child
restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been sub‐ OBSERVE WHEN STOPPING OR PARKING
jected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their inten‐
ded protective function. & WARNING
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. vehicle
# Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
been damaged or involved in an accident. intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems

# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a vehicle.
child restraint system again.
160
& WARNING
Overview of warning stickers in the vehicle
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY
CAN BE EXPECTED IN PARTICULAR TO
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLE BY:
1 Front passenger airbag warning (on the front passenger sun visor)
R releasing the parking brake. (/ page 162)
R changing the drive range. 2 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff warning (visible
R starting the vehicle. when the front passenger door is open) (/ page 164)
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.
# Keep the key out of reach of children.
161
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing IF IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYS‐
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE ADDI‐
child restraint systems on the front passenger TIONAL NOTES.
seat R the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 141).
R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front
& WARNING passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This
Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit con‐
system while the front passenger airbag is enabled tinuously (/ page 139).
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the R The front passenger airbag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG
front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be
is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing
child restraint systems.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Information on the automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the
of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current
situation.
Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing

child restraint systems (/ page 174).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor
162
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint
and the child restraint system system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff. front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
# Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system. The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is # Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The
always resting on the seat surface of the co-driver seat. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co- with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH
driver seat. of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
# It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manu‐

facturer's installation instructions.
% The front passenger airbag is enabled depending on the child
restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
vehicle-specific information (/ page 162). The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident.
If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing
REARWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
PASSENGER SEAT Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suita‐
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, ble rear seat.
the front passenger airbag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp must light up continuously (/ page 139).
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER SEAT
If a forward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag depends on the child restraint system and
the stature of the child.
163
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously, or it is
not lit (/ page 139). Always observe the following information.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger airbag shutoff
& WARNING Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special
Risk of injury or death caused by incorrect positioning of the child sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side
restraint system (/ page 161).
IF YOU SECURE A CHILD IN A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT AND YOU POSITION THE
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT TOO CLOSE TO THE COCKPIT, IN THE R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger
EVENT OF AN ACCIDENT, THE CHILD COULD: seat
R Come into contact with the vehicle interior if the PASSENGER AIR R Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example. R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on
R Be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator the front passenger seat (/ page 162)
lamp is off.
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

In doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the
shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder
belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the
seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the passenger seat
accordingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's

installation instructions.
164
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children
Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children
Information on the advantage of a rearward- R Authorisation number

Child restraint size class
facing child restraint system
R
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is
also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child
restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the
direction of travel and faces backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to
the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during
an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Approval categories for child restraint sys‐

tems
ONLY CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING UNECE Example of an approval label
STANDARDS ARE PERMITTED FOR USE IN THE VEHICLE: R Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are
approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance
R UN-R44 with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint sys‐
R UN-R129 tems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.
The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Uni‐
IDENTIFICATION ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
versal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION, E.G., IS AVAILABLE ON THE APPROVAL using Top Tether or support points.
LABEL ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM:
R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category
R Approval category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child
restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
R Child weight group
165
R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" cate‐ OBSERVE THE SUITABILITY OF VEHICLE SEATS
gory may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the R Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. (/ page 170)
R Suitability of seats for securing i‑Size child restraint systems
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129
(/ page 171).
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
(/ page 171)
Overview of recommended child restraint

systems
% Further information on the correct child restraint system can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec‐
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
purpose.
Example of an approval label
R i‑Sizechild restraint systems and booster seats with backrest: suitable
ATTACHMENT WITH ISOFIX
for attachment to i‑Size mounting brackets. They can be used on the
seats marked i‑U. WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS)
Child restraint systems in this category can also be attached to ISOFIX Type1 BABY SAFE plus (including base station)
bars if approved by the manufacturer of the child restraint system. i‑Size
booster seats with backrest can be used on seats marked U if the seat is Size category E
approved for category B2/B3.
Approval E1 04 301 146
R Belted child restraint systems and belted booster seats without backrest
of the Universalcategory: suitable for attachment to the seats marked U. Order number2 B6 6 86 8224
R Vehicle-specific child restraint systems (ISOFIX or belted attachment as 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
well as child booster seats with and without backrest): suitable for
attachment to the seats marked i‑U or U if this is approved by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
166
WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4 Type1 Dualfix 3 i-Size

YEARS)
Order number A000 970 93 02
Type1 DUO plus
Order number A000 970 73 02
Size category B1
FlexBase iSense
Approval E1 04 301 133 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02

WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95 12 YEARS
Type1 KIDFIX M i-Size
ATTACHMENT WITH I-SIZE (R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS)
WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, SIZE 40 TO 83 CM AND AGE FROM BIRTH TO Size category B2
APPROX. 15 MONTHS
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Type1 Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Order number A 000 970 89 02
Size category R2
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO
Order number A 000 970 68 02 12 YEARS
Order number A 000 970 73 02 Type1 AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
FlexBase iSense
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
WEIGHT UP TO 18 KG, SIZE 61 TO 105 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX.
3 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS
Type1 Dualfix 3 i-Size
Size category F2X/R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
167
ATTACHMENT WITH THE SEAT BELT OF THE VEHICLE SEAT WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROX. 3 TO
12 YEARS)
WEIGHT CATEGORY 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND APPROX. 6 MONTHS) AND
WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND APPROX. 15 MONTHS) Type1 KIDFIX XP
Type1 BABY SAFE plus II Approval E1 04 301 304
Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 A 000 970 49 02
Order number2 A 000 970 38 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROX. 3 TO
12 YEARS)
R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, SIZE 40 TO 83
CM AND AGE FROM BIRTH TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS) Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP
Type1 Baby Safe 3 i-Size Approval E1 04 301 304
Size category R2 Order number2 A 000 970 33 02
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS)
Type1 KIDFIX M i-Size
WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4
YEARS) Size category B2
Type1 DUO plus

Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Approval E1 04 301 133 Order number A 000 970 89 02
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
168
R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT

FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS)
Type1 AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
169
Children in the vehicle Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
Overview of suitability of the seats for attach‐ WEIGHT CATEGORY 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 6 MONTHS)
ing ISOFIX child restraint systems Size class –

Equipment
Left/right rear seat
ISOFIX IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY

E – ISO/R1 IL
DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the
® The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems",
restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 165). or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's vehicle model list.
° ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be installed on seats with WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS)
i‑Size markings (/ page 171).
Size class – Left/right rear seat
Equipment
Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance
E – ISO/R1 IL
with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
CARRY COT C – ISO/R3 IL (1)

Size class – Left/right rear seat
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the rec‐
Equipment ommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child
restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
F – ISO/L1 X
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the
highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the
G – ISO/L2 X
child restraint system.
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight

category and/or size class.
170
WEIGHT CATEGORY 1 (9–18 KG AND APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS) LEFT AND RIGHT REAR SEAT
Size class – Left/right rear seat i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ i‑U
Equipment F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
C – ISO/R3 IL (1) FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
B – ISO/F2 IUF i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ X
F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
B1 – ISO/F2X IUF
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.
A – ISO/F3 IUF
Overview of the suitability of seats for attach‐

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recom‐
mended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint
ing belt-secured child restraint systems

system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in
this weight category.
Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the
highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the
child restraint system.
REAR SEATS
Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Overview of suitability of the seats for attach‐ Left/right rear seat U, L
ing i‑Size child restraint systems Centre rear seat1 U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg

I‑SIZE IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY
DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS. Left/right rear seat U, L
° i‑Size child restraint systems can be attached to a seat with the Centre rear seat1 U, L
i‑Size marking (/ page 165).
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with the fol‐
Left/right rear seat U, L
lowing i‑Size table may be attached.
Centre rear seat1 U, L
171
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Left/right rear seat U, L Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Centre rear seat1 U, L Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Left/right rear seat U, L Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Centre rear seat1 U, L Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suita‐

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
ble for this seat.
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in
this weight category.
Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehi‐
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufactur‐
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
er's vehicle model list.
Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L

NOTES ON CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child
1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the
restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 162). seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the
R Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward- seat cushion is in the lowest position.
facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied,

2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 139).
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in
Weight category 0: to 10 kg this weight category.
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
172
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to

the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehi‐
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufactur‐
er's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Uni‐

versal" category in this weight category.
173
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system
Securing the child restraint system
Adjusting the seat correctly removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it
correctly.
WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE LEFT OR RIGHT # The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof
REAR SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where
# Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, possible, adjust the seat cushion angle accordingly.
move the front seat slightly forwards.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is
If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended not put under strain by the head restraint.
when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maxi‐
mum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint 7 WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO
system manufacturer's installation instructions. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
# When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
% Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended
and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. # When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated
child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it
®° ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING AN ISOFIX OR does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the
I‑SIZE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM: respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of
the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the back‐
# When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat:
rest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been
adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it
# When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated correctly.
child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it # The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as
does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the
possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of
the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the back‐
rest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been
174
# The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where pos‐
possible, adjust the seat cushion angle accordingly. sible, downwards to the child restraint system.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
not put under strain by the head restraint.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat
# Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion
move the front seat slightly forwards. is in the lowest position.
7 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE # Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT:
# Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐
systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 162).
tem
# When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child
seat belt: remove the head restraint from the front passenger seat, if WARNING
&
possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
replace the head restraint and adjust it correctly. are not engaged
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. even while the vehicle is in motion.
# The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be
not put under strain by the head restraint.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
system.
backrest are engaged before every trip.
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat
into the highest position if possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
Vehicles without a sliding rear bench seat: if a rear seat backrest is not
belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to
engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.
175
Vehicles with a sliding rear bench seat: if the centre rear seat backrest is not or
The outer seat backrests will lock automatically when they are not folded ° i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 171)
down.
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child
and child restraint system together is exceeded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys‐
tems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an
accident, for example.
# If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐

tem with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child and
child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.
1 ISOFIX mounting bracket
ALWAYS OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ON THE MASS OF THE CHILD 2 i‑Size mounting brackets
RESTRAINT SYSTEM: # Before every journey always ensure that the ISOFIX child restraint sys‐
R in the installation instructions and Owner's Manual of the manufacturer tem or the i‑Size child restraint system is engaged in both mounting
of the child restraint system used brackets on the vehicle.
R on a label on the child restraint system, if present
* NOTE
Regularly check that the permissible total mass of the child and child restraint Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of
system is still being adhered to. the child restraint system
WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOL‐ # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
LOWING:
O Always observe the area of use and the suitability of the seats for # Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system to both mounting
attaching a child restraint system. brackets in the vehicle.
® ISOFIX mounting bracket (/ page 170)
176
Fastening a Top Tether
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked
after Top Tether belts are fitted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.
As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform

their intended protective function. This may also cause additional inju‐
ries.
# Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.
# Observe the lock verification indicator.

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
# If necessary, slide the head restraint upwards (/ page 231).
# Guide Top Tether belt 3 under the head restraint between the two head
Vehicles with a sliding rear bench seat: if the centre rear seat backrest is not
engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. restraint bars.
The outer seat backrests will lock automatically when they are not folded
down. Vehicles without adjustable head restraints:
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:
# Top Tether belt with one seat belt strap: guide Top Tether belt 3 over
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables the centre of the head restraint.
an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with
ISOFIX or i‑Size and the vehicle. or
# Top Tether belt with two seat belt straps: guide one Top Tether belt 3
past the head restraint on the right and left sides respectively.
All vehicles:
177
# Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing
so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation
Securing the child restraint system with the
instructions. seat belt
# Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether anchorage 1 without twisting.
& WARNING
# Tension Top Tether belt 3. In doing so, comply with the child restraint Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
system manufacturer's installation instructions. are not engaged
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: even while the vehicle is in motion.
# If necessary, slide the head restraint downwards (/ page 231). Make R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
3. intended and could cause additional injury.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
Vehicles with a sliding rear bench seat: if the centre rear seat backrest is not
The outer seat backrests will lock automatically when they are not folded
down.
# For a child restraint system of the category "Universal" or "Semi-Univer‐
sal" ensure that this is approved for the vehicle seat.
# Fit the child restraint system.

The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sit‐
ting surface of the seat.
178
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child
restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt out‐
let and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
# When fitting on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether, if present.
# When fitting on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the belt
sash guide and the front passenger seat appropriately.
179
Children in the vehicle Child safety locks
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety # Keep the key out of reach of children.
lock for the rear doors

& WARNING
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. vehicle.

R releasing the parking brake.

R changing the drive range.
R starting the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
180
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN
PARTICULAR:

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are

travelling in the vehicle.
# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Check the functionality of the child safety lock.
lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the
"Notes on the additional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The
doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
181
Activating and deactivating the child safety & WARNING

lock for the rear side windows Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
& WARNING
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY vehicle.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. & WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN
IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN PARTICULAR:
R changing the drive range.
R starting the vehicle.
# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. travelling in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
# Keep the key out of reach of children. lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the
"Notes on the additional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
182
# To activate/deactivate: press button 2.

THE REAR SIDE WINDOW CAN BE OPENED OR CLOSED IN THE FOL‐
LOWING CASES:
R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

R Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear
door or driver's door
183
Children in the vehicle Occupant presence reminder
Occupant presence reminder
Function of the occupant presence reminder

The occupant presence reminder can help to remind you about a child who
may have been forgotten in the rear compartment of the vehicle. It activates
and deactivates automatically when the rear door is open for an extended
period of time and a child which the system presumes to be present could
enter or exit the vehicle.
When the vehicle is switched off, the Do not leave persons or animals in the vehi-
cle message appears on the driver's display if the system was already auto‐
matically activated.
You can permanently deactivate the function in the multimedia system

(/ page 184). When the system is deactivated, the p indicator lamp in the
driver's display lights up.
Activating or deactivating the occupant pres‐

ence reminder in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Back to Contents184
Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Key 186
Doors 191
Load compartment 197
Side windows 203
Sliding sunroof 207
Anti-theft protection 212

Opening and closing Key
Key
Overview of key functions * NOTE

Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields
& WARNING # Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehi‐
cle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR
R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
Vehicle key
1 Locking
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
2 Indicator lamp
R releasing the parking brake. 3 Unlocking
R change the gearbox setting. 4 Opens/closes the tailgate
R start the vehicle.
% If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the Ü or
ß button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you the battery as soon as possible.
and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the key out of reach of children. Replace the key battery (/ page 189).
186
THE KEY LOCKS AND UNLOCKS THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:

Changing the unlocking settings
R Doors
POSSIBLE UNLOCKING FUNCTIONS OF THE KEY:
R Fuel filler flap
R Socket flap (plug-in hybrid) R Central unlocking
R Tailgate R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
R Plug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap/socket flap
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it
locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again. # To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simulta‐
neously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes
Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This twice.
can affect the key's functionality.
OPTIONS IF THE UNLOCKING FUNCTION FOR THE DRIVER'S DOOR AND
FUEL FILLER FLAP HAS BEEN SELECTED:
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice.
verification signal R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door
handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
Multimedia system: are unlocked.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close
# Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock. OPTIONS IF THE UNLOCKING FUNCTION FOR THE DRIVER'S DOOR AND
FUEL FILLER FLAP/SOCKET FLAP HAS BEEN SELECTED (PLUG-IN-HYBRID):
% Please observe:
R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice.
The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal
must comply with the relevant national road and traffic regula‐ R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door
tions. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap/
locking verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accord‐ socket flap are unlocked.
ance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national
road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply
with these regulations. In countries where the use of this func‐ Deactivating the function of the key
tion is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the
must not be activated.
KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization via
187
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that key. Activate the function of # Press release knob 1.
the key so that all of its functions are available once again. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
You can also deactivate the key's function to reduce the key's energy con‐ # Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
sumption if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
# Press and hold the key button ß.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the intermediate position
# With the key button ß pressed, immediately press key button Ü is not available.
twice in quick succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly, and then again for # Press release knob 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.
longer.
INSERTING THE EMERGENCY KEY
% YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE

KEY:
R Press any button on the key.

R Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage
compartment(/ page 311).
# Press release knob 1.

Removing/inserting the emergency key # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it
REMOVING THE EMERGENCY KEY engages.
% You can use emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring.
Depending on the respective configuration, you may have to pull
out the emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate
position.
188
Replacing the key battery Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 188).

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swal‐
lowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur
within two hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury!
# Keep the batteries out of the reach of children.
# If the lid and/or the battery compartment do not close # Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of
securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. the arrow.
# If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek # Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
immediate medical attention.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the posi‐
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE tive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries doing this.
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the # Push in battery compartment 3.
household rubbish.
# Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Problems with the key, troubleshooting
YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE
Requirements POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. R The key battery is weak or discharged.
189
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 186).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 189).
# Use the replacement key.
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 194).
# Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY IS IMPAIRED:
R high voltage power lines

R mobile phones
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate sys‐
tems or automatic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the
potential source of interference.
YOU HAVE LOST A KEY
# Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
# If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.
190
Opening and closing Doors
Doors
Notes on the additional door lock If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.
% After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.
& WARNING
Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating
door lock is activated interior protection before locking the vehicle (/ page 214).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be
opened from the inside.
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
# Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the
vehicle. # United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock
(/ page 191).
# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the addi‐
tional door lock.
THE ADDITIONAL DOOR LOCK IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED IN THE

FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R The vehicle is locked using the key.

R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
# Pull the door 1 handle.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door
lock is not activated (/ page 633).
191
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-
from the inside GO
Requirements
R The key is outside the vehicle.

R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are
closed.
* NOTE
Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash
# To unlock: Press 1 button.
R when using a high pressure cleaner
# To lock: Press 2 button.
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.
or
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
Plug-in hybrid: The socket flap is also locked and unlocked. The socket flap
from the vehicle.
can be opened even if a key is detected in the car.
THE VEHICLE IS NOT UNLOCKED:

OBSERVE THE NOTES:
R if you have locked the vehicle using the key
R on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 40)
R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R on using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 687)
192
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 74).
# Use the replacement key.
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 194).
# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF KEYLESS-GO IS IMPAIRED:
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. R high voltage power lines
R mobile phones
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 2 until the clos‐
ing process has been completed. R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate sys‐
tems or automatic barriers
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 205).
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the
If you open the tailgate from outside, it is automatically unlocked.
potential source of interference.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting Activating/deactivating the automatic locking

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE USING KEYLESS-GO feature
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the
R The function of the key has been deactivated. wheels are turning faster than walking pace.
R The key battery is weak or discharged.
193
Activating/deactivating automatic locking in

the MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
% The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched

on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.
# Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.

# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds
until an acoustic signal sounds. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A DANGER OF BEING LOCKED
OUT WHEN THE FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED:
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds
until an acoustic signal sounds. R The vehicle is being towed or pushed.
R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A DANGER OF BEING LOCKED Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emer‐
OUT WHEN THE FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED:
gency key
R while the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed
R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DRIVER'S DOOR WITH THE EMERGENCY KEY
% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key,
first press the button for locking from the inside while the driv‐
er's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using
the emergency key.
% If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key,
this triggers the anti-theft alarm system.
194
% Information regarding starting the vehicle with the key in the

storage compartment (emergency operation mode)
(/ page 311).
# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
# Carefully press the cover cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and
is seated firmly.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 188).
LOCKING THE FRONT PASSENGER DOOR AND REAR DOORS
# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into the opening 1 on the
cover cap.
# Pull and hold the door handle.
# Pull the cover cap on the emergency key as straight as possible away
from the vehicle until it releases.
# Release the door handle.
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the
door lock.
195
# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key anti-
clockwise as far as it will go.
# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key
clockwise as far as it will go.
If the locked door is closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.
196
Opening and closing Load compartment
Load compartment
Opening the tailgate VEHICLES WITH AN EASY-PACK TAILGATE
& DANGER
Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon
monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is
open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
# Never drive with the tailgate open.
# Pull remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate opens.

* NOTE
or
Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Press and hold the p button on the key.
# If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again
# Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the
immediately.
tailgate.
# If the tailgate has stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards.
Release it as soon as it begins to open.
# Pull the tailgate handle.
If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process,
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with
blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection
your foot below the bumper (/ page 200).
function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
197
Closing the tailgate # Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is
outside the vehicle.
# To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate downwards with the handle and
& WARNING
let it drop into the lock.
Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, VEHICLES WITH AN EASY-PACK TAILGATE
they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate
sudden change in direction. Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing
area.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around.
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area dur‐
ing the closing process.
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against USE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO STOP THE CLOSING
slipping or tipping over. PROCESS:
R Press the p button on the key.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key
R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
recognition.
R Pull the tailgate handle.
NOTE THAT THE TAILGATE WILL NOT BE LOCKED IN THE FOLLOWING SIT‐
UATION:
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing
R You have locked the vehicle and closed the tailgate while a key belonging process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.
to the vehicle is inside the vehicle and is detected.
# To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as
and
soon as it begins to close.
R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehi‐
cle.
Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten‐
tiveness.
198
# Press and hold the p button on the key. The key must be in the vicin‐
ity of the vehicle.
VEHICLES WITH HANDS-FREE ACCESS
# Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper
(/ page 200).
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION FOR THE TAILGATE
The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing
function. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing
process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection
with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten‐
# Switch on the power supply or the vehicle. tiveness.
# Push remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate is fully closed.

# During the closing process, ensure that no body parts remain within the
closing area.
# Press closing button 1 on the tailgate.

VEHICLES WITH KEYLESS-GO
# Press locking button 2 on the tailgate.
If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the
vehicle will be locked.
199
R If you stop the tailgate closing process with a kicking motion, the tailgate
& WARNING is opened with the next kicking motion
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT: IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE TAILGATE CAN ONLY BE CLOSED WITH
HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R towards the end of the closing procedure R If the vehicle is switched on and the key's unlock function has been set
so that only the driver's door is unlocked when activated (/ page 187).
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent
R If the vehicle has been centrally locked from the inside (/ page 192).
someone being trapped.
# Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 197) and closing (/ page 198) the
IF SOMEONE IS TRAPPED, EITHER: tailgate.
R Press the p button on the key.
R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing.
R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
R Pull the tailgate handle.
& WARNING
Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS allows you to open and close the tailgate, or even stop # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within
the opening and closing process at any point, by performing a kicking motion the detection range of the sensors.
under the rear bumper. The transmission must be in position j for this func‐
tion.
THE KICKING MOTION TRIGGERS THE OPENING OR CLOSING PROCESS

ALTERNATELY.
R If you stop the tailgate opening process with a kicking motion, the tail‐
gate is closed with the next kicking motion
200
* NOTE
Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash
R when using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
or 1 Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking motions are not successful, wait ten seconds.
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. SYSTEM LIMITS
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
CASES:
Ensure that you are standing firmly on the ground when performing the kicking
motion. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
R The kicking motion is made using a prosthetic leg.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R The key is behind the vehicle. THE TAILGATE CAN OPEN OR CLOSE UNINTENTIONALLY IN THE FOLLOW‐
If the key is not recognised: ING SITUATIONS:
- Take the key in your hand.
R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g.
or
when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
- Ensure that the function of the key is activated (/ page 74). R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle when performing the kicking dispenser, a charging cable or luggage
motion. R Tension belts, tarps or other covers are pulled over the bumper.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper when performing the kicking R A protective mat with a length reaching over the loading sill down into
motion. the detection range of the sensors is used.
R Do not carry out the kicking motion too slowly. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
R The kicking motion must be towards the vehicle and back again. R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Work is being carried out on the trailer
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Perform the kicking motion to the left or hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.
right of the ball head.
201
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 74) or do not carry the key about
your person in such situations.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

ACTIVATING THE OPENING ANGLE LIMITER
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening
range up to a point shortly before the end position.
# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 188).
# Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short # Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in.
tone.
The tailgate will be unlocked.
The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in
the stored position when opened.
FULLY OPENING THE TAILGATE AFTER IT HAS STOPPED AUTOMATICALLY
# Pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again.
DEACTIVATING THE OPENING ANGLE LIMITER
# Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short tones
sound.
Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

Requirements
R The rear seat backrest has been folded forward.

R The load compartment cover has been removed.
202
Opening and closing Side windows
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
& WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, par‐
Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window ticularly when unattended.
When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or # Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side
lock the vehicle.
window.
# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull
it in order to close the side window again.
Requirements
R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing
area in the process.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing
area.
# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or

press the button in order to reopen the side window.
203
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
THE REVERSING FUNCTION DOES NOT REACT:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

R during resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped

in these situations.
1 Closing # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are
2 Opening in the closing area.
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open
the side window again.
# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point
of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.

Automatic function of the side windows
#
When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side win‐
dows. IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE SIDE WINDOWS WILL BE CLOSED AUTO‐
MATICALLY WHEN THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF:
This function will be available for around four minutes or until a front door is
opened. R if it starts to rain
Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SIDE WINDOWS R in extreme temperatures
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side win‐
R after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system volt‐
dow will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an
age)
aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the clos‐
ing area.
The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.
204
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed R The panoramic sunroof opens.
completely if the sliding sunroof is open. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window
concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process,
the automatic function may be deactivated. The automatic function will be % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed,
active again the next time the vehicle is started. the roller sunblind is opened first.
Interrupt convenience opening: Release the key Ü.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
#
before starting a journey) # Continue convenience opening: Press key Ü again and keep it
pressed.
& WARNING
Risk of entrapment when opening a side window Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or outside)
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side & WARNING
window. Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
ence closing
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trap‐
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
ped.
could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof.
Requirements
R The key is near the vehicle. the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: Requirements
R The vehicle is unlocked. R The key is near the vehicle.

R The side windows are open.
205
# Press and hold the ß button on the key. A SIDE WINDOW CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE CAUSE.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
R The vehicle is locked. # Adjust the side windows.

R The side windows are closed.
R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. Adjusting the side windows
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ß button # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again
again. until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO
(/ page 192).
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
# Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again
Resolving problems with the side windows until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (follow-up adjustment).
WARNING The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
&
Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection THE SIDE WINDOWS CANNOT BE OPENED OR CLOSED USING THE CONVE‐
is not activated NIENCE OPENING FEATURE.
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, POSSIBLE CAUSES:
the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The
reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trap‐ R The key battery is weak or discharged.
ped.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the
button again to reopen the side window.
206
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof & WARNING

Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving
sunroof. parts, particularly if unattended.
& WARNING # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being lock the vehicle.
opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.
# During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are
in the range of movement.
ped.
or
# Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic

operation.
The opening or closing process will be stopped.
207
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is fitted
opened and closed When a roof luggage rack is fitted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame may be restricted.
or sliding roof.
# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened
# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in when a roof luggage rack is fitted.
the roller sunblind's range of movement.
# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.
ped.
or

operation.
The opening or closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE
Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.
1 Raise
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.
2 Open
3 Close/lower
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller
* NOTE
Damage caused by protruding objects sunblind.
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals. The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is
open.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
208
# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof
luggage rack is fitted. & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being
# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point active
of resistance or pull and release it.
IN PARTICULAR, THE REVERSING FUNCTION DOES NOT REACT:
# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
direction.
R towards the end of the closing procedure.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
R during resetting.
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SLIDING SUNROOF
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are
sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function in the closing area.
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trap‐
ped.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the clos‐
ing area. or

operation.
The closing process will be stopped.
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ROLLER SUNBLIND

If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the
roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the
area of movement.
209
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin vehicle interior.
objects, e.g. fingers.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, it
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof
are in the range of movement. and the side windows will then be deactivated.
ped. RAIN CLOSING FUNCTION WHEN DRIVING
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised slid‐
or ing sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.
# Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic AUTOMATIC LOWERING FUNCTION
closing process. Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at
The closing process will be stopped. the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low
speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding
sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be low‐
sunroof. ered slightly at the rear.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range
THE SLIDING SUNROOF WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE
of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
VEHICLE HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof
R if it starts to rain
button forwards or backwards.
Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
R in extreme temperatures
R after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system volt‐
age)
210
# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button

% By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
"Automatic lowering".
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof # Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller
& WARNING
sunblind is not operating smoothly.
Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof
is closed again # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately after it has been
blocked or reset, it will close with increased force.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is
fully closed.
ped.
# Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is
or
fully closed.
# Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
closing process.
The closing process will be stopped.
THE SLIDING SUNROOF CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE
CAUSE.
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding

sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
211
Opening and closing Anti-theft protection
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct
key.
The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off,

and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

FUNCTION OF THE ATA SYSTEM
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is primed.
IF THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED, A VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARM IS TRIG‐
GERED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: THE ATA SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING
R when a door is opened SITUATIONS:
R when the tailgate is opened R After unlocking the vehicle with the key
R when the bonnet is opened R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R when interior protection is triggered (/ page 213) R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
R when tow-away protection is triggered (/ page 213) ment (/ page 311)
DEACTIVATING THE ATA

THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROXIMATELY # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the key.
TEN SECONDS IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
or
R After locking the vehicle with the key
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO # Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment
(/ page 311)
212
DEACTIVATING THE ALARM USING KEYLESS-GO

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
# Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing
Function of tow-away protection 5 Vehicle protection
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle # Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.
of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed. TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY PRIMED AFTER ABOUT R The vehicle is unlocked again.
60 SECONDS: R A door is opened.
R After locking the vehicle with the key R The vehicle is locked again.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Function of interior protection

TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COM‐
PONENTS ARE CLOSED: When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if
movement is detected in the vehicle interior.
R Doors
R Tailgate INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROX‐
IMATELY TEN SECONDS:
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED: R after locking the vehicle with the key
R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R After pressing the Ü or p button on the key
R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COMPO‐
ment (/ page 311)
NENTS ARE CLOSED:
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS R Doors
R Tailgate
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 388).
213
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED:
R after pressing the Ü or p button on the key

R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compart‐
ment (/ page 311)
R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO A FALSE ALARM:
R when there are moving objects suchas mascots in the vehicle interior
R if a side window is open
R if the panoramic sunroof is open
Activating/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing
5 Vehicle protection
# Activate or deactivate Interior protection.
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS ACTIVATED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R The vehicle is unlocked again.

R A door is opened.
R The vehicle is locked again.
Back to Contents214
Seats and stowing
Seats and stowing

Notes on the correct driver's seat position 216 Cup holders 259
Notes on grab handles 217 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 262
Seats 218 Sockets 264
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and

Steering wheel 235 267
connection with the exterior aerial
Easy entry and exit feature 237 Fitting/removing the floor mats 270
Memory function 239
Stowage areas 242

Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING WHEN ADJUSTING STEERING WHEEL 1, SEAT

& WARNING BELT 2 AND DRIVER'S SEAT 3:
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING following points into consideration:
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: R You are sitting in an upright position
R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
head restraint
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your R You can move your legs freely
seat belt.
R You can see all the indicators on the driver's display clearly
R You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
R Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 136).
216
Seats and stowing Notes on grab handles
Notes on grab handles
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly,
the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage.
This may result in injuries.
# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or

to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
217
Seats and stowing Seats
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (without & WARNING

Seat Comfort Package) Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.
& WARNING This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before
when unattended. starting the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
& WARNING
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
& WARNING R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
parts in the sweep of the seat. seat belt.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
218
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have
could be trapped and thereby injured. not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐ In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
ment buttons and become trapped.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body
parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjust‐
ment system. position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being & WARNING
adjusted incorrectly Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly,
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage.
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. This may result in injuries.
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise,
you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints cor‐
rectly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible

to the back of your head.
219
& WARNING
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
system.
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no

objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
seat. # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2 until the desired posi‐
tion has been reached.
ADJUSTS THE SEAT FORE-AND-AFT POSITION # To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards
and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with

Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly
when unattended.
# Lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
220
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become vehicle is in motion
trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat. R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
& WARNING seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged seat belt.
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

& WARNING
# Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
starting the vehicle. If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants
could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐

ment buttons and become trapped.
ment system.
221
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles
adjusted incorrectly If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly,
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage.
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, This may result in injuries.
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted. to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
at about eye level. & WARNING
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
rectly.
system.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
& WARNING objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position seat.
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

222
ADJUSTS THE SEAT FORE-AND-AFT POSITION # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired posi‐
tion has been reached.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 5 forwards

Adjusting the front seat electrically
& WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly
when unattended.
# Lift lever 2 and slide the seat into the desired position.
lock the vehicle.
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become
trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body
# To adjust the seat cushion length (driver's seat only): lift lever 1 and parts in the sweep of the seat.
slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
# To adjust the seat cushion inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
223
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
vehicle is in motion adjusted incorrectly
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion # Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your at about eye level.
seat belt.
& WARNING rectly.
Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants to the back of your head.
could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐ & WARNING
ment buttons and become trapped. Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
ment system. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

224
& WARNING

& WARNING 1 Seat backrest inclination

Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the 2 Seat height
front passenger seat 3 Seat cushion inclination
Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the 4 Seat fore-and-aft position
system.
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 240).

objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
seat.
225
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support & WARNING

Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards.
THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or
positioned and will no longer fulfil its function as intended.
R The seat backrest will not be able restrain objects or goods in the
load compartment.
1 Higher
2 Softer ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT AND SEAT BACKREST ARE
3 Lower ENGAGED, IN PARTICULAR:
4 Firmer R Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with
# Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest. the easy entry and exit feature
R After the seat has been adjusted.
After the easy entry and exit feature has been used
Adjusting rear seats manually
R
R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
wards
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. & WARNING
Risk of injury from adjusting the rear seats while driving
parts in the sweep of the seat. You or other vehicle occupants could become trapped and thereby
injured.
# Adjust the rear seats before starting the vehicle.
226
& WARNING

* NOTE # Lift release handle 1 and slide the corresponding part of the bench
Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the rear seat into the desired position.
seats.
# Let go of release handle 1.
The rear seats and/or objects may be damaged during adjustment in
the longitudinal direction. # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
# Stow the objects in a suitable place.
Switching the seat ventilation of the AMG Per‐
This function is available only for vehicles with a movable rear bench seat. formance seats on or off
The components of the rear bench seat can be moved. You can move the Requirements
right-hand and left-hand parts together with the centre part independently of
each other. R The power supply is switched on.
227
& WARNING
Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards.
THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been
R The seat backrest will not be able restrain objects or goods in the
reached.
load compartment.
Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light
up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT AND SEAT BACKREST ARE
ENGAGED, IN PARTICULAR:
Adjusting the rear seat backrests manually R Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with
the easy entry and exit feature
R After the seat has been adjusted.
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats R After the easy entry and exit feature has been used
R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
wards
Vehicles without movable rear bench seats: if a seat backrest in the rear
passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
228
Vehicles with movable rear bench seats: if the centre seat backrest in the ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST
rear passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, red lock veri‐ YOU CAN FOLD THE SEAT BACKRESTS ON THE SECOND ROW OF SEATS
fication indicator 3 will be visible. The outer seat backrests lock automati‐ FORWARDS FOR THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R For easier access to the luggage compartment
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged You can set the seat backrest to different angles.
The seat does not engage when folded forwards. The seat can fold
If you no longer require the seat backrest to be folded down for getting in and
backwards unexpectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event
out, fold it back into place.
of an abrupt change of direction or an accident.
People in the seat's sweep can become trapped.
# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold it back before driving

off.
# Hold the seat backrest in place with your hand or back.

& WARNING
# Gently pull one of release loops 1 and fold the seat backrest forwards
or backwards.
the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. # Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged.

Requirements
R The area into which the seat is folded is clear.
229
Head restraints Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise,
ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS MANUALLY rectly.

& WARNING to the back of your head.

seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
seat belt.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push
& WARNING
the head restraint down.
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly # To move the driver's head restraint forwards: press release knob 2
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted and pull the head restraint forwards.
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # To move the driver's head restraint backwards: press release knob 2
and push the head restraint backwards.
at about eye level.
230
ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINTS OF THE REAR SEATS MANUALLY # To lower: press release button 1 and push the head restraint down.
# If the centre seat on the second row of seats is not occupied: press
& WARNING
the head restraint down all the way.
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly FITTING/REMOVING THE REAR SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, & WARNING
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
at about eye level. # Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
at about eye level.
rectly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as
possible to the back of your head.
rectly.

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
231
REMOVING # Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until it engages.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
Setting automatic seat adjustment
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat
after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 48).
the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. pants could be injured in the process.
# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head
# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being
adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body
restraint.
parts are in the seat's range of movement.
FITTING
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the
adjustment process by:
# a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
# b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat

adjustment switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped.
232
Multimedia system:
Resetting seat settings
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Position seat automatically
Multimedia system:
MANUALLY ADJUSTING DRIVER'S SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL POSITION
TO BODY SIZE 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on # Select Reset.
the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly.
# Select ß for the desired seat.
# To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. The settings for the selected seat are reset.
# Set the size using the scale.
# Select Start positioning. Switching the seat heating on/off

The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size
that has been set. & WARNING
Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating
% You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion
account for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the and seat backrest padding to become very hot.
vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry
over these settings for your vehicle. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity
Further information about synchronising user profiles or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
(/ page 528). they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
% If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the

vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adap‐ To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐
ted at any time via the control buttons. ted after it has been switched on repeatedly.
The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they
have to be set manually via the operating switches.
233
* NOTE % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three
Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating
seat heater is switched on switches off.
When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to
objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child
seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. Switching the seat ventilation on/off
# Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats Requirements
when the seat heater is switched on.
R The power supply is switched on.
Requirements
R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been
reached.
Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.
Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
234
Seats and stowing Steering wheel
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel manually UNLOCKING
& WARNING
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's # Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
seat belt. # Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.
& WARNING
Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
lock the vehicle.
235
Seats and stowing Steering wheel
LOCKING
# To switch on: push the switch to position 1.

If the indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched
# Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
on.
# Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the
# To switch off: push the switch to position 2.
steering wheel.
When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Depending on the vehicle version, the steering wheel heater can be switched
on/off via a switch on the steering wheel.
Requirements:
R The vehicle is switched on.
236
Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function
position switches.
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and
of the easy entry and exit feature exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit
feature, particularly when unattended.
# Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before
driving off. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and
exit feature WHEN THE EASY ENTRY AND EXIT FEATURE IS ACTIVE, THE DRIVER'S
You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. SEAT WILL MOVE INTO AN IDEAL POSITION FOR GETTING IN OR OUT OF
THE VEHICLE AND THE SEAT BACKREST WILL BE MOVED TO A MORE
# Ensure that no-one has any body parts in the range of move‐ UPRIGHT POSITION IF:
ment of the seat.
R you switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open.
R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:
# Press the seat adjustment switch.

The adjustment process will be stopped. % The driver's seat will only move forwards or backwards if it is not
already in the ideal position for getting in or out of the vehicle.
237
Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature
The seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already er's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position
at the front of the backrest adjustment range. automatically (/ page 525).
THE DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE BACK TO THE LAST DRIVE POSITION IF:
R you switch the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed.

R you close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.
THE LAST DRIVE POSITION WILL BE SAVED WHEN:
R you switch off the vehicle.

R you call up the seat settings via the memory function.
R you save the seat settings via the memory function.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Requirements
R The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (/ page 232).

R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort
5 Easy entry and exit feature
SETTING THE EASY ENTRY AND EXIT FEATURE

# Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off.
% If you are using a custom user profile, this information will be

used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driv‐
238
Seats and stowing Memory function
Memory function
Memory function & WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by chil‐
& WARNING dren
Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped,
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you especially if they are unsupervised.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
made.
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the
lock the vehicle.
vehicle is stationary.
You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the
& WARNING
memory function.
Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
tion YOU CAN SAVE SETTINGS FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. R Seat
R Seat contour
# During the adjustment process of the memory function, make
R Outside mirrors
sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button

or seat adjustment switch immediately.
239
Operating the memory function & WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by chil‐
& WARNING dren
Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped,
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you especially if they are unsupervised.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
made.
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the
lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the ignition is switched off.
& WARNING STORING
Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.
# During the adjustment process of the memory function, make

sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button

or seat adjustment switch immediately.
# Set the desired position for all systems.
# Briefly press memory button V and then press preset position 4,

T or U within three seconds.
240
# To call up: press and briefly hold one of preset position buttons 4,
T or U.
After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored posi‐
tion.
241
Seats and stowing Stowage areas
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle & WARNING

Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
& DANGER If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently,
Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon occupants.
monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is
open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
sudden change in direction.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
# Never drive with the tailgate open. around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from func‐ slipping or tipping over.
tioning correctly. Observe the notes on airbags (/ page 154).
242
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's and front-passenger
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or footwell
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, Objects in the driver's and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain travel or block a depressed pedal.
all objects they contain.
This jeopardises the operating‑ and road safety of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres
or abrupt changes in direction.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's or front-passenger footwell.
such situations.
# Always ensure that the pedals have sufficient free space.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. top of one another.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-
edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment. Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff: objects trapped
under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the auto‐
matic front passenger airbag deactivation or damage the system. Therefore
please observe the notes on the function of automatic front passenger airbag
deactivation (/ page 141).
243
& WARNING * NOTE

‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
vehicle is in motion When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in
motion.
# Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may
be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may
come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. & WARNING
You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose con‐ Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims
trol of the vehicle. The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you
come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn your‐
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. self.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tail‐
pipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
* NOTE
Damage to the cup holder
The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat arm‐ * NOTE
rest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight. Damage to the load compartment floor caused by uneven loading
or sudden stresses
# The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup
The load compartment floor can be damaged by unevenly distributed
holder is closed.
loads or sudden stresses.
# Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is # Distribute the load evenly.
open.
# Drive with due care when the vehicle is carrying a load. Avoid
sudden starting, braking and steering manoeuvres or fast cor‐
nering.
244
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, % Further information on stowage compartments and stowage
such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and facilities can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
injury or subtle colour differences. These surface characteristics
are particular to leather, and not material defects. Leather is also
subject to a natural ageing process which changes the surface
characteristics. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
OVERVIEW OF THE FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
THE DRIVING CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE DEPENDENT ON
THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE LOAD WITHIN THE VEHICLE. YOU SHOULD WARNING
&
BEAR THE FOLLOWING IN MIND WHEN LOADING THE VEHICLE: Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
R Never allow the payload including occupants to exceed the maximum If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle. be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
These are shown on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 810). open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects within.
R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
R Always use the partitioning net when carrying objects in the load com‐ There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
partment. sudden change in direction.
R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in
R Secure the load using the tie-down eyelets and distribute the tension such situations.
evenly.
NOTES ON CARRYING A ROOF LOAD:
at the bottom. Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
R Drive with care. Avoid sudden starting, braking and steering manoeuvres fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
or fast cornering.
R When carrying a roof load or when the vehicle is fully loaded or occu‐
pied, select drive program ; or A. These are configured for good
stability (/ page 333).
245
& WARNING
are not engaged
1 Stowage spaces in the doors with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
2 Storage compartment in the armrest with a multimedia and USB connec‐ intended and could cause additional injury.
tion
3 Storage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port restrained by the seat backrest.
4 Glove compartment
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
Through-loading feature in the rear bench
seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold) Vehicles without movable rear bench seats: if a seat backrest in the rear
passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri‐
FOLDING THE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS fication indicator will be visible.
& WARNING Vehicles with movable rear bench seats: if the centre seat backrest in the
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats rear passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock
verification indicator will be visible. The outer seat backrests lock automati‐
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold
the backrest back into place.
Requirements
R The area into which the seat backrest is folded is clear.
246
R To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: the centre seat backrest has FOLDING THE CENTRE SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS
been unlocked.
R The armrest on the second row of seats is folded back and the cup hold‐
ers are empty.
FOLDING THE LEFT AND RIGHT SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARDS

You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards.
# Pull release catch 3 for seat backrest 2 forwards.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

FOLDING BACK THE REAR SEAT BACKREST
& WARNING
# If necessary, fully insert the seat backrest head restraints (/ page 231). Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
# Pull release lever 1.
247
& WARNING
are not engaged
restrained by the seat backrest. # Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat Vehicles without a movable rear bench seat: if a seat backrest in the rear
backrest are engaged before every trip. passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
Vehicles with a movable rear bench seat: if the centre rear seat backrest is
* NOTE
not engaged and locked in place, red lock verification indicator 3 will be visi‐
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the
ble. The outer seat backrests will lock automatically when they are not folded
seat backrest
down.
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the
seat backrest is folded back.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back
the seat backrest.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
248
LOCKING THE RELEASE CATCH OF THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST
& WARNING
are not engaged
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be # Fold the centre and left seat backrests forwards.
# To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat ADJUSTING THE ANGLE OF THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS
& WARNING
Vehicles without a movable rear bench seat: if a seat backrest in the rear Risk of an accident because the rear bench seat and the seat
passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri‐ backrest is not engaged
fication indicator will be visible. The rear bench seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even when
you are driving.
Vehicles with a movable rear bench seat: if the centre seat backrest in the
rear passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt
verification indicator will be visible. The outer seat backrests lock automati‐ with increased force. The seat belt may not be able to provide the
cally when they are not folded down. intended protection and could cause additional injury.
Requirements R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or
R The left and centre seat backrests are engaged and joined together.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment will not be
You can lock the centre seat backrest. The centre seat backrest can then be
folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.
# Before each journey, make sure that the rear bench seat and
the seat backrest are fully engaged.
249
For vehicles with longitudinally adjustable rear seats, you can also adjust the Vehicles without a movable rear bench seat: if a seat backrest in the rear
angle of the rear seat backrests. There are several possible detent positions. passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri‐
fication indicator will be visible.
* NOTE Vehicles with a movable rear bench seat: if the centre seat backrest in the
Damage to the release loops due to the attachment of objects rear passenger compartment is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock
The release loops of the seat backrests in the rear may be damaged due verification indicator will be visible. The outer seat backrests lock automati‐
to the attachment of objects. cally when they are not folded down.
# Only attach objects to the tie-down eyes.

Load compartment cover
INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE LOAD COMPARTMENT COVER
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy
objects, items of luggage or heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of

abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.

# Pull right or left release loop 2 forwards in the direction of the arrow. around.
1 The corresponding seat backrest will be unlocked. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping
over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the
# Move seat backrest 1 to the desired angle. load compartment cover.
# Let go of release loop 2.
REQUIREMENTS
# Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged.
R Do not load the load compartment cover with more than 2.5 kg.
250
REMOVING
% Please ensure that the load compartment cover is lying flat on
the guide rails on the right and left when the tailgate is closed.
% Please note that the load compartment cover must not be
pushed further upwards when the tailgate is open.
Attaching/removing the partitioning net
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage or heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of

abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.

around.
# Pull hanger 3 on the tailgate upwards out of eyelet 1 and unhook it.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping
# Swivel the load compartment cover downwards and pull it evenly out of over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the
the guide rails on the right and left in the direction of arrow 4. partitioning net.
FITTING
# Place the load compartment cover on the guide rails on the left and
For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load.
right.
Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfil their functions and must be
# Slide the load compartment cover forwards evenly in the guide rails on
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
the right and left with both hands until it engages.
# Swivel the load compartment cover upwards and hook hanger 3

through eyelet 2.
# Pull hanger 3 downwards into eyelet 1 until it engages.
251
ATTACHING # Without load compartment enlargement: attach hooks 3 to tie-down

eyes 4 on the left and right in such a way that hooks 3 point back‐
wards.
# With load compartment enlargement: attach hooks 3 to tie-down eyes

4 on the left and right in such a way that hooks 3 point to the door.
# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at the same time until the
partitioning net 1 is tight and the top edge of partitioning net 1 is hor‐
izontal.
REMOVING
Partitioning net without load compartment enlargement
# Turn the buckle of the lashing strap in the direction of arrow 6.
# Slide the loose end of lashing strap into the buckle in the direction of
arrow 5 until the lashing straps are loose.
Partitioning net with load compartment enlargement
# Hook partition net 1 into holders 2 on the left and right on the roof # Remove hooks 3 from tie-down eyes 4 on the left and right.
lining.
# Remove partitioning net 1 from brackets 2 on the roof lining on the
left and right.
252
Overview of tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 242).
Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods
to them.
1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench

1 Bag hook
seat)
Overview of bag hooks Overview of clothes hooks on the tailgate

& WARNING
Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.
Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occu‐
pants.
# Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag

hooks.
253
Attaching the luggage net
& WARNING
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres

or abrupt changes in direction.
1 Clothes hook
The clothes hooks are not suitable for hanging heavy objects as this can cause # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in
the tailgate to lower automatically. Use the clothes hooks only for light objects such situations.
such as jackets.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-
edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.
254
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor
If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be
flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in
direction.
# Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.
# Lift the load compartment floor upwards using the handle, remove it
from the load compartment and put it down on a clean surface. # Pull rubber sections 5 and 6 over load compartment floor 3 as
shown.
# Align luggage net 1 so that

R rubber section 5 runs underneath recesses 7 and beads 8 on
the left and right are placed on the lower edge of load compart‐
ment floor 3.
R rubber section 6 runs above handle 4 and beads 8 on the left
and right are placed on the lower edge of load compartment floor
3.
# Align luggage net 1 on load compartment floor 3 so that strap 2 is
positioned at handle 4 and points upwards.
% Ensure that the luggage net does not block the locking mecha‐
nism of the load compartment floor.
# Close the load compartment floor.
255
Opening or closing the stowage space under Adjusting the load compartment floor
the load compartment floor TO ADJUST THE HEIGHT
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor Damage to the load compartment floor due to uneven loading or
If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be jerky movements
flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of The load compartment floor may be damaged by uneven loading or
injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in jerky movements.
direction.
# Distribute the load inside the vehicle evenly.
# Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.
# Drive carefully when the vehicle is loaded. Avoid abrupt starts,
braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
OPENING
The load compartment can be made larger or smaller depending on require‐

ments. To this end, you can lock the load compartment floor at two different
heights. The higher position provides a flat surface when the rear seat backr‐
ests are folded forward. Furthermore, you can remove a mounting bracket at
the rear to create additional space lengthways.
# Pull handle 1 upwards.
# Lift the load compartment floor up using handle 1. # Lift load compartment floor 1 (in the bottom position in the example)
only slightly using handle 3 and pull it towards you.
CLOSING
# Fold the load compartment floor down and then press handle 1 down # Insert load compartment floor 1 into rear fixtures 2.
until it engages.
256
# Fold load compartment floor 1 down. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data"
section.
ADJUSTING THE LENGTH
* NOTE
ble clearance height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged.
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.

# Fold the rear seat backrests forward slightly. # If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
# Make sure that load compartment floor 1 is inserted in the lower posi‐ drive in.
tion. # Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
# Press one release catch 5 and remove console 4 upwards. structures or other carrier systems into account.
Attaching a roof luggage rack * NOTE

Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved
WARNING roof luggage racks
&
Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and
well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. approved for Mercedes-Benz.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as

# When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama sliding
well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving
style. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the
vehicle interior.
257
NOTES ON DRIVING WITH ROOF LOAD
at the bottom. Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 242) .
R Drive carefully, avoiding abrupt starting, braking and steering as well as
fast cornering.
R When transporting a roof load and with a fully laden or fully occupied
vehicle, select one of the drive programs ; and A. These are con‐
figured for good stability (/ page 333).
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof railing.
# Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
258
Seats and stowing Cup holders
Cup holders
Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from REMOVING
the centre console
& WARNING
‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the
motion.
come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose con‐ Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover
trol of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover
259
# Slide snap-in brackets 1 of the cup holder inwards until they are
unlocked.
# Pull the cup holder up and out of the stowage compartment.
% The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath it can be

removed for cleaning, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water.
Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover

FITTING
# Open the cover of marked space if necessary.
# Insert the cup holder, as shown, into the stowage compartment with the
imprint facing the vehicle interior.
# Slide the cup holder onto the bars in the stowage compartment.
Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover # Slide snap-in brackets 1 outwards until they engage.
# Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover: press button 2.
# Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover: press button 2

and/or 4.
Wings 3 will fold upwards.
% The cup holder wings can be folded downwards and locked. The
cup holder's holding function will then not be available.
260
Opening or closing the cup holders in the rear * NOTE

armrest Damage to the cup holder
The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat arm‐
rest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.
& WARNING
‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the # The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup
vehicle is in motion holder is closed.
motion. # Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is
open.
come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
% Depending on its equipment, your vehicle will have a rear arm‐
You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose con‐
rest with a cup holder.
trol of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
* NOTE
# To open: press cup holder 1 or 2.
Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
Cup holder 1 or 2 will extend automatically.
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.
# Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

# To close: push cup holder 1 or 2 back until it engages.
261
Seats and stowing Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Using the ashtray Using the cigarette lighter

DURING A JOURNEY
# Place the closed ashtray in the front door stowage compartment. & WARNING
Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter
# Check that it is secure. You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter.
# Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 242).
IN ADDITION, FLAMMABLE MATERIALS CAN CATCH FIRE IF:
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter.

R children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects.
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach
of children.
# To open: fold lid 1 upwards. Requirements

% Twist the top part of the ashtray to remove it for cleaning, e.g.
with clean, lukewarm water, or for emptying.
262
Seats and stowing Ashtray and cigarette lighter
# Press in cigarette lighter 1.

The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when the heating ele‐
ment is red-hot.
263
Seats and stowing Sockets
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger
Requirements compartment
R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A) are permissible.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to a damaged connecting cable or a dam‐
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOL‐ aged socket
LOWING 12 V SOCKETS:
You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V
R In the stowage compartment in the front centre console power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.
R In the load compartment # Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.
# When the vehicle is switched off, make sure that the 115 V
power socket is dry.
# Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced

at a qualified specialised workshop if it is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket

Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Fold up socket cap 1.
# Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the stowage compartment with cover: if you have connected

a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment
open.
264
& DANGER
Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly
IN PARTICULAR, YOU COULD RECEIVE AN ELECTRIC SHOCK:
R if you touch the inside of the socket

R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket
# Do not touch the inside of the socket.
# Only connect suitable devices to the socket.
# Open socket flap 3.

Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket.
# Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1.
When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket flap closed. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp
Requirements 2 lights up.
R The device is equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the

standards specific to the country you are in. USB port in the rear passenger compartment
R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (1.3 A) is used.
R Do not use multiple socket outlets. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage
compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear centre
console may vary.
265
When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a USB device, such as a
mobile phone, at USB port 1 using a suitable charging cable.
266
Seats and stowing Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exte‐
rior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone & WARNING
Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage
& WARNING compartment
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or constitute a fire hazard.
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in
open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always
the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those
made of metal.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in * NOTE

such situations. Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone
stowage compartment
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other
objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone
stowage compartment.
267
* NOTE
Charging a mobile phone wirelessly
Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liq‐
uids & WARNING
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compart‐ Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
ment may be damaged. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage com‐
partment.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON WIRELESSLY CHARGING A MOBILE
PHONE:
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to
such situations.
the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.
R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
on.
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of
the mobile phone stowage compartment. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehi‐
cle's exterior aerial.
R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may in
particular be dependent on the currently open applications (apps), which Requirements
are open in the background.
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.
R To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exte‐
rior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protec‐ A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://
tive covers which are required for wireless charging are excluded. www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com.
268
RADIO EQUIPMENT APPROVAL NUMBERS FOR BRAZIL

This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection
against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and
must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Direc‐

tive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets
the applicable technical requirements.
# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of the marked surface on
mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br
When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is # For further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle com‐
being charged.
ponents which receive and/or transmit radio waves see (/ page 112).
Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central dis‐
play.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.
STOWAGE COMPARTMENT WITHOUT COVER

Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from
falling out while you are driving.
# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out.
269
Seats and stowing Fitting/removing the floor mats
Fitting/removing the floor mats
FITTING FLOOR MATS

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.
into the driver's footwell.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to

ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the
top of one another. footwell.
# Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
# Adjust the corresponding seat.

REMOVING FLOOR MATS
# Pull the floor mat off holders 2.
# Remove the floor mat.
Back to Contents270
Light and sight
Light and sight

Exterior lighting 272
Interior lighting 281
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer

283
system
Mirrors 286
Light and sight Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting
Notes on adjusting the lights when driving Light switch

abroad OPERATING THE LIGHT SWITCH
It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. The legal requirements are also
met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.
Information about lighting systems and your

responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the
vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the
prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situa‐
tion.
1 W Left-hand parking lights

2 X Right-hand parking lights
3 T Standing lights and licence plate lighting
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)
5 L Low beam/high beam
6 R Activates or deactivates the rear fog light.
7 N Switches the front fog lamps on/off.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights
will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp.
272
# Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance

with the relevant legal stipulations. & WARNING
Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor vis‐
ibility
* NOTE
Battery discharging by operating the standing lights When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be
Do not have the standing lights switched on over a period of several switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
hours. visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to L.

For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking
lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle
also switched on in the parking lights position.
lighting.
If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will SWITCHING THE REAR FOG LIGHT ON/OFF
be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
Requirements
THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING (EXCEPT STANDING AND PARKING LIGHTS)
R The light switch is in the L or Ã position.
WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE DRIVER'S DOOR IS
OPENED.
# Press button R.
R Observe the notes on locator lighting (/ page 280).
Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
AUTOMATIC DRIVING LIGHTS FUNCTION
When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime
running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light condi‐
tions.
273
Operating the combination switch for the HEADLAMP FLASHING

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.
lights
#
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

# To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the

point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning

lights
1 High beam
2 Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing
4 Turn signal light, left
# Use the combination switch to select the desired function.
SWITCHING ON HIGH BEAM
# Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1.

When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will
be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.
# Press button 1.
THE HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS WILL SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY IF:
SWITCHING OFF HIGH BEAM
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the R the airbag has been deployed.
direction of arrow 3. R the vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a
standstill.
274
When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off R The headlamps will follow your steering movements.
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard R Relevant areas will be better illuminated during a journey.
warning light system using button 1.
The functions will be active when high beam is switched on.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED CORNERING LIGHT FUNCTION
FUNCTION OF DYNAMIC LOW BEAM
The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the weather and the situation on the
road and provide advanced functions for improving the illumination of the
road.
THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R Active headlamps (/ page 275) The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide
angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for
R Cornering light (/ page 275) example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched
R Motorway mode (/ page 275) on.
R City lighting (/ page 276)
THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R Off-road light (/ page 276)
R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the
SYSTEM LIMITS steering wheel is turned
R The system will be active only when it is dark.
R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is
ACTIVE HEADLAMPS FUNCTION turned
Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on

both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position.
It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.
MOTORWAY MODE FUNCTION

Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, ena‐
bling better visibility.
275
The function will be active when low beam is switched on if you are not driving
at a speed greater than 50 km/h and the F (Offroad) drive program has
been selected.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING DYNAMIC LOW BEAM

Requirements

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IF A MOTORWAY JOURNEY IS DETECTED
BY MEANS OF:
Multimedia system:
R the vehicle's speed
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 MULTIBEAM LED
R the multifunction camera
# Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
R the GPS
THE FUNCTION WILL NOT BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R at speeds below 80 km/h
THE CITY LIGHTING FUNCTION

City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a
broad distribution of light.
THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R At low speeds
R In illuminated parts of urban areas
FUNCTION OF THE OFF-ROAD LIGHT

The off-road light improves illumination during off-road driving. The low beam
is distributed symmetrically and across a wide angle. This makes it easier to
find your way when driving off road and to detect obstacles at an early stage.
The active headlamps will be deactivated during this time so that steering
movements do not change the illumination.
276
Adaptive Highbeam Assist % Adaptive Highbeam Assist is an on-demand feature

(/ page 106).
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST FUNCTION
& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians

R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise

other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES BETWEEN
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be
THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT:
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
users. R Low beam
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and R High beam
switch off the high beam in good time.
AT SPEEDS GREATER THAN 30 KM/H:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic R If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automati‐
conditions. cally.
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

HIGH BEAM WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING
R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow CASES:
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
R At speeds below 25 km/h
R If other road users are detected
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the
vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
277
R If street lighting is sufficient # Switch on high beam using the combination switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will
light up on the driver's display.
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen
SWITCHING OFF
near the overhead control panel.
# Switch off high beam using the combination switch.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST ON/OFF

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
& WARNING
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS FUNCTION
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:
& WARNING
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to rec‐
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road ognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them
users. too late.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be
switch off the high beam in good time. deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
users.
SWITCHING ON # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
# Turn the light switch to the Ã position. switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traf‐
fic conditions.
278
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on auto‐
matically.
R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
AT SPEEDS BELOW 25 KM/H OR WHEN THERE IS SUFFICIENT STREET
LIGHTING:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting
the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. R High beam will switch off automatically.
R Partial high beam will switch off automatically.
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen

near the overhead control panel.
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES

BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT:
R Low beam
R Partial high beam
R High beam
Partial high beam uses high beam to shine past other road users rather than
dazzling them. The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low beam.
AT SPEEDS GREATER THAN 30 KM/H:
R If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automati‐
cally.
279
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS ON/OFF

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay
& WARNING
time
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Multimedia system:
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
5 Exterior lighting display
# Set a switch-off delay time.
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier After parking and locking the vehicle, the exterior lighting will be activa‐
ted for the set time.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to rec‐
ognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them Activating/deactivating locator lighting
too late.
Multimedia system:
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
users.
# Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds
switch off the high beam in good time. after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is
parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting is
switched off and automatic driving lights are activated.
SWITCHING ON
# Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
# Switch on high beam using the combination switch.

When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the _
indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.
SWITCHING OFF
# Switch off high beam using the combination switch.
280
Light and sight Interior lighting
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting OPERATING UNIT INSIDE THE GRAB HANDLE (REAR)
FRONT OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL
1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press the 1 button.
1 p Front left reading lamp
2 | Automatic interior lighting control
3 c Front interior lighting Adjusting the ambient lighting
4 u Rear interior lighting
Multimedia system:
5 p Front right reading lamp
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient light
# To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5 accordingly.
SETTING THE COLOUR
# Select Colour.
# Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.
# Set the desired colour or colour scheme.

ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS
# Select Brightness.
# Adjust the brightness.
281
Light and sight Interior lighting
% Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay
will automatically switch between day and night modes. time on/off
Multimedia system:
ACTIVATING THE BRIGHTNESS FOR ZONES
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
# Select Brightness.
5 Interior lighting display
# Switch off Link zones . # Activate or deactivate Interior lighting display.
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately. If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a
ACTIVATING EFFECTS short time after the end of the journey.
# Select Effects.
# Activate the desired effect.
% Different effects will be available depending on the vehicle

equipment.
MULTI-COLOUR ANIMATION
R The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.
CLIMATE
R If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour
of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
GREETING
R When you get into the vehicle, a special colour animation will play.
282
Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system
Switching the windscreen wipers on/off % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 40).
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
1 g Windscreen wipers off

2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal
3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
1 ô Single wipe/washing
# Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5. 2 è Intermittent wiping
# í Single wipe: press button 1 as far as the point of resistance. # Single wipe: press button 1 as far as the point of resistance.
# î Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of # Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of resist‐
resistance. ance.
283
# Switching intermittent wiping on/off: press button 2. SERVICE INDICATOR

The è symbol will appear on the driver's display when the rear win‐
dow wiper is switched on.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
& WARNING
# Remove protective film 1 from the service indicators on the tips of the
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before newly fitted wiper blades.
When the colour of the service indicators changes from black to yellow,
replace the wiper blades.
MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION
# Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐ conditions.
bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 283).
% Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace

# Observe the information about the service indicator.
284
Replacing the rear window wiper blade FITTING THE WIPER BLADE
& WARNING

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADE # Position wiper blade 1 with both tabs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper
arm.
# Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in

holder 2.
# Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly.
# Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear
window.
# Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear window until it engages in the
replacement position.
# Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction
of arrow 3.
285
Light and sight Mirrors
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors & WARNING

Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the
& WARNING outside mirror
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in
vehicle is in motion view are in fact closer than they appear.
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING # Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure
that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering road users driving behind you.

seat belt.
# To fold in or out: briefly press button 2.
# To adjust: use button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjus‐

ted.
286
# Use button 4 to adjust the position of the mirror glass.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
% If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, & WARNING

you will have to reset the outside mirrors. Only then will the Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror
automatic mirror folding function work properly. electrolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror
# To reset: briefly press button 2. breaks.
An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not
position again as follows: come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or
be swallowed.
# Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move
the outside mirror into the correct position. # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the follow‐
ing:
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold but‐
ton 2. R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with
water and seek medical attention.
You will hear a click. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct
position. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immedi‐
ately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek
medical attention.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your
mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing which has been con‐
taminated with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention
immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will auto‐
matically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on
the inside rearview mirror.
287
SYSTEM LIMITS
Storing the parking position of the front-
THE SYSTEM WILL NOT GO INTO ANTI-DAZZLE MODE IF:
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
STORING
R Reverse gear is engaged.
R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐

tion function
The parking position makes parking easier.
THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL SWIVEL DOWNWARDS

IN THE DIRECTION OF THE REAR WHEEL ON THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE WHEN:
R the parking position is stored (/ page 288). # Press button 1 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.
R the front-passenger mirror is selected. # Engage reverse gear.
R reverse gear is engaged.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking posi‐
tion using button 2.
THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL MOVE BACK TO ITS
ORIGINAL POSITION WHEN:
R you shift the transmission to another transmission position.

R you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.
288
CALLING UP
1 Selects the front-passenger outside mirror

2 Adjusts the mirrors
# Press button 1 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.
# Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking
position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror

folding function
Multimedia system:
# Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-in.
Back to Contents289
Climate control
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems 291
Operating the climate control system 294

Climate control Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control 5 ¬ Defrosts the windscreen

6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
For the air-conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and air filtration to 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 296)
function correctly, an interior air filter must always be used. Make sure that the 8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 294)
filter is installed correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by
9 & Activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control"
Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified spe‐
(/ page 300)
cialist workshop.
A _ Sets the air distribution
Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (without stationary
Overview of the air conditioning control panel heater):
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding functions
are activated.
Plug-in hybrid with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel:
1 q Sets the temperature

2 Button inoperative
3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 295)
1 q Sets the temperature
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen
2 A Calls up the air conditioning menu
7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 296)
8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 294)
291
9 Button inoperative
Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary
heater):
1 q Sets the temperature on the driver's side

1 q Sets the temperature 6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
2 A Calls up the air conditioning menu 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 296)
3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control 8 Á Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 294)
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 295) Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 296)
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen 9 & Activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control"
6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off (/ page 300)
7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 296) A q Sets the temperature on the front passenger side
8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 294)
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel (without station‐
9 & Switches the stationary heater on/off (/ page 60) ary heater):
Plug-in hybrid with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel:
292

8 Á Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 294)
Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 296)
9 & Switches the stationary heater on/off (/ page 60)
2 _ Sets the air distribution
A q Sets the temperature on the front passenger side
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen % Residual heat can be used only in vehicles with a diesel engine or
6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off vehicles with a stationary heater in combination with the
THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel.
8 Á Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 294)
Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 296)
9 0 Switches synchronisation on/off (/ page 295)
A q Sets the temperature on the front passenger side
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary
heater):

293
Climate control Operating the climate control system
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off Calling up the air conditioning menu via the
# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button. climate bar or the air conditioning control
# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H button.
panel
The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar
If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. is always shown on the lower edge of the media display.
Switch climate control off only briefly.
# Select the Climate menu entry in the air conditioning bar.
Switching the A/C function on/off using the

air conditioning control panel Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.
the air conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
# Press the ¿/Á button.
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats
Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehu‐
more quickly. midification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activa‐
ted. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode
central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central
is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
display.
# Select A/C (A/C).
Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up
more quickly.
294
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode W Automatic air distribution
is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
Setting climate control to automatic mode Setting air distribution via the air conditioning
In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a con‐
menu
stant level by the air supply. Multimedia system:
# Press button Ã. 4 Climate menu
# Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.
# To switch to manual mode: press the _ or Ã button.
# To set air distribution: select ¯, P or O.
In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using
the H button. Automatic mode is retained. # Set the airflow.
Overview of the air distribution settings % When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one
zone is always active. However, several air distribution options
THE SYMBOLS ON THE DISPLAY INDICATE WHICH VENTS THE AIRFLOW can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate
IS BEING DIRECTED THROUGH: control for the vehicle interior and the footwells simultaneously.
The ¯ climate control for the windscreen can only be selected
¯ Demister and side air vents for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the but‐
tons for setting the air distribution are deactivated automatically.
P Centre and side air vents If the air conditioning system is deactivated, the buttons remain
operable and the last setting is saved.
O Footwell and side air vents
S Centre, side and footwell vents
a Demister, footwell and side air vents Switching the synchronisation function on/off
_ All vents
via the air conditioning control panel
Requirements
b Demister, centre and side air vents
R The vehicle is not equipped with a stationary heater.
295
Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The
temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the g button.
# Press the 0 button. The interior air will be recirculated.
The synchronisation function will switch off if the settings for one of the other Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after a while.
climate zones are changed.
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist
up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching the synchronisation function on/off
via the air conditioning menu
Multimedia system: Switches residual heat on/off
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats Requirements
The synchronisation function controls the climate control centrally. The driv‐
er's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically R The vehicle is parked.
adopted for each climate zone.
# Select SYNC (SYNC). % Residual heat can be used only in vehicles with a diesel engine or
vehicles with a stationary heater in combination with the
THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel.
Demisting the windows
WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE INSIDE It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue
# Press the Ã button. heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately
30 minutes, depending on the temperature set.
# If the windows remain misted up: press the ¬ button.
# To activate: press the Á button.
WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE OUTSIDE
# Switch on the windscreen wipers. Residual heat will be switched off automatically.
# Press the Ã button.
296
Pre-entry climate control via the key (plug-in SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS
UNLOCKED IN THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
hybrid) Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
FUNCTION OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL VIA THE KEY (PLUG-IN
HYBRID)
Before entering the vehicle, the driver's side or the whole vehicle interior can % This function is available only for plug-in hybrid vehicles.
be briefly pre-warmed or pre-cooled.
WHEN PRE-COOLING, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE ACTIVATED AS # Activate or deactivate the function.
NEEDED: SELECTING SEATS
R Automatic climate control
# Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right.
R Blower The seat-specific functions of pre-entry climate control (e.g. seat heat‐
ing) will be performed for the selected seats.
R Seat ventilation
When pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar of the
WHEN PRE-HEATING, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE ACTIVATED AS media display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated vehi‐
NEEDED: cle.
R Automatic climate control ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL VIA THE

KEY (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
R Blower
R Seat heating Requirements:
R Steering wheel heater R The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.
R Mirror heater R The function has been activated via the multimedia system.
R Rear window heater
# To switch on: unlock the vehicle.
The climate control functions are activated for up to five minutes for
pre-heating and pre-cooling.
Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be activated more than twice
when the vehicle is switched off.
297
# To switch off: push the & button up or down. R The high-voltage battery is not charged sufficiently.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE
HAS BEEN STARTED: With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage bat‐
tery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.
R Seat heating
R Seat ventilation FOR COOLING, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED:

Pre-entry climate control for departure time R Blower
(plug-in hybrid) R Seat ventilation
FUNCTION OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME

FOR HEATING, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED:
(PLUG-IN HYBRID)
& WARNING R Blower
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the R Seat heating
vehicle
R Steering wheel heater
R Mirror heater
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
R Rear window heater
vehicle. SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL AT DEPARTURE TIME VIA THE
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
Multimedia system:
The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when the vehicle is parked. 4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME
charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum charge. # Select Edit departure time ´ .
THE RUNNING TIME OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL MAY BE REDUCED # Select a departure time or set a new departure time.
UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
SETTING REPEAT DAYS
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment. # Select Edit departure time ´ .
298
# Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding days on # Select Driver's seat only.
which this departure time is to apply. If the Driver's seat only setting is deactivated, pre-entry climate control
will take place for the entire vehicle.
# Press OK to confirm.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPAR‐
SELECTING SEATS
TURE TIME (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
# Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right.
Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats. WARNING
&
When pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar on the Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
central display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated vehi‐ vehicle
cle. If the departure time is selected, the LED on the climate bar of the central If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
display will light up yellow. intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME (PLUG-IN # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
HYBRID) vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
Requirements:
SETTING A SINGLE DEPARTURE TIME
R The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.
# Select ONCE.
R The function has been activated via the multimedia system.
# Set a departure time.
CHANGING THE ACTIVE DEPARTURE TIME # To activate: set the departure time (/ page 299, 298).
# Select the pen icon next to the displayed departure time. Pre-entry climate control for departure time will switch on a maximum of
55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for
# Set a departure time. another five minutes if departure is delayed.
SETTING THE WEEK PROFILE
# To deactivate: press the & button up or down.
# Select WEEK PROFILE.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE
# Set the desired departure times, e.g. every day at 08:00. HAS BEEN STARTED:
SELECTING THE ZONE R Seat heating
# Select Z. R Seat ventilation
299
Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry R Yellow: the departure time has been preselected.
climate control # Set the desired temperature using the w button.
WARNING
# Press button 1 .
&
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
vehicle
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. Stationary heater/ventilation
# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the STATIONARY HEATER/VENTILATION FUNCTION
vehicle.
% The following function is equipment-dependent.
Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if
the journey is interrupted. R The air inside the vehicle will be heated or ventilated to the set tempera‐
ture.
R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below
the outside temperature.
R If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode will automatically
switch to heating mode or heating mode will automatically switch to ven‐
tilation mode.
The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated in front of the
right front wheel.

INGS:
R Blue: cooling is activated.

R Red: heating is activated.
300
SWITCHING THE STATIONARY HEATER/VENTILATION ON/OFF VIA THE

OPERATING UNIT * NOTE
Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary venti‐
lation operation
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the bat‐
tery.
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poison‐
ous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This # After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer
is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for period of time.
example.
# Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces Requirements

without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
R The fuel tank is at least Õ full.
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the
wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING
Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust
gases
# When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:

R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flamma‐
# Set the desired temperature using the w button.
ble materials. # Press button 1.
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
exhaust pipe unhindered.
R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flam‐
mable materials.
301

INGS:
Air vents
ADJUSTING THE FRONT AIR VENTS
R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
& WARNING
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected. Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a suffi‐
SETTING THE STATIONARY HEATER/VENTILATION VIA THE MULTIMEDIA cient distance from the air vents.
SYSTEM
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle
Requirements
interior.
R The vehicle is fitted with the stationary heater equipment.
TO GUARANTEE THE FLOW OF FRESH AIR THROUGH THE AIR VENTS INTO
Multimedia system: THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, NOTE THE FOLLOWING:
4 Climate menu 5 Stationary heater
R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
SELECTING THE DEPARTURE TIME R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (/ page 684).
# Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME
# Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
# Select the pen beside the time.
# Set a time.
# To open or close: hold the centre of air vent 1 and turn it to the left
(open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of air vent 1 and move it
up or down or to the left or right.
302
ADJUSTING THE REAR AIR VENTS
& WARNING
Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a suffi‐

cient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle

interior.
# To open or close: hold the centre of air vent 1 and turn it to the left or
right as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of air vent 1 and move it
up or down or to the left or right.
Back to Contents303
Driving and parking
Driving and parking

Driving 305 Driving and driving safety systems 391
DYNAMIC SELECT 333 Trailer hitch 465
Automatic transmission 340 Bicycle rack function 472
Function of 4MATIC 350 Vehicle towing instructions 475
Refuelling 351
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in

359
hybrid)
Parking 378
Driving and parking Driving
Driving
Notes on plug-in hybrids & DANGER

NOTES ON PLUG-IN HYBRID OPERATION Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the
WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.
&
Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage # Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual
battery odours, smoke or burn marks.
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electro‐
lyte and gases may leak out. # Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at
a sufficient distance.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
# Call the fire service.
# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek
medical attention straight away.
The hybrid system combines a combustion engine with an electric motor.
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN THE VEHICLE IS AT A STANDSTILL:
R The combustion engine is generally switched off.

R Idle speed occurs only in certain instances.
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STARTED:
R If the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, the vehicle can be

started with the electric drive system without the combustion engine
(noiseless start).
305
R If the high-voltage battery for the electric drive system is not sufficiently CHARACTERISTICS WHEN THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED DUR‐
charged or the vehicle conditions for a silent start are not met, the vehi‐ ING THE JOURNEY:
cle will start with the combustion engine.
R The electric motor is operated as an alternator when in overrun mode
and during braking.
% Depending on the system, it may be that even though the high- R The high-voltage battery is charging.
voltage battery is charged, electric mode has restricted or no
availability. When the combustion engine has run for long NOTES ON ELECTRIC MODE:
enough and the ambient conditions permit, electric mode will be
available without restriction once more. R Vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise when sta‐
tionary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
R When you drive in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other
% To start the combustion engine, the high-voltage battery can be road users owing to the significantly reduced operating noise.
used as a starter battery. It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator,
which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety
CHARACTERISTICS WITH MODERATE POWER OUTPUT REQUESTS: system is prescribed by law.
The external noise produced by the sound generator is perceptible in the
R The combustion engine is switched off as often as possible during a jour‐ vehicle interior at low speeds and does not constitute a malfunction.
ney. R If not all of the vehicle conditions for electric mode are met, the com‐
R Depending on the drive program selected and the state of charge of the bustion engine will be switched on.
high-voltage battery, the vehicle can be accelerated electrically up to a R Performance restrictions in electric mode are possible as a result of the
speed of approximately 140 km/h.
operating temperature of the high-voltage battery and drive system, the
ambient temperature and ageing of the high-voltage battery.
CHARACTERISTICS WITH HIGH POWER OUTPUT REQUESTS: R In electric mode, the maximum power will not be permanently available
and may drop to continuous output.
R The electric motor supports the combustion engine (boost effect), e.g.
when pulling away or accelerating.
R The high-voltage battery is discharging. NOTES ON THE ACOUSTIC VEHICLE ALERTING SYSTEM:
R The sound generator produces speed-dependent driving noises up to a

speed of approximately 30 km/h when driving forwards and reversing.
R This will help other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to
hear your vehicle better.
306
R From a speed of 20 km/h, the acoustic vehicle alerting system gradually MANUALLY DISCONNECTING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL
switches off. SYSTEM
R The sound generator is off when the vehicle is stationary.
& DANGER
Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged compo‐
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high volt‐
age. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-
board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may
be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components
may cause a fire.
In the event of an accident or impact to the underbody, components of

the high-voltage on-board electrical system may be damaged although
the damage is not visible.
# Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board

electrical system.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-

board electrical system components have been modified or
damaged.
# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-

board electrical system.
# After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-

voltage on-board electrical system.
# After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical

system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary.
307
Requirements # Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the direction of the arrow until
it engages.
ONLY DISCONNECT THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched off.
MANUALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
All work on the hybrid drive system– (including after disconnecting the high-
R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up in the driver display,
voltage on-board electrical system manually–) may only be carried out in a
e.g. after an accident.
R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and the restraint
system components have not been triggered.
OPERATING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE DISCONNECT DEVICE
# Shift the transmission to position j.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
# Open the bonnet.
# Press release tab 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.
308
Switching on the power supply or the vehicle
& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR

R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample. # To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once.
You can, for example, switch on the windscreen wipers.
THE POWER SUPPLY WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS ARE MET:
R You open the driver's door.
R change the gearbox setting.
R You press button 1 twice more.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver's display.
and lock the vehicle. THE VEHICLE WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS IS MET:
R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in
position j or the electric parking brake is applied.
Requirements R You press button 1 once.
R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
R The brake pedal is not depressed.
309
Starting the vehicle & WARNING

STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE START/STOP BUTTON Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehi‐
cle
DANGER IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN

&
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases IN PARTICULAR
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
results in poisoning.
# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

& WARNING
Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment
or on the exhaust system R start the vehicle.
Flammable materials may ignite. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust sys‐ and lock the vehicle.
tem.
Requirements
R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
310
STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE KEY IN THE STORAGE COMPARTMENT

(EMERGENCY OPERATION MODE)
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and

running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
# Shift the transmission to position j or i.
# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

& WARNING
# Keep the brake pedal depressed until the vehicle starts. Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment
or on the exhaust system
# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equip‐
Flammable materials may ignite.
ment and press button 1 once.
# Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign
# If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked
materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust sys‐
space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's dis‐
tem.
play: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency
operation mode) (/ page 311).
% You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and
hold button 1 for about three seconds or press button 1 three
times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes
concerning this under "Driving tips" (/ page 316).
Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on

the driver's display.
311
& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR

Marked space (example with cup holder without cover)

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: # Open the cover of marked space 2 if necessary.
R releasing the parking brake. # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
# Remove key 1 from the key ring.
# Place key 1 in marked space 2 on symbol 3.
The vehicle will start after a short time.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you If you remove key 1 from marked space 2, it will still be possible to
continue driving the vehicle. For further engine starts, however, key 1
# Keep the key out of reach of children. must be located on symbol 3 in marked space 2 during the entire
journey.
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Own- # Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
er's Manual message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle IF THE VEHICLE DOES NOT START:
in emergency mode. # Place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop but‐
ton.
# Keep the brake pedal depressed until the vehicle starts.
312
STARTING THE VEHICLE (REMOTE ONLINE)

% You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/
stop button.
& DANGER
Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
the driver's display. monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv‐ # Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
ices running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
COOLING OR HEATING THE VEHICLE INTERIOR BEFORE STARTING A

JOURNEY
& WARNING
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE: Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment
R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow or on the exhaust system
engine starting via smartphone. Flammable materials may ignite.
R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. # Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign
R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust sys‐
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. tem.
CHARGING THE STARTER BATTERY BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY

You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of
the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone & WARNING
to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the
minutes. engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintention‐
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE:
ally during service or maintenance work.
R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow # Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before
engine starting via smartphone.
carrying out maintenance or repair work.
R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
313
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

& WARNING
# Start the vehicle using your smartphone.
cle
After every engine start, the engine will run for ten minutes.
IN PARTICULAR You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must
start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle with your smart‐
phone again.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample. YOU CAN SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE AT ANY TIME AS FOLLOWS:
R Via the Mercedes me App

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the key

% Further information can be found in the Mercedes me App.
SECURING THE ENGINE AGAINST STARTING BEFORE CARRYING OUT
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR WORK:
# Switch on the hazard warning light system or unlock the doors.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
and lock the vehicle. # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Running-in notes
Requirements TO PRESERVE THE ENGINE DURING THE FIRST 1500 KM:
R Park position j is selected. R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds.
R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R Do not drive faster than 140 km/h.
R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;.
R The bonnet is closed. Plug-in hybrid: use drive program Î, n or o.
R The doors are closed and locked.
314
R Then shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle rea‐ INFLUENCING VARIABLES INCLUDE:
ches the last third before the red area in the rev counter.
R Location above sea level
R Do not shift down manually in order to brake.
R Fuel quality
R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. by driving at full throttle.
R Outside temperature
R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
R Operating temperature of the engine
R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to
full speed after 1500 km.
The p engine operating temperature warning lamp will remain lit until the
engine has reached its operating temperature.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been
replaced. Engine output and engine torque will be reduced. Factor this into your driving
style.
PLEASE ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING RUNNING-IN NOTES:
When the p engine operating temperature warning lamp goes out, full
R In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust auto‐
matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has engine output and engine torque will be available.
been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached
when this teaching-in process has concluded.
R Brake pads, brake discs and tyres that are either new or have been
replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after driving sev‐
eral hundred kilometres. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Engine output and engine torque (Mercedes-

AMG vehicles)
% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine
output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values
within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances
(basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).
315
Notes on driving & WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear
& WARNING INCORRECT FOOTWEAR INCLUDES, FOR EXAMPLE:
Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
R shoes with platform soles
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal. R shoes with high heels
R slippers
This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
into the driver's footwell. # Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the
pedals safely.
# Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the
pedals.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed. & WARNING
Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
top of one another. If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted
or no longer available.
This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boost‐
ing, for example.
You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for
example.
# Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.
316
& DANGER & WARNING

Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake sys‐
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and tem may overheat.
This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at

the same time while driving.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slip‐
pery road surfaces
* NOTE
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine brak‐ Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
ing effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrev‐
# Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the ving range.
engine braking effect. # Do not drive with the engine in the overrevving range.
& DANGER
* NOTE
Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases
Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poison‐ brake pedal
ous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This # Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.
is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.
# To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in
good time.
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the
wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
317
* NOTE * NOTE
Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull ble clearance height
away immediately. If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the
engine has reached its operating temperature. # Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not

drive in.
* NOTE
Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel # Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.

% Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Own‐
# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
er's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain toler‐
# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist ance.
workshop.
OBSERVE THE NOTES ON DRIVING WITH A ROOF LOAD, TRAILER OR
FULLY LADEN VEHICLE.
NOTE Driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer, or with the vehicle fully loa‐
*
Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips ded or occupied, changes the handling and steering characteristics of your
vehicle.
The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is
used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. THEREFORE PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
# Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and trailer load. Also observe
the information in the technical data in this respect.
at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle.
(/ page 242)
318
R Drive carefully, avoiding abrupt starting, braking and steering as well as NOTES ON DRIVING THROUGH WATER ON THE ROAD
fast cornering. Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.
NOTES ON DRIVING ON ROADS TREATED WITH DE-ICING SALT Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.
The braking effect is limited on road surfaces treated with de-icing salt.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF YOU NEED TO DRIVE THROUGH WATER:
PLEASE THEREFORE BEAR IN MIND THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R The water, when calm, should reach no higher than the lower edge of the
R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brake linings, the braking dis‐ vehicle body.
tance can increase considerably or braking may be one-sided. R Drive at a walking pace at most, otherwise water may enter the vehicle
R Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead. interior or engine compartment.
R Vehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which
REMOVE SALT BUILD-UP AS FOLLOWS: may exceed the maximum permissible depth of water.
R Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, pay‐
R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when ing attention to the traffic conditions, until braking power has been fully
starting the next journey restored.
NOTES ON AQUAPLANING
Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road
surface.
Notes on off-road driving
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES DURING HEAVY PRECIPITATION OR IN
& WARNING
CONDITIONS IN WHICH AQUAPLANING MAY OCCUR:
Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines
R Reduce speed. If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip side‐
R Avoid tyre ruts. ways, tip and rollover.
R Avoid sudden steering movements. # Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down)
R Brake carefully. and do not turn.
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres

(/ page 42).
319
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot Damage caused by driving over obstacles
parts of the exhaust system THE VEHICLE CAN BE DAMAGED BY:
If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite. R driving onto high kerbs or unpaved roads.
R quickly driving over obstacles such as kerbs, speed bumps or pot‐
# When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the holes.
underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.
R heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components.
# In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flam‐ # Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle.
mable material.
# Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving.
# If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop. # Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop

When driving off-road, it is possible that sand, mud and water, or water mixed immediately.
with oil, may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect
or total brake failure, also as a result of increased wear. The braking character‐
istics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean
the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist Environmental damage due to non-observance of prohibition signs
workshop. Adapt your driving style to the modified braking characteristics. Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect.
# Be sure to observe prohibition signs.
% The vehicle is designed for easily negotiable and moderate off-

road terrain. When driving off-road, make sure there is sufficient
ground clearance.
320
The high-voltage battery in particular can be damaged by bot‐ R Always keep the doors and windows closed while the vehicle is in
toming or impacts on the underbody. Also observe the notes on motion.
operating safety (/ page 107). R Deactivate the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
cruise control.
CHECKLIST BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD R Adapt your driving style to the terrain.
CHECK THE FOLLOWING POINTS BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD: R Do not use the HOLD function on steep downhill or uphill gradients with
slippery or loose surfaces.
R Fuel level
R Vehicles with a diesel engine: AdBlue® level Driving on sand
R Engine oil level: fill engine oil to the maximum level to ensure full grade‐
ability (/ page 39). WHEN DRIVING ON SAND, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUC‐
TIONS:
R Wheel-change tool kit and spare wheel
R Tyres and wheels R Select drive program F.
R Shift to a lower gear.
R Drive briskly to overcome the rolling resistance. The vehicle may other‐
% Further information about special all-terrain tyres for retrofitting
wise dig itself in.
can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that the fol‐
lowing prerequisites are met:
OFF-ROAD DRIVING - the tyre ruts are not too deep.
Read this section before driving your vehicle off-road. Practise by driving over
- the sand is firm enough.
less challenging off-road terrain first.
- the ground clearance is sufficient.
R Observe the notes on off-road ABS (/ page 393).
R Select drive program F (/ page 336) before driving off-road. Fording
ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION WHEN FORDING:

R Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill
gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter‐ R Drive no faster than 10 km/h.
rain.
R The water, when calm, should reach no higher than the lower edge of the
R Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on vehicle body.
marked routes.
R Switch off automatic climate control (/ page 295).
321
R Vehicles with auxiliary heating/ventilation: switch off the auxiliary - tyres, wheels and wheel arches
heating/ventilation (/ page 60). - underbody
R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive. R After driving through sand, mud, water or gravel, have the following com‐
R Do not stop in the water and do not switch off the engine. Ensure the ponents checked and cleaned:
ECO start/stop function is switched off (/ page 323). - brake discs and brake linings
- tyres and wheels
Driving in mountainous terrain - axle joints
ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION WHEN DRIVING IN

MOUNTAINOUS TERRAIN: ECO start/stop function
R Avoid high engine speeds. ECO START/STOP FUNCTION
R Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill.
R Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and on long, steep downhill gra‐ % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not
dients. available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the
R If necessary, activate DSR before driving downhill (/ page 416). driver's display concerning this.
CHECKLIST AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD

Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on nor‐
% Plug-in hybrid: this function is not available.
mal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time
after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to
imbalances and therefore vibrations. THE ENGINE WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOW‐
ING SITUATIONS IF ALL VEHICLE CONDITIONS FOR AN AUTOMATIC
R If the F drive program is selected: select another drive program. ENGINE STOP ARE MET:
R Deactivate DSR.
R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i.
R Apply the brakes to dry them after fording.
R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the
R Check that the service brake is working normally after a long downhill
brake pedal when travelling at a low speed.
stretch.
R Clean the following components every time after driving off-road:
- licence plate number
- headlamps and tail lamps
322
IF THE SYSTEM HAS DETECTED ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not
THE ENGINE WILL NOT STOP: all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
R Neither the è symbol nor the ç symbol appears when the vehicle
R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.
is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been
R The vehicle that stopped in front of you pulls away again. detected.
R You manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or
there is a malfunction.
% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign,

the engine will not stop. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave
If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In
j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop addition, the following display message will appear on the driver's display:
inhibitor. Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before exiting
If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after
THE ENGINE WILL RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
three minutes.
R You engage transmission position h or k.
SWITCHING THE ECO START/STOP FUNCTION ON/OFF
R You depress the accelerator pedal.
R The vehicle requires an automatic engine start.
R You release the brake pedal.
R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system:
- You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle
does not roll.
- The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically
enter glide mode at 20 km/h.
ECO START/STOP FUNCTION SYMBOLS ON THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:
R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the # Press button 1.
engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
A display will appear on the driver's display when you switch the ECO
start/stop function on/off.
323
# Press corresponding button 2.

% s will be continuously shown on the driver's display while the
THE SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENT STATUS OF THE ECO START/
ECO start/stop function is deactivated.
STOP FUNCTION:
SWITCHING THE ECO START/STOP FUNCTION ON/OFF (MERCEDES-AMG R s (red): switched off
VEHICLES) R è (green): activated
Observe the notes on the ECO start/stop function in the vehicle Owner's Man‐ R ç (yellow): inactive
ual.
% You can also switch the ECO start/stop function on or off via the ECO display function
steering-wheel button or via the multimedia system.
% Depending on the model and equipment, your vehicle will have
one of the following representations of the ECO display.
The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the
journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical
driving style.
THE ECO DISPLAY ASSESSES THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA FOR AN ECO‐

NOMICAL DRIVING STYLE:
# Press upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until it displays the
è symbol. R Coasting at the right times
R consistent speed
R moderate acceleration
% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are dis‐
played can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 332).
324
THE LETTERING IN THE SEGMENT WILL LIGHT UP BRIGHTLY, THE OUTER

EDGE WILL LIGHT UP AND THE SEGMENT WILL FILL UP WHEN THE FOL‐
LOWING DRIVING STYLE IS ADOPTED:
R 1 Steady speed
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R 3 Moderate acceleration
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's dis‐
play depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of
THE LETTERING IN THE SEGMENT WILL BE GREY, THE OUTER EDGE WILL
your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO display menu shows a ball
BE DARK AND THE SEGMENT WILL EMPTY WHEN THE FOLLOWING DRIV‐
ING STYLE IS ADOPTED: 2 that will roll forwards or backwards in the direction of travel on a stylised
road according to the driving characteristics.
R 1 Fluctuations in speed
Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style 3.
R 2 Heavy braking
Ball 2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines,
R 3 Sporty acceleration the ball will light up in orange.
The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using
THE ECO DISPLAY WILL SHOW YOU WHEN YOU HAVE DRIVEN ECONOMI‐
stars 1. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if
CALLY:
you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the
R The three segments will fill up completely at the same time background.
R The edge around all three segments will light up
% You can call up the ECO display function via the Classic menu
(/ page 480).
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison
with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the centre of the
display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in con‐
sumption. ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-
board electrical system)
For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist information (/ page 328).
325
THE ECO ASSIST DISPLAY WILL BE HIDDEN AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING

% ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A. CASES:
R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the sys‐
tem to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and R You depress the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening for a
recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front).
event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel econ‐ R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route
omy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gra‐ ahead.
dient.
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also DEPENDING ON EQUIPMENT, ECO ASSIST WILL DETECT FOLLOWING
brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for example, ROUTE EVENTS 2 IN ADDITION TO THE VEHICLE IN FRONT ¥:
you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in ~ Roundabout
front is very short.
£ T-junction
¤ Downhill gradient
¦ Speed limit
% In drive program A, ECO Assist will react only to the "vehicle

1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation in front" route event without displaying the ¥ route event or
ý recommendation.
2 Route event ahead
If a route event or vehicle that requires an adjustment of your driving style for
more efficiency is detected ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý SYSTEM LIMITS
If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist
symbol (grey) will be displayed.
will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý symbol will turn green and recu‐ active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be fore‐
peration in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, seen. The quality depends on the map data.
also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
(not for a vehicle in front) and you then press the accelerator pedal again, you
from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
will end control by ECO Assist.
326
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐ The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when
ING SITUATIONS: coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.
R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly The deceleration in overrun mode may not be sufficient depending on the
variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. driving situation. There is no deceleration to a standstill. Also brake with the
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. service brake if necessary. Always adapt your speed to the driving situation
and keep sufficient distance.
R If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.
R If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
% If you brake heavily, the mechanical brake is also used. This
R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient light‐
means that the maximum recuperation energy cannot be recov‐
ing, or because they are obscured.
ered. The more proactively you accelerate and brake, the more
R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or efficiently energy can be recuperated.
out of date.
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
SYSTEM LIMITS
R If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
WITH RECUPERATION IN OVERRUN MODE, THE BRAKING EFFECT OF THE
R When you drive on roads with steep gradients.
ELECTRIC MOTOR IS ONLY REDUCED OR NON-EXISTENT IN THE FOLLOW‐
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. ING SITUATIONS:
R when the high-voltage battery charge level increases

Recuperative brake system (plug-in hybrid) R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature
FUNCTION OF THE RECUPERATIVE BRAKE SYSTEM MANUALLY SETTING RECUPERATIVE DECELERATION
% The function is only available for plug-in hybrids. % The function is only available for a plug-in hybrid.
You can use the steering wheel gearshift paddles to adjust the
The recuperative braking system converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into intensity of recuperation in drive programs n, o and Î.
electrical energy during overrun and braking.
Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motor is operated

as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge
the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you take your foot off the
accelerator while driving in transmission position h, recuperation starts in
overrun mode.
327
# Default setting: Pull long on the gearshift paddle 1 or 2 engage the

transmission position h again.
% When the vehicle is started again, the standard setting is also

set.
THE FOLLOWING RECUPERATION LEVELS ARE AVAILABLE: The driver display shows the currently set recuperation level next to the trans‐
mission position display.
R hÃ Intelligent, anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist
(/ page 328)
R hq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely
ECO Assist (plug-in hybrid)
R h Normal recuperation ECO ASSIST FUNCTION
R h± Increased recuperation: Strong vehicle deceleration in overrun
mode, e.g.for driving on a downhill gradient % The following function depends on the equipment and the coun‐
try and is available only for plug-in hybrids.
DEFAULT SETTING:
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the sys‐
R hÃ: If the ECO Assist function in the multimedia system is switched
tem to help optimally adjust your driving style for the route ahead, save fuel
on (/ page 330).
and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears
R h: If the ECO Assist function in the multimedia system is switched off. the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel
economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill
gradient.
% hÃ is only available if the ECO Assistant function in the mul‐
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also
timedia system is switched on and if the function of the radar
brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for example,
sensors is not impaired. Please also note the information on the
you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in
vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 391).
front is very short.
# Increase recuperation: Pull the gearshift paddle 1 briefly. THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:
# Reduce recuperation: Pull the gearshift paddle 2 briefly. R The function is activated in the multimedia system (/ page 330).
328
R The hÃ recuperation level is selected (/ page 327). R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route
R p manual gearshifting is not activated. ahead.
R Drive program C is not selected.
IN ADDITION TO A VEHICLE IN FRONT ¥, ECO ASSIST CAN DETECT THE
FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS 2 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIP‐
MENT:
~ Roundabout
¢ Sharp bend
& Junction
1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation £ T-junction

2 Route event ahead
¤ Downhill gradient
If a route event that you can deal with more efficiently by adjusting your driv‐
ing style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý symbol ¦ Speed limit
will be displayed in grey.
SYSTEM LIMITS
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý symbol will turn green and recu‐ If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist
peration in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without
also apply the service brake. active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be fore‐
seen. The quality depends on the map data.
If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead and you press the accelerator
pedal, you will end control by ECO Assist. This does not apply in the case of a ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
vehicle in front. from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
THE ECO ASSIST DISPLAY WILL BE HIDDEN AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐
CASES: ING SITUATIONS:
R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time. R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road,
R You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening because highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
of a route event ahead. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
front. R If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.
329
R If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient.
R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient light‐
ing, or because they are obscured. When the function is active, data on the further course of the route will be
R If the digital road map of the navigation system has incorrect or outda‐ analysed. This includes e.g. road type, speed limits and elevation data.
ted information.
THE HYBRID SYSTEM WILL THEN ADAPT THE OPERATING STRATEGY TO
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
THE FURTHER COURSE OF THE ROUTE:
R If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
R When you drive on roads with steep gradients. R Use of electrical energy and the combustion engine will be adapted.
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery will be controlled accord‐
ingly.
ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING ECO ASSIST R Electrical energy will be reserved especially for electric mode, e.g. urban
Multimedia system: route sections or areas with low emission zones.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving R The vehicle will automatically select the operating mode.
AMG Real Performance Sound

Function of the route-based operating-mode
SELECTING A SOUND CHARACTERISTIC WITH THE STEERING-WHEEL BUT‐
strategy (plug-in hybrid) TON
% The following function is country-dependent and available only % You can select a comfortable (Balanced) or a sporty (Powerful)
in conjunction with an integrated navigation system. sound characteristic using the steering-wheel button or the mul‐
timedia system (/ page 339).
THE ROUTE-BASED OPERATING-MODE STRATEGY WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE
FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:
R Drive program n is selected .

R The Route-based option is selected for drive program n on the
DYNAMIC SELECT menu (/ page 337).
R Route guidance is active.
330
# Press upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until it displays the THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE EQUIP‐
ö symbol. MENT:
å ESP® (/ page 395)

% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. ä AMG RIDE CONTROL (/ page 439)
played can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 332). d Manual gearshifting (/ page 347)
ç ECO start/stop function (/ page 324)

# Press the corresponding button 2.
THE COLOUR OF THE BUTTON SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY ö AMG Real Performance Sound (/ page 330)
SELECTED SOUND CHARACTERISTIC:
e Camera views (/ page 446)
R Blue: Balanced – comfortable
g AMG DYNAMICS (/ page 334)
R Red: Powerful – sporty
In addition all the functions you have saved as favourites in the multimedia
Function of the AMG steering wheel buttons system are available for selection. Information on favourites
% Individual functions may be faded out. How functions are dis‐

played and the order in which they are displayed can be set in
the multimedia system (/ page 332).
If you have assigned a specific function to one of the display buttons 1, you
can operate this function with the corresponding button 2.
The AMG steering wheel buttons are an additional control element with two
buttons on the steering wheel. The assignment of the display buttons 1 remains stored even after a new
engine start. But the operating status of the respective function is reset to the
You can assign two vehicle functions of your choice to the control element. basic setting.
You can change between the available functions for the corresponding button
1 by pressing the upper or lower part of the display buttons 2 repeatedly.
The display buttons 1 show each function selected.
331
Setting the AMG steering wheel buttons

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
5 AMG steering-wheel buttons
The left display buttons on the steering wheel can be set in the SETTINGS
SELECT menu.
# Press q and select the desired function from the list.

The selected function is assigned to the corresponding display button
and can now be called up directly by simply pressing it.
DELETING BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
# Select the upper or lower display button and switch to editing mode by
pressing and holding it.
# Press £ to delete the selected display button assignment.
332
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT
DYNAMIC SELECT
Function of DYNAMIC SELECT R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch
of road
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to
the current driving conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics. You can N HYBRID (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
select the following drive programs.
R Comfortable and economical driving
% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle will have R Balance between traction and stability
different drive programs. R Recommended for all road conditions
R Full development of all intelligent hybrid functions
The drive program selected appears on the driver's display. R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
R The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system
= INDIVIDUAL
depends on the driving conditions and the route
R Custom settings (/ page 337)
A COMFORT
C SPORT R Comfortable and economical driving
R Maximum output is available R Balance between traction and stability
R Sporty driving R Recommended for all road conditions
R Sporty, but with an emphasis on stability
R Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style Î ELECTRIC (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
R Driving with the combustion engine and reinforced boost effect (plug-in
R Electric mode – driving without the combustion engine is possible up to
hybrid)
approx. 140 km/h
R Deactivation of the combustion engine when stationary (plug-in hybrid)
R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
R Adaptation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for electric mode
333
R Depending on the equipment, the maximum set speed for cruise control,
the limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limited to the % Depending on the situation and the engine, cylinders can be
maximum speed possible in electric mode briefly deactivated in drive programs ; and A.
R Activation of the combustion engine via the pressure point of the accel‐
erator pedal (kickdown)
% The ESP® settings in drive programs ; and A are designed
for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs
O BATTERY HOLD (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and
R Prioritises maintaining the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, when the vehicle is fully laden or fully occupied.
e.g. for subsequent journeys in inner cities/low-emission zones Plug-in hybrid: this also applies to drive programs n, Î
and o.
R The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system
depends on the driving conditions and the route
R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM, THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS WILL
CHANGE THEIR CHARACTERISTICS:
; ECO R Drive
- Engine and transmission management
R Particularly economical driving
- Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Balance between traction and stability
- Availability of Glide mode
R Recommended for all road conditions
R ESP®
R Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment: suspension
F OFFROAD
R Steering
R Intervenes later if there is oversteer or understeer, thus improving trac‐
tion
R Suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain, such as dirt tracks, gravel Function of DYNAMIC SELECT (Mercedes-
or sandy surfaces AMG vehicles)
R Not suitable for use on public roads
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to
the current driving conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics.
334
% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle will have % The I drive program is available only for the
different drive programs. Mercedes‑AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+ model.
YOU CAN SELECT THE FOLLOWING DRIVE PROGRAMS: The I drive program offers driving characteristics suited to the racetrack
and must not be used on normal roads. The I drive program may be activa‐
R o Slippery
ted and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads.
- Optimised pulling-away and driving characteristics in wintry and
slippery road conditions Mercedes-AMG recommends selecting drive program A when in city traffic
R A Comfort or stop-and-go traffic.
- Comfortable and economical driving DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM SELECTED, THE FOLLOWING VEHI‐
R = Individual CLE CHARACTERISTICS WILL CHANGE:
- Customised settings for drive, suspension, steering and ESP® R Drive
R C Sport R AMG DYNAMICS
- Sporty driving - The four agility functions, Basic, Advanced, Pro and Master, will be
- Balance between stability and sportiness selected automatically depending on the drive program.
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear - The steering, shift timing point, all-wheel drive and stabilisation
stretch of road functions will be adapted to the selected drive program.
R B Sport+ - When ESP® is activated, the Pro agility function will be selected in
- Particularly sporty driving drive program I. The Master function will be selected automati‐
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear cally when ESP® is switched to SPORT Æ or is switched off ¤.
stretch of road R Real Performance Sound
R I Race R Suspension
- Maximum sportiness R Steering
- Particularly firm suspension tuning from AMG RIDE CONTROL R Availability of Glide mode
- Sporty sound from the exhaust system R 4MATIC+
% You can set the drive program characteristics using the multime‐
dia system (/ page 339).
335
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 repeatedly until the selected drive

% You can adjust certain agility functions of AMG DYNAMICS using program appears on the driver's display.
the AMG steering-wheel buttons.
or
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 and select the drive program on the
Notes on the roof load display
#
DYNAMIC SELECT menu on the central display.

Certain drive programs and ESP® settings are unsuitable for transporting a roof
load.
Selecting a drive program (Mercedes-AMG
If one of these drive programs is set or selected, the W symbol is shown as vehicles)
a warning. When this symbol is shown, the selected drive program is not suita‐
ble for transporting a load on the roof. SELECTION WITH RIGHT-HAND STEERING-WHEEL BUTTON
THE FOLLOWING DRIVE PROGRAMS ARE AFFECTED:
R Drive program C Sport
Selecting the drive program

# Turn the rotary switch 2.
The selected drive program will appear on display button 1 and on the
driver's display.
% Individual drive programs may not be shown. How drive pro‐

grams are displayed and the order in which they are displayed
can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 339).
# To set the drive program properties: press display button 1.
336
SELECTION VIA THE CENTRAL DISPLAY (MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM) SETTING THE H DRIVE PROGRAM (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
# Select Hybrid.
# Select Route-based or Standard.

If route guidance is active and the Route-based option has been activa‐
ted, the electrical energy is distributed intelligently over the entire route.
In built-up areas, electric mode is preferred, while on the motorway the
combustion engine is used.
With the Standard option, the vehicle drives in its standard drive program
(Î Electric or n Hybrid). There is no distribution of electrical
energy over the entire route. The high-voltage battery is exhausted and
the vehicle is then driven by the combustion engine.
# Push DYNAMIC SELECT button 3 and select the drive program via the SWITCHING THE RESET DISPLAY ON/OFF
central display and set its properties (/ page 339). # Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multi‐ % This function must be activated for each user profile separately.
Only when this function is activated will the drive program and
media system ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the
respective user profile.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking
SETTING DRIVE PROGRAM I whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop
# Select = Individual. function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function
should remain deactivated.
# Select and set a category.
% The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate
% A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction with a sporty sus‐ from the standard settings.
pension mode.
Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set
automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.
337
SWITCHING THE RESET DISPLAY ON/OFF (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Displaying engine data
# Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
Multimedia system:
% This function must be activated for each user profile separately. 4 © 5 Info
The drive program for the respective user profile of the last # Select Engine.
driver is only stored if this function is activated. The engine data is displayed.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking % The actual maximum values that can be achieved for engine out‐
whether the last active drive program should be restored. put and engine torque may deviate from the certified values
within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances
% The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).
from the standard settings. INFLUENCING VARIABLES INCLUDE:
R Sea level
Function off (plug-in hybrid): if the Î drive program was the last one
R Fuel quality
active, and all requirements for the drive program are fulfilled, it will be selec‐
ted automatically the next time the vehicle is started. If another drive program R Outside temperature
was active, then the n drive program is set automatically. R Operating temperature of the engine
Adjust your driving style accordingly.

Displaying vehicle data The p warning lamp in the driver display is on until the engine
Multimedia system: has reached operating temperature.
4 © 5 Info
# Select Vehicle. % The values displayed serve only as guidance. The values for
The vehicle data is displayed. engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may
deviate from the actual values.
% The p warning lamp to show the power output limitation after

starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models.
338
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator % The AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu can also be called up using the
DYNAMIC SELECT button.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Info
# Select the appropriate drive program.
# Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.
The settings of the drive programs can be adjusted individually.
Setting AMG DYNAMIC SELECT in the MBUX # Select the desired tab on the left and make the relevant setting.
SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE DRIVE PROGRAMS (EQUIPMENT-DEPEND‐
multimedia system ENT):
Multimedia system: R AMG DYNAMICS:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT Basic/Advanced/Pro/Master
OVERVIEW OF THE AMG DYNAMIC SELECT MENU R Suspension:
Comfort/Sport/Sport+
R Sound:
Balanced/Powerful
R Drive (can only be set in the = drive program):
Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic
(Example of representation) Representation and arrangement of content % In order to use the "Master" setting within "AMG DYNAMICS",
equipment-dependent. ESP® SPORT must be set or ESP® must be switched off.
1 Drive programs
2 AMG drive program settings
3 ESP and quick-access buttons®(/ page 395)
4 Edits the quick-access buttons
339
Driving and parking Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING

FUNCTION OF THE DIRECT SELECT LEVER Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehi‐
cle
WARNING IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN

&
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting IN PARTICULAR
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly
and do not accelerate at the same time. IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

340
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury when the transmission position is not
engaged
The current transmission position will be highlighted on the driver's dis‐
play.
If the selected transmission position is not highlighted, the vehicle may

pull away in the wrong direction or roll away.
# After changing the transmission position, always check the

transmission position display on the driver's display.
j Park position
k Reverse gear
If the transmission position is not highlighted on the driver's display
even after a short time: i Neutral
h Drive position
# Pay attention to the display messages.
ENGAGING REVERSE GEAR R
# Pull away carefully and check the engaged transmission posi‐
tion. & WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting
# When parking, engage the parking brake and secure the vehi‐
cle against rolling away. If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.
# Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly
and do not accelerate at the same time.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current
transmission position will be highlighted on the driver's display.
341
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
past the first point of resistance. to the first point of resistance.
ENGAGING NEUTRAL N
% To shift into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the
& WARNING selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting resistance.
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle
freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly PROCEED AS FOLLOWS IF YOU WANT THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
and do not accelerate at the same time. TO REMAIN IN NEUTRAL I, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF OR
THE DRIVER'S DOOR IS OPENED:
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
# Release the brake pedal.
The message reading Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No auto-
matic switch to P will appear on the driver's display.
342
ENGAGING PARK POSITION P

% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the
automatic transmission will remain in neutral i.
& WARNING
THE PARK POSITION J IS AUTOMATICALLY RE-ENGAGED AS SOON AS cle
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET: IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR
R You switch to transmission position h or k.
R You press the button j. R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.


343
* NOTE % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is

Damage due to engaging park position j while the vehicle is roll‐ engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission
ing position display.
If you shift the transmission into park position j while the vehicle is
rolling, the transmission may be damaged. PARK POSITION J WILL BE ENGAGED AUTOMATICALLY IF ONE OF THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET:
# If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
R You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position h or k.
# Only engage the park position j when the vehicle is station‐
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission
ary.
position h or k.
R When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position h
or k and bring it to a standstill.
R When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position i, bring
the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary.
R Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle.
% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door

while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position
h or k again.
# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 378).
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. % At very low outside temperatures below approximately -20 °C, it
may not be possible to shift the transmission from j to another
# When the vehicle is stationary, press button 1. transmission position when the vehicle is switched off. If this is
When the j transmission position display is shown, park position is the case, change the transmission position only while the vehicle
engaged. If the j transmission position display is not shown, apply the is switched on.
parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
344
ENGAGING DRIVE POSITION D

Problems with the transmission
& WARNING THE TRANSMISSION HAS A FAULTY GEAR SHIFT
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting POSSIBLE CAUSE:
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the
R the transmission is losing oil.
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the # Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme‐
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly diately.
and do not accelerate at the same time.
THE ACCELERATION CHARACTERISTICS GET WORSE, AND THE TRANS‐
MISSION NO LONGER SHIFTS.
POSSIBLE CAUSE:
R the transmission is in emergency operation mode.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Wait at least ten seconds.
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past # Start the vehicle again.
the first point of resistance.
# Shift the transmission to position h.
WHEN THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IS IN TRANSMISSION POSITION
H, IT WILL SHIFT GEARS AUTOMATICALLY. THIS DEPENDS, AMONG # Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme‐
OTHER THINGS, ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS: diately.
R The selected drive program
R The position of the accelerator pedal
R The driving speed
345
Rocking the vehicle free YOU HAVE TWO OPTIONS FOR MANUALLY SHIFTING THE AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION:
Rocking the vehicle free may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in
R Temporary setting
slush or snow.
R Permanent setting
To rock the vehicle free, move the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards and down‐
wards past the point of resistance to switch between transmission positions
The gears are shifted automatically when manual shifting is deactivated.
h and k.
Temporary setting:
% The maximum design speed for switching between h and k is # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2.
approximately 9 km/h.
Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission posi‐
tion display will show p and the current gear.
Manual gearshifting
% How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various
% For plug-in hybrids, observe the information regarding the regen‐ factors.
erative brake system (/ page 327). MANUAL SHIFTING CAN BE DEACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R When the drive program is changed

R When the vehicle is restarted
R When transmission position h is engaged again
R Driving style
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.

When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can shift it
manually with the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If permitted, the auto‐
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.
matic transmission will shift to a higher or lower gear depending on the steer‐ If you pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle 1, the transmission
ing wheel gearshift paddle pulled. will shift down to the lowest possible gear.
346
# To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. # To activate/deactivate: press the corresponding button 2.
The transmission position display will show h. THE SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY SELECTED TRANSMIS‐
SION POSITION:
% You can activate or deactivate manual shifting permanently in R d M (red): manual gearshifting
the multimedia system.
R d D (blue): automatic transmission
SHIFTING UP AND DOWN
Manual shifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) NOTE

*
Damage to the engine due to shifting up too late
% You can also activate and deactivate manual gearshifting via the The automatic transmission does not shift up in manual mode even
multimedia system (/ page 348). when the engine's limiting speed is reached.
The fuel supply is interrupted in order to prevent the engine from over‐
revving.
# Shift up before the engine speed reaches the red area in the
rev counter.
# Press the upper or lower 1 display button repeatedly, until it displays

the d symbol.
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.
347
# If gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission posi‐

tion display, shift to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown
# Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point
of resistance.
If the engine speed is too high or too low, you will not be able to change gear
using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. In this case, segments 3 will light To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to
up red on the driver's display. the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.
Permanently activating or deactivating man‐ Glide mode function

ual shifting Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption when you employ an antici‐
patory driving style.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving GLIDE MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING:
# Permanently activate or deactivate the function.
R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and contin‐
ues to run in neutral.
Gearshift recommendation R The transmission position display h is shown in green.
R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the combustion engine
The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving is switched off depending on the driving situation. All the vehicle func‐
style. tions will remain active.
GLIDE MODE WILL BE ACTIVATED IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE

MET:
R Drive program ; is selected.

R The speed is within a suitable range.
R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep inclines or tight bends.
348
R There is no trailer coupled up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fit‐
ted.
Function of glide mode (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐
R The state of charge of the battery is sufficient. cles)
R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption when you employ an antici‐
applications). patory driving style.
When you drive in Glide mode, the J symbol will appear on the driver's dis‐
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" play and, depending on the model, the combustion engine will be switched off
setting for the drive in the drive program =. or disconnected from the powertrain. All the vehicle functions will remain
active.
Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. GLIDE MODE WILL BE ACTIVATED IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE
MET:
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: when Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is not available. R The ECO start/stop function is switched on.
R Drive program = is selected with the "Moderate" or "Reduced" drive
GLIDE MODE CAN ALSO BE PREVENTED BY THE FOLLOWING PARAME‐
setting.
TERS:
R The speed is within a suitable range.
R Incline R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep inclines or tight bends.
R Downhill gradient R The state of charge of the battery is sufficient.
R Temperature R You are no longer depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.
R Height
R speed Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.
R Operating condition of the engine
R Traffic situation
% You can end glide mode by operating a steering wheel gearshift

paddle (/ page 346).
349
Driving and parking Function of 4MATIC
Function of 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS,
4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be
due to insufficient traction. achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary.
You can display the current distribution of drive torque to all four wheels on
the head-up display and in the right-hand display area of the driver's display.
The fuller the respective scale, the higher the corresponding drive torque.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of
road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsi‐
ble in particular for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
350
Driving and parking Refuelling
Refuelling
Refuelling the vehicle & WARNING

Risk of injury from fuels
& WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes
Fuels are highly flammable.
or clothing.
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐ # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
ded.
# Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the sta‐
tionary heater and keep switched off during filling. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.
ing:

immediately.


with fuel.
351
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. Vehicles with a petrol engine:
# Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. system, the engine and the emission control system.
# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into # Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine
the vehicle again during the refuelling process. fuel.
Petrol can contain up to 25 Vol.‑% ethanol by volume.

& WARNING
Risk of fire from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is fied specialist workshop.
While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
may overheat without warning.
# Never refuel using petrol.
R Diesel
# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
352

* NOTE
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL:
* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Only refuel with sulphur-free diesel fuel.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, only refuel with
low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content below 50 ppm.
# Vehicles without a diesel particulate filter: only refuel with

* NOTE
diesel fuel with a sulphur content below 500 ppm.
Do not refuel diesel-engined vehicles with petrol
NEVER REFUEL WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS: IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL:
R Petrol R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
R Marine diesel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
R Heating oil the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
R Pure biodiesel or vegetable oil
R Petroleum or kerosene

353
* NOTE
Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank
If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling
pump:

1 Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap
* NOTE 3 Tyre pressure table
Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle 4 Fuel type
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. 5 QR code for rescue card
Requirements % Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel filler flap opens
automatically after the fuel tank has been vented (/ page 355).
R Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel tank was vented before # Press on the centre rear of fuel filler flap 1.
refuelling (/ page 355).
# Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.
Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. # Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place
mation label in the fuel filler flap.
and refuel.
354
% Vehicles with diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid
refuelling at diesel filling pumps. with petrol engine)
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being filled, your vehicle is
% Vehicles with diesel engine: do not run the fuel tank empty.
When the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 l
diesel before starting the vehicle.
% Vehicles with diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diam‐
eter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from # Pull switch 1 once briefly.
a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank. Indicator lamp 2 will flash and the Please wait Depressurising fuel tank
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being filled, your vehicle is message will appear on the driver's display.
When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator lamp 2 will light up con‐
tinuously.
The Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling message will appear on
the driver's display and the fuel filler flap will open automatically.
# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages
audibly.
% Depressurising the fuel tank may take several minutes.
The fuel tank can be depressurised only if the conditions described above are
fulfilled. Otherwise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the process.
% IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A MALFUNCTION:
R Indicator lamp 2 flashes initially and then goes out.
355
R The yellow ; engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up. Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth
out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once.

* NOTE
Damage to the fuel filler flap when opening it ADBLUE® IS AVAILABLE HERE:
If an attempt is made to open a fuel filler flap that is not unlocked, the
fuel filler flap or the opening mechanism may be damaged. R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist work‐
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# Only refuel when the fuel filler flap has opened automatically. R AdBlue® is available at many filling stations from AdBlue® filling pumps.
R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue®
refill canisters or AdBlue® refill bottles.
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

% Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle
NOTES ON TOPPING UP ADBLUE® filler neck does not drip.
AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of die‐
sel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly,
only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. REFILLING ADBLUE®
ADBLUE® IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING: NOTE

*
Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
R non-toxic
R colourless and odourless
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
R non-flammable # Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® tank.
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.

If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be
released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue®
away from children.
356
* NOTE % The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style
Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate
from the calculated range.
# After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
# Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the OPENING THE ADBLUE® FILLER CAP
vehicle.
Requirements
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR IN ORDER IN THE DRIVER DISPLAY

WHEN THE ADBLUE® TANK REQUIRES REFILLING:
R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
reserve range. Add at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low # Press on the centre of the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining dis‐
tance displayed has been driven. Add at least 5 l of AdBlue®. # Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and remove it.
R Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.
The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed % You can also place the AdBlue® filler cap in the filler cap holder in
displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it the hinge arm of the fuel filler flap.
will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up at least the dis‐
played quantity of AdBlue®.
REFILLING ADBLUE®
R Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you top up AdBlue® at a pump. If no AdBlue®
possThe AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Top
pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue® with a canister.
up at least the displayed quantity of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and
wait approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the driver display Service.
357
% If it was no longer possible to start the vehicle due to the empty

AdBlue® tank, it takes up to 60 seconds for topping up to be
detected.
# Start the vehicle.
% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehi‐

cle.
# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canister 4.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister 4

until hand-tight.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-
tight.
# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 4.

The filling process stops when the AdBlue® container is completely full.
AdBlue® refill canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially
emptied.
# Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and AdBlue® refill canister 4 in

reverse order.
# Replace the AdBlue filler cap® 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly
engages.
# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
358
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery * NOTE

Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery due to not observ‐
& DANGER ing the following recommendations
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of and the
Charging System Pro amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decreases
If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical
e.g. in fires or an electric shock. range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical
output can be impaired.
# Observe the notes in the Owner's Manual for the Flexible
Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected. THE FOLLOWING FACTORS COULD ACCELERATE THE AGEING OF
THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:
R a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is idle for a lengthy

* NOTE period of time
High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for R frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
lengthy periods of time R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient tem‐
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-discharge. peratures
Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for sev‐ # To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following rec‐
eral months. This can damage the high-voltage battery. ommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.
# To avoid damage, please observe the following recommenda‐

tions when handling the high-voltage battery.
359
DEPENDING ON THE CHARGING VERSION, YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED

* NOTE WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING VEHICLE SOCKETS:
Damage to the drive system when charging the high-voltage bat‐
tery at extreme altitudes R Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)
The drive system may be damaged if the high-voltage battery is charged R Type Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and
at elevations greater than 4,000 m above sea level. charging with direct current (mode 4)
It may then no longer be possible to continue the journey.
# Avoid charging processes at extreme altitudes.
RECOMMENDATIONS WHEN HANDLING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:
R Rapid-charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (Mode 4) only

when required.
R In case of longer downtimes, switch off the vehicle with a charge status
of the high-voltage battery between 25 % and 30 %. Do not permanently
connect the high-voltage battery to a power supply.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, avoid high outside temper‐ Example: type Combo 2 vehicle socket
atures wherever possible.
R Every six weeks check the charge level of the high-voltage battery
1 AC charging port type 2
(/ page 377). 2 Socket extension for DC charging
R Make sure to charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below
15 %.
R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left unused for % When using a CCS charging cable (Combined Charging System)
a lengthy period. Otherwise the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage for charging with direct current at a vehicle socket type Combo,
battery cannot be monitored. both ports on the vehicle socket 1 and 2 are used for charg‐
R When only using the high-voltage battery with low states of charge, fully ing.
charge the high-voltage battery twice a year.
CHARGING OPTIONS FOR THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY (MODE 2, 3 OR 4):
R While the vehicle is in motion by means of recuperation
360
R Stationary alternating current charging:

Stowing the charging cable
- At a mains socket (mode 2)
- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the charging cable bag provided,
and secure the charging cable bag in the boot or load compartment with the
R Stationary DC charging (vehicles with vehicle socket type Combo 2):
included retaining strap. Otherwise, the charging cable bag with the charging
- At a rapid-charging station (mode 4) cable is not sufficiently secured.
Depending on the country-specific vehicle equipment and your vehicle's

charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible.
Observe the different grid requirements of your current location when charg‐
ing. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements. Consult
a qualified electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions.
It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or

charging station due to the improved charging power and better charging effi‐
ciency offered.
SYSTEM LIMITS
Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load compartment
THE POWER OUTPUT OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY MAY BE IMPAIRED
BY THE FOLLOWING: As delivered, charging cable bag 1 with retaining strap 2 is located in the
boot or load compartment. To secure the charging cable bag, the retaining
R high or low outside temperatures
strap must be attached to tie-down eye 3. Do not use bag hooks to attach
R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. oper‐ the retaining strap.
ating the air conditioning system
R extended periods without charging
THE CHARGING TIME OR THE CHARGING POWER OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE

BATTERY MAY BE INCREASED BY THE FOLLOWING:
R high or low outside temperatures

R A low or high charge status of the high-voltage battery
R The maximum available charge current of the charging device
361
# Feed the loop end of retaining strap 2 through tie-down eye 3 in the
boot or load compartment.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at
a mains socket (Mode 2)
# Feed the end with the snap hook through the loop of retaining strap 2.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible
Charging System Pro
If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result
e.g. in fires or an electric shock.

Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected.
# Tighten retaining strap 2 so that the knot around tie-down eye 3 is

tight and secure.
# Hook the snap hook of retaining strap 2 in a tie-down eye of charging

cable bag 1.
362
been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging

& DANGER the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle.
Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the
installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for socket adapter.
example.
# Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that: ONLY THE FOLLOWING CHARGING CABLES MAY BE USED:
R Has been properly installed and R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
R Has been inspected by a qualified electrician R A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle.
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. The
the vehicle or an original Mercedes‑Benz charging cable. charging times when charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket are
considerably longer than when charging at a wallbox or charging station.
# Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and
obtain advice there. When doing so, always observe the local information.
Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their
suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. DO NOT LIFT THE CONTROLS BY THE FOLLOWING COMPONENT PARTS:
# Never use a damaged charging cable. R the charging cable connector

R the mains plug
# Do not use:
R Extension cables When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive
R Extension reels heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise the charging process may be aborted.
R Multiple sockets
# Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to

the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has
363
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at & DANGER

a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) Risk of fatal injury due to damaged components
Connecting the vehicle to a charging station using damaged component
parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts # Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed defects, for example damage to the housing or charging cable
component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example. connection.
# Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that: # Never use damaged charging cables.
R Has been properly installed and # Do not use an extension for the charging cable.
R Has been inspected by a qualified electrician
# Do not use adapters.
# For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been # Always observe the safety instructions on the charging station.
tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the
high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g.
# Never use damaged charging cables. using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site operator's
instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge
# Do not extend the charging cable. (/ page 571).
# Do not use adapters. The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the
charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging los‐
wallbox. ses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for exam‐
ple, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary
If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally availa‐ consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency
ble charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/luggage compartment.
Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufac‐
turer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
364
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge
(/ page 571).
a rapid charging station (mode 4)
The charging cable for the vehicle must not be longer than 30 m due to the
legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of sig‐
& DANGER nals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close
Risk of fatal injury due to damaged components proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable
Connecting the vehicle to a charging station using damaged component may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if
parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example. this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
# Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the
defects, for example damage to the housing or charging cable charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed
connection. by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging los‐
ses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for exam‐
# Never use damaged charging cables. ple, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary
consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency
# Do not use an extension for the charging cable.
can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Do not use adapters.
# Always observe the safety instructions on the charging station. Maximum permissible charging current for
charging at a mains socket
& DANGER DANGER
&
Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible
the charging process Charging System Pro
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐ If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result
tem is under high voltage. e.g. in fires or an electric shock.
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging # Observe the notes in the Owner's Manual for the Flexible
process. Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g.
using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site operator's
365
If you have questions concerning the charging current or if there is a malfunc‐

* NOTE tion, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current
If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the
external mains supply could overheat. Overview of the charging cable control panel
# Ensure that the external mains supply has been designed to
handle the charging current provided. & DANGER
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with Charging System Pro
the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables e.g. in fires or an electric shock.
for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle.
# Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected.
obtain advice there.
# Check the maximum charging current using the charging capa‐ The charging cable control panel of the standard charging cable described
city shown in the driver's display. below shows the current status of the charging process.
The charging cable supplied is set to a country-specific maximum charging

current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the per‐
mitted value for that country.
If you use the Mercedes-Benz Flexible Charging System Pro, the maximum
charge current can be set country-specifically (see Owner's Manual for the
charging system).
1 Supply voltage indicator
# Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charg‐ 2 Charging process indicator
ing current for the relevant mains socket or the building checked by a
3 Temperature monitor indicator
qualified electrician.
4 Safety system indicator
# When abroad, observe the country-specific laws when charging.
366
SUPPLY VOLTAGE INDICATOR 1 When all four displays light up, the charging cable control panel is performing
a self-test.
Display Meaning
If the temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect

Lights up white The supply voltage is connected.
the charging cable from direct sunlight.
CHARGING PROCESS INDICATOR 2
To reset the charging cable control panel: if safety system 4 indicates a
Display Meaning charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, first reset the charging
cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle
Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging.
and from the mains socket and wait for approximately five seconds. If the mal‐
function persists after the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the
TEMPERATURE CONTROL INDICATOR 3
mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehi‐
Display Meaning cle plug must be checked at a qualified specialist workshop, depending on the
indicator.
Lights up red The green LED flashes simultaneously: over‐
temperature – the charging performance is
reduced.
The green LED does not flash: overtempera‐ Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehi‐
ture – the charging process is stopped.
cle socket
Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug – the
charging process is stopped.
% Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with
SAFETY SYSTEM INDICATOR 4 one of the following vehicle sockets.
Display Meaning
The socket flap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.
Flashes red Charging cable malfunction – cannot carry out
the charging process, reset the charging cable
control panel.
Lights up red White LED is off: power supply malfunction –

cannot carry out the charging process, replace
the mains socket.
White LED is on: vehicle malfunction – cannot
carry out the charging process, reset the
charging cable control panel.
367
R Flashes red (for approx. 90 s): malfunction in vehicle; charging not possi‐
ble
Starting the alternating current charging proc‐

ess (mode 2/3)
& DANGER
Charging System Pro
Example: type Combo 2 vehicle socket If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result
e.g. in fires or an electric shock.
1 Socket lamp
2 Charging process indicator lamp # Observe the notes in the Owner's Manual for the Flexible
3 Locking status indicator lamp Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected.
Socket lamp 1 flashes or lights up as with indicator lamps 2 and 3. The

colour and signalling of the indicator lamps 2 and 3 have the following
meaning.
LOCKING STATUS % 3
R Lights up white: vehicle socket unlocked; insert or remove charging cable

R Flashes white: malfunction during locking or unlocking
STATUS OF THE CHARGING PROCESS # 2
R Lights up green (for approx. 60 s): charging process completed

R Flashes green: charging; active energy flow
R Lights up orange (for approx. 60 s): charging break
R Flashes orange: connection is being established
368
& DANGER * NOTE

Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port
The charging process uses high voltage. Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐
ble limiting values during the charging process.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock. THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE
PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
# Only use an undamaged charging cable.
R The power supply of the mains supply and the charging cable are
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐ intact.
ing over the cable.
R The notes on operating the charging cable and control element on
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐ the charging cable were observed.
ist workshop as soon as possible. # If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked.
socket.
* NOTE
Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle
socket from dirt and damage.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before clos‐
ing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which
may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.
369
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due
to incorrect handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to fully insert the charging
cable connector into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise damage the
vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging

cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
Combo 2 vehicle socket (example)

Requirements
R The transmission is in position j.

# Press the centre on the rear area of the socket flap 1 and swivel the
socket flap to the front.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. The indicator lamp 2 % and status display 3 light up white.
R The charging cable is not taut. # Press catch 7 to the left and open the socket cover 5.

WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING VEHICLE SOCKETS: % On vehicles with a Combo vehicle socket, only the connection 8
is required for the charging cable connector. Only open the upper
R Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) part of the socket cover 5.
R Type Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and
charging with direct current (mode 4)
# For charging at a mains socket insert the mains plug into the mains
socket of the external power source right to the stop point.
# Flexible Charging System Pro: if necessary switch off protective earth

conductor detection and set maximum charging current (see the charg‐
ing system's operating instructions).
# Fully insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket 8. If the
wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert
370
the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station being tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to
socket right to the stop point. resume automatically.
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.
The indicator lamp 4 # and status display 3 flash orange, and
green as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged. Ending the alternating current charging proc‐
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be ess (mode 2/3)
started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the & DANGER
driver display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction is the point Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
in time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling sys‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock.
tem may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the

# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged auto‐ ing over the cable.
matically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
(e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
ist workshop as soon as possible.
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle

% The vehicle is equipped with an electric fuse against overvol‐ socket.
tages in the mains supply. This electric fuse can be triggered e.g.
in severe storms and result in tripping the fuse in the building
and in an interruption of charging. These functions protect the
vehicle.
After the building's circuit breaker is switched on again, the
charging process resumes automatically. Following an interrup‐
tion in the power supply without the building's circuit breaker
371

* NOTE WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING VEHICLE SOCKETS:
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port
R Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐
ble limiting values during the charging process. R Type Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and
charging with direct current (mode 4)
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE
intact.
the charging cable were observed.
# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much

heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked.
* NOTE
Example: type Combo 2 vehicle socket
% Vehicles equipped only with a Type 2 vehicle socket for AC
socket from dirt and damage. charging have no charging interruption button 2.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before clos‐ # Type Combo 2 vehicle socket: press the charging interruption button
2.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Requirements
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance

between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
372
% As an alternative, and only if the charging interruption button 2 Starting the direct current charging process
is not working, you can unlock the vehicle using the vehicle key (mode 4)
or centrally from inside to end the charging process. If the indi‐
cator lamp % 1 then lights up white, the vehicle socket is
unlocked for around 30 seconds. & DANGER
Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
# Type 2 vehicle socket: Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key or cen‐
trally from inside. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up aged, you could receive an electric shock.
white. The vehicle socket is unlocked for around 30 seconds.
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐

% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the ing over the cable.
unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still
locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop. # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
ist workshop as soon as possible.
# Close the socket cover and the socket flap. # Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle
socket.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the
socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging
cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 361).
% The indicator lamp % 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for

some time before switching off.
373
* NOTE * NOTE
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐ to incorrect handling
ble limiting values during the charging process. Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to fully insert the charging
cable connector into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise damage the
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging
R The power supply of the mains supply and the charging cable are cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
intact.
the charging cable were observed. Requirements
# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much R The transmission is in position j.
heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked. R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance
R The charging cable is not taut.
* NOTE
374
# Press the centre on the rear area of the socket flap 1 and swivel the matically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated
socket flap to the front. (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
The indicator lamp 2 % and status display 3 light up white.
Press catch 7 to the left and open the socket cover 5.

Ending the direct current charging process
#
(mode 4)
% Connections 6 and 8 are required for the CCS charging cable
connector. Both sections of the socket cover must therefore be
& DANGER
opened 5.
Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
# Fully insert the CCS charging cable connector into the vehicle socket.
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock.
The indicator lamp 4 # and status display 3 flash orange, and
green as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged. # Only use an undamaged charging cable.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be # Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
started or moved. ing over the cable.
At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
driver display with a charging prediction. The completion time either refers to ist workshop as soon as possible.
the predicted state of charge at the set departure time, or the time at which
the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. # Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle
socket.
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling sys‐
tem may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the

mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged auto‐
375
* NOTE
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐
ble limiting values during the charging process.
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE

intact.
# Press charging interruption button 2.
the charging cable were observed.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked.
% As an alternative, and only if the charging interruption button 2

* NOTE is not working, you can unlock the vehicle using the vehicle key
Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open or centrally from inside to end the charging process. If the indi‐
cator lamp % 1 then lights up white, the vehicle socket is
unlocked for around 30 seconds.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the
vehicle and repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable
Requirements connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance # Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
376
% After the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the % The value of current charging power 6 can differ from the dis‐
left % indicator lamp 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for play on the charging station.
some time before switching off.
Function of the charge level display in the

driver display
1 Remaining range at current charge level

2 Current charge level of the high-voltage battery
3 Maximum charge level (as per the setting)
4 Remaining time until fully charged (up to the selected maximum charge
level)
5 Dynamic charge level display
6 Current charging power
% The indicated remaining range 1 may vary due to various fac‐

tors, e.g.driving style or topography.
When the vehicle is switched off and connected to the mains supply, the
driver display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes.
377
Driving and parking Parking
Parking
Parking the vehicle & WARNING

& WARNING cle
Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
vehicle rolling away IN PARTICULAR
If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an
uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.
# apply the parking brake. IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
# Switch the transmission to position j.
WARNING R start the vehicle.
&
Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into and lock the vehicle.
contact with hot vehicle components.
# In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
378
* NOTE % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side win‐
Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four
minutes if the driver's door is closed.
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Automatic vehicle shut-off upon locking
Your vehicle is equipped with automatic engine shut-off.
WHEN YOU LEAVE THE VEHICLE READY TO DRIVE, THE VEHICLE WILL BE
TURNED OFF WHEN LOCKED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
R The ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

R Transmission position j is engaged.
R The driver's door is closed.
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- The vehicle is locked using the vehicle key.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal. - Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is locked via KEYLESS-GO
on the door handle of a closed door.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle
will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving. - Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is locked via the locking
button on the tailgate.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
# Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake % The engine will continue to run if the vehicle is not locked as
pedal applied (/ page 343).
described after you have left it. In this case, switch off the vehi‐
cle manually.
# Switch off the vehicle by pressing button 1.
# Release the service brake slowly. Automatic vehicle shut-off after a period of time (equipment-dependent)
# Get out of the vehicle and lock it. When the engine is running, the following display message will appear on the
driver's display when you leave the vehicle or after a certain holding time in
379
transmission position j : Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when

locked or automatically in XX mins
Garage door opener
PROGRAMMING BUTTONS FOR THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The vehicle will then switch off automatically after a total holding time of
20 minutes.
& DANGER
% To avoid automatic shut-off after a period of time, acknowledge
the corresponding message on the central display of the multi‐
media system.
THE ENGINE WILL CONTINUE TO RUN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: # Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
R If the vehicle is not locked as described after you have left it
R If automatic shut-off is not indicated by the display message
R If automatic shut-off after a period of time has been deactivated via the WARNING
&
corresponding message on the central display Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
In this case, switch off the vehicle manually. When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement.
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the

garage door's movement.
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the
garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements
R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of
movement of the door.
380
R The vehicle has not been started. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following
signals appears:
R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is
% The garage door opener function is always available when the complete.
vehicle is switched on. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Programming was successful.
Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door sys‐
tem must be carried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the proce‐
dure.
# Release all of the buttons.
% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the
scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
SYNCHRONISING THE ROLLING CODE

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. & DANGER
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
yellow. results in poisoning.

# Release the previously pressed button. running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control 5 from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button

1, 2 or 3.
381
& WARNING
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage

Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the # Press the programming button on the door drive unit.
garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
Requirements # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the
R The door system uses a rolling code. door closes.
R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. When the door closes, programming is completed.
R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range
of movement of the door. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL

% The garage door opener function is always available when the
vehicle is switched on.
& DANGER

382
# Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to

& WARNING 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
garage door
# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door of the rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 sec‐
if they stand within its range of movement. onds before trying another position.

# Press the button 6 on the remote control 5 again before transmission
garage door's movement. ends on remote controls that transmit only for a limited period.
# Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the control.
garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
% It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using
% The garage door opener is always available when the vehicle is the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even after you
switched on. have successfully performed the measures described above. If
this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline.
% SUPPORT AND ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMING INFORMATION:
R with the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 0800 046 635 465 or

+49 (0) 7132 3455 733 (chargeable)
R on the Internet at https://www.homelink.com
# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control 5 is suppor‐

ted.
# Replace the batteries in the remote control 5.
383
OPENING OR CLOSING THE GARAGE DOOR
& DANGER

# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.
& WARNING # If the indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a the previously pressed button again and keep it pressed until the door
garage door opens or closes.
CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER MEMORY
& DANGER
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
garage door's movement. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the
garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. # Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
Requirements running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.
% The garage door opener function is always available when the

384
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3.

& WARNING The entire memory has been deleted.
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage Electric parking brake
if they stand within its range of movement. FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (APPLYING AUTOMATI‐
CALLY)
& WARNING
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the cle
garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR
% The garage door opener function is always available when the R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.


# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. and lock the vehicle.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # Keep the key out of reach of children.
385
THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED IF THE TRANSMISSION IS IN FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (RELEASING AUTOMATI‐
POSITION J AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED: CALLY)
R The vehicle is switched off. THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS RELEASED WHEN THE FOLLOWING
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's CONDITIONS ARE FULFILLED:
seat and the driver's door is opened.
R The vehicle has been started.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator
brake (/ page 387). pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on
level ground.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS R If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate must be closed.
ALSO APPLIED: R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary. seat.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: - You shift from transmission position j.
- The vehicle is switched off. or
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the - You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.
driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
- There is a system malfunction. When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the
- The power supply is insufficient. driver's display goes out.
- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights
up in the driver's display.
% The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the

vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
386
APPLYING/RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE MANUALLY APPLYING
& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN # Push handle 1.
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.
R change the gearbox setting. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red !
indicator lamp is lit continuously.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. RELEASING

387
# Switch on the vehicle. YOU WILL RECEIVE INFORMATION ABOUT THE FOLLOWING POINTS:
# Pull handle 1. R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
The red ! indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out. R The force of the impact.
EMERGENCY BRAKING
THE FOLLOWING SITUATION CAN LEAD TO INADVERTENT ACTIVATION:
R Forexample, the parked vehicle is moved to a two-storey garage.
% Deactivate tow-away protection to prevent accidental activation.

If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will
also be deactivated.
You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multi‐
media system (/ page 389).
SYSTEM LIMITS
# Press and hold handle 1.
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is
displayed and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. R the vehicle is damaged without impact, forexample, if an outside mirror
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driver's dis‐ R an impact occurs at low speed
play. R the electric parking brake is not applied
Information on collision detection on a % You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your
parked vehicle vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.
If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is

switched on, and the collision detection is switched on, when the vehicle is
switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system.
388
Setting collision detection for a parked vehi‐ # Select Manage collision photos.
cle # Select Copy (USB).

All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close 5 Vehicle protection
% Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices to
# Activate or deactivate the function via Collision notification. ensure secure operation.
% A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos DELETING COLLISION PHOTOS

are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the # Select Manage collision photos.
photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not
been deleted already. # Select Delete.
All collision photos are deleted.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE COLLISION PHOTOS FUNCTION
Please note that legal restrictions regarding automatic recording of the vehicle
surroundings may be in place in certain countries. Notes on parking up the vehicle
# Activate or deactivate Collision photos. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer
damage through disuse.
TRANSFERRING THE COLLISION PHOTOS WITH THE MERCEDES ME APP
# Select Upload collision photos. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.
or Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a lengthy
period.
# Select Upload automatically.
% Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist

% Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the colli‐ workshop.
sion photos in the Mercedes me app.
COPYING THE COLLISION PHOTOS TO A USB FLASH DRIVE

# Connect a USB flash drive (/ page 655).
389
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ CHARGE THE STARTER BATTERY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
tery's period out of use) R If the vehicle's non-operational time needs to be extended.
R If the starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode.
STANDBY MODE FUNCTION
% This function is not available for all models. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is
switched on.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended
periods of non-operation. ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING STANDBY MODE (PARKING UP THE VEHICLE)
STANDBY MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING: Requirements:
R The starter battery is preserved. R The power supply is switched on.

R The maximum non-operational time appears on the driver's display. R The vehicle is not switched on.
R The connection to online services is interrupted.
R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not available. Multimedia system:
R The interior protection and tow-away protection functions are not availa‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other functions
ble. # Activate or deactivate Standby mode.
R The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available.
IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE FULFILLED, STANDBY MODE CAN

BE ACTIVATED OR DEACTIVATED USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:

R The vehicle has not been started.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconven‐

ience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the
vehicle.
390
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, park‐
ing and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are
not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not
relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is
always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to
the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of
the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your
1 Multifunction camera
driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors
3 Front radar
% Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previ‐ 4 Front camera
ously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when chang‐ 5 Corner radars
ing drivers. 6 Ultrasonic sensors
7 Reversing camera
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultra‐
sonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
391
& WARNING
Overview of driving systems and driving
Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi‐ safety systems
cle sensors and cameras
R ABS (/ page 393)
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or
dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. R Off-road ABS (/ page 393)
There is a risk of an accident. R BAS (/ page 394)
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any
R ESP® (/ page 394)
obstructions and clean. R ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (/ page 395)
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping
R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 398)
in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali‐ R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 398)
fied specialist workshop. R EBD (/ page 400)
R STEER CONTROL (/ page 400)
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or R HOLD function (/ page 400)
slush (/ page 689). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the R Hill Start Assist (/ page 402)
detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional
R Start-off assist (/ page 402)
licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against
stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 402)
there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 403)
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have R Cruise control (/ page 404)
the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have R Limiter (/ page 405)
damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear win‐ R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 427)
dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 430)
R Traffic light view (/ page 434)
% The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for
R Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment (/ page 439)
the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image
in the display. R AMG RIDE CONTROL (/ page 439)
R RACE START (/ page 440)
392
DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE

Function of ABS
% The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Pack‐ THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) REGULATES THE BRAKE PRESSURE
age. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some IN CRITICAL DRIVING SITUATIONS:
functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Pack‐
R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is
age, albeit with restricted functionality.
insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 408)
R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 414)
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The
R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 415) pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and
R DSR (/ page 416) can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 422) SYSTEM LIMITS
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 418) R ABS is active from speeds of approximately 5 km/h.
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 420) R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred
R Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 435) and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the
vehicle is started.
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 437)
PARKING PACKAGE
Function of off-road ABS
% The availability of individual functions depends on country and
equipment.
% Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select the F
drive program.
R Reversing camera (/ page 442)

OFF-ROAD ABS IS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:
R 360° Camera (/ page 446)
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 450) R The front wheels lock cyclically during braking.
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 453) R The braking distance is shortened due to the digging-in effect.
R Trailer Manoeuvering Assist (/ page 462) SYSTEM LIMITS
R Off-road ABS functions at speeds below 40 km/h.
393
R If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer may be restricted.

Function of ESP®
Function of BAS & WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
& WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.
Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist
System) # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking
situation is increased.
THE ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®) CAN MONITOR AND
# Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking IMPROVE DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. TIONS WITHIN PHYSICAL LIMITS:
R When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with R When braking.
additional brake force.
IF THE VEHICLE DEVIATES FROM THE DIRECTION DESIRED BY THE
IF YOU DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL QUICKLY, BAS IS ACTIVATED:
DRIVER, ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOL‐
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. LOWING WAYS:
R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R One or more wheels are braked.
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
R The engine output is adapted according to the situation.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED, THE Å WARNING LAMP LIGHTS UP CON‐
deactivated. TINUOUSLY:
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.

R The drive wheels could spin.
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
394
ETS/4ETS
% When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when ETS/4ETS traction control (Electronic Traction System) is part of ESP® and
braking. makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway.
If you select drive program F a special ETS/4ETS system specifically suited

WHEN THE ÷ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS
to off-road terrain is automatically activated.
HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT:
ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN
R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
THE FOLLOWING WAYS:
R Do not deactivate ESP®.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
away. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
DEACTIVATE ESP® IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS TO IMPROVE TRAC‐ INFLUENCE OF DRIVE PROGRAMS ON ESP®
TION: The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road condi‐
tions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected
R When using snow chains. drive program, the appropriate ESP(/ page 336)® mode will be activated.
R In deep snow.
R On sand or gravel.
Function of ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING MODES OF THE ELEC‐
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances
traction. TRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®):
R ESP® ON
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a R ESP® SPORT
malfunction. R ESP® OFF
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS ACTIVATED
R warning and indicator lamps (/ page 900) ESP® MONITORS AND IMPROVES DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION,
R Display messages (/ page 834) PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R When moving off on wet or slippery roads.

R When braking.
395
R Vehicles with trailer coupling: in trailer operation from speeds of CHARACTERISTICS OF ESP® SPORT
65 km/h, if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from side to
side.
& WARNING
R When there is a strong crosswind and a driving speed of approximately Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly
80 km/h to 200 km/h.
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding
and having an accident.
ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING
WAYS: # Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described
below.
R One or more wheels are braked.
R The engine output is adapted according to the situation.
If ESP® SPORT is selected, the warning lamps å and Æ light up continu‐
ously.
ESP® is activated every time the engine is started, regardless of whether ESP®
SPORT or ESP® OFF was selected. Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's inherent oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired, e.g. on cordoned-off roads.
WHEN THE ÷ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS
HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT: Driving with ESP® SPORT or with ESP® deactivated requires an extremely skil‐
led and experienced driver.
R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather condi‐
tions. If ESP® SPORT is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the
R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. ÷warning lamp flashes. ESP® then only stabilises the vehicle to a limited
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. degree.
ESP® SPORT ALSO HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:
R ESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree.

R The engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive
wheels can spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction
on loose surfaces.
R ESP® continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied.
396
R Vehicles with trailer coupling: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combi‐ R In deep snow.
nation is no longer active. R On sand or gravel.
R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances
traction.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. % Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no lon‐
ger apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
If ESP® is switched off, the å and ¤ warning lamps light up continuously. If the warning lamp ÷ lights up continuously, ESP® is not available owing to
a malfunction.
DEACTIVATING ESP® HAS THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:
OBSERVE THE DISPLAY MESSAGES AND WARNING AND INDICATOR
R Driving stability will no longer be improved. LAMPS WHICH ARE DISPLAYED
R The drive wheels could spin.
R Vehicles with trailer coupling: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combi‐
nation is no longer active. ETS/4ETS (ELECTRONIC TRACTION SYSTEM)
R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN

% THE FOLLOWING WAYS:
Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP®
when braking hard. R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
IT MAY BE BEST TO ACTIVATE ESP® SPORT OR DEACTIVATE ESP® IN THE
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R When using snow chains.
397
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® TRAILER STABILISATION MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNC‐
TION IF:
ESP® CROSSWIND ASSIST DETECTS SUDDEN GUSTS OF SIDE WIND AND R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the
HELPS THE DRIVER TO KEEP THE VEHICLE IN THE LANE:
vehicle.
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx.
80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one
Activating / deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐
side. bility Program)
Multimedia system:
Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation 4© 5ß 5y
WARNING % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when

&
Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can
In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high
centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. # Select ESP.
# Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and # Select On or Off.
weather conditions.
If the ESP® OFF å warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated.
WHEN DRIVING WITH A TRAILER, ESP® CAN STABILISE YOUR VEHICLE IF Note the information on warning lamps and display messages that may appear
THE TRAILER BEGINS TO SWERVE FROM SIDE TO SIDE: in the driver display.
R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h.

R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake appli‐ Setting ESP® with the steering-wheel button
cation on one side.
R In the event of severe swerving, the operating energy output is also % You can also adjust ESP® (/ page 399) via the multimedia sys‐
reduced and all wheels are braked. tem.
398
% In the drive program I if you deactivate® ESP ¤, AMG

Dynamics automatically shifts to the Master level.
# To activate ESP® : briefly press button 2 when ESP® SPORT is selected

or ESP® is deactivated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up blue.
# Set® ESP: press the upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until it
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps go out.
displays the å symbol.
When the ÷ symbol is shown with a red ! on the display button, ESP® is
malfunctioning. Observe the information on warning lamps and display mes‐
% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. sages which are shown in the driver's display.
Setting ESP® in the multimedia system
THE LANE COLOUR OF THE Å BUTTON SYMBOL INDICATES THE CUR‐
Multimedia system:
RENT SETTING:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
R å (blue): ESP® ON ESP is always active when the vehicle is started. The road in the å button
R å (yellow): ESP® SPORT symbol lights up in blue.
R å (red): ESP® OFF # To set ESP SPORT: with ESP activated, briefly press å to change to
the Sport program.
# To adjust ESP® SPORT: briefly press button 2 when ESP® is activated. The road in the å button symbol lights up in yellow.
The road in the å button symbol lights up yellow. # To deactivate ESP : set the ESP SPORT program and press and hold
The å and Æ warning lamps appear in the driver's display. å to deactivate ESP.
The road in the å button symbol lights up in red. The å and ¤
# To deactivate ESP® : Set ESP® SPORT, then press the 2 button for a
warning lamps appear in the driver display.
long time.
The road in the å button symbol lights up red.
The å and ¤ warning lamps appear in the driver's display.
399
# To activate ESP: briefly press å in ESP SPORT or if ESP is deactiva‐ ommendation. If the vehicle is skidding, you will not receive a steering recom‐
ted. mendation.
The road in the å button symbol lights up in blue.
SYSTEM LIMITS
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps go out.
STEER CONTROL MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOL‐
LOWING SITUATIONS:
% You can also adjust ESP via the steering-wheel button
(/ page 398).
R ESP® is deactivated.
R ESP® is malfunctioning.
R The steering is malfunctioning.
Function of EBD
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the power steering.
ELECTRONIC BRAKEFORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) IS CHARACTERISED BY
THE FOLLOWING:
R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.

HOLD function
R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. HOLD FUNCTION
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to
depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
Function of STEER CONTROL
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the standing still remains with the driver.
steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.
SYSTEM LIMITS
THIS STEERING RECOMMENDATION IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐ The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is
TIONS: not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when
stationary.
R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road sur‐
face when you brake R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
R the vehicle starts to skid
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you brake and both right wheels or both left
wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface, you will receive a steering rec‐
400
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION

# Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
& WARNING
or
Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when
you leave the vehicle # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display disappears from the
IF THE VEHICLE IS ONLY BRAKED WITH THE HOLD FUNCTION IT driver display.
COULD, IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ROLL AWAY: THE HOLD FUNCTION IS DEACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator R The parking position j is engaged.
pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you
leave it. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE VEHICLE IS HELD BY THE PARKING
POSITION J AND/OR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE:
Requirements R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
R the vehicle is stationary. R The vehicle is switched off.
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fas‐ R There is a system malfunction.
tened. R The power supply is insufficient.
R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by
In addition, the Brake immediately message may appear in the driver display
the ECO start/stop function.
and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals.
R The electric parking brake is released.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message
R The transmission position h, k or i is engaged. disappears.
The HOLD function is deactivated.
ACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION # Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further
until the ë display appears in the driver display.
# Release the brake pedal.
401
Function of Hill Start Assist Start-off assist

FUNCTION OF THE START-OFF ASSIST
& WARNING The start-off assist enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For
Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, the tyres and vehicle must
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. also be in good condition.
# Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator Do not activate the start-off assist on public roads.
pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill
Start Assist. Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 394).
ACTIVATING THE START-OFF ASSIST

HILL START ASSIST HOLDS THE VEHICLE FOR A SHORT TIME WHEN PULL‐
ING AWAY ON A HILL UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: & WARNING
Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
R The transmission is in position h or k.
When you use start-off assist, individual wheels could spin and you
R The electric parking brake is released. could lose control of the vehicle.
If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skidding and accident!

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐
ity of your vehicle.
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

# Deactivating ESP® (/ page 398).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE LIGHTS WARN FOLLOWING TRAFFIC IN AN EMER‐
GENCY BRAKING SITUATION WITH THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS: # Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
R flashing the brake lamps # Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and keep it depressed.
R activating the hazard warning lights (/ page 62)
# Engage the h drive position (/ page 345).
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps # Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 336).
flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more
noticeable warning. # Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
402
# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
# Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete. ESP® will

otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid
or a wheel starts to spin.
CANCELLING THE START-OFF ASSIST
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
# Reactivate the ESP®.

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED IN THE DRIVER DISPLAY:
ATTENTION ASSIST R journey time since the last break.

R the attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST
FUNCTION OF ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motor‐
The more segments 1 of the circle displayed, the higher the detected atten‐
ways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion level. Fewer segments 1 are displayed in the circle as the attention level
tion on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break.
decreases.
ATTENTION ASSIST serves solely as an aid. It cannot always promptly detect
If the ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot
fatigue or lapses in concentration. The system is not a substitute for a well-
issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.
rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular, timely breaks to
allow for adequate recovery. If the driver display shows a warning, the MBUX multimedia system offers to
search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this
YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN TWO SETTINGS:
rest area.
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.
When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched
R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.
SYSTEM LIMITS
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTEN- ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.
TION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears on the driver display. You can If the system is unavailable due to a fault, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning
acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not lamp Û lights up continuously in the driver display.
403
FUNCTIONALITY OF ATTENTION ASSIST IS RESTRICTED, AND WARNINGS SETTING ATTENTION ASSIST

MAY BE DELAYED OR NOT ISSUED AT ALL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐ Multimedia system:
TIONS IN PARTICULAR: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance
5 ATTENTION ASSIST
R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). SETTING THE SENSITIVITY
R If there is a strong side wind. # Select Z next to ATTENTION ASSIST.
R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of # Select Standard or Sensitive.
acceleration).
R If the Active Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is active. Cruise control and limiter
R If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
FUNCTION OF CRUISE CONTROL
R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving sit‐
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver.
uations.
Forexample, the stored speed is not deleted if you accelerate to overtake. If
Observe also any information regarding display messages that can be dis‐ you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise con‐
played in the driver display. trol will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed.
THE ATTENTION ASSIST DROWSINESS OR ALERTNESS ASSESSMENT IS You can set any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up
RESET AND RESTARTED WHEN CONTINUING THE JOURNEY IN THE FOL‐ to the set winter tyre limit.
LOWING SITUATIONS:
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
R If you switch off the vehicle. wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391).
R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed
drivers or take a break). of 250 km/h.
DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY

h Grey: cruise control is selected but not yet active or temporarily
passive.
h Green: cruise control is active.
404
A stored speed is shown below the display h and is indicated in the speed‐ Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
ometer. wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391).
SYSTEM LIMITS Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: The limiter is available up to a maximum speed of

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. 250 km/h.
The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you must change down to a lower gear M Grey: variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.
in good time. This is particularly important when driving a laden vehicle. You
are thus making full use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of M Flashing grey: variable limiter is temporarily passive.
the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and
M Green: variable limiter is activated.
wearing too quickly.
DO NOT USE CRUISE CONTROL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: A stored speed is shown below the display M and is indicated in the speed‐
ometer.
R in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic, on winding roads If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the
R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose trac‐ variable limiter switches to passive mode. The M passive message appears
tion and the vehicle could then begin skidding. in the driver display and the indicator M starts flashing.
R when visibility is poor
THE VARIABLE LIMITER IS REACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
FUNCTION OF THE LIMITER TIONS:
The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set
speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically. R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.
R If the stored speed is called up.
YOU CAN LIMIT THE SPEED AS FOLLOWS: R If you store a new speed.
R Variable: for short-term limitation of the driving speed, e.g. in built-up
areas
R Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or
up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle
is stationary if the vehicle has been started.
405
OPERATING CRUISE CONTROL OR THE VARIABLE LIMITER
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current
speed, the vehicle decelerates.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the

stored speed.
Requirements Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter
CRUISE CONTROL J Adopts the stored/detected speed

R Cruise control is selected. ± Deactivates cruise control/the variable limiter
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease speed
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
h Selects cruise control
R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
M Selects the variable limiter
R The transmission is in position h.
Operating cruise control and the variable limiter:
VARIABLE LIMITER # Press the corresponding button with only one finger or swipe on the
control panel.
R The variable limiter is selected.
Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter
# To select cruise control: pressh.
# To select the variable limiter: pressM.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable lim‐

iter is selected by a different button (/ page 411).
406
Activating cruise control or the variable limiter # Briefly press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten
# Press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.
(e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h).
The current travel speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle's cruise
control, or is restricted by the variable limiter. or
or # Press and hold ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.

The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten
# Press J.
and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h.
The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle's cruise
control, or is restricted by the variable limiter. or
If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle
speed is stored.
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
# Press ® on the control panel 1.

% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist
% When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you can‐
DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is
not increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of
deleted.
1 km/h.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed

Adopting a detected speed
# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control
If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detec‐
panel 1.
ted a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is dis‐
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. played in the driver's display:
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control # Press J.
panel 1.
The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.
or
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter
# Press ±.
407
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. % The Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC described for vehicles
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist without the Driving Assistance Package is an on-demand feature
DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is (country-dependent) (/ page 106).
deleted.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing
INFORMATION ON THE PERMANENT LIMITER roads. If vehicles are detected ahead the set distance is maintained, if neces‐
If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter sary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes
tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed.
You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the mul‐ The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the
timedia system (/ page 56). steering wheel.
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears on the driver's display. Available speed range: 20 km/h - 160 km/h
When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you
OTHER FEATURES OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:
switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle
has been restarted or if the set speed is changed. R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program
(energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic) (/ page 333)
The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown
and the driven speed remains below the set speed. R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is
switched on to change to the overtaking lane
SETTING THE SPEED LIMIT FOR WINTER TYRES R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Multimedia system: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Winter tyre limit (except bicycles and motorcycles)
# Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit. - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways
SETTING A SPEED or multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-depend‐
ent)
# Select Winter tyre limit.
# Select a speed.
408
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC on ç Green: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detec‐
multi-lane separated roadways, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front ted
as it moves off again, depending on the equipment. If a critical situation is
detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is issued indicating
The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highligh‐
that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not acceler‐
ted on the speedometer. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC's status display is
ated any further.
greyed out when in passive mode.
If the speed of the vehicle in front or the ascertained target speed due to the
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391).
route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speed‐
ometer light up.
The display h appears briefly if you increase or decrease the specified dis‐
tance 3.
% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle sym‐

bol ç is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull
Display in the driver display in the Assistance menu away.
1 Vehicle in front
2 Distance indicator % The system is switched to passive mode if you depress the
3 Set specified distance accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
setting. The following message appears briefly in the driver dis‐
The vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the play ç suspended .
lane to the right of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to over‐
take on the left, for example, on UK motorways.
SYSTEM LIMITS
PERMANENT STATUS DISPLAY THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
ç Grey: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active INSTANCES, FOREXAMPLE:
ç Green speedometer, grey vehicle: Active Distance Assist R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in
DISTRONIC active, speed set greatly varying light conditions.
R If there is swirling dust, e.g. when driving off-road or on sandy surfaces.
409
R The windscreen in the camera's area is dirty, misted up, damaged or cov‐
ered. & WARNING
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC
R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradi‐
ents. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50%
of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warn‐
ing.
Moreover, braking or accelerating on slippery roads can cause one or several
wheels to lose traction, and the vehicle could then begin skidding. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the
vehicle in front.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.
& WARNING
Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING
Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR
DISTRONIC is impaired
BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE:
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. LIMITED REACTION:
R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or
R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
slower than the currently driven speed.
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unex‐
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in
pected obstacles
front or does not react to relevant objects.
R to complex traffic conditions
# Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
brake at all times.
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warn‐
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the ings nor intervene in such situations.
stored speed.
# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react
accordingly.
410
& WARNING
OPERATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC AND THE VARIABLE Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance
LIMITER Assist DISTRONIC
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR
& WARNING BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE:
Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or
LIMITED REACTION: slower than the currently driven speed.
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in
R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes front or does not react to relevant objects.
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unex‐
pected obstacles # Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to
brake at all times.
R to complex traffic conditions
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the
stored speed.
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warn‐
ings nor intervene in such situations.
# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react WARNING

&
accordingly. Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50%
of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warn‐
ing.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the

vehicle in front.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.
411
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjustment of speed by the Active Speed
Limit Assistant
The speed adopted by the Active Speed Limit Assistant may be too high
or incorrect in individual cases:
R For speed limits below 20 km/h

R In wet or foggy conditions
# Ensure that the speed driven always complies with the traffic
regulations.
J Adopts the stored/detected speed
# Adjust the speed driven to the current traffic and weather con‐ ± Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/the variable lim‐
ditions. iter
1®¯ Switch panel to increase/decrease speed
Requirements K Increases/decreases the specified distance
I Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC: DISTRONIC
R The electric parking brake is released.

# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter:
press the respective button with only one finger or swipe across the
R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
switch panel.
R Transmission position h is engaged.
SWITCHES BETWEEN THE VARIABLE LIMITER AND ACTIVE DISTANCE
R All the doors are closed. ASSIST DISTRONIC
R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. # Press I.
VARIABLE LIMITER:
R The variable limiter is selected.
412
ACTIVATING THE VARIABLE LIMITER OR ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST # Briefly press ® at the top or ¯ at the bottom of the control panel
DISTRONIC 1.
# To activate without a stored speed: press ®, ¯ or J. Active The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h.
Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. or
The current driving speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle via
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or is restricted by the variable limiter. # Press and hold ® at the top or ¯ at the bottom of the control
panel 1.
or The stored speed is increased or reduced in 10 km/h increments.
# To activate with a stored speed: press J. Active Distance Assist or
DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle via # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or is restricted by the variable limiter.
# Press ® at the top of the control panel 1.
If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is
stored. ADOPTING THE SPEED RESTRICTION SHOWN ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press
®, ¯ or J.
% When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted.
When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the speed # Accept the displayed speed limit: press J.
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
The speed restriction displayed on the driver display is adopted as the
stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front,
INCREASING OR REDUCING THE SPEED but only up to the stored speed, or restricts its speed accordingly.
# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of the
control panel 1.
% A speed restriction shown on the driver display is only adopted
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. while driving, not when stationary.
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of the
control panel 1. PULLING AWAY WITH ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from
the brake pedal.
or # Press J.
413
or FUNCTION OF ACTIVE SPEED LIMIT ASSIST

If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed lim‐
# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. its is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed
The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remain active. (/ page 416). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not accepted.
INCREASING OR DECREASING THE SPECIFIED DISTANCE FROM THE VEHI‐ Adjustment of travel speed is initiated no later than when the vehicle is level
CLE IN FRONT with the traffic sign. For signs indicating entry into an urban zone, the speed is
# Press K. adapted according to that permitted within the built-up area. The speed
The h display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one restriction indicator on the driver display is always refreshed when the vehicle
level. is level with the traffic sign.
If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest If you are driving on German motorways with no speed limit, the system uses
level. the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If
DEACTIVATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC OR THE VARIABLE you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the
LIMITER recommended speed of 130 km/h is adopted.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by press‐
& WARNING ing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set
Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being speed are adopted.
active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active The maximum permissible speed does not consider the road condition and
Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. current weather and traffic conditions. Adjust your speed accordingly when
necessary.
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and
secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
leave the driver's seat. wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391).
SYSTEM LIMITS
# Press ±. The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs
(/ page 430).
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Dis‐ Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as
tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g.for a specific time or due
deactivated. to weather conditions) cannot be unequivocally detected by the system.
Adjust the speed in these situations.
414
R Turns and exits

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjustment of speed by the Active Speed
ALSO, THE SPEED IS REDUCED IF THE TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR IS
Limit Assistant
SWITCHED ON AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IS DETECTED:
The speed adopted by the Active Speed Limit Assistant may be too high
or incorrect in individual cases: R Turning off at junctions
R Driving on slowing-down lanes
R For speed limits below 20 km/h
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes
R In wet or foggy conditions
# Ensure that the speed driven always complies with the traffic The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other
regulations. road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic
lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐
# Adjust the speed driven to the current traffic and weather con‐
still.
ditions.
When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out auto‐
matically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con‐
firmed and further speed adaptation is activated.
FUNCTION OF ROUTE-BASED SPEED ADAPTATION
SPEED ADAPTATION IS CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be
adapted to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is
the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or presumed that the route event is not deemed relevant by the driver
dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle acceler‐
R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.
ates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehi‐
cles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. SYSTEM LIMITS
Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into
Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system
account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations
(/ page 416).
and driving at a suitable speed.
THE FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS ARE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT:
IN DIFFICULT CONDITIONS, THE SPEED SELECTION MADE BY THE SYS‐
R Bends TEM MAY NOT ALWAYS BE SUITABLE. THIS APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Roundabouts
R T-junctions R The road's course is not clearly visible
415
R Road narrowing Multimedia system:

R Varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example, at 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist
toll stations
SELECTING A DRIVING STYLE
R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice # Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable.
R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached
to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly
established % Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 411).
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

SETTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT
# Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based speed adjustment.
& WARNING
Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depend‐
ing on the route events ahead or the speed limit.
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily
unavailable in the following situations:
% IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE
R If the driver does not follow the calculated route DETECTED SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE
R If map data is not up-to-date or available SPEED LIMIT:
R In the event of roadworks
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R In bad weather or road conditions
R Variable limiter
R If the accelerator pedal is depressed
R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations
% Further information on speed adjustment (/ page 415).
# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
SETTING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DRIVING STYLES

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Requirements
FUNCTION OF THE DSR SYSTEM
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel
at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater
416
the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gra‐ You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing
dients, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. whether the downhill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface
and tyres, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a
When DSR is activated and the transmission is in position h, k or i, DSR target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the
controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between brakes yourself if required.
2 km/h and 18 km/h. By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or
lower speed than the target speed at any time. ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING DSR (DOWNHILL SPEED REGULATION)
DSR WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AUTOMATICALLY Requirements
R If you are driving at a speed greater than 45 km/h

R You are driving at 40 km/h or slower.
R If you change the drive program If the vehicle speed is too high, the Max. speed 40 km/h message
appears in the driver's display.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, cruise control and variable limiter are
The î off message appears in the driver's display. The status indicator in
switched off.
the driver's display goes out. You also hear a warning tone.
Multimedia system:
% DSR remains activated in drive program F.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
# Select î.
INFORMATION ON DSR
A status display appears when the function is activated in the driver's
display.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery CHANGING THE TARGET SPEED
road surfaces When DSR is activated, you can change the target speed to a value between
2 km/h and 18 km/h.
If the driven speed and the target speed differ, the wheels may lose
traction.
# Take into account the road surface and the difference between
the driving speed and target speed before activating DSR.
wise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 391).
417
Active Steering Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 160 km/h.
The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate
steering interventions. Depending on the travel speed, Active Steering Assist
uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.
% Depending on the respective country, Active Steering Assist can

use the surrounding traffic as a reference in the lower speed
# To increase the target speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of con‐ range. Active Steering Assist can also assist when driving outside
trol panel 1. the centre of the lane, forexample, to form an emergency corri‐
R The target speed is increased by 1 km/h. dor.
or
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steer‐
ing Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this
# At the top of control panel 1 press and hold ®.
case.
The target speed is increased in 1-km/hincrements.
# To decrease the target speed: swipe downwards from the top of con‐ STATUS DISPLAY OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
trol panel 1. Ø Grey: activated and passive
R The target speed is decreased by 1 km/h. Ø Green: activated and active
or Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition
from active to passive mode, system limit detected
# At the bottom of control panel 1 press and hold ¯.
The target speed is reduced in 1-km/hincrements. Ø White, red hands: "hands on the steering wheel" prompt
The set target speed is shown next to the status display î in the driver's
display.
418
The warning is not issued or stops as soon as the system detects the driver
% During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø sym‐ touching or steering the steering wheel.
bol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is in pas‐
sive mode, the Ø symbol is shown as grey on the driver dis‐ The touch detection may be limited or inoperative if there is no direct contact
play. between the hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there
is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering
warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.
Assist may be unavailable.
STEERING AND TOUCH DETECTION wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391).
The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times
SYSTEM LIMITS
and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In
keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode
some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in
or vice versa at any time.
the lane or to drive through exits.

INSTANCES:
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly
varying light conditions or dense shadows on the carriageway.
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
R Insufficient road illumination.
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a consid‐
R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of
erable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, an
the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
initial visual warning is issued. The indication 1 appears in the driver display.
R There are no lane markings in a given lane, or the markings are not easily
If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the
discernible or change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or junc‐
system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.
tions.
(/ page 420)If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
period, an emergency stop may be initiated. snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings
cannot therefore be detected.
419
R The roadway is narrow and winding.

R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, suchas & WARNING
object markers. Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause
to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly unexpected steering interventions.
established. # Steer according to traffic conditions.
THE SYSTEM DOES NOT PROVIDE ASSISTANCE IN THE FOLLOWING CON‐

DITIONS: You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
R On very tight bends and when turning. ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
R When crossing junctions. Requirements
R At roundabouts or toll stations.
R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
R When actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indica‐
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
tor.
R When the tyre pressure is too low.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving
& WARNING # Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.

Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in
lane. % The following function is only available in combination with the
Driving Assistance Package.
# Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe
the traffic carefully.
Active Emergency Stop Assist monitors the steering wheel, as well as the
# Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions. accelerator and brake pedals. If the system detects a lack of driver activity or
the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane, a warning can be issued and an
emergency stop initiated.
420
If Active Steering Assist is switched off, the system is available from a speed R The Beginning emergency stop message appears in the driver display, a
of approx. 60 km/h. continuous warning tone sounds and the vehicle will no longer acceler‐
ate.
IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS THAT THE VEHICLE IS IN DANGER OF LEAVING
R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until the vehicle comes to a
THE LANE, A WARNING CAN BE ISSUED AND AN EMERGENCY STOP INITI‐
standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also effected.
ATED.
R The driver has not touched the steering wheel for a certain while, or no When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
steering movement is detected for a lengthy period (depending on the deactivated. Depending on the respective country, the hazard warning light
vehicle equipment). system is switched on.
R Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is depressed.
WHEN THE VEHICLE HAS COME TO A STANDSTILL:
R the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

% If Active Steering Assist is switched on and active, the system
R the vehicle is unlocked.
only monitors the steering wheel. If the driver has not touched
the steering wheel for a certain while, a warning may be issued R if possible, an emergency call is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency
despite pedal actuation. call centre.
Observe also the instructions on the touch detection of Active
Steering Assist (/ page 418). Before the Beginning emergency stop message is displayed, you can cancel
Active Emergency Stop Assist by turning the steering wheel.
ONCE THE BEGINNING EMERGENCY STOP MESSAGE HAS BEEN DISPLAYED,

YOU CAN CANCEL ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST AS FOLLOWS:
R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is cancelled, but the warn‐

ing message, warning tone and electric power steering remain active
R Steering: electric power steering is cancelled, the warning message and
warning tone remain active, and the vehicle continues to be braked
ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST ISSUES THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS R Steering and accelerating or braking: The emergency stop and electric
IN ORDER: power steering are cancelled. The warning message and the warning
tone are cancelled.
R Display message 1 appears in the driver display.
R In addition to display 1, a warning tone sounds.
421
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehi‐
% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a cles, cyclists or pedestrians, or to reduce the effects of such a collision.
maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active
Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds
until the vehicle has been restarted. and the Active Brake Assist warning lamp L lights up.
SYSTEM LIMITS
FOR THE DETECTION OF VEHICLES AND OTHER OBSTACLES, OBSERVE
THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 408)

R Active Steering Assist (/ page 418)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 437) Display in the driver display in the Assistance menu
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 422)

1 Distance insufficient
2 Red radar waves
THE ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST IS INACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
CASE: In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance to the vehicle in front 1 is
displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also
R Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Steering Assist are switched off. highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves
2 appear ahead of the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist

% Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an addi‐
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST tional haptic warning is given in the form of slight, repeated ten‐
ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: sioning of the driver's seat belt.
R Distance warning function

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti‐
R Collision warning cal situations.
R Autonomous braking function
In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autono‐
R Situation-related brake force boosting
mous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone and distance warning
R Vehicles Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist lamp L are simultaneous with the braking action.
422
If you apply the brakes yourself in a critical situation or apply the brakes dur‐
ing autonomous braking, situation-related braking assistance is given. The & WARNING
brake pressure increases up to maximum emergency braking if necessary. Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of
Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex
traffic situations.
IN SUCH CASES, ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MIGHT:
R Give a warning or brake without reason

R Not give a warning or not brake
If autonomous braking, situation-related braking assistance or evasive action
has occurred, pop-up 1 appears on the driver display. It automatically disap‐ Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintain‐
pears after a short time. ing a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and
for braking in good time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situation-dependent braking assis‐
tance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection by # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
PRE-SAFE® may also be initiated. on Active Brake Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. owing
to activation of another driving system, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê appears in the driver display.
If the system is unavailable owing to soiled or damaged sensors or a fault, or if

the functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist Ó warning lamp
appears on the driver display.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
DISTANCE WARNING FUNCTION

From approximately 30 km/h, you are warned by the distance warning function
if for several seconds, the safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead is
423
insufficient at the current speed. In this case, the distance warning lamp L SITUATION-RELATED BRAKE FORCE BOOSTING
in the driver display lights up. If the distance to the vehicle in front continues AT SPEEDS ABOVE APPROXIMATELY 7 KM/H, SITUATION-RELATED
to decrease at higher speeds, the distance warning lamp L begins to flash. BRAKE FORCE BOOSTING CAN INTERVENE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
TIONS.
COLLISION WARNING
THE COLLISION WARNING CAN ASSIST YOU IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐ R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles
TIONS WITH AN INTERMITTENT WARNING TONE AND L WARNING ahead.
LAMP: R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving
cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking along the road and stationary vehi‐
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles cles.
ahead.
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.
vehicles, pedestrians walking along the road and moving cyclists ahead.
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists.
pedestrians and cyclists.
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary CANCELLING A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST
pedestrians and cyclists. YOU CAN CANCEL A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST AT
ANY TIME BY:
AUTONOMOUS BRAKING FUNCTION
AT SPEEDS ABOVE APPROXIMATELY 7 KM/H, THE AUTONOMOUS BRAK‐ R firmly depressing the accelerator pedal or by kickdown
ING FUNCTION CAN INTERVENE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: R releasing the brake pedal.
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles

ahead. ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MAY CANCEL THE BRAKE APPLICATION WHEN
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED:
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving
cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking along the road and stationary vehi‐ R You steer to avoid an obstacle.
cles.
R There is no longer a risk of collision.
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.
pedestrians and cyclists.
424
TURNING MANOEUVRE FUNCTION (VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSIS‐ ACTIVE EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERIS‐
TANCE PACKAGE): TICS:
If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turn‐
ing across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles.
below 15 km/h before you have departed your own lane. R Assistance through autonomous steering intervention during a necessary
evasive manoeuvre
ACTIVE EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
R Autonomous activation if there is sufficient space in your own lane
R Reaction from a speed of approximately 30 km/h up to a speed of
& WARNING approximately 80 km/h.
Risk of accident despite Active Evasive Steering Assist
Active Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and
When Active Evasive Steering Assist is intervening, and for the duration of the
complex traffic situations.
evasive action, a warning tone is sounded and the distance warning lamp L
IN SUCH CASES, ACTIVE EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST MIGHT: flashes.
R issue an unfounded warning or initiate a steering intervention The steering assistance by Active Evasive Steering Assist can be cancelled at
R not issue a warning or not initiate a steering intervention. any time by steering, accelerating or braking.
ACTIVE EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST CAN INTERVENE IN THE FOLLOWING

The Active Evasive Steering Assist can provide support in preventing a SPEED RANGES:
collision via an automatically initiated steering intervention.
R when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians or cyclists at speeds
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely from approximately 30 km/h to approximately 80 km/h
on Active Evasive Steering Assist alone. R when approaching pedestrians or cyclists moving longitudinally ahead at
speeds from approximately 30 km/h to approximately 80 km/h
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
SYSTEM LIMITS
# Drive with adjusted speed if pedestrians are in the area sur‐ Full system performance is not yet available for a short time after switching on
rounding the road. the vehicle or after driving off. Depending on the environmental conditions, it
may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.
Active Evasive Steering Assist can automatically react to objects that are sta‐
tionary or moving longitudinally in your lane.
425
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION, PARTICULARLY SETTING ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
Requirements
R in snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly vary‐ R The vehicle is switched on.
ing light conditions.
R if the sensors are soiled, misted up, damaged or covered.
Multimedia system:
R if the sensors are impaired owing to interference from other radar sour‐
ces, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
R if a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and dis‐ # Activate or deactivate the function.
played.
R if DSR is activated. % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist
R in complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly activated.
identified.
R if pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. Switching off Active Brake Assist also switches off the distance warning func‐
R if pedestrians are hidden by other objects. tion, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Active Eva‐
R if the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the sive Steering Assist (with Driving Assistance Package - country-dependent).
background.
R if a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. owing to special clothing or % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in
other objects. the status bar of the driver display. When the vehicle is next star‐
R on bends with a tight radius. ted, the system is activated again.
R if the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
R if there is no lane marking, or it is not clearly recognisable SETTING WARNING TIMING
R if the course of the road is not almost straight
# Select Z alongside Active Brake Assist.
R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached # Select Early, Medium or Late.
% If the ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs of fatigue or a
microsleep, depending on the country the system can issue a
warning earlier than set. Further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST (/ page 404).
426
Speed Limit Assist The driver must manually adjust the maximum permissible speed in the small
or large trailer category.
FUNCTION OF SPEED LIMIT ASSIST
IN PARTICULAR, THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC LAWS MUST BE TAKEN INTO
ACCOUNT, E.G. ON:
% This function is an on-demand feature (/ page 106).
R maximum design speed or speed restriction for which the vehicle is
approved
% The Speed Limit Assist uses Open Street Map data provided R permissible gross mass with or without towing vehicle
under the Open Database Licence (ODbL) terms. For more infor‐ R required number of years with a corresponding driving licence
mation, see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence. R type and condition of the road used
R the weather conditions
Speed Limit Assist records speed restrictions with a multifunction camera and
shows them in the driver display.
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the vehicle/trailer combination
Optionally, maximum permissible speeds can also be shown in the head-up can be transferred to the manual or automatic speed transfer during the jour‐
display. ney (depending on the equipment).
The camera also detects further speed restrictions indicated by an additional On the system side, relevant additional signs for speed restrictions and clear
sign (e.g. in wet conditions). road category traffic rules can be considered for the vehicle combination
(depending on the country).
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391). No maximum permissible speed can be selected for a bicycle rack in the multi‐
media system. When using a bicycle rack, observe the specifications for the
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION maximum permissible speed in the Owner's Manual.
OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

% Observe also the notes on trailer operation (/ page 465).
R select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather condi‐
tions
If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly, the central display shows the
R observe actual traffic signs
query concerning the type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed
(/ page 470). R observe applicable traffic rules and regulations
427
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED

The system can warn you if you are about to exceed the maximum permissible
speed. Depending on the country, you can set how much the maximum per‐
missible speed may be exceeded on the multimedia system before a warning
is issued. You can select in the settings whether the warning should be issued
optically, with the traffic sign flashing in the driver display, or as a combination
of optic and acoustic warning. Selection of the type of warning is confirmed
1 Permissible speed
via an indication in the driver display, depending on the respective country of
use. 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction
% Traffic signs that affect the maximum permissible speed, e.g.

indicating the beginning or end of motorways, can also be detec‐
ted.
The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver display simultane‐
ously. The system always prioritises displaying speed restrictions. The head-up
1 Optical warning only
display shows only one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed. If two
2 WARNING off
speed signs are shown on the driver display, forexample, when speed limits
are detected, the value of the left-hand speed restriction 1 is always trans‐
% The type, duration and activation threshold of the speed limit mitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for
warning, as well as the option of setting the timing of the activa‐ acceptance and is shown on the head-up display.
tion threshold upon which the warning is issued, are subject to
legislation valid for the respective country in which the vehicle is Important information from other systems can cause traffic signs to be hidden
delivered. for a short time.
If the Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible
speed, e.g. due to a lack of signage, the following display appears in the driver
display:
428
This display is shown permanently in the vehicle when travelling in countries R If the signage, road markings, or road guidance is country-specific and
which do not support Speed Limit Assist. Speed Limit Assist is not available in deviates from the navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or after
all countries. road works.
R After sharp turns and tight bends, if traffic signs are outside the camera's
If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault
field of vision.
or soiling of the windscreen, a corresponding display message appears in the
driver display. Depending on the country, the Speed Limit Assist warning lamp R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs affixed or attached to them.
ê also lights up in the driver display. R If transport devices are used that are attached to the trailer coupling,
e.g. bicycle racks, the system may react to restrictions for trailers.
% Please also note the information on the display messages SETTING SPEED LIMIT ASSIST
(/ page 834). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
SYSTEM LIMITS ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING
% The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on
R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly the respective country).
variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. # Switch off Speed limit warning .
R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains
camera, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off.
R If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty,
obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insuffi‐ % The audible speed limit warning can also be switched off and on
ciently illuminated or askew.
via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the
R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly, or steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of
even at all due to technical factors suchas transmission frequency. the media display or via a voice control command (availability of
R If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs these functions is country-dependent).
at road works, at exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel roads,
and pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights.
CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING
R If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard. # Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.
429
SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE

SPEED ON OR OFF
Traffic Sign Assist
FUNCTION OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST
% The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
switched off at the factory. % This function is an on-demand feature (/ page 106).
The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each Traffic Sign Assist detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera and
change of the displayed speed in the driver display. compares them with the information on the digital road map of the navigation
system. It supports you by showing detected speed restrictions and overtaking
bans on the driver display.
% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐ Maximum permissible speeds can also be shown on the head-up display.
try.
The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible
speed.
SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD
This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can
warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings. If the system
# Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of
travel, it triggers a warning.
Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.
The camera also detects and analyses traffic signs with a restriction indicated
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE DETECTED by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions).
SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
SPEED: Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs on the driver display. Actual
traffic signs and speed restrictions have priority over traffic signs and speed
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC restrictions shown on the driver display.
R Cruise control
R Variable limiter Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
% Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 411).
430
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
R select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather condi‐

% Observe also the notes on trailer operation (/ page 465). tions
R observe actual traffic signs
If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly, the central display shows the R observe applicable traffic rules and regulations
query about the type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed
(/ page 470).
The driver must manually adjust the maximum permissible speed in the small wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 391).
or large trailer category.
IN PARTICULAR, THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC LAWS MUST BE TAKEN INTO
ACCOUNT, E.G. ON:
R maximum design speed or speed restriction for which the vehicle is

approved
R permissible gross mass with or without towing vehicle
R required number of years with a corresponding driving licence
R type and condition of the road used
1 Permissible speed
R the weather conditions
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the vehicle/trailer combination
can be transferred to the manual or automatic speed transfer during the jour‐ The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver display simultane‐
ney (depending on the equipment). ously. The system always prioritises displaying speed restrictions. The head-up
display shows only one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed. If two
On the system side, relevant additional signs for speed restrictions and clear speed signs are shown on the driver display, forexample, when speed limits
road category traffic rules can be considered for the vehicle combination are detected, the value of the left-hand speed restriction 1 is always trans‐
(depending on the country). mitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for
acceptance and is shown on the head-up display.
No maximum permissible speed can be selected for a bicycle rack in the multi‐
media system. When using a bicycle rack, observe the specifications for the Important information from other systems can cause traffic signs to be hidden
maximum permissible speed in the Owner's Manual. for a short time.
431
Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map on the navigation
system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a motor‐
way exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a junction, the display on
the driver display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been
detected.
% Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system to

Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed ensure optimum functioning of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 44).
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN DETECT AND DISPLAY THE FOLLOWING TRAF‐
FIC SIGNS 1: Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the system can also display
speed restrictions ahead on the driver display and head-up display. The driver
R speed restrictions display can also show the distance to an upcoming lower limit speed. Informa‐
R end of the speed restriction tion from the digital road map of the navigation system is used for this pur‐
R overtaking restrictions pose. The Assistance menu can also display a dynamic visualisation of the
speed restrictions ahead.
R play streets
R depending on the country: signs showing the start or end of motorways If the Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible
and dual carriageways speed, e.g. due to a lack of signage, the following display appears in the driver
display:
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN DETECT THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL SIGNS
3 AND, IF NECESSARY, ANALYSE THE RELEVANCE OF THE RESTRICTIONS
USING OTHER VEHICLE SENSORS: Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. This display is shown perma‐
nently in the vehicle when travelling in countries which do not support Traffic
R in wet conditions
Sign Assist.
R slippery road surfaces
R in fog If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault
R temporary restrictions or soiling of the windscreen, a corresponding display message appears in the
driver display. The Traffic Sign Assist ê warning lamp also lights up in the
R exits
driver display in certain countries.
R restrictions for car/trailer combinations
432
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST (COUNTRY-SPECIFIC)

% Please also note the information on the display messages from Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the
Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 834). wrong way down a section of road, forexample, on motorway slip roads or
one-way streets.
WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED
Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, pro‐
The system can warn you if you are about to exceed the maximum permissible
vided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic
speed. Depending on the country, you can set how much the maximum per‐
Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.
missible speed may be exceeded on the multimedia system before a warning
is issued. You can switch off the warning, or select in the settings whether the SYSTEM LIMITS
warning should be issued optically, with the traffic sign flashing in the driver
display, or as a combination of optic and acoustic warning. Selection of the
type of warning is confirmed via an indication in the driver display, depending
on the respective country of use. R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly
variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction
camera, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
R If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty,
obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insuffi‐
ciently illuminated or askew.
1 Optical warning only R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly, or
even at all due to technical factors suchas transmission frequency.
2 WARNING off
R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect,
incomplete or out of date.
% The type, duration and deployment stages of the speed limit R If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
warning, as well as the option of setting the timing of the deploy‐ at road works, at exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel roads,
ment stages upon which the warning is issued, are subject to leg‐ and pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights.
islation valid for the respective country in which the vehicle is R If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard.
delivered.
R If the signage, road markings, or road guidance is country-specific and
deviates from the navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or after
road works.
433
R After sharp turns and tight bends, if traffic signs are outside the camera's # Set the desired speed under warning threshold.
field of vision.
R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs affixed or attached to them. % Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legisla‐
R If you use transport equipment secured to the vehicle with a trailer cou‐ tion.
pling, suchas a bicycle rack, restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations
may be considered valid if applicable.
SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
SETTING TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SPEED ON OR OFF
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist % The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
switched off at the factory.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING
The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each

% The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on
change of the displayed speed in the driver display.
the country).
# Switch off Speed limit warning .
Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains % Availability of the function is dependent on the country.
deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off.
% The audible speed limit warning can also be switched off and on Traffic light view
via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of INFORMATION ABOUT THE TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW
the media display or via a voice control command (availability of The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by
functions depending on respective country). displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is dis‐
played when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded
out when the vehicle drives off.
CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING
# Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible. DISPLAYING TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW
SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD Requirements
This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.
R The Traffic light view option is switched on.
434
R A traffic light view is available. If at speeds above approximately 12 km/h a vehicle is detected and this vehi‐
cle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the
warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic light view STATUS DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY
¸ Grey: the system is activated but inoperative.

% This function is not available in all countries.
¸ Green: the system is activated and operational.
If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic
light view is shown on the central display. If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you actuate the turn signal
indicator in its direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning
When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out. lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched
on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red
# Activate D or deactivate E Traffic light view.
warning lamp.
USING OTHER AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
# Select Z.
# Select On request or Automatic. WARNING

&
If On request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Please tap Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
here for traffic light view. message is displayed. The camera image is Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking
shown after confirmation of the message. you at a greatly different speed.
When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed
when the traffic light view is available. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐

Blind Spot Assist tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
FUNCTION OF BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH EXIT WARNING

Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the
wise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 391).
area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.
435
EXIT WARNING R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when
R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
stationary.
R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane
& WARNING
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar
Risk of accident despite exit warning
continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or the side for other traffic or obstacles.
road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed.
Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for exam‐
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. ple lorries, for a prolonged time.
# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.
opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.
Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is
coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly estab‐
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mir‐ lished.
ror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warn‐
ing tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. THE EXIT WARNING MAY BE LIMITED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking
When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to spaces
three minutes after switching the vehicle off. The exit warning is no longer R when people approach the vehicle
available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING BLIND SPOT ASSIST
occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving
Multimedia system:
the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
SYSTEM LIMITS # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
BLIND SPOT ASSIST MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
TIONS, IN PARTICULAR:
436
Active Lane Keeping Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means
of a multifunction camera, (/ page 391) and can protect you from departing
your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane by
course-correcting steering intervention, and warn you with tangible steering
wheel feedback. IN THE FOLLOWING CASES A WARNING 1 APPEARS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐
PLAY AND A WARNING TONE IS SOUNDED:
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h
and 200 km/h. R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist has a duration lon‐
ger than approximately ten seconds.
THE SYSTEM CAN INTERVENE IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:
R There are two or more steering interventions by the systems within
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. approximately three minutes, without steering action by the driver.
R One of your front wheels moves onto this lane marking.
You can set the sensitivity of the system in the Active Lane Keeping Assist set‐
If you activate the direction indicators, there is no steering intervention on that tings in order to determine the level of assistance. You can also determine
side. whether the system is to react to broken lane markings, or only to continuous
lane markings (/ page 439).
There is no steering intervention if you depart your lane without activating the
direction indicators but there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle in STATUS DISPLAYS OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
your own lane. ï White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched off.
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assistance Package: If the sys‐ If ESP® is switched off or a tyre pressure loss warning is given, Active
tem detects an obstacle, e.g. another vehicle, in the adjacent lane, there is a Lane Keeping Assist is automatically switched off.
steering intervention despite the direction indicators.
ï Yellow: There is a malfunction. Also note any display messages.
ð Grey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched on but not ready.
ð Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched on and ready.
ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane
by a course-correcting steering intervention. If a tangible warning is
437
also given in the steering wheel, the status display flashes. The lane THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
marking of the affected side is shown in red. SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
R if there is poor visibility, e.g. owing to insufficient road illumination,

highly variable shadows, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction
camera, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
R if the bumper is soiled in the area of the radar sensors, or if these are
damaged or obscured
Display in the driver display in the menu Assistance R if there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are pres‐
ent for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.
If one of your front wheels moves onto a recognised lane marking, this is high‐ R if the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
lighted in red in the Assistance menu in the driver display.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings
SYSTEM LIMITS cannot therefore be detected.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE MAY BE NO COURSE-CORRECT‐ R if the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one
ING STEERING INTERVENTION BUT A WARNING MAY BE GIVEN IN THE another or merge.
STEERING WHEEL DEPENDING ON THE SITUATION: R if the lanes are very narrow and winding.
R if you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.

R if a driving safety system is intervening, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist
R if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or
high rates of acceleration. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
Multimedia system:
established.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via
the vehicle quick-access y.
438
Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 420).

% Setting after vehicle start is country-dependent.
SETTING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

Multimedia system:
Function of adaptive damping adjustment
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance The suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continually adjusts the
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving
conditions.
SETTING THE SENSITIVITY
# Select Z. THE DAMPING IS SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH WHEEL AND IS AFFECTED
BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
# Select Early, Med. or Late.
R the road surface conditions
The setting last selected is adopted when the vehicle is next started. R the vehicle load
R the drive program selected
% The standard setting of this function is country-dependent. R the driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using DYNAMIC SELECT.

% The function may not be available on vehicles with Driving Assis‐
tance Package, depending on the country.
AMG RIDE CONTROL
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ASSISTANCE WHEN LANE MARKINGS ARE
INTERRUPTED FUNCTION OF AMG RIDE CONTROL
AMG RIDE CONTROL is an electronically controlled damping system for
# Select Advanced support.
improved driving comfort and increased driving safety.
The setting last selected is adopted when the vehicle is next started.
THE DAMPING IS ADJUSTED INDIVIDUALLY TO EACH WHEEL AND
DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
% The standard setting of this function is country-dependent.
R driving style, e.g. sporty
R road condition, e.g. undulations
% Depending on the country, this function must be activated in R individual selection of SPORT, SPORT + or COMFORT
order for the full scope of Emergency Stop Assist to be available.
439
The suspension tuning depends on the selected driving mode. # Press the upper or lower 1 display button repeatedly, until it displays
the ä symbol.
In each driving mode, you can also select the tuning individually using the
AMG steering wheel button (/ page 440). After every change of driving mode,
automatic suspension tuning is active again.
% When the vehicle is started again, the COMFORT setting is acti‐ played can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 332).
vated automatically.
# Press corresponding button 2.
SELECTING THE SUSPENSION SETTING
The selected suspension setting is shown in the driver's display as a
message.
% You can also adjust the suspension setting via the multimedia THE Ä SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY SELECTED MODE:
system (/ page 339).
R ä (blue): COMFORT
YOU CAN SELECT FROM THREE DIFFERENT SUSPENSION SETTINGS: R ä (yellow): SPORT
R ä (red): SPORT +
R COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspension setting. Select this sus‐
pension setting if you prefer a comfortable driving style.
R SPORT ensures a firmer suspension setting. Select this suspension set‐ RACE START
ting when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads. INFORMATION ABOUT RACE START
R SPORT + ensures a very firm suspension setting.
% RACE START is available only for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.
RACE START enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. A suitably

high-grip road surface is required for this, and the tyres and vehicle must also
be in good condition.
RACE START is only available after the vehicle has been run in.
440
R The vehicle is on level ground.

% RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE
R The vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) and the
START may be activated and used only on dedicated race cir‐
parking brake is released.
cuits, not on public roads.
Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 395).
R One of the C, B or I drive programs is selected (/ page 334).
% RACE START is available only for Mercedes-AMG vehicles and

& WARNING
must not be used during normal road operation. RACE START
may be activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not
If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP® mode selected, there is on public roads.
an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 395).
# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐
ity of your vehicle. # Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed will increase. The RACE START Release brake to start
message will appear on the driver's display.
ACTIVATING RACE START
& WARNING % In this phase, you can adjust RACE START depending on the road
conditions. You can vary the engine speed by pulling on one of
If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP® mode selected, there is the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The segments on the driver
an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. display will flicker rapidly.
# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐
ity of your vehicle.
% If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START
will be cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message will appear
Requirements on the driver display.

# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
R The engine is running and the transmission and engine are at normal
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START
operating temperature.
active message will appear on the driver display.
R The steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
441
RACE START will be deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator

pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions is no longer ful‐
filled. The RACE START cancelled message will appear on the driver display.
% After being used several times in short succession, RACE START

will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven.
Standard view
Reversing camera 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m
from the rear area
FUNCTION OF THE REVERSING CAMERA 2 Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle
The reversing camera serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐ (dynamic)
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐ 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
vring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no persons, animals
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
% The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as it

would appear in the inside rearview mirror.
VEHICLES WITHOUT PARKING PACKAGE

The following camera perspectives are available in the central display:
Wide-angle view
442
In addition, the message º Pedestrian! Deact. emerg. braking: press here

appears.
The driver can close or ignore this message. Pedestrian braking then remains
active. When the driver taps the message, pedestrian braking is momentarily
deactivated.
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE PEDESTRIAN BRAKING FUNCTION IS

Trailer view ACTIVATED AGAIN:
5 Yellow guide line, locating aid R The vehicle is travelling forward at over 16 km/h.
6 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of R The vehicle is switched off and on again.
the trailer hitch
7 Ball head of the trailer hitch
PEDESTRIAN BRAKING FUNCTION % If the function is unavailable or deactivated, the symbol º
appears in grey in the camera image.
% This function is only available in vehicles without the Parking
Package. Vehicles with the Parking Package are equipped with The pedestrian braking function serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute
manoeuvring assistant functions (/ page 459). for you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for
safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Ensure that no persons, ani‐
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
The pedestrian braking function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when
reversing the vehicle at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person
in the vehicle's path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.
THE PEDESTRIAN BRAKING FUNCTION CAN INTERVENE UNDER THE FOL‐

LOWING CONDITIONS:
R The vehicle is reversing at a speed below 15 km/h.

R The camera image is shown on the central display.
When automatic braking is triggered, the symbol º appears in red in the

camera image.
443
& WARNING
Risk of accident caused by limited detection of the pedestrian
braking function
The pedestrian braking function cannot always clearly detect people.
Other obstacles are not detected by the function.
In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. Menu Camera views
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely

1 Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle
on the pedestrian braking function alone.
(dynamic)
# Be ready to brake. 2 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Menu Parking Assistance
4 Reversing camera with Top View
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE PEDESTRIAN BRAKING FUNCTION
IS NOT AVAILABLE: 5 Wide-angle view
6 Trailer view
R on inclines 7 Activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 453)
R if transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to 8 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly estab‐ 9 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m
lished. from the rear area
R if the reversing camera is not operational A Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 450)
Please also note the system limits of the reversing camera. % When Active Parking Assist is active, paths 1 are displayed in
green (/ page 453).
VEHICLES WITH PARKING PACKAGE
444
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or
spray.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if a light is shining into the
camera.
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Observe the notes on
cleaning the reversing camera (/ page 689).
R The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the
Wide-angle view
camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
A Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 450)
% Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You

could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when park‐
ing the vehicle.
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted
due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle
Trailer view rack).
B Yellow guide line, locating aid

C Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or
the trailer hitch by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. Particu‐
lar attention must be afforded in this case.
D Ball head of the trailer hitch
SYSTEM LIMITS
If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message % Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, its use is
appears on the central display. considerably restricted due to pixel errors.
THE REVERSING CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION, OR WILL ONLY PARTI‐
ALLY FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: Observe also the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 391).
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.

R The tailgate is open.
445
360° Camera
FUNCTION OF THE 360° CAMERA
The 360° camera is a system comprising four cameras which cover the imme‐
diate vehicle surroundings. The cameras support you, for example, when park‐
ing or when exits are difficult to see.
THE 360° CAMERA INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING CAMERAS AND EVALU‐ Menu Camera views overview
ATES THEIR IMAGES:
1 Menu Parking Assistance
R Reversing camera
2 Top view with image from the front camera
R Front camera
3 Wide-angle view
R Two outside mirror cameras
4 Top view with image from the reversing camera
5 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors
The cameras serve solely as aids and may show a distorted view of obstacles, 6 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 453)
show them incorrectly or even omit them altogether. They are not a substitute
7 Set the GPS activation point
for you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for
safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no per‐
sons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and % The warning display of the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is shown
parking. in all views (/ page 450).
446
Function of the guide lines Top view with image from the outside mirror cameras
1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
from the rear area
2 Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle
(dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are
displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 453). Wide-angle view
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 450)

2 Top view with image from the reversing camera
3 Wide-angle view
If the top view with the reversing camera image is displayed, switch to the
wide angle view with the icon 2 indented to the left. When the wide-angle
view is displayed, switch back to the respective top view.
Top view with the image from the front or reversing camera
If you select the trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the fol‐
lowing display appears:
1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 450)
2 Your vehicle from above
3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle
447
SYSTEM LIMITS
If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message
appears on the central display.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to functional limitations of the 360° camera
Trailer view If the function of the 360° camera is restricted, there is a risk of colli‐
sion with persons or objects.
1 Switch between standard and trailer view
# Do not use the 360° camera in case of functional limitations.
2 Yellow guide line, locating aid
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch # Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
the trailer hitch
THE 360° CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION, OR WILL ONLY PARTIALLY FUNC‐
% In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the TION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
trailer hitch.
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.
R The doors are open.
When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the
trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. R An outside mirror is not completely extended.
R The tailgate is open.
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or
spray.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if a light is shining into the
camera.
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Refer to the notes on
cleaning the 360° camera (/ page 689).
Side view of outside mirror cameras in trailer view R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are
damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their set‐
1 Switch to the side view of the outside mirror cameras ting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
448
For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the gram F. Please also note the system limits of the respective
vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide functions.
lines and in the display of generated images.
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted FRONT AND REAR VIEW
due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle
rack).
% Contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sun‐

light or other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. Par‐
ticular attention must be afforded in this case.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, its use is

considerably restricted due to pixel errors.
Front and rear view display (example)

Observe also the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 391).
OFF-ROAD FUNCTION OF THE 360° CAMERA 1 Cardinal point

The 360° camera can support you with different views when driving off-road. 2 Switch camera perspective on or off
3 Activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 450)
THE FOLLOWING VIEWS ARE AVAILABLE:
4 Pitch display
R Front view 5 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle
R Rear view 6 Roll display
7 Altitude above sea level
To call up the function, call up the off-road menu in the multimedia system
(/ page 555). % Note that the area between the vehicle and up to approx. 1 m in
front of the vehicle is not displayed.
The slope and inclination indicators are only shown in the front
% Active Parking Assist, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC and the
view.
manoeuvring assistant functions are not available in drive pro‐
449
The camera image is closed if the vehicle is travelling faster than approx. OPENING THE CAMERA COVER
20 km/h - 30 km/h (depending on the drive program). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera
The reversing camera image is automatically displayed when you engage
reverse gear. # Select Open camera cover.
Observe the instructions on the 360° camera's function and its system limits.
% The camera cover closes automatically after some time, or after
Otherwise, you may fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 446).
the vehicle is switched on or off.
CALLING UP THE 360° CAMERA VIEWS USING THE BUTTON
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

FUNCTION OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which
monitors the area surrounding your vehicle . The distance between your vehi‐
cle and a detected obstacle is displayed visually and acoustically.
The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side.
These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper
while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and
there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued.
# Press button 1.
Passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multi‐
# Select Camera views menu. media system (/ page 453).
# Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 446). In order that front or rear obstacles to the side can be displayed, the vehicle
must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle
SELECTING A VIEW FOR THE 360° CAMERA (REVERSE GEAR) has travelled a distance of one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be
# Engage reverse gear. shown.
# Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 446). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for
you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no persons,
450
animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/ R Orange: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
exiting parking spaces. R Red: < 0.4 m
DISPLAYS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY
Vehicles with 360° camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending
on the position and distance of the obstacles detected.
An intermittent warning tone also sounds depending on the distance to the

obstacle detected. You can set the timing of the warnings on the multimedia
system. In the Warn early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 1 m.
In the standard setting, from a shorter distance of 0.4 m.
Vehicles with 360° camera
Vehicles with 360° camera
Vehicles with reversing camera
1 Ready for display at the front and rear

2 Ready for display all around
3 Ready for display all around and obstacle detection
As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective
areas 1 to 3 of the display are shown in blue.
Vehicles with reversing camera
THE COLOUR OF THE DISPLAY CHANGES DEPENDING ON THE DISTANCE
TO THE DETECTED OBSTACLE:
R Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)

R Yellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m
451
IF YOU ARE NOT IN THE CAMERA & PARKING MENU AND AN OBSTACLE IN OBSTACLES ON THE SIDES ARE NOT SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
THE VEHICLE PATH IS DETECTED, A POP-UP WINDOW 1 APPEARS ON TIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IF THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET:
R You park the vehicle and switch it off.
R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than R You open the doors.
12 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than
After the vehicle is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past
18 km/h.
them before a new warning can be issued.
OBSERVE ALSO THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

R 360° camera (/ page 446)
Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; otherwise the sys‐
tem cannot function properly (/ page 391).
Head-up display (example)
Vehicles with trailer hitch: If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle rack is
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly estab‐
of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m at the sides 3 can also be dis‐ lished, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone.
played on the head-up display.
PROBLEMS WITH PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
SYSTEM LIMITS If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three
PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC DOES NOT NECESSARILY TAKE INTO seconds and then goes out, and the é symbol appears on the driver dis‐
ACCOUNT THE FOLLOWING OBSTACLES: play, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start
the vehicle again and check whether Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works in a
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. different location.
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or
IF A WARNING TONE ALSO SOUNDS, THE CAUSES MAY BE AS FOLLOWS:
loading ramps of lorries.
R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side. R (/ page 689)The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors .
R Objects placed next to the vehicle R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunc‐
tion: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
452
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC SETTING THE WARNING TONES OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
* NOTE 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking 5 PARKTRONIC
Vehicle damage when parking or manoeuvring due to nearby
SETTING WARNING TONES
objects
# Select Set warning tones.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects in the close-
up range. # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone pitch.
# When parking or manoeuvring, pay particular attention to ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING AUDIO FADEOUT
objects that are under or above the sensors, e.g. flower pots # Select Audio fadeout and activate or deactivate Audio fade for warnings.
or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects may otherwise be The volume of the media source currently playing is reduced during a
damaged. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.
or
Requirements
# Select Audio fadeout and activate or deactivate Audio fadeout in trans.
R The camera menu is open. position R.
R Or: the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up window is displayed.
The volume of the media source currently playing is reduced when
reverse gear is engaged.
# Tap = on the central display. SETTING THE TIME OF THE WARNINGS
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator
# Select Time of warning.
lamp does not light up or the symbol é is displayed, Parking Assist # Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.
PARKTRONIC is not active.
# Activate or deactivate Side warning.
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the
vehicle is started.
Active Parking Assist
Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
the quick-access menu. Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses
ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° camera.
453
When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system auto‐ show the side of the roadway on which free parking spaces are located. These
matically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. are then shown on the central display.
Active Parking Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐ When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐ based on the calculated path of your vehicle. The procedure is assisted by
vring and parking remains with you. Ensure that no persons, animals or objects acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes when entering or exiting a
etc. are in the manoeuvring range. parking space.
Active Parking Assist offers the following functions: To start the parking procedure, press the button c (/ page 455).
VEHICLES WITH REVERSING CAMERA ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST WILL BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
TIONS:
R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the roadway
R Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to the roadway R You press the c button again.
R You begin steering.
The parking space is freely selectable. The parking procedure is executed with R You select park position j.
the vehicle reversing. R You engage the electric parking brake.
VEHICLES WITH 360° CAMERA

R ESP® intervenes.
R You open the driver's door.
R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the roadway
R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the roadway (either forwards SYSTEM LIMITS
or reversing as desired) If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.
R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such from mark‐ Objects above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g. pro‐
ings (for example at the roadside) truding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or parking space bounda‐
R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist ries are not detected when measuring the parking space. These are also not
subsequently taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In
some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may prematurely guide you into the
The parking space is freely selectable. The parking direction (forwards or
parking space or brake too late.
reversing) can also be freely selected, depending on the orientation of the
parking space. Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to
a parking space being mismeasured. Parking spaces that are partially occupied
If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç message appears in the driver
by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or may be measured incor‐
display. When the system detects parking spaces, È appears. The arrows
454
rectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level road surfaces with adequate R If the vehicle level has been offset, e.g. mounting the kerb on one side
grip. (vehicles with level control)
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐ PARKING WITH ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
tion range of Active Parking Assist
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, & WARNING
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE: Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
There is a danger of collision! R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
There is a danger of collision!

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking # In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
spaces in which parking is not permitted or on unsuitable surfaces.
DO NOT USE ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R In extreme weather conditions, such as ice, packed snow or in heavy

rain.
R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.
R When snow chains are fitted.
R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached
R Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
R On steep inclines of more than approximately 15 %.
# Press button1.
455
# Take your hands off the steering wheel.

The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking proce‐
dure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in
accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indi‐
cator accordingly.
Parking Assistance menu (example)
# Select Parking Assistance 2 menu. WARNING

&
Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐
Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are shown on the central display. ing out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can
drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking pro‐

cedure with Active Parking Assist.
Parking Assistance menu (example)
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the indicated vehicle path 4 into the cur‐ Following completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist fin-
rently selected parking space 5 also appears. ished display message appears.
# If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When necessitated by legal
requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
# If necessary, select another parking space.
# Vehicles with 360° camera: to change the parking direction, tap the % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position
selected parking space again. during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission
# To start the parking procedure: press button 1 again.
position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.
456
EXITING A PARKING SPACE WITH ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
There is a danger of collision! # Press button 1.

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
Requirements
R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera.

R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.
# Start the vehicle. Parking Assistance menu (example)
# Select Parking Assistance 2 menu.
# If necessary, change direction of exit 3.
# To initiate the unparking procedure: press button 1 again.
# If necessary, change the transmission position. Observe any messages

displayed on the driver display and central display.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
457
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when the unparking pro‐ PAUSING ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
cedure is initiated, and automatically switched off again when it is completed.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with WARNING
&
the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
& WARNING IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐ THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
ing out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can
drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. There is a danger of collision!
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking pro‐

cedure with Active Parking Assist. You can interrupt the parking or unparking procedure of Active Parking Assist
by performing one of the following actions, forexample:
After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Ø Active
# Depress the brake pedal.
Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message prompt you to take con‐ # Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the tailgate or the bonnet.
trol of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear your‐
self again. # Apply the electric parking brake or activate the HOLD function.
If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will # To resume the parking or unparking procedure: gently depress the
brake the vehicle to a standstill. accelerator pedal.
% If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking

Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal gently to
start the parking or unparking procedure.
458
Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking
procedure. Ensure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the
Manoeuvring assistant
manoeuvring range. Observe also the system limits of Active Parking Assist. FUNCTION OF DRIVE AWAY ASSIST
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If
AUTOMATIC BRAKING FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly
reduced to approx. 2 km/h. When a critical situation is detected, the symbol
& WARNING É appears in the central display.
Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
tion range of Active Parking Assist Drive Away Assist can be switched off or on in the menu Manoeuvring assis-
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, tance.
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
% You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time
by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
There is a danger of collision!

& WARNING
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive
Away Assist
Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring range could cause the vehicle Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic sit‐
to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will uations.
then be held at a standstill. The parking or exiting procedure is resumed if you # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
depress the accelerator pedal.
on Drive Away Assist alone.
Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exit‐ # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the
ing procedure. Ensure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the
traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive
manoeuvring range. Also, observe the system limitations of Active Parking
action.
Assist.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention
to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range.
459
A RISK OF A COLLISION MAY ARISE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, The Cross Traffic Alert function can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when
FOREXAMPLE: reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the
bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is
R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. detected, the L symbol appears on the central display and the vehicle can
R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged. be braked automatically.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is

THE DRIVE AWAY ASSIST FUNCTION IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING not possible.
CONDITIONS:
The Cross Traffic Alert function can be switched on or off in the Manoeuvring
R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. assistance menu depending on the respective country (/ page 462).
R If you shift the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary. THE CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT FUNCTION IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOW‐
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. ING CONDITIONS:
R Manoeuvring assistant is activated (/ page 462). R The vehicle is reversing at walking pace.
SYSTEM LIMITS
R Manoeuvring assistant is activated (/ page 462).
Drive Away Assist is not available in the drive program F.
The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Observe also the instructions on Blind Spot Assist (/ page 435).
Drive Away Assist is not available if a transport device, e.g. a trailer or bicycle
rack is attached to the trailer hitch, and the electrical connection is correctly SYSTEM LIMITS
established. The Cross Traffic Alert function is unavailable in drive program F.
The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available on inclines.

% Also, observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(/ page 450). If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle rack is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection is correctly established, the Cross Traffic Alert
function is not available.
FUNCTION OF CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
FUNCTION OF CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING
% The Cross Traffic Alert function is only available for vehicles with Close-range braking can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle
Blind Spot Assist. is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the
vehicle's path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.
460
CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING CAN INTERVENE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDI‐

TIONS: & WARNING
Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring
R The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h. brake function
R The camera image is shown in the central display (/ page 450). The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people.
Other obstacles are not detected by the function.
Depending on the country, close-range braking can be deactivated or activa‐
In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all.
ted in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 462).
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
When close-range braking is triggered, the symbol º appears in red in the on the manoeuvring brake function alone.
selected view in the menu Camera & parking.
# Be ready to brake.
% If close-range braking is not available, the symbol º appears
in grey. SYSTEM LIMITS
Close-range braking is not available in the drive program F.
Close-range braking serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐
OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
vring and parking remains with you. Ensure that no persons, animals or objects R Active Parking Assist (/ page 453)
etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
THE CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE FOL‐

LOWING SITUATIONS:
R on inclines
R If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached
established.
461
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING MANOEUVRING ASSISTANCE

Multimedia system: & WARNING
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers
Trailers with a steered axle or a fifth wheel cannot be used with Trailer
Manoeuvring Assist.
Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction
and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn.
% The Activating/deactivating Manoeuvering assistance function is
# Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with fixed
not available in all countries.
drawbars and axles.
# Select Manoeuvring assistance.
# Activate or deactivate the desired manoeuvring assistance. * NOTE

Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations
The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations.
FUNCTION OF TRAILER MANOEUVRING ASSIST # Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations
while manoeuvring.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. The
reversing camera monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and the
trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits
your speed.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you
having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no persons,
animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/
exiting parking spaces.
462
You can enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system,
or use a straightening or 90° manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening
manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and
straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction.
Observe the notes regarding trailer operation (/ page 465).
SYSTEM LIMITS
OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 453)

# Engage reverse gear k.
# Press button 1.
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING The camera image is shown on the central display.
SITUATIONS:
# Take your hands off the steering wheel.
R The gradient is greater than approximately 15 %.
USING TRAILER MANOEUVRING ASSIST

Requirements
R The vehicle has been started and is stationary.

R A trailer is selected in the Vehicle menu (/ page 470).
R A trailer has been detected.
R The gradient is less than approximately 15 %.
R The tailgate is closed. % This image is shown as an example and is without trailer.
R The electric parking brake is not applied.
R The driver's seat belt is fastened. You can select various manoeuvres in the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist menu.
The manoeuvres available depend on the trailer's current articulation angle
and length.
463
# To adjust the articulation angle: select 4. To change the articulation

angle, swipe to the left or right in the central display in the entire area of % Be aware of all surroundings and always remain ready to brake.
the camera image.
or
# To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select 2.

The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direc‐
tion of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short
countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversing to
guide it back to the desired line. This allows the vehicle to align with the
trailer, while at the same time maintaining the trailer's direction.
or
# To activate the 90° manoeuvre:

R Align the vehicle in the same direction (line) as the trailer.
R Select 3 (left or right).
The system calculates the articulation angle so that a trailer can be man‐
oeuvred into a driveway at the most acute angle possible when it is per‐
pendicular to its own vehicle. After the manoeuvre, the vehicle is aligned
again in the trailer's direction.
# Accelerate and brake as required.
% The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the

trailer. The system calculates this by driving the vehicle forwards,
including cornering. Before the trailer length has been calculated,
the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23°. The longer
the trailer, the greater the maximum articulation angle (max.
approximately 60°).
464
Driving and parking Trailer hitch
Trailer hitch
Notes on trailer operation & WARNING

Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving
* NOTE If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may
The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installa‐ start to swerve.
tion of trailer hitches
This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The
The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-remov‐
car/trailer combination may even overturn.
able trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited. # Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/
trailer combination by increasing your speed.
# Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of
trailer hitches. # Reduce the speed and do not countersteer.
# Brake if necessary.
* NOTE
Damage to the engine due to overheating
# If you have a trailer hitch retrofitted, modifications to the
engine cooling system may be necessary depending on the
vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the fastening points
on the vehicle frame.
465
Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your

vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for % When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the
trailer operation. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist function (/ page 462).
Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON THE TONGUE WEIGHT: Folding the ball neck out and in
R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible
tongue weight & WARNING
R use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.
DO NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING VALUES: # Always engage the ball neck as described.
R Permissible trailer load
R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
R Permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle & WARNING
Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
R Permissible gross mass of the trailer
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not
R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer
been properly engaged.
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY: There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!
R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maxi‐ # Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unob‐
mum load structed.
R the lighting of the connected trailer is operational # Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards.
R vehicles without LED headlamps or MULTIBEAM LED headlamps: the
headlamps have been set correctly
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination may not
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating
permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed
for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
466
FOLDING THE BALL NECK OUT

* NOTE
Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer
hitch, retract the ball neck.
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer
hitch itself may be damaged in the process.
# Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching
approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack). # Keep the swivel range clear.
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fix‐
# Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
ture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is per‐
mitted. # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
# When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper.
information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
eye."
467
# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in
a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check
lock message will appear on the driver's display.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased
or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
FOLDING THE BALL NECK IN

# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly
behind the bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the driver display will
disappear.
OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT INDICATORS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐
PLAY:

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer

# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF
The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper.
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:
Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position.
TRAILERS WITH A 7-PIN PLUG CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE VEHICLE

WITH THE FOLLOWING ADAPTERS:
R adapter plug
468
R adapter cable COUPLING UP A TRAILER
THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF * NOTE

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET: Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can
R the trailer is connected correctly damage the starter battery.
R the trailer lighting system is in working order
# Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer
battery.
A CORRECTLY CONNECTED TRAILER INFLUENCES, AMONG OTHER
THINGS, THE FUNCTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:
R ESP® trailer stabilisation
R Trailer Manoeuvring Assist # Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
R Active Lane Keeping Assist # Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC to the vehicle.
R Active Parking Assist
R Blind Spot Assist
R Drive Away Assist
R Cross Traffic Alert
R Manoeuvring brake function
R Reversing camera
R 360° Camera
# Open the socket cap.
# Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on the socket.
# Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as it will go.
# Let the cap engage.
469
# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an
adapter cable). * NOTE
Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake
# Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during
The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun
cornering.
brake.
IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES, A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR ON THE
DRIVER'S DISPLAY EVEN IF THE TRAILER HAS BEEN CONNECTED COR‐ # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.
RECTLY:
R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum cur‐ # Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
rent (50 mA).
# Uncouple the trailer.
% Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply # Place the cover on the ball head.
up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the
ignition lock. % Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch
the vehicle on and then off again.
UNCOUPLING A TRAILER
& WARNING Selecting a trailer type

Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a
trailer Multimedia system:
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Trailer type
hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. CONFIGURING SETTINGS FOR A TRAILER
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. The settings on this menu make it possible to calculate a route suitable for the
selected trailer and optimise the calculated arrival time.
# Select the desired trailer type.
# Select the maximum permissible speed of the selected trailer.
# To save changes: select Confirm.
470
% When contact with the trailer socket is established (trailer/rear

bicycle rack), a menu will automatically appear on the display.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R Bicycle rack
R Small trailer
R Large trailer
471
Driving and parking Bicycle rack function
Bicycle rack function
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or
THE BICYCLE RACK MAY BECOME DETACHED FROM THE VEHICLE improperly used bicycle rack.
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: # Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly
as described below.
R the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head.
* NOTE
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY AND THAT OF Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
OTHER ROAD USERS: # When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer
R always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. hitch, retract the ball neck.
R always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi‐
cle.
R use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles.
* NOTE
R always properly secure the bicycle rack by attaching it to the ball The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installa‐
head. tion of trailer hitches
R use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-remov‐
R always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions. able trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited.
# Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of

trailer hitches.
472
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible

across the vehicle's longitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g.

baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the
bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of grav‐
ity of the bicycle rack.
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check
them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up to three bicycles can be transpor‐
may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the
ted on the bicycle rack.
trailer hitch will increase.
When mounted by being attached to ball head 1, the maximum load capacity
is 75 kg.
The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack
and the bicycle rack load.
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle
(/ page 316).
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear Load distribution on the bicycle rack
axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
the tyre pressure table (/ page 730). 2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis
NOTES ON LOADING
The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, Observe the following information when you are loading the bicycle rack with
the greater the load on the trailer hitch. up to three bicycles:
THEREFORE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible
473
LOADING THE BICYCLE RACK

Total weight of bicycle rack Max. distance 1 Max. distance 2
and load
Up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm
474
Driving and parking Vehicle towing instructions
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat
towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems
may result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow
bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing
vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
R Permitted towing methods (/ page 714)

R Plug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods (/ page 715)
R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
(/ page 69)
Back to Contents475
Driver's display
Driver's display
Overview of status indicators on the driver

Notes on the driver display 477 500
display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Operating the driver display 478
Driver display menus 480
Head-up display 494
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

496
system
Function of the power meter 497
Overview of status indicators on the driver

498
display
Driver's display Notes on the driver display
Notes on the driver display
Some menu content and settings can be changed (/ page 481).

& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver's display fails
If the driver's display fails or malfunctions, you may not be aware of any
functional limitations to safety-critical systems. This may affect the
operating safety of the vehicle.
# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a quali‐

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immedi‐
ately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
THE DRIVER DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING BASIC INFORMATION:
R Speed and engine speed

R Fuel level and coolant temperature
R Indicator and warning lamps
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
R Various menus, such as Assistance and Navigation

R Status displays for the driving systems
R Display messages
R Power meter level and state of charge of the high-voltage battery
R Indicator and warning lamps
477
Driver's display Operating the driver display
Operating the driver display
SCROLLING ON THE MENU BAR

& WARNING
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐

mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying

attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ment with the vehicle stationary.
1 Back button
2 Main menu button
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv‐ 3 Touch Control
ing when operating the driver display.
You can manage the content of the driver display with the controls on the left
of the steering wheel. You can navigate the content by swiping vertically and
horizontally with one finger on Touch Control 3. Press the Touch Control to
confirm your selection.
% To operate Touch Control 3 in the most effective way, use the

tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of
the Touch Control on the central display (/ page 518).
478
Driver's display Operating the driver display
# Briefly press main menu button 2.
# Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.
# To confirm: press Touch Control 3.
479
Driver's display Driver display menus
Driver display menus
Notes on menus on the driver display R Offroad (vehicles with 4MATIC)

R Service
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE
& WARNING
equipment On some of these menus, you can choose from a range of information for the
centre display content.
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. the menu-specific display content.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
mits.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv‐
ing when operating the driver display.
THE FOLLOWING MENUS CAN BE CALLED UP VIA THE MENU BAR ON THE
DRIVER DISPLAY:
R Understated
R Sport
R Classic
R Navigation
R Assistance
480
Calling up and operating menus on the driver # Press main menu button 2 on the steering wheel.
The menu bar will be shown in the lower area of the driver display.
display
CALLING UP A MENU ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Swipe to the left or right on Touch Control 3 and select a menu (e.g.
the Classic menu) on the menu bar.

CALLING UP OR EXITING THE OPTIONS SUBMENU
# To call up: press Touch Control 3.
# To exit: press back button 1.

BROWSING THROUGH DISPLAY CONTENT OR LISTS
# Swipe vertically or horizontally on Touch Control 3.
% On some menus, an index character will be displayed at the right

edge of the centre display content to indicate how the informa‐
tion has been sorted.
PRESETTING DISPLAYS
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
You can preset individually configured information of a menu and thus deter‐
1 Back button mine the standard display.
2 Main menu button
3 Touch Control
481
# Press Touch Control 3 until the bar is completely filled.

Answer the Set direct entry? query as follows.
# Swipe to the left on Touch Control 3 and select Yes.
# To call up presettings: press back button 1 on the upper level of a

menu.
% Pressing back button 1 on the standard display will open the

previous menu. 1 Speedometer
2 Rev counter or clock
RESETTING VALUES 3 Transmission position
# To call up the Options submenu: press Touch Control 3. 4 Coolant temperature display
5 Outside temperature
# Select Yes .
6 Centre display content (example: trip distance)
# To confirm: press Touch Control 3. 7 Time
8 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator
Classic or Understated menu # Call up the Classic menu via the driver display menu bar.
Driver display:
# To select display content: Swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch
Control and select the display content.
4 Classic
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION CAN BE SHOWN IN THE CENTRE DIS‐
SELECTING THE CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT PLAY CONTENT 6:
The Classic menu shows the driver display separated into speedometer and
rev counter. The area in between can be filled with various types of informa‐ R Trip and total distance
tion. R Trip computer From start and From reset
R ECO display
R Consumption
R ATTENTION ASSIST
482
R Audio INFORMATION ON THE PROPORTION OF DRIVING DONE IN ELECTRIC

R Navigation MODE
R When the proportion of driving done in electric mode is determined, only

distances driven under the following conditions will be taken into
account:
- The combustion engine is switched off.
- The Electric or Hybrid drive program is active.
- The high-voltage battery is charged.
Trip computer (example) Distances travelled under electric power in the Battery Level drive program or
with an empty high-voltage battery will not be taken into account in the pro‐
1 Proportion of driving done in electric mode (distance travelled under elec‐
portion of driving done in electric mode.
tric power per total distance travelled)
INFORMATION ABOUT RANGE
% To increase the proportion of driving done in electric mode,
R The actual range achieved may differ from the range displayed. Your pre‐ charge the high-voltage battery as frequently as possible at a
vious driving style will be taken into account when the range is being cal‐ suitable charging facility.
culated.
R Factors such as outside temperature or climate control settings have a SELECTING THE RADIO STATION OR TRACK ON THE STATION OR TRACK
direct influence on the achievable range. LIST
R While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional You can change radio stations or tracks on the station or track list in the centre
information about the route ahead can be included in the range calcula‐ display content with audio information.
tion.
THE FOLLOWING WILL BE ADJUSTED IN THE MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:
INFORMATION ON ELECTRIC ENERGY CONSUMPTION R Configuring the station or track list

R Switching between media sources
R The From start and From reset consumption figures take into account all
R Setting the frequency band
active consumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's opera‐
tional readiness õ.
483
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUB‐

MENU, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map set‐
tings
R Resetting the trip odometer
R Resetting the trip computer From start
R Resetting the trip computer From reset
R Resetting the ECO display values
CHANGING COLOUR SETTINGS ON THE UNDERSTATED MENU

1 Track list in the centre display content (example) # Call up the Understated menu via the driver display menu bar.
# To change radio stations or tracks: swipe left or right on the Touch # To call up the colour list: press the Touch Control.
Control and select a radio station or track on the station or track list 1.
The colour list on the Understated menu will be displayed.
% If you do not select something immediately after opening the # To select colour settings: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
station or track list 1, the view will return to the radio station or hand Touch Control and select the desired colour setting.
track selected.
% If you do not select anything within a limited time after opening

% The radio station or track displayed when the vehicle is restarted the colour list, the view will switch back to the default view of
depends on the user profile used for the previous trip. the Understated menu.
CALLING UP OR EXITING THE OPTIONS SUBMENU # To exit the colour list: press the back button G.
Depending on the information in the centre display content, you can configure
various settings on the Options submenu. % Depending on the equipment, the selected colour setting will be
# To call up the Options submenu: press the Touch Control. adopted for the ambient lighting and the MBUX multimedia sys‐
tem. If you select the Understated menu on the driver display, the
# To exit the Options submenu: press the back button G. content in the MBUX multimedia system will also be made
smaller.
484
Classic or Understated menu (Mercedes-AMG # To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select the display content.
vehicles) THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION CAN BE DISPLAYED ON THE CENTRE DIS‐
PLAY CONTENT:
Driver display:
4 Classic R Trip and total distance
SELECTING THE CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT R Trip computer From start and From reset
The Classic menu shows the driver display separated into speedometer and R ECO display
rev counter. The area in between can be filled with various types of informa‐ R Consumption
tion. R ATTENTION ASSIST
R Audio
R Navigation
R Temperature (transmission oil, engine oil and coolant)
R Setup
R Engine data
% Depending on the equipment, AMG-specific content regarding

temperature, set-up and engine data will be displayed. You can
configure the set-up display content either using the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia
1 Speedometer
2 Rev counter
3 Gear display
SELECTING THE RADIO STATION OR TRACK ON THE STATION OR TRACK
4 Coolant temperature display
LIST
5 Outside temperature You can choose radio stations or tracks on the station or track list in the centre
6 Centre display content in the Classic menu (example: temperature) display content with audio information.
7 Time
THE FOLLOWING WILL BE ADJUSTED IN THE MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:
8 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator
# Call up the Classic menu via the driver display menu bar. R Configuring the station or track list
485
R Switching between media sources THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUB‐
R Setting the frequency band MENU, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map set‐
tings
R Resetting the trip odometer
R Resetting the trip computer From start
R Resetting the trip computer From reset
R Resetting the ECO display values
CHANGING COLOUR SETTINGS ON THE UNDERSTATED MENU

1 Track list in the centre display content (example) # Call up the Understated menu via the driver display menu bar.
# To change radio stations or tracks: swipe left or right on the Touch
Control and select a radio station or track on the station or track list 1. # To call up the colour list: press the Touch Control.
The colour list on the Understated menu will be displayed.
% If you do not select something immediately after opening the # To select colour settings: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
station or track list 1, the view will return to the radio station or hand Touch Control and select a colour setting.
track selected.
% If you do not select something immediately after opening the

% The radio station or track displayed when the vehicle is restarted colour list, the view will switch back to the default view for the
depends on the user profile used for the previous trip. Understated menu.
CALLING UP OR EXITING THE OPTIONS SUBMENU # To exit the colour list: press the back button G.
The functions in the Options submenu depend on the selected centre display
content.
% Depending on the equipment, the selected colour setting will be
# To call up the Options submenu: press the Touch Control. adopted for the ambient lighting and the MBUX multimedia sys‐
tem. If you select the Understated menu on the driver display, the
# To exit the Options submenu: press the back button G. content in the MBUX multimedia system will also be made
smaller.
486
Service menu Assistance menu

Driver display: Driver display:
4 Service 4 Assistance
The current status of the vehicle is shown on the Service menu. The Assistance menu displays various driver assistance systems and naviga‐
tion instructions.
# To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT IS AVAILABLE ON THE SERVICE
# To call up the display: select Assistance on the driver display.
MENU (EQUIPMENT-DEPENDENT): # Press the Touch Control.
R Information about how many messages are in the message memory
R AdBlue: AdBlue® range and fill level
R Tyre pressure:
- Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 733)
- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (/ page 731)
- Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 731)
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC indicator on the assistant display (exam‐
R ASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date (/ page 671)
ple)
R Engine oil level: checking the engine oil level (/ page 39)
IN VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOW‐
R Coolant indicator ING DISPLAYS MAY VARY DEPENDING ON THE DRIVING SITUATION:
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: temperature display (transmission oil, engine
oil and coolant) R The navigation instructions in the left-hand display section
R The traffic light view in the right-hand display section
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU: R The display of the driver assistance systems
R The level of detail on the assistant display
R Tyre pressure (/ page 731)
R Message memory (/ page 834) In vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package, your lane and the vehicle
in front will be displayed.
487
THE FOLLOWING STATUS DISPLAYS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE ASSISTANT

DISPLAY:
Sport menu
Driver display:
R Y Green: pedestrian detection active
4 Sport
R Y Grey: pedestrian detection enabled
The Sport menu provides information about the engine data of the vehicle.
R ¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist is enabled and
ready for operation
R ¸ Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist is enabled but % When you call up the Sport menu on the menu bar of the driver
not ready for operation display, the menu colour setting will automatically be applied to
the MBUX multimedia system.
THE CONTENT ON THE ASSISTANT DISPLAY WILL ADAPT TO THE FOLLOW‐

ING SITUATIONS:
R Number of lanes detected

R Change of direction, e.g. lane change
R Current road conditions
R Road users detected
% The assistant display will not display other detected obstacles 1 Current torque
with the exception of road users.
2 G-meter
3 Current power output
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU: 4 Boost pressure
R Starting route guidance 5 Engine oil temperature
R With active route guidance: end route guidance 6 Engine speed
R Call up previous destinations and favourites
R Start new route guidance to a recent destination
R Start new route guidance to a favourite
488
Sport menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Sport menu (plug-in hybrid)

Driver display: Driver display:
4 Sport 4 Sport
The Sport menu displays information about the engine data, the setup and the The Sport menu provides additional information about the operating energy as
temperature of the vehicle. well as the recuperated power of the vehicle.
# To call up the menu: swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control.
% When you call up the Sport menu on the menu bar of the driver
display, the menu colour setting will automatically be applied to
the MBUX multimedia system.
1 Current torque
2 Temperature (transmission oil temperature, engine oil temperature, coolant
temperature)
4 Set-up (drive position, transmission position, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension
tuning, exhaust system, ESP®) 1 Display area for recuperated power (recuperation)
5 Engine speed 2 Display area for output
3 Additional display area for output
% Depending on the equipment, AMG-specific content regarding
temperature, setup and engine data will be displayed. You can
set the setup display content using the buttons on the multifunc‐
Supersport menu
tion steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system Requirements
(/ page 339). You can also activate or deactivate ESP® using the
steering-wheel button or via the MBUX multimedia system. R For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.
489
Driver display: R Navigation

4 Supersport
# To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch
Control. % Depending on the equipment, AMG-specific content regarding
temperature, setup and engine data will be displayed. You can
set the setup display content using the buttons on the multifunc‐
tion steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system
(/ page 339).
Track Pace menu

1 Current torque Requirements
2 Centre display content (example: setup)
R For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.
Driver display:
% The displays for current torque 1 and current power 3 vary
4 TRACK PACE
depending on the display content in the centre display area.
The Track Pace function is intended only for closed race tracks. Do not use this
function on public roads, and adapt your driving style to your personal capa‐
THE CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: bilities and the ambient conditions.
R Gear display THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS WILL BE DISPLAYED ON THE TRACK PACE
R Temperature display (transmission oil, engine oil, coolant) MENU:
R Engine data
R G-meter
R Setup
R Race track selected
R G-force
R Braking and acceleration procedure
R Trip and total distance
R Gear currently selected
R Distance From start and From reset
R Consumption
R Audio
490
Off-road menu
Driver display:
4 Offroad
AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MENU SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMA‐
TION:
Indicators on the Track Pace menu (example) R Steering angle

1 G-meter R Elevation above sea level
2 Centre display content (example: gear display) R Compass with direction of travel
3 Telemetry display (example: selected race track) R Coordinates
THE CONTENT OF THE TRACK PACE MENU WILL ADAPT TO THE SELECTED # To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
SETTINGS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:
R Gear display
R Braking points
R Acceleration
R Quarter-miles
R Race track selected on the central display
R Current race
R Record route
Navigation menu
While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter will show the forces that are exer‐ Driver display:
ted on the vehicle occupants both laterally and in the direction of travel. The 4 Navigation
maximum values will be shown in red in the coordinate system. The Navigation menu shows the relevant map with navigation instructions.
491
CHANGING THE SCALE OF THE SELECTED MAP VIEW THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:
R With active route guidance: end route guidance

R Select route guidance
R Map settings
% If the current route guidance is ended on the Navigation menu of

the driver display, it will also be ended in the MBUX multimedia
1 Distance to the change of direction system.
2 Road to which the change of direction leads
3 Traffic incident indicator On the Options submenu, you can use other functions in the Destinations and
4 Currently selected route Map settings categories.
5 Indicator showing vehicle's current position
YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IN THE DESTINATIONS CATE‐
6 Change-of-direction symbol
GORY:
7 Recommended lane (white)
8 Lane not recommended (grey) R Call up previous destinations and favourites
9 Current lane R Start new route guidance to a favourite
% The level of detail in the navigation instructions in the left-hand

display section may vary. % The two options Work and Home will be displayed in Favourites
even if no address is stored.
# To zoom in and out on the map directly: swipe upwards or downwards

on the Touch Control. YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IN THE MAP SETTINGS CATE‐
GORY:
% If you do not operate anything in Autozoom, the system will reset R Activate auto zoom
the scale of the map view already selected after a short time. R Set the map view, satellite view and route overview.
You can set the map scale permanently in the MBUX multimedia
492
THE FOLLOWING MAP VIEWS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE NAVIGATION MENU:
R Entire route
R 2D direction of travel
R 2D north-up
R 3D map
493
Driver's display Head-up display
Head-up display
Function of the head-up display HEAD-UP DISPLAY CONTENT WITH NAVIGATION (6X2°)
The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision,
for example.
YOU CAN USE THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY MENU BAR TO SELECT DIFFERENT
CONTEXTS, E.G.:
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport

R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE 1 Detected instructions and traffic signs
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Race 2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event)
R Minimal 3 Steer Assist status
R Sport 4 Current speed
R Standard 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
R Settings SYSTEM LIMITS
R Head-up display on/off VISIBILITY IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IN PARTIC‐
ULAR:
R Seat position
R Image position setting
R Light conditions
R Wet road surfaces
R Objects on the display cover
R Polarisation in sunglasses
494
Driver's display Head-up display
Operating the head-up display # Press the G or a button to exit the settings.
SELECTING DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY VIA THE MENU

BAR OF THE DRIVER DISPLAY Switching the head-up display on/off
# Press the main menu button ò. Driver display:
# To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the 4©
Touch Control. SWITCHING ON
SWITCHING BETWEEN DISPLAY CONTENT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY # Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
# Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control.
# Press Touch Control a.
A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up
display. SWITCHING OFF
# Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
# To confirm: press the a button.
SWITCHING BACK TO THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Swipe on the Touch Control and select Head-up display.
# Press the G or ò button. # Press Touch Control a.
SETTING THE POSITION AND BRIGHTNESS
# Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control and select Settings on the
menu bar of the head-up display.
Setting the head-up display in the multimedia
system
# Press the Touch Control.
The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graph‐ Multimedia system:
ics on the head-up display as well as on the driver display. 4© 5ß 5y
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch Con‐ SWITCHING THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY ON/OFF
trol. # Select Head-up display.
The head-up display is activated or deactivated.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the Touch Con‐
trol.
The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved auto‐
matically.
495
Driver's display Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
1 Electric drive support

2 Recuperation behaviour of the electric motor
% Due to various system limits, the values displayed may tempora‐

rily differ slightly from the actual value.
496
Driver's display Function of the power meter
Function of the power meter
% Due to various system limits, displayed value 4 may temporarily

differ slightly from the actual value.
1 Start of the POWER display range

2 End of the POWER display range
3 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
4 Maximum recovered energy
5 Start of the display range of the recovered energy
THE POWER METER HAS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R In electric mode, area 1 – 2 shows what percentage of the electrical

drive is currently being used. The combustion engine is switched on at a
percentage of 100%. In boost mode, the electrical power assistance of
the drive is displayed.
R The area 4 – 5 shows the recuperation and charging behaviour using
the combustion engine.
497
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display
Overview of status indicators on the driver display
The status indicators for the driving and driving safety systems are shown in Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
the 1 and 4 areas. (/ page 408)
æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 426)
Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 426)
Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 418)
ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 437)
Z Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only)
Z Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only)
õ Plug‑in hybrid operation activated

Y Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only)
° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 328, 325)
Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 455)
è ECO start/stop function (/ page 322)
È Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space (/ page 455)
ë HOLD function (/ page 400)
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 453)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 277)
h Cruise control (/ page 404)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 278)
È Limiter (/ page 405)
ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 408)
¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist
498
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display
Ò Slippery road surface warning
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 427)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 430)
Important information from other driving systems may briefly appear in front
of the displayed traffic signs.
499
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles)
The status indicators for the driving and driving safety systems are shown in é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 453)
the 1 and 6 areas.
h Cruise control (/ page 404)
È Limiter (/ page 405)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 408)
Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 408)
æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 426)
Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 426)
Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 418)
% The number, position and presentation of the status indicators ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 437)
on the driver display depend on which systems are activated or
deactivated. Z Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only)
è ECO start/stop function (/ page 322)

DEPENDING ON THE EQUIPMENT, MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES HAVE THE
FOLLOWING STATUS DISPLAYS: ë HOLD function (/ page 400)
Y Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 277)
Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 455) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 278)
È Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space (/ page 455) ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
500
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist
Ò Slippery road surface warning
p Engine operating temperature warning lamp (/ page 315)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 427)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 430)
Important information from other driving systems may briefly appear in front
of the displayed traffic signs.
Back to Contents501

Notes on operating safety 503
Operation 504
Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively 507
Essential voice commands 509

MBUX Voice Assistant Notes on operating safety
Notes on operating safety
FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS

WHEN OPERATING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND ESPE‐
CIALLY YOUR VOICE CONTROL SYSTEM:
R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can
change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be
delayed.
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before start‐
ing the journey.
% The voice control system does not replace the Owner's Man‐
ual.
The answers from the voice control system do not provide the
complete scope of information contained in the Owner's Manual.
The voice control system also does not give detailed warning or
damage information. Therefore read the Owner's Manual so that
you are fully informed about the functions and the safe operation
of the vehicle.
503
MBUX Voice Assistant Operation
Operation
Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant For the dialogue with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete senten‐
ces of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: combined directly with a voice command, e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it
outside?
Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the
MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navigation or INTERRUPTING THE DIALOGUE
Telephone. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational about half a minute after # During the dialogue say Pause.
switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats (depending on the The dialogue is interrupted.
special equipment).
# Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.
Conducting a dialogue CORRECTING AN ENTRY

# During the dialogue say Correction.
Requirements
or
R Voice activation is activated in the multimedia system (/ page 505).
# Interrupt the system's voice output.
R For corrections during output, the Voice barge-in option must be activa‐
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 505). CHANGING DIALOGUE LEVEL
# During the dialogue, say Back.
STARTING A DIALOGUE The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps back to the previous dialogue step.
# Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX Voice Assistant.
# During the dialogue, say From the beginning again.
or The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps to the highest dialogue level.
NAVIGATING IN THE SELECTION LIST
# Press the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
If a voice command does not achieve a clear result, a selection list is shown.
A wave appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can be
started.
504
# Say the line number or the content to select an entry or to have further Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with acti‐
details shown. vation of online voice control (/ page 505).
# Say Next page or Previous page to browse the selection list.

CALLING UP HELP Information on the language setting
# For information about the MBUX Voice Assistant: say Hey Mercedes, You can change the language of the MBUX Voice Assistant via the system lan‐
what can you do? guage settings (/ page 541). If the set system language is not supported by
# Current application: say Help. the MBUX Voice Assistant, English will be selected.
You will receive suggestions and information about operation of MBUX

Voice Assistant for the current application. Setting functions of MBUX Voice Assistant
# Specific function: call up the voice command for the required function, using the multimedia system
for example with Hey Mercedes, I need help with the radio.
Multimedia system:
# Digital Owner's Manual: say Show me the Owner's Manual. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Voice assistant
The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available on the media
SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION OF MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT ON OR OFF
display when the vehicle is stationary.
# Select Hey Mercedes.
When the function is active, the Hey Mercedes voice command can acti‐
Overview of the operable functions of the vate the dialogue.
MBUX Voice Assistant SWITCHING DIRECT COMMANDS ON OR OFF
# Select Z.
YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOW‐
ING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT: # Activate or deactivate the function.
R Telephone If the function is active, some commands can be used without Hey
Mercedes, for example Next track.
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION FOR INDIVIDUAL SEATS ON OR OFF
R Radio and media # Select Z.
R Vehicle functions # Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.
R Online functions
505
SWITCHING VOICE INTERRUPTION ON OR OFF

# Select Further settings.
# Select Voice barge-in.

If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice out‐
put of the system.
SWITCHING PROACTIVITY ON OR OFF
# Select Further settings.
# Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate your profile or Don't forget your
phone.
When the function is active, the voice assistant proactively provides
information in specific situations.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ONLINE VOICE CONTROL
% Online voice control is activated at the factory.
# Select Online recognition.

If the function is activated and a Mercedes me user account is linked to
the vehicle, additional results are available through the provision of
external information, e.g. information on POIs. By clicking the symbol in
the wave, more information about the online voice control can be dis‐
played.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING CONTACTS FOR ONLINE USE
# Select Contact upload for online recognition.
When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and
accurately using voice input.
506
MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively
Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively
Notes on optimum use of the MBUX Voice Information on the MBUX online voice assis‐
Assistant tant
R The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational half a minute after switching on The online voice control facilitates recognition and thanks to external informa‐
the vehicle and can be operated from all seats, depending on the equip‐ tion makes additional results available.
ment installed. The system recognises from which seat the command
was spoken and performs actions according to the seat position. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control
(/ page 505).
R When a dialogue is ended, the MBUX Voice Assistant continues to be
active for as long as the wave is displayed in the multimedia system. You You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a
can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes. user account you must create one and connect it with your vehicle
R Using the direct command Change language to English, the system lan‐ (/ page 635).
guage can be changed to English without Hey Mercedes. Direct com‐
mands must be activated for this. Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are
shown and can be activated (/ page 635).
R If a user profile has been stored and is active, the MBUX Voice Assistant
can make suggestions based on the habits of the user. If the voice com‐ By clicking on the symbols displayed in the wave, further information on the
mands are not clear, the system selects an action. The action can be cor‐ online status is displayed.
rected with a new voice command.
Say Hey Mercedes, load my personal profile, to activate the profile. The WHEN ONLINE VOICE CONTROL IS ACTIVE, ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE
user's voice must first be taught in by the system and assigned to a pro‐ AVAILABLE SUCH AS:
file.
R Weather
Further information on user profiles (/ page 526).
R General knowledge
R With the MBUX Voice Assistant, incoming calls can be accepted or rejec‐
R Public holidays and school holidays
ted without the keyword Hey Mercedes.
R Smarthome
R Messages
R Time, date and time zones
507
MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively
R Pocket and currency calculator

R Football results and fixture lists
R Share prices
R Calendar
R ChitChat
R Horoscope
R Geo Quiz
% The availability of these functions is country and equipment-

dependent.
% Text content is taken from Wikipedia in accordance with the CC

BY-SA 3.0 licence.
508
MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands
Essential voice commands
Notes on voice commands R Where is the nearest service station?

R Is there a service area along the route?
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: R Set Covent Garden as intermediate destination.
It is not necessary to use exact voice commands to call up a specific function. R Cancel the route guidance.
The MBUX Voice Assistant also understands you when you use your colloquial R Show my last destination.
speech. Some examples are listed below. For some languages however these R I want to buy juice.
examples are only available to a limited extent. R Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South London.
EXAMPLES OF VOICE COMMANDS:
R Navigation (/ page 509) Examples of telephone voice commands

R Telephone (/ page 509) You can operate phones connected with the MBUX multimedia system using
R Radio and TV (/ page 510) the MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the
R Media player (/ page 510) possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you
say Help for phone.
R Messages (/ page 511)
R Vehicle functions (/ page 511) R Call Peter Miller on the mobile phone.
R Online functions (/ page 512) R Dial 0711 17 0.
R Call my father.
Accept call
Examples of navigation voice commands R
R Reject call
You can operate the navigation system using the MBUX Voice Assistant. The R Search for the contact Peter Miller.
following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation com‐ R Switch to address book
mands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation.
R Show me the incoming calls.
R Drive me home. R Switch phone
509
Overview of radio voice commands lowing list offers just a small selection of the possible radio voice commands.
You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for radio.
Radio voice commands can also be used when the radio application is running
in the background and another application is visible in the foreground. The fol‐
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS

Voice command Colloquial example Function
Radio station <station name> I'd like to select the radio station "Cool FM" Selects the radio station.
Radio frequency <Frequency> Go to station/radio frequency "eighty seven point Enters a radio frequency, e.g. in the FM frequency band.
five megahertz".
Next radio station Call up the next radio station Calls up the next radio station from the station list.
Previous station Switch to the last radio station/to the previous pro- Switches to the previous radio station.
gram
Save radio station Please save the radio station Saves the radio station currently playing.
Show radio station list Show me the list of all radio stations, please Shows the radio list with the radio stations that can currently be received.
Read out channel list I'd like to listen to the station list, please Reads out the radio list with the radio stations that can currently be received.
Traffic information on Switch on the traffic info Switches on traffic announcements.
Traffic information off I'd like to switch off traffic info Switches off traffic announcements.
Radio info on I want you to turn on additional radio station text Switches on the radio text information for the radio station currently playing.
Radio info off I want you to turn off additional radio station text Switches off the radio text information for the radio station currently playing.
Change to radio favourites Please show me the list of all favourite radio stations Shows the favourites with the saved radio stations.
Examples of media voice commands media voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help
for media or Help for player.
You can operate connected media sources and online music using the MBUX
R Play Michael Jackson.
Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible
510
R Play "Yellow Submarine' by the Beatles.

% If no seat is mentioned for commands, the action is carried out
R Next track.
automatically for the seat from which the command was spoken
R Previous track. or for the function which is closest to that seat.
R Play similar track.
R Repeat this track. R Switch the seat heating to level 2.
R Switch on random playback. R My feet are cold.
R Mute the music. R Start the Refresh programme.
R Switch to USB. R Switch the massage function on.
R I would like to set the ambient light to blue
Examples of message voice commands R Switch on the reading lamp.
R Turn off the rear light.
Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the MBUX Voice Assis‐
R Open all the windows.
tant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible message
voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for R Switch the driver display to 3D.
messaging. R How fast can I drive here?
R Tell me my next service appointment
R Write a text message to Jane Doe: When will the next meeting take place?
R How warm is it outside?
R Show me my new e-mails.
R Write an e-mail to Jane Doe.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE VEHICLE CAN ALSO BE REQUESTED:
R Read me my new text messages.
R Show all new text messages. R Information about individual items of the vehicle equipment
R Write an e-mail to John Doe in English - Hey Mercedes, which massage programmes do you have?
- Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist?
Examples of vehicle voice commands - Hey Mercedes, where is the warning triangle?
R Information about functioning of the systems and components installed
You can operate vehicle settings and vehicle functions using the MBUX Voice in the vehicle
Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible vehicle - Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?
voice commands. - Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?
- Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX?
511
R Information about operating the systems and components installed in R What day is it tomorrow?
the vehicle R What is 20 % of 29?
- Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my smartphone? R What does my horoscope say?
- Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the main-beam headlamps? R What is the price of Mercedes-Benz Group shares?
- Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionization function? R Let's play Geo Quiz.
You can also use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the menus for R I'm bored.
the plug-in hybrid settings and operate the corresponding vehicle functions. R Who is the current prime minister?
R What do you know about the Globe Theatre in London?
R "Display the energy flow."
R Who painted the picture "The Scream"?
R "Switch to charging settings."
R What's the status in the Premier League?
R "Activate pre-entry climate control."
R Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am.
R "Where is the nearest charging station?"
R What's my next task?
R "How far can I still drive?"
R Tell me a joke.
R "Set the departure time to tomorrow morning at 8 am."
R How many languages do you speak?
R What is your favourite animal?
Examples of online functions R Are there any updates?
R Is the light still on in the kitchen?
Depending on the country, language and vehicle equipment, additional func‐
tions are available when online voice control is active. The system accesses R Switch off all the devices in my house.
external information and can, as a result, answer general knowledge questions R Please set the temperature in the living room to 24 degrees.
and make calculations, for example.
R Is the sun shining in Manchester? Direct command examples

R Is it raining at my destination?
With direct commands, some functions can be operated without first saying
R What are the skiing conditions on the Zugspitze?
the voice command Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the function must
R What's the time in Sydney now?
be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 505).
R In which country do you pay with dollars?
R How many Swiss franks make 25 euros? R Next TV channel
R How long now until the holidays? R Previous TV channel
R Next radio station
512
R Previous radio station

R Next station
R Previous station
R Next track
R Previous track
R Start dashcam recording
R Stop dashcam recording
R Show the map
R 3D map
R 2D map
R Align map to north
R Align map in direction of travel
R Show all routes
R Show traffic
R Navigate to work
R Navigate home
R Repeat driving instruction
R Cancelling route guidance
R Change language to English
Back to Contents513
MBUX multimedia system

Overview and operation 515 Telephone 606
System settings 537 Online and Internet functions 644
AMG TRACK PACE 547 Media 653
Plug-in hybrid settings 553 Radio 661
Off-road menu 555 Sound 666
Fit & Healthy 557
Navigation and traffic 562

MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation
Overview and operation
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system * NOTE

Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the cen‐
& WARNING tral display
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications The surface of the central display is very dark.
equipment
If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very
hot.
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight,
allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time.
mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying % THE FUNCTIONS OF YOUR MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM MAY
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ DIFFER AND DEPEND ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
R Market
R National version
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
rently driving when operating the multimedia system. R Technical conditions
Functions, services and service aspects provided by Mercedes-

Benz and/or third-party providers may no longer be available
when the contractual period expires or due to technical condi‐
tions. There is therefore no entitlement to the continuous provi‐
sion of functions and services.
The described functions may be modified, optimised and adap‐
ted after the time of going to press.
515
MERCEDES-BENZ THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off
INTRODUCE CHANGES IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS: Turn: adjusts the volume
R Features
R Services % Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice dialogue.
Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey
R Service aspects
Mercedes" (/ page 504). You can start a voice navigation, for
example, with the input of a three-word address from
For these reasons, descriptions and depictions relating to the what3words.
MBUX multimedia system may, in some cases, differ for your
vehicle.
% If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected
functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-
free. In addition, the reading light or search light can be switched
on or off contact-free.
Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you.
These can be called up via the home screen.
You can conveniently call up your favourites using the ß button on the
steering wheel. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve
to select functions more quickly.
If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, you will receive sug‐
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system gestions during operation of the most probable navigation destinations, media
MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience. sources, radio stations and contacts. The configuration of the suggestions is
• Operating Touch Control (/ page 517) completed in the system settings. You can compile your user profile from vari‐
2 Media display with touch functionality ous vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some functions
• Home screen overview (/ page 517) and services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric procedures to
identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN.
• Operating the touchscreen (/ page 518)
3 Controller The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available
Press and hold: switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various
or off actions. The call is made via the Control Centre.
516
With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g. 9 Index points for selected display area
in the navigation, and on the Internet. A Calls up the air conditioning menu
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE CALLED UP IN THE CONTROL CENTRE:
This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft.
More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a R Notifications Centre
qualified specialist workshop. R Favourites
R Vehicle quick-access
In the image, the applications are arranged as a carousel. Pressing and holding
Home screen overview on © arranges the applications in a grid. This view is also used by a smart‐
phone, for example.
Touch Control
OPERATING TOUCH CONTROL (MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM)
1 On the home screen: displays the first three applications

In other displays: calls up the home screen
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
2 Calls up user profile settings and switches user
1 © Shows the home screen
3 Uses the global search
2 Touch Control
4 Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
=9Ì: Swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate)
5 Calls up favourites
a Press (confirm)
6 Displays in the status line
3 G Returns to the previous display
7 Calls up applications
4 6 Makes or accepts a call
8 Quick-access to application
517
5 ~ Rejects or ends a call # Set Off, Unleaded or Loud.

6 To increase volume: swipe upwards If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when selecting
To reduce volume: swipe down control elements or when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end
8 To switch off the sound: press of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.
7 ß Calls up favourites
8 £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant Touchscreen
OPERATING THE TOUCHSCREEN
% To operate Touch Control 2 in the most effective way, use the
tip of your thumb if possible. TAPPING
# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of # To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, for example:
# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
# To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press
on Touch Control 2. # To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.
# To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2. SINGLE-FINGER SWIPE
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
SETTING THE SENSITIVITY FOR TOUCH CONTROL
Multimedia system: # To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements finger on the touchscreen.
5 Touch Control sensitivity TWO-FINGER SWIPE
# Select Fast, Medium or Slow. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
SETTING ACOUSTIC OPERATIONAL FEEDBACK FOR ALL CONTROL ELE‐ # To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fin‐
MENTS
gers together or apart.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements # To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers.
5 Acoustic feedback
The function is supported by the selection in a list.
518
THREE-FINGER SWIPE
Overview of the lower control panel in the
To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an applica‐
centre console
#
tion.
TOUCHING, HOLDING AND MOVING
# To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any
direction.
# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the fin‐
ger to the left or right.
TOUCHING AND HOLDING
# To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold
until a message is shown.
# To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen

and hold until the Options menu appears. 1 Turn: adjusts the volume
Press: switches sound on or off
MBUX Interior Assistant

NOTES ON LASERS AND LASER CLASSIFICATION
& WARNING
Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation
This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is
opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina.
# Do not open the housing.
# Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a

519
This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014

and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.
& WARNING
equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐ Example of camera installation location
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Camera 1 is located in the overhead control panel.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ SYSTEM LIMITS, DISPLAY MESSAGES AND NOTES FOR RECTIFICATION
mits. THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying ING SITUATIONS:
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating
ment with the vehicle stationary. conditions. As a result the camera may switch off temporarily, particu‐
larly during longer periods of operation and at high outside tempera‐
tures.
rently driving when operating the multimedia system. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled
down and is available again.
OVERVIEW OF THE MBUX INTERIOR ASSISTANT
If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of
R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched.
the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. In addition, the reading Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens.
light or search light can be switched on or off contact-free. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do
not use microfibre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.
The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front
R Recognition can be impaired by reflective clothing, an adverse colour of
passenger interactions.
clothing or by accessories, for example.
The MBUX Interior Assistant recognises specific hand movements and a pose. R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection
range of the camera.
Keep the camera's field of vision clear.
R The camera is not operational.
Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
520
SUPPORTED INTERACTIONS
Interaction area Interaction Description
In front of the media display or above the touchpad Proximity to the control element The MBUX Interior Assistant recognises a hand approaching a control element.
Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media dis‐
play. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger.
No specific hand position is required.
Above the centre console Defined pose A favourite is called up with a defined pose.
Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading
light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off.
Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched
seat on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.
OPERATING FUNCTIONS BY BRINGING YOUR HAND CLOSER TO THE MUL‐ SEAT ADJUSTMENTS BY THE DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER
TIMEDIA SYSTEM In the seat settings menu, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects proximity to
various control elements of the multimedia system. In addition, the MBUX
Requirements:
Interior Assistant detects from which seat the action emanates.
R One of the following applications appears in the media display:
# When the seat settings are shown, move your hand towards the
- Seat settings with displays for the driver and front passenger seat, touchscreen.
e.g. Seat
The seat of the person operating, driver's seat or front passenger seat, is
- Home screen enlarged in the media display.
- Radio menu or media menu The appropriate control elements are pre-selected automatically.
- Map in the navigation
- Active Parking Assist
# Either switch the function on and off directly or make further settings
(depending on function).
R Recognition occurs as your hand approaches to approximately 10 cm
from the touchscreen. HIGHLIGHTING AN APPLICATION ON THE HOME SCREEN
The MBUX Interior Assistant detects in which area your hand is in front of the
touchscreen. The display of objects shown is adjusted to improve orientation.
521
# Move your hand towards the touchscreen.

% Further information on the navigation menu (/ page 562).
The symbol for the application is enlarged. The quick-access applica‐
tions will be highlighted.
SHOWING OPERATING SYMBOLS IN THE ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST CAM‐
# Continue operation and select a quick-access application, for example. ERA IMAGE (ONLY FROM DRIVER'S SEAT)
The MBUX Interior Assistant facilitates quick-access for the driver to various
% Further information about the home screen (/ page 517). camera views.
# When Active Parking Assist is shown, move your hand towards the
ACTIVATING COVER CHANGE IN THE RADIO MENU AND MEDIA MENU touchscreen.
The MBUX Interior Assistant reduces the number of operating steps. The camera operation symbols are displayed.
# Move your hand towards the touchscreen. # Continue operation and display the desired front, rear, left and right
The current information, e.g. about the radio station, track and artist is camera views.
hidden. Cover change is activated.
# Continue operation and select a cover. % Further information on the Active Parking Assist function
(/ page 453).
# To show current information again: move your hand away from the
touchscreen.
CALLING UP FAVOURITES WITH THE V POSE
Requirements:
% More information on the radio menu (/ page 661) and the
media menu (/ page 655). R There is at least one favourite.
R The favourite has been connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant
SHOWING THE NAVIGATION MENU ON THE MAP (/ page 529).
The MBUX Interior Assistant shows the navigation menu. R The area for recognition of the favourite's pose (V pose) is above the
centre console at the height of the climate control vents and the media
# Move your hand towards the touchscreen.
display. Your hand should be at least 10 cm from the media display.
The navigation menu is shown. R The V pose is held for a brief time.
# Continue operation and select a symbol.
# To hide the navigation menu again: move your hand away from the
touchscreen.
522
CALLING UP FAVOURITES R The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front
The driver and front passenger can connect two different favourites with the V passenger seat.
pose. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the
seat belt buckle.
% If a favourite has not yet been saved and connected with the
MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you. Stretching out a hand over the front passenger seat switches a search light on
for the driver when it is dark. Pulling the hand back switches the search light
# Position a hand above the centre console in the direction of the media off again.
display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so the index # To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand.
and middle finger are spread to form a V with the other fingers bent
inwards. Briefly hold the V pose. The search light is switched on for the driver.
The favourite is called up. # To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat.
CONTACTLESS SWITCHING ON OR OFF OF THE READING LIGHT FOR The search light is switched off again.
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER
SELECTING SETTINGS FOR THE MBUX INTERIOR ASSISTANT
Requirements: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Interior assistant
R The function is available when it is dark.
# To switch on full functionality of the MBUX Interior Assistant: select
R The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside
On.
rearview mirror.
The option is activated #.
# To activate additional functions for reading and search lights: select
Briefly moving a hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror switches
Including search and reading light.
the reading light specifically for the driver or front passenger on or off.
When the option is switched on, the display button is activated.
# Move your hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror. The functions for the reading and search lights are activated in addition
The reading light is switched on or off. to the proximity functions.
# To switch off the MBUX Interior Assistant: select Off.
SWITCHING THE SEARCH LIGHT FOR THE DRIVER ON OR OFF WITH A
HAND MOVEMENT The option is activated #.
Requirements:
R The function is available when it is dark.
523
User OVERVIEW OF USER PROFILES

REQUIREMENTS FOR USE
NOTES ON USER PROFILES R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R You have a Mercedes me PIN.
& WARNING R You have agreed to the terms of use.
Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.
after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to
the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
% If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile
pants could be injured in the process.
has been selected, the data described in the following section
# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard set‐
adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body tings can be changed by all vehicle users.
parts are in the seat's range of movement.
User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the
person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other
adjustment process by:
users.
# a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
You can individualise a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or
or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me
PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes
# b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat me Portal.
adjustment switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped. % If the user profile is downloaded while travelling, user profiles
are not set up using the set-up assistant.
The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature.

User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by dif‐
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the ferent levels of security (/ page 526).
driver's profile.
To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the
vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are used.
524
ADDING A USER
% The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated
from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels Requirements
cannot be turned off. R The vehicle is stationary.
% WHEN A USER PROFILE IS ACTIVATED, THE FOLLOWING PER‐ Multimedia system:

SONALISED COMFORT SYSTEMS, FOR EXAMPLE, CAN BE 4 © 5 f 5 Select user
ADJUSTED OR THEIR SETTINGS LOADED: # Select f Add user.
R Seat A QR code is loaded.
R Ambient light # Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code
R Outside mirrors scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed
R Climate control settings on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile
device.
If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat # Follow the steps in the Mercedes me App.
position will not be adjusted. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This
automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle.
USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT You will be informed when your user profile is available.
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT YOU CAN, AS A USER, SAVE When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically
THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE: after user selection.
R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings

% When the user has been added, they can be selected
R Climate control
(/ page 528).
R Ambient light
R Radio (including station list)
R Suggestions and favourites
525
SELECTING USER OPTIONS IN THE FOLLOWING CASES YOU WILL BE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICA‐
Multimedia system: TION OR RE-AUTHENTICATION USING A SENSOR OR THE MERCEDES ME
4 © 5 f 5 Settings PIN:
PROTECTING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS R When selecting a protected user profile
If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user pro‐ R When calling up a function requiring special protection
file. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biomet‐
R If biometric sensors provide insufficient or contradictory information
ric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be
taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available R If the multimedia system no longer trusts a sensor
sensors into account. R If the seat belt buckle and the door are opened at the same seat and a
function requiring special protection is called up
THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS ARE PRO‐ R When the vehicle is locked from outside
TECTED, FOR EXAMPLE:
R User selection and user profile settings # Select Protect content.

R Biometric sensors
# Switch Access protection on or off.
The teaching-in of biometric sensors
For teaching in and editing biometric recognition see the following sec‐
tion. % When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be
viewed from any seat and changes can be made.
R Suggestions
The data and determination of the most probable navigation destina‐
tions, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages.
% Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific
R ENERGIZING COACH basis.
The recorded health data and its evaluation.
R In-Car Office
The calendar, the tasks and the e-mails. % Please note that authentication is necessary for several functions
R Parking service such as In-Car Office and cannot therefore be completely
switched off.
The payment transactions.
R Mercedes me Store
The purchase of services.
R System activations of paid vehicle functions
526
SETTING UP AND EDITING BIOMETRIC RECOGNITION CHANGING A USER NAME OR PROFILE PHOTO
The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recogni‐ # Select Profile.
tion has been set up, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authenti‐
cation on the multimedia system. # Select Change user name.
# Select Protect content. or
# Select Voice recognition. # Select Profile picture.

# Enter the user name or select a user image.
% If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system. # Select Finished.
SETTING UP VOICE RECOGNITION

% You can store your photo in the Mercedes me user account using
# Speak the sentence shown on the media display and follow the voice the app or in the portal. The photo will then be shown in the
assistant's instructions. vehicle. In the vehicle itself, you can select other sample images
If voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the media instead of the photo.
display. You can unlock your user profile.
DELETING A USER PROFILE
% Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition. # Select Profile.
# Select Remove.
DELETING BIOMETRIC DATA
# Tap on E behind Voice recognition. # Select Remove user profile.
# Select Yes.
% Your Mercedes me user account and your personal data will
CALLING UP THE SET-UP ASSISTANT
remain within the Mercedes me ecosystem.
# Select Profile.
# Select Set-up assistant. RESETTING THE USER PROFILE TO FACTORY SETTINGS

# Select Profile.
# Follow the directions from the set-up assistant.
# Select Reset.
# Select Yes.
527
R The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account.

% This resets the contents of the user profile to factory settings,
but not the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 f 5 Settings 5 Synchronisation
# Synchronise automatically .
SELECTING A USER When the vehicle is switched on or off, the data stored in the vehicle is
Multimedia system: automatically synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts. This
4© 5f synchronization is done for all user profiles and is not profile-specific.
or
% When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the
steering wheel can be set. # Select Synchronise now.
YOU CAN CANCEL THE SETTING PROCESS WITH THE FOL‐ After selecting this option, the data stored in the vehicle is synchronised
LOWING ACTIONS: with the Mercedes me user accounts.
R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.
% Not all user profile functions are available during synchroniza‐
tion.
# Select Select user.
# Select a user.
% IF THE PERSONALISATION SERVICE IN THE VEHICLE IS
# When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a DEACTIVATED, ONLY THE FOLLOWING USER PROFILE MAS‐
taught-in biometric characteristic. TER DATA IS SYNCHRONISED:
The user profile is loaded and activated.
R Profile name
R Profile image
% If you select Continue without selecting user, no specific settings
for the user profile are loaded. R Mercedes me PIN
SYNCHRONISING USER PROFILES

Requirements
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
528
Favourites ADDING A FAVOURITE FROM AN APPLICATION

You can, for example, save a contact (example), or add an ENERGIZING COM‐
OVERVIEW OF FAVOURITES FORT programme.
Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favour‐ # To save a contact as a global favourite: select a contact (/ page 614).
ites are available in total.
# Press on a telephone number until a menu is shown.
You can select favourites from categories or you add favourites directly from
an application. # Select Save as favourite.
CALLING UP FAVOURITES The contact is added as a favourite.
Multimedia system: LINKING FAVOURITES WITH THE MBUX INTERIOR ASSISTANT V POSE
4© 5ß
# Alternatively, in the home screen pull down bar 4 in the centre of the % If a favourite is linked to the V pose, you can call it up
status line (/ page 517). (/ page 522).
# Select ß in the Control Center.
# Select r.
ADDING FAVOURITES
Multimedia system: # Select Driver or Passenger.
4© 5ß
# Select the category.
SELECTING FAVOURITES FROM CATEGORIES
# Select r. # Select a favourite.
If the favourite is linked with the V pose, a notification appears.
# Select W Create new favourite.
# Select the category. % The linked favourite pose can be activated or deactivated for the
driver or front passenger.
# Select a favourite.
The favourite is stored at the next available position.
RENAMING FAVOURITES
# All positions in the favourites are taken: confirm the message shown. Multimedia system:
A list shows all the favourites. 4© 5ß
# Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
# Select a favourite to be overwritten.
529
# Select Rename.
Notifications Centre
# Enter the name.
OVERVIEW OF THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE
# Save the names. THE FOLLOWING COMMUNICATIONS ARE COLLECTED IN THE NOTIFICA‐
TIONS CENTRE:
MOVING FAVOURITES
Multimedia system: R Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from the multi‐
4© 5ß media system.
# Press on a favourite until a menu is shown. R Communications which are received through the use of services.
# Select Move.
THE FOLLOWING NOTIFICATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE FOR YOU:
# Move the favourite to the new position.
R Navigable destinations and routes
# Tap on ø. R Messages (text messages)
DELETING FAVOURITES R Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-Car Office
Multimedia system: This function is not available in all countries.
4© 5ß R System information, e.g. Important software update available. Confirm to
# Press on a favourite until a menu is shown. start the update.
R Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be sub‐
# Select Delete. scribed to or emergency reports (e.g. tornado)
# Select Yes.
The Notifications Centre is in the Control Centre.
RESETTING FAVOURITES
# In the menu, select Reset all favourites . Depending on the style set, newly received notifications are shown using a
coloured dot.
# Select Yes.
Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. If you take no
action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre.
The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are
at the top.
530
You can pin a notification so that this is not deleted automatically after a cer‐
tain time (/ page 532).
CALLING UP NOTIFICATIONS
OPENING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE
# In the home screen pull down bar 4 in the centre of the status line
(/ page 517).
Example of a message The Control Centre opens.
1 Calls up the Notifications Centre
2 Time message received
# Select 3 in the Control Center.
3 Calls up the settings SELECTING A NOTIFICATION
4 Display for available actions # If several messages are available swipe up or down.
5 Description of the notification and the issuing service
# Select an action.
6 Symbol for notifications
7 Date of the received notifications CLOSING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE
# Select G.
Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions are availa‐
ble. SELECTING ACTIONS FOR A NOTIFICATION
EXAMPLES OF ACTIONS INCLUDE:
R Select the action directly after a notification is received and shown.
R Reading aloud
R Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre.
R Placing a call
R Replying
# Up to two actions available: select the action.
R Calling up a web page
R Navigation # More than two actions available: select q.
# Select the action.

Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore,
The notification is still available.
it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly upon receipt of the
notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time. # Close the actions with r.
531
EDITING NOTIFICATIONS or
# Call up the Notifications Centre (/ page 531).
# Select E.
CONFIGURING SETTINGS
# Select Yes.
# Select Z Settings .
All messages are deleted.
# Select the service.
# Switch the options on or off. Global search

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE
GLOBAL SEARCH OVERVIEW
SERVICE:
You can call up the global search on the home screen. You can input charac‐
R Allow notifications ters using the keyboard or the handwriting recognition. Alternatively, the MBUX
R Display in notification centre voice assistant allows voice input.
R Show notifications THE GLOBAL SEARCH PROVIDES SEARCH RESULTS FOR THE FOLLOWING
R Switching Acoustic signals on or off CATEGORIES:
R External access R Navigation
The option allows an external service access to specific data, e.g. R Entertainment
the current vehicle position. The detailed, approved information is
R Phone, In-Car Office
shown with Õ.
In-Car Office is not available in all countries.
R Digital Owner's Manual
If Allow notifications is switched off, the options cannot be selected with
the exception of External access. R Internet
PINNING A NOTIFICATION
The global search enables you to search for towns, roads and tourist attrac‐
# Drag a notification to the right on the touchscreen.
tions in the navigation category, for example.
A pin appears.
The global search makes it possible to enter a three-word address
# Tap on the pin. (/ page 567).
The notification is marked with a pin.
If the search field is empty, you will first see smart suggestions in the Sugges-
DELETING NOTIFICATIONS
tions category.
# Drag a notification to the left on the touchscreen.
532
As soon as a letter is entered, you will be shown the best hits in the All cate‐
gory. You will find further search results in the individual categories. Next to
Switching the sound for the MBUX multimedia
the category is the number of results. system on or off
After selecting a category you can select the search results within the cate‐
gory. When you select a search result, a detailed view is opened depending on
the category.
USING THE GLOBAL SEARCH

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 ª Search
In the Suggestions category up to six smart suggestions are displayed, even if On the steering wheel
no search entry has been entered yet.
# Enter the search term into the search field.

As soon as a character is entered the All category is marked. Up to ten
search results per category are displayed there.
In the other categories suitable search results for the entered search
item are displayed.
% Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice input using

p or you switch to the handwriting recognition v
(/ page 534).
On the centre console
# To end the search: select a. # To switch off: press button 1 on the steering wheel or controller 1 on
the centre console.
# To show search results for a category: select a category. The current audio source is muted.
# To accept the search result: select the search result. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the media display.
An action starts, e.g. a radio station is set or a detailed view is displayed, If you are listening to a radio station, for example, and switch off the sound
e.g. for a contact. then all media sources will be muted.
533
Traffic and navigation announcements can still be heard in this case. The # If handwriting recognition has been selected, write the characters on the
MBUX voice assistant and telephony are also not affected. touchscreen.
Examples for character input include the global search, entering a navigation
SWITCHING ON destination or the renaming of a favourite, for example.
# Press button 1 on the steering wheel or controller 1 on the centre
console again. THE TOUCHSCREEN SUPPORTS CHARACTER INPUT WITH THE FOLLOW‐
ING FUNCTIONS:
or
R Handwriting recognition offers character suggestions.
# Set the volume. R If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then
the entered characters are read aloud.
or
ENTERING CHARACTERS ON THE TOUCHSCREEN
# The media source changes.
Requirements:
Entering characters R If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud func‐
tion of the handwriting recognition is switched on (/ page 536).
USING THE CHARACTER INPUT FUNCTION R An online connection is required for some functions.
Requirements:
R For the handwriting recognition read-aloud function: the MBUX multi‐

media system is equipped with the MBUX voice assistant.
R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.
R The handwriting recognition read-aloud function is activated.
Enter the characters on the Touch Control or on the touchscreen. Character

input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.
# When the keypad is shown, enter the characters by swiping and pressing
on the Touch Control or by tapping on the touchscreen.
Character input with the keypad (destination entry)
or
1 Input line with current entry
534
2 Deletes an entry
3 Selects previous destinations
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
6 Search result
7 Deletes the last character entered
8 Hides the keypad
9 Switches to handwriting recognition
A Sets the written language
B Switches to digits and special characters
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters Example: entering characters with handwriting recognition
1 Input line
2 Shows suggestions during input
# Example: call up the navigation and enter a destination address 3 Accepts search result
(/ page 45). 4 Search result
5 Displays additional suggestions
# Briefly press on a character.
6 Deletes the last characters entered
The character is entered in input line 1.
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
# Resume character input. 7 Enters a space
8 Switches to keypad entry
% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the 9 Accepts an entry
language set and the character level. A Shows suggestions during input
B Writing area
ENTERING ALTERNATIVE CHARACTERS If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input.
# Press and hold on a character.
# When the keyboard is displayed, select v.
# Select the character.
ENDING CHARACTER INPUT
# Hide keypad 8 .
535
# Write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. The letters can ACTIVATING HANDWRITING RECOGNITION ON THE KEYBOARD
be written next to each other or above each other. # Select Handwriting recognition.
The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in A.
# Activate D Handwriting recognition.
# Select one of the suggestions. You can write characters directly on the keyboard.
# If available, display additional suggestions with q or r. DELETING THE USER DICTIONARY
The user dictionary learns from your inputs and offers suggestions during
# To end character entry: press briefly on G. character input. You can reset the user dictionary.
SETTING THE KEYBOARD AND HANDWRITING RECOGNITION FOR CHAR‐ # Select Reset my dictionary.
ACTER ENTRY
Requirements: # Select Yes.
R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Keyboards and handwriting
SETTING THE KEYBOARD LANGUAGE

# Select Keyboard languages.
# Select one or more keyboard languages.

SETTING THE WRITING SPEED
# Select Handwriting recognition.
# Select an option, e.g. Medium.

ACTIVATING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION
# Select Handwriting recognition.
# Activate D Read out.

The letter that your write on the touchscreen is read aloud.
536
MBUX multimedia system System settings
System settings
Display or
CONFIGURING DISPLAY SETTINGS

# Select the Automatic time zone entry from the country list.
Multimedia system: The time zone will be set automatically according to the vehicle location.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS % The Automatic time zone option is available for vehicles with sat‐
ellite reception.
# Select Display brightness.
# Vehicles with a driver display and media display: adjust the display SETTING THE TIME AND DATE FORMAT
brightness of the driver display or media display. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date 5 Set format
Time and date # Select a time and date format.
SETTING THE TIME AND DATE MANUALLY
SETTING THE TIME ZONE
Multimedia system: Requirements:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date
R The vehicle does not have satellite reception.
# Select Time zone.
The list of countries is displayed. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date
% If there are several time zones available in a country, these will
be shown after the country is selected. SETTING THE TIME
# Select Set time.
# Select a country and, if required, a time zone. # Set a time.
The time zone set is displayed after Time zone.
537
SETTING THE DATE

% The function is country-dependent. For more information, con‐
# Select Set date.
sult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# Select a date.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection
# Activate or deactivate theTransmit veh. position function.
% On vehicles with satellite reception, the time and date settings
are determined automatically based on the vehicle location and
cannot be set manually. % Alternatively, you can also switch the function on or off in the
status line via Ô.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
# Select Adjust time.
Setting permissions
# Set a value.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 Permissions
In the Permissions menu, you can set access authorisations for various data
% The function is only available in vehicles with satellite reception. points (such as microphone, camera) used in an application. You can change
permissions that have already been granted here. You can set permissions
either for individual data points or for certain applications or websites.
Vehicle position # Select Requests or Apps/websites.
SWITCHING TRANSMISSION OF THE VEHICLE POSITION ON OR OFF # Make the required settings for the permissions.
Requirements:
R A Mercedes me user account is available. Bluetooth®

R At least one service is activated in the Mercedes me user account which
has access to the transmitted position data. INFORMATION ABOUT BLUETOOTH®
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transfer up
to approximately 10 m.
538
YOU CAN USE BLUETOOTH® TO CONNECT YOUR MOBILE PHONE TO THE SWITCHING NEAR-FIELD COMMUNICATION ON OR OFF
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AND USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAM‐ Multimedia system:
PLE: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
R Hands-free system with access to the following options:

# Activate or deactivate NFC.
- Contacts (/ page 614)
- Call lists (/ page 616) % Further information on connecting a mobile phone via the NFC
interface (/ page 610)
- Text messages (/ page 617)
R Internet connection (/ page 644)
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG)
Inc. WI-FI CONNECTION OVERVIEW
You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the Internet or to external network
% devices.
Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not available in all coun‐
tries.
% The availability of the function is dependent on the country.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BLUETOOTH®
Multimedia system: GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot (/ page 540)
# Activate or deactivate Bluetooth.
The vehicle's multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile
communication devices, such as smartphones or tablet PCs, for example.
Near Field Communication (NFC)
R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
INFORMATION ON NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC) (/ page 646)
NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or connection of a mobile
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the
phone with the multimedia system.
vehicle's multimedia system.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
539
SWITCHING WI-FI ON OR OFF be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This
Multimedia system: contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previ‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth ously purchased package. The availability of this option is
dependent on the country.
# Select Wi-Fi.
If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded,
The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone
network provider for a fee.
When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with
external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices.
When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connec‐ % Some functions may first need to be activated on the device
tion. being connected. More detailed information can be found in the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
% The availability of the function is dependent on the country.
% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not avail‐
USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AS A WI-FI HOTSPOT able in all countries.
Requirements:
Multimedia system:
R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of con‐
nection described. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The # Select MBUX hotspot.
function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device
to be connected. The type of connection must be selected on the multi‐
# Select one of the following connection options.
media system and on the device to be connected. CONNECTING USING A QR CODE
Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being
connected.
% The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering
Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner
device is used for the data connection.
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Vehicle data volumes: depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone net‐ # Scan the QR code shown.
work provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the
The WLAN connection is established.
data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile
phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can
540
CONNECTING USING NFC

System language
# Activate NFC on the device to be connected.
NOTES ON THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE
# When the NFC symbol is displayed in the MBUX hotspot menu, hold the This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and
device to be connected to the NFC interface. the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters
available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan‐
# Follow the instructions on the device.
guages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in
The WLAN connection is established. English.
CONNECTING USING A SECURITY KEY
SETTING THE LANGUAGE
# Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is dis‐ Multimedia system:
played with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language
# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device SETTING THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE
to be connected. A list of the available system languages is shown.
# Confirm the entry. # Select a language.
GENERATING A NEW SECURITY KEY The system language is switched to the selected language.
# Select the Generate new security key option in the MBUX hotspot menu.
# Confirm the prompt with Yes. Setting the distance unit

A new security key is generated.
Multimedia system:
A connection will be established with the newly created security key. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display
% When a new security key is generated, all existing WLAN connec‐ % This function is not available in all countries.
tions are then disconnected. If the WLAN connections are re-
established, the new security key must be entered.
# Select a unit for the distance.
# Activate Additional speedometer for an additional display in the driver's

display.
541
Activating/deactivating system PIN protection # Switch the options on or off individually.

If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, per‐
Multimedia system: sonalised suggestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 PIN protection you. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone num‐
bers dialled as well as suggestions based on your music preferences.
SETTING THE SYSTEM PIN
Navigation
# Select Set PIN.
When Allow destination suggestions is switched on, the vehicle makes
# Enter a four-digit system PIN. suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations.
If Commuter route is switched on, the navigation automatically detects
# Enter the four-digit system PIN again. that the vehicle is on a commuter route.
If both system PINs match, then the system PIN protection is active. Calls & messages
CHANGING THE SYSTEM PIN Suggestions are offered for numbers dialled and messages sent.
# Select Change settings. Comfort
The vehicle makes suggestions based on the use of your comfort func‐
# Enter the current system PIN.
tions, e.g. which massage programme should be started at what time.
# Select Change PIN. Entertainment
Suggestions are offered for the currently played media source. Sugges‐
# Set a new system PIN.
tions are also made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify, TuneIn Radio
ACTIVATING SYSTEM PIN PROTECTION FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES and streaming services, and for categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood.
# Select Protect software updates. Vehicle
The suggestions for vehicle functions are displayed, e.g. for Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC.
Online voice services
Configuring suggestions The suggestions are made available online based on your voice input
and are offered on the zero layer.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Suggestions
% The suggestions offered depend on the equipment.
# Select Z.
542
Deleting collected suggestions Further information about software updates can be found at https://
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com.
Multimedia system:
CARRYING OUT SOFTWARE UPDATES
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Suggestions
Requirements
# Select Î.
FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE AND WI-
# Select Yes. FI:
The suggestions are reset.
R Your vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account (/ page 635).
R Software updates without Mercedes me user account: the Allow software
Software update updates option is activated in the Software update menu.
INFORMATION ON SOFTWARE UPDATES R For software updates via the communication module: an Internet con‐
Software updates keep your vehicle and the related systems up-to-date and nection exists via the communication module (/ page 645).
prevent security flaws. R For software updates via Wi-Fi: a connection to an external Wi-Fi hot‐
spot exists (/ page 646).
Software updates are available online for vehicle components such as control
units, convenience systems, locking and safety systems, driver assistance sys‐
tems, suspension and drive systems as well as for the MBUX multimedia sys‐
% Depending on the software update, this is started via the z
tem. Software updates are available via the communication module or a Wi-Fi
communication module, ö Wi-Fi or an 4 external storage
connection to an external hotspot.
medium.
The navigation maps are also updated via updates from external storage media
(e.g. USB flash drive).
% Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi
Install available software updates regularly. Otherwise the security of your hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP.
MBUX multimedia system and individual vehicle components cannot be
ensured.
% If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the
% Software updates can be protected with a system PIN. Further connection is successfully established the browser will open in
information about the system PIN (/ page 542). order to start the update. To start the download follow the
instructions in the browser.
543
Multimedia system: # Start the update.

4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Software update 5 Z
# Establish the connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot.
STARTING A MAP UPDATE FROM AN EXTERNAL STORAGE MEDIUM The update is downloaded and installed automatically.
# Connect the storage medium with the vehicle via a media interface.
For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installa‐
A message about an available map update appears on the media display.
tion step is reached, a message appears on the media display after the vehicle
# Select the message. is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the media display to
complete the installation.
# Select Start.
There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is
The map update is started.
safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is
STARTING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE locked.
If the Automatic online update option is active, available software updates are
downloaded and installed automatically. Activate the option in order to always INSTALLING SOFTWARE UPDATES
keep your vehicle up-to-date and avoid security flaws. Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As
soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears in the
# Select Automatic online update. media display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system.
The software update is downloaded and installed automatically.
Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be
completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the
If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates vehicle switched off. If this is necessary, a message appears on the media dis‐
once. The updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time. play after the vehicle is switched off.
# Select an update from the list of available updates. # Follow the instructions on the media display.
# Start the update.
For some software updates, you can set a time for installation. The installation
The software update is downloaded and installed automatically.
is carried out automatically at the scheduled time. You do not need to be in
STARTING A SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA WI-FI the vehicle during installation. Note that the planned installation is cancelled
Some software updates require an additional connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. as soon as the vehicle door is opened.
The connection to an external hotspot can be established when the software
update is started. If an installation is available where you can set the time, a message appears
on the media display after the vehicle is switched off.
# Select an update from the list of available updates.
# Follow the instructions on the media display.
544
The vehicle cannot be used while these software updates are being installed. Further information about software updates can be found at https://
Make sure that no persons or animals are in the vehicle. Events stored in the me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
vehicle's control units can be overwritten.
FAILURE OF THE MEDIA DISPLAY:
AVAILABILITY OF THE DRIVER AND MEDIA DISPLAY If the media display fails or the display message shown above is shown con‐
During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehi‐ tinuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist
cle, driver display and media display. You may receive the following display PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and
message when an installation is running: consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐

tion)
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions
While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the revers‐
% The display message does not appear every time a software ing camera, are not available.
update is installed.
# Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system
automatically attempts to restore the previous version.
Requirements:
If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown
above appears every time the vehicle is started. R The vehicle is switched on.
FAILURE OF THE DRIVER DISPLAY:

R The vehicle is stationary.
If the driver display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognise limi‐
tations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for
example. This may impair the operating safety of the vehicle. Park the vehicle
safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.
(/ page 857)
545
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset
WHEN RESETTING THE SYSTEM, PERSONAL DATA AND SETTINGS ARE
DELETED, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Connected devices
R Individual user profiles
R Biometric data
% The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver
assistance systems is deleted.
# Select Reset.
A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.
# Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia
system is restarted after the system reset.
% Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driv‐

ing systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to
carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or
transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car.
546
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE
AMG TRACK PACE
Function of AMG TRACK PACE # At the desired starting point, select Ì Start recording.
The track recording starts at this point.

During track recording, sectors can be set to subdivide the track.
With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be ana‐ # Select ö Set sector.
lysed and optimised. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hocken‐
heimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored for # To finish track recording, select É Stop recording or cross the starting
every track. These can be analysed and compared to other lap times to ach‐ line again.
ieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking pro‐
# Confirm the prompt with Yes.
cedures can be measured and stored.
# Select the weather.
Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-off routes outside the public traf‐
fic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and environ‐
mental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your
vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application. % The temperature is determined automatically.
Enter a name.
Setting Track Race
#
# Press a to confirm.
Multimedia system:
The track is saved under the name you entered.
4 TRACK PACE 5 Track Race
SEARCHING BY TRACK NAME
RECORDING A NEW TRACK # Select ª Search .
# Select Ü New track .
# Enter the track name.
Tracks with the searched name are displayed.
547
MEASURING THE TIME ON THE SAVED TRACK R Lap overview

# Select ß All tracks.
# Select ï Start timing .
# Select the desired track.
# Select à.
# Select u.
# Pull the desired display from the grid on the left or right edge of the
# If you are already at the starting line, select Start timing.
media display.
or The displays are shown during Track Race.
# Select Navigate to to be navigated to the starting line. Selecting ¨ on the active display deactivates it.
Timekeeping begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed.
DISPLAYING THE ANALYSIS
# Select ß All tracks.
% Selecting ¨ enables you to switch to the AR view of the track.
An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
Selecting ò also allows you to switch to the telemetrics dis‐
play. # Select a track.
# Select a session.
# To end the timekeeping, select ð End timekeeping.
THE FOLLOWING DATA IS DISPLAYED:
# Confirm the prompt with OK.
R lap and sector times
# Select the weather. R average and maximum permissible speed
R driver
# Select Yes to save the times recorded for this track.
R vehicle
FADE IN DISPLAYS DURING TRACK RACE
R date
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS CAN BE SUPERIMPOSED:
R weather
R Tyre temperature
# Select Add recording to use a different session as a reference value.
R Miniature map # Select % in order to return to the overview.
R Sector overview
R Engine data
# Select Diagram.
R G-force display
548
# Set the desired parameters. EXPORTING TRACKS (USB)

The analysis is displayed. # Select ß Tracks .
An overview of all saved tracks appears.
# Select options u of the desired track.
# Select Export track to….

The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected
to the vehicle.
1 Lap overview
2 Parameter overview EDITING TRACKS AND RECORDINGS
3 Editing parameters # Select ß Tracks .
4 Adding a new parameter
5 Deleting parameters # Select options u of the desired track.
# Select Rename or Delete.

% THE FOLLOWING VALUES CAN BE SET FOR PARAMETERS,
FOR EXAMPLE: or
R speed
# Select a track.
R longitudinal/lateral acceleration
R steering angle # Highlight the desired recording.
R engine speed # Select u options.
R engine oil/tyre temperature
# Select Exporting to… or Delete.
Based on the analysis, you can check and optimise driving characteristics for
any position on the track.
549
Setting Drag Race # Start off and begin the measurement.

Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the
Multimedia system: target distance or a maximum of one mile has been travelled.
4 TRACK PACE 5 Drag Race
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.
MEASURING ACCELERATION
MEASURING BRAKING
# Select Z Drag race options.
# Z Drag Race options
# Select Acceleration.
# Select Braking.
# Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
# Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been
reached. # Start off and begin the measurement.
# Set a target speed. # Brake to a stop.
Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been Measurement is incremental, in steps of 10 km/h to a stop. If the braking
reached. procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, measurement starts as
soon as 150 km/h has been reached
# Start off and begin the measurement.
Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. STORING AND CALLING UP MEASURED VALUES
If measurement is completed or cancelled, a prompt appears asking whether
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure. the measurement should be saved.
QUARTER MILE RACE # Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

# Select Z Drag race options. CALLING UP SAVED MEASUREMENTS
# Select Quarter-mile.
# ± Select History.
# Set a target distance.

# Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking.
# Select a measurement.
Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been
reached. The desired measurement is displayed in detail.
or
# Delete a measurement.
550
Calling up the telemetry display Multimedia system:

4 TRACK PACE 5 Z
Multimedia system:
CONNECTING A MOBILE DEVICE VIA THE TRACK PACE APP
4 TRACK PACE 5 Telemetry The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronise
The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a them with stored tracks.
diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected that are to be shown in the
display.
# Select TRACK PACE App.
FOR EXAMPLE: # Select Authorise new device.
R engine speed # Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected.
R wheel angle # Select Continue and confirm the authorisation prompt.
R speed A four-digit code is shown on the media display.
R steering angle
# Enter the code in the smartphone.
# Set the desired parameters. The device is authorised.
DE-AUTHORISING THE MOBILE DEVICE
# Set the time. # Select TRACK PACE App.
The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the time set.
# Select a device.
Configuring AMG TRACK PACE # Confirm the prompt with Yes.

The device is de-authorised.
Requirements
SETTING THE TRACK PACE DISPLAY IN THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY AND
To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app: DRIVER DISPLAY
# Select IC and HUD contents.
R the TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile device.
R The mobile device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi # Activate or deactivate the desired contents.
(/ page 540). The content in the head-up display and driver display is adjusted.
551
SETTING A DASHCAM
% For further information on the Head-up Display (/ page 494). If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE.
# Select Dashcam.
% Further information about the driver display (/ page 477). # Select Track Race or Drag Race and activate Activate recording.
SETTING ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK

# You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under
Video overlay contents.
# Select Acoustic feedback.
A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.
# Select a setting.
SHOW STATISTICS
# Select TRACK PACE statistics.
Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.
THE FOLLOWING DATA IS DISPLAYED:
R driving time
R track driven
R tracks recorded
R track races recorded
R laps recorded
R drag races recorded
R top speed
ACTIVATING THE AMBIENT LIGHT
If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on
delta time.
# Select Ambient light.
552
MBUX multimedia system Plug-in hybrid settings
Plug-in hybrid settings
Configures the charging settings SETS THE DEPARTURE TIME

The set departure times are used for the pre-entry climate control of the vehi‐
Multimedia system: cle.
4 © 5 Hybrid 5 Charging # Select Next departure time.
SETTING THE CHARGING PROGRAM THE FOLLOWING CHARGING TIMES CAN BE SELECTED:
# Select Home, Work or Standard.
R individual charging times
R a Week profile
% The standard charging program is automatically activated when
the vehicle is switched on or off. SETTING AN INDIVIDUAL DEPARTURE TIME
# Select Add new time and set the desired departure time.
UNLOCKING THE CHARGING CABLE (MODE 3 OR 4) or
When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maxi‐
mum charge level is reached. # Select ´ and adapt an existing departure time.
# Select Home or Work. SETTING REPEAT DAYS
# Select Add new time and set the desired departure time.
# Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
# Mark the relevant weekdays for which the departure time will apply and
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING LOCATION-BASED CHARGING
confirm with a.
# Select Charging program, home or Charging program, work.
or
# Activate or deactivate Select based on location.
# Select ´ and edit existing repeat days.
When the function is activated, the vehicle's current position is saved as one
of the selected options. When the address is reached again, a brief query SETTING THE MAXIMUM CHARGE LEVEL
appears as to whether the respective charging program should be selected. # Select Maximum charge state.
553
MBUX multimedia system Plug-in hybrid settings
# Set the desired percentage. THE ENERGY FLOW IS SHOWN IN DIFFERENT COLOURS DEPENDING ON
The high-voltage battery is charged up to the set percentage as a maxi‐ THE OPERATING STATUS:
mum.
R White: constant energy flow
R Red: high energy flow (boost effect)
% The percentage can be set in increments of 10 %.
R Green: low-emission energy flow in the case of recuperation, electric
mode and charging the high-voltage battery
% As soon as the full charge level is reached, a notification is

shown in the media display that the charging process is comple‐ Calling up the energy flow display
ted and the journey may be continued. The maximum charge
level can be saved in the Home and Work charging programs. In Multimedia system:
the Standard charging program, the setting is automatically reset 4 © 5 Info
to a charge level of 100% after the vehicle is switched on or off. # Select Energy flow.
The energy flow in the vehicle will be displayed.
Overview of the energy flow display in the Information on the status of the hybrid system and the current state of charge
of the high-voltage battery will be displayed in addition to the energy flow.
multimedia system
The active components of the hybrid system are highlighted on the energy
flow display. The energy flow between the individual components is shown in
colour.
THE COMPONENTS DISPLAYED ARE:
R State of charge of the high-voltage battery

R Combustion engine
R Energy flow
R High-voltage battery
554
MBUX multimedia system Off-road menu
Off-road menu
Overview of the Offroad menu in the MBUX Setting the off-road menu in the multimedia
multimedia system system
The Offroad menu provides an overview of the most important, relevant data Multimedia system:
for off-road driving, as well as functions to assist driving off-road and the pos‐ 4 © 5 Offroad 5 Cockpit
sibility to record tracks for subsequent re-use or for sharing with other drivers.
SETTING DISPLAYS IN THE CENTRAL DISPLAY
COCKPIT # Press ,, . or on the display itself to jump to the next display.
This tab provides an overview of the most important data. Content is displayed
in different tiles that can be changed using directional arrows or swipes. In QUICK-ACCESS: ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING PARKING ASSIST
addition, this menu contains buttons for quick-access to certain vehicle func‐ PARKTRONIC
tions relevant to off-road operation. # Press = to switch the function on or off.
DISPLAYED DATA ARE, FOR EXAMPLE:

% Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R Artificial horizon (/ page 450).
R Compass
R Altitude QUICK-ACCESS: ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ESP® (ELECTRONIC STA‐
R Steering angle of the front and rear wheels BILITY PROGRAM)
R Torque and power # Press å to switch the function on or off.
R Tyre pressure and temperature
R Transparent bonnet % Further information on ESP (/ page 394).
Further information on the Cockpit tab (/ page 555). QUICK-ACCESS: ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING MANUAL SHIFTING
# Press p to switch the function on or off.
555
MBUX multimedia system Off-road menu
% Additional information on manual gearshifting (/ page 346).
QUICK-ACCESS: ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING DSR (DOWNHILL SPEED

REGULATION)
# Press î to switch the function on or off.
% Further information on DSR (/ page 416).
556
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy
Fit & Healthy
Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics ENERGIZING COMFORT

Requirements OVERVIEW OF ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMMES
% These functions are available only for fully electric seats with a % Note that the available programmes and the associated functions
memory function. depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equip‐
ment, fewer functions may be available.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat PROGRAMME OVERVIEW
# Select Seat kinetics. R Refresh: Can have a refreshing effect with short, cool puffs of air. The
seat is ventilated, the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and
ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back health by changing the seat posi‐
the programme is completed with appropriate sound.
tion during a journey. This involves repeatedly stressing and relieving the mus‐
cles and joints by means of minor movements of the cushion and backrest. R Warmth: Can increase the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. Seat,
surface and steering wheel heater provide soothing warmth. The pro‐
STARTING SEAT KINETICS gramme is completed with unobtrusive sound and warm colours.
# Select ; for the desired seat. R Vitality: Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driv‐
The programme will run for the set duration. ing situations. The activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants is car‐
ried out with invigorating sound, activating light and a vitalising massage.
CONFIGURING SEAT KINETICS
R Joy: Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as
# Select Z for the desired seat. mental regeneration. This results from the activation of a massage pro‐
gramme, friendly sound and illumination with suitable colours.
# Select Backrest, Backrest & seat surface or Seat surface.
R Well-being: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. This is achieved
# Select the desired duration for the selected seat. through a relaxing massage programme, friendly light and calming sound.
557
R Forest Glade: Can have a calming and soothing effect on the vehicle STARTING THE ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMME
occupants thanks to the acoustics of the forest. The ambience is suppor‐
ted by a suitable animation, colours and sound. WARNING
&
R Sounds of the Sea: Can contribute to calming the vehicle occupants. Increased risk of accidents when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT
The acoustics of wave sounds and seagulls in combination with other programmes Tips and Training
vehicle functions create a relaxing seashore atmosphere.
The Tips and Training ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes can distract
R Summer Rain: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. The relaxing effect you when driving.
of a rain shower can be experienced via acoustics and other vehicle
functions inside the vehicle. # Only carry out exercises if the traffic situation permits.
R Power Nap: The programme consists of three phases. # When listening to the tips, make sure you are aware of the
- Falling asleep phase: here relaxing music is played and the air is traffic around you at all times.
purified by ionisation.
- Sleeping phase: the active functions are deactivated or restricted
as much as possible.
& WARNING
- Waking phase: slightly stimulating music is played and the air is
Risk of becoming trapped when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT
purified by ionisation. Additionally, functions such as fragrancing,
programme Power Nap
seat ventilation and a massage programme are activated.
The following systems may be automatically moved when using the
R Training: Can counteract the onset of muscle tension, limbs falling
ENERGIZING COMFORT programme Power Nap:
asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The
exercises are demonstrated in short videos. R Side windows
The training consists of audio content and a brief animation. The audio R Sliding sunroof
content is conceived so that it can also be played back when you are
R Roller sunblinds
driving. Animations are only shown when the vehicle is stationary. Always
observe the traffic conditions if you are training when driving.
R Tips: The system gives auditory tips for possible exercises or measures As a result you or other vehicle occupants may become entrapped.
for improving the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. By selecting the
# Make sure that there is sufficient space behind the front seats.
desired area of the body you can receive targeted tips for the comfort
level of this area. # Make sure that no body parts are in the area of movement.
Most programmes that have been started for one seat can also be transferred
simultaneously to another seat.
558
Requirements SETTING THE DURATION

# Select a programme.
# Select Settings.
FOR THE START OF POWER NAP: # Select the desired duration.
R Only the power supply is on. STARTING A POWER NAP
R The doors are closed. # Select Power Nap.
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
# Select ; for the desired seat.
R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient for the use of
the auxiliary climate control.
WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STATIONARY, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS ARE CAR‐
RIED OUT WHEN POWER NAP IS STARTED:
Multimedia system:
R The roller sunblinds are extended.
4 © 5 Comfort 5 ENERGIZING COMFORT
R The doors are locked.
STARTING AND STOPPING A PROGRAMME R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Select a programme. R The parking brake is applied.
# Select ; for the desired seat.
# Select É to stop the programme.
# Select É to stop the programme.
STARTING THE TRAINING PROGRAMME
# Select Training.
% If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no lon‐
ger met, a corresponding message appears. The active pro‐ # Select Ì a programme.
gramme is cancelled.
# To activate fragrancing for training: select Air freshener.
CONFIGURING A PROGRAMME # Select É to stop the training programme.
# Select a programme.
# Select Settings. % The animations demonstrating the exercises are faded out when
the vehicle is in motion and you only hear the instructions.
# Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.
559
STARTING TIPS As a refreshing programme when temperatures rise

# Select Tips. Information on the Refresh programme; see (/ page 557).
R Warmth
# Select Ì an area of the body.
As a warming programme when temperatures drop
# Select É to stop playback of the tip. Information on the Warmth programme; see (/ page 557).
ENERGIZING COACH By connecting a Garmin fitness tracker, for example the Garmin vívoactive® 3,
additional information can be entered into the evaluation for the recommenda‐
FUNCTION OF THE ENERGIZING COACH tion of an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. The additional information
REQUIREMENTS includes the stress level, that is calculated by the fitness tracker. The stress
level is based primarily on the pulse rate.
R The ENERGIZING COACH service is activated in the Mercedes me portal
or the Mercedes me App. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INTEGRATION OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
VIA A GARMIN FITNESS TRACKER:
R The Mercedes me ENERGIZING app is installed on the mobile phone to
use the service. R Your fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.
R Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account.
With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the driving and driver situation.
Depending on the situation, it offers recommendations for the start of an
If you wear your Garmin fitness tracker at night also, the sleep data is included
appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.
in the evaluation of the ENERGIZING COACH.
THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMS COULD BE SUGGESTED:
REQUIREMENT FOR THE INTEGRATION OF THE SLEEP DATA:
R Vitality
R The Garmin fitness tracker is synchronised with the Garmin account
As an activating programme in monotonous driving situations or for long before the beginning of the journey.
journey times, for example
Information on the vitality program see (/ page 557). CALLING UP THE ENERGIZING COACH DISPLAY
R Joy Requirements:
As a balancing programme in demanding driving situations
R The fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.
Information on the Enjoyment program see (/ page 557).
R Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account
R Refresh in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app.
560
R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 608).

R You are logged in with your Mercedes me profile both in the vehicle and
in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 ENERGIZING COACH
# Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of your pulse for the last
30 minutes driving time are shown.
A corresponding fault message is shown if there is no mobile phone con‐
nected or no pulse can be sent to the system for an extended period.
561
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic
Navigation and traffic
Switching navigation on The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the
zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay
Multimedia system: £ Ends the current route guidance
4 © 5 Navigation Tapping opens the navigation module and displays the route overview
# Alternatively, switch on the MBUX voice assistant (/ page 504). (/ page 576)
2 Sets map orientation Ä and map type
# Switch to navigation. 3 Calls up the telephone menu
The map appears. 4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
5 Calls up entertainment applications
Navigation overview 6 Elevation and map scale (/ page 594)

7 Navigation window shows the next manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the
DIGITAL MAP route monitor (zoomed in view)
Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming
driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays,
3D images at motorway exits, online content
PRESSING 2 SEVERAL TIMES CHANGES THE MAP ORIENTATION IN THIS
ORDER:
R 2D and to the north

R 2D and in the direction of travel
R 3D and in the direction of travel
R Map with complete route
1 Navigation module (reduced view)

Route guidance active:
562
% If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of Destination entry
travel and 2D north orientation.
NOTES ON DESTINATION ENTRY
THE FOLLOWING MAP TYPES 2 ARE AVAILABLE: WARNING

&
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication
R Daytime display
equipment while the vehicle is in motion
R Night-time display
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle
R Satellite map when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
% If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
under https://mapfeedback.here.com/#/report. mits.

rently driving when operating the multimedia system.
ENTERING A POI OR ADDRESS

Requirements:
R For the online search:

- There is an Internet connection.
- Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have
accepted the terms of use.
- Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
563
- The service is available and has been activated. B Switches to digits and special characters
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
% If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using
the data of the digital map. # Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª
% Online search results for POIs may contain additional informa‐
tion, for example opening times and ratings. The information is
provided by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all countries.
THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN 1:
R Town, street, house number or street, town

R Postcode
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
R Town, POI name
Example: entering a POI or address R Contact name
1 Input line with current entry R Geo-coordinates (/ page 567)
2 Deletes an entry R Three-word addresses from what3words (/ page 567)
3 Selects previous destinations Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search.
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search # Hide the keyboard with a.
6 Search result
7 Deletes the last character entered # Select the destination in the list.
8 Hides the keypad The following menu shows the selected destination with the address
9 Switches to handwriting recognition (/ page 534) information and a corresponding map section.
A Sets the written language The menu enables the route to be calculated.
564
SELECTING A DESTINATION SUGGESTION SELECTING A POI

Requirements: Requirements:
R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 542). R For use of personal POIs: a USB device is connected with the multime‐
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show dia system.
destination suggestions. R Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx) have been saved in
the PersonalPOI folder on the USB device.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Multimedia system:
# Select Suggestions.
The route is calculated in the following menu.
# Select POIs.
# Select one of the displayed quick-access categories, e.g. j .

% If Suggestions has been selected, a menu is available via Ä.
The menu offers settings for the suggestions and memory func‐
# Select the POI.
tions. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
or
% Managing destination suggestions (/ page 586). # Select All categories or Personal POIs (see requirements).
SELECTING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

# Select the category.
Multimedia system: # Select the POI.
The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
# Select Previous destinations.
SETTING A SEARCH FILTER AFTER SELECTING A POI CATEGORY
# Select the destination. THE PRESET SEARCH POSITION DEPENDS ON THE STATUS OF THE ROUTE
The following menu enables the route to be calculated. GUIDANCE:
R If route guidance is not active, In the vicinity is searched.

% You can save a destination as a favourite (/ page 585). R If route guidance is active, Along the route is searched.
565
# When the search results are displayed, select Filter. CHANGING THE ORDER OF QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES
# In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.
# Select the search position, e.g. In the vicinity.
# Tap on the arrows next to the selected category.
# If a route with intermediate destinations already exists and Near destina-
The arrows for the other categories are greyed out.
tion has been selected in the search filters, the destination is selected
for the search. # Drag the category up or down.
or # Select ø.
# Select the desired travelling time to the point of interest. DELETING QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES
# Select Search results. # In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.
CONFIGURING CATEGORIES FOR QUICK ACCESS # Select ß for the chosen category.
THE CATEGORIES ARE DISPLAYED:
# Select Delete.
R As symbols after calling up the destination entry via ª
R As a list after calling up All categories
# Select ø.
CHANGING CATEGORIES FOR PERSONAL POIS
# In the POI menu, select All categories. # Select Personal POIs.
# Select f or ß for a category. # Press on a category as long as is necessary until a menu appears.
Tapping on f adds the category. # Select Change name and enter a name.
Tapping on ß removes the category.
# Select Change icon and select a symbol.
# Use G to change back.
# Select Delete and confirm the prompt with Yes.
The new categories are shown after the destination entry is called up the
next time. SELECTING A CONTACT FOR DESTINATION ENTRY
Requirements:
% If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 608).
to be replaced.
R The contacts from the mobile phone have been downloaded .
R The contact has a navigable address.
566
R The address data can be located on the digital map. R The online search is active.
Multimedia system: Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª
# Enter a contact in the entry line. # Enter the destination as a three-word address from what3words. The
entry can be made with spaces between the words instead of dots.
# Select the address.
The search results are displayed.
# Select the destination in the list.
% Alternatively, after calling up the destination entry, you can enter The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
the name of a contact in the search field. THE BRANDENBURG GATE HAS THIS LANGUAGE DEPENDENT THREE-
WORD ADDRESS:
ENTERING GEO-COORDINATES R German: tapfer.gebäude.verliehen
Multimedia system: R English: that.lands.winning
R French: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant
# Enter the geo-coordinates as latitude and longitude.
EXAMPLES OF INPUT FORMATS: % Searching for a destination using three-word addresses is not
R 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes and seconds) possible in all countries and in all languages.
R 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
ALTERNATIVELY, USE THE FOLLOWING ENTRY OPTIONS:
# Confirm the entry. R Entry in the global search (/ page 533)
The following menu enables the route to be calculated. R Voice navigation (/ page 504)
ENTERING THE DESTINATION AS A THREE-WORD ADDRESS Example: during a telephone call you are given a 3-word address. After
Requirements: activating the MBUX voice assistant, say one of the following two voice
commands:
R An active Internet connection is indicated in the status line on the media - Navigate to tapfer gebäude verliehen
display with the Q symbol. - Navigate to tapfer Punkt gebäude Punkt verliehen
567
# Briefly press on a POI symbol.

The POI is selected. If there are several POIs at this map position, a list
appears.
# Select the destination in the Selected objects list.
SELECTING A DESTINATION FROM FAVOURITES
Three-word addresses from what3words are an alternative addressing system Requirements:
for multilingual georeferencing of global locations with a resolution of three
metres. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do
R Destinations are saved as favourites.
not have a building address such as a street and house number, for example. Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite
(/ page 585).
% Three-word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice

for most routine applications. Multimedia system:
YOU CAN CONVERT ADDRESSES TO THREE-WORD 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª
ADDRESSES AND BACK AGAIN: # Select Favourites.
R At the website https://what3words.com # Select a favourite.
R In the what3words apps The route is calculated in the following menu.
ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE ALREADY SET
SELECTING A DESTINATION ON THE MAP # Select Home or Work.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation
ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE NOT YET SET
# If necessary, move the map (/ page 593).
# Select Home or Work.
# Press and hold on the map. The prompt No "Home" address available. Set address now? appears, for
Available destinations are displayed. example.
or # Select Yes.
# Search for or select the address.
568
# Select Save.
% You can save a received destination in the favourites
DELETING FAVOURITES (/ page 585).
# Select Ä for a favourite.
# Select Delete.
DELETING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS
or # Delete a destination with E.
# Select Delete all. or
# Confirm the prompt. # Select Delete all.

When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for
example.
Route
SELECTING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS
CALCULATING A ROUTE
Requirements:
R There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.

R A destination has been sent to the vehicle.
R Destinations have been shared from another seat in the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
Example: detailed display
The vehicle can receive destinations from services or apps. You will be
informed when a destination is received. 1 Calls up alternative routes
2 Calculates the route and starts route guidance
# Select Received destinations.
3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination
# Select a destination. 4 Destination address
The route is calculated in the following menu. The detailed display can contain additional entries, such as a three-word
address from what3words, online content
569
SEARCHING FOR POIS IN THE VICINITY OF THE DESTINATION SHOWN

% If the destination is located in a multi-storey car park, for exam‐ # Select In the vicinity.
ple, and corresponding data is available, the parking levels are
displayed. # Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal
POI (/ page 565).
After selection of a destination the route is be calculated. ADDING AN INTERMEDIATE DESTINATION TO THE EXISTING ROUTE OR
STARTING A NEW ROUTE GUIDANCE
# Select one of the options. # Select ¦ Add.
CALLING UP ALTERNATIVE ROUTES The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destina‐
# Select Routes. tion. Route guidance begins.
# Select an alternative route (/ page 578). # There are already four intermediate destinations: confirm the prompt
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE with Yes and select an intermediate destinations in the route overview
(/ page 576), that should be overwritten with the new intermediate
# Select ¥ Let's go!.
destination.
CALLING UP THE DETAILED DISPLAY WITH DESTINATION ADDRESS
or
# Pull the bar above 2 upwards.
Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, # Select Í Replace.
for example ratings and weather information, is shown.
The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route guid‐
If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed. ance begins.
# To share a destination: select Ç Share.
This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code. % IF YOU CALL UP THE MENU DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE,
MORE OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
# To save a destination as a favourite: select ß Favourite and then an
option. R To change the order of destinations, select Move
(/ page 577).
# To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select R To delete the destination, select Delete (/ page 577).
www.
R To cancel route guidance, select Cancel route guidance.
# To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.
570
PAYING FOR THE CHARGING PROCESS ON A ROUTE WITH MERCEDES ME R Before selection of a charging station: the data for the
CHARGE (PLUG-IN HYBRID) charging stations is based on the online content available
from the respective third-party provider.
Requirements:
R Observe the local information and conditions.
R The Mercedes me Charge service is available and subscribed to in the
Mercedes me Portal.
R The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of charging % With the Plug & Charge charging function of Mercedes me
stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are activated. Charge, you can charge the vehicle at public Plug & Charge-ena‐
R To select a charging station: the Schedule charging stops option is bled charging stations. The charging process starts immediately
switched on in the multimedia system. when the charging cable is plugged into the charging station. No
further authentication is required. Communication between the
R For authentication at the charging station: after activation in the
vehicle and the charging station takes place directly via the
Mercedes me Portal, you have concluded a charging contract with your
charging cable.
payment details with the respective contractual partners.
This charging function is not available in all countries.
R For authentication using the app: the Mercedes me App is installed on
the external device, e.g. tablet or smartphone.
R For charging stations without remote access, you have purchased an
# To select a charging station: tap on a symbol on the map for a charging
RFID card for the contracting partner. station or on a group of symbols for several charging stations.
# If a group of symbols is selected, select the charging station from the

list.
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED (IF AVAILABLE):
Multimedia system: R Name of the charging station operator
4 © 5 Navigation R Address of the charging station
R Plug with availability and information about charging power
% OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: R Opening times
R Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery R Name of the charging station
(/ page 359). R Travel time and distance of the charging station from the vehicle
R Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the R Authentication method
charging station (/ page 364) and (/ page 365). R Contact information of the charging station operator
R General costs and charging costs
571
R Estimated charging costs and your available energy volumes, if available # If required, select the connector ID from the list shown.
R Display of available reviews and the ability to review with up to five stars The selected charging cable connector is unlocked.
R Availability prognosis # Start the charging process.
R Information on green charging
The start of the charging process is shown.
Mercedes-Benz provides high-quality certificates of origin to ensure that
an equivalent amount of electricity from renewable sources is fed into # Select the Stop charging process display button in the app.
the grid for charging processes carried out via Mercedes me Charge. The charging process is ended.
Payment is processed automatically.
# Calculate the route (/ page 569). IF DATA FOR THIRD-PARTY PROVIDERS IS AVAILABLE, YOU WILL
RECEIVE THIS INFORMATION:
% If the function is available, the start/stop of the charging process R Overview of the charging process
can be selected. R Estimated cost
# To access a charging station remotely (start/stop): select a charging % There may be differences between the costs listed and the costs
station in the map menu of the app or the MBUX multimedia system. billed.
# Show the details using the widget (programme symbol).

SWITCHING LOW EMISSION ZONES FOR THE ROUTE ON OR OFF
# Select Start charging process. Requirements
The charging process starts. In addition, the payment agreement saved
with the third-party provider is authorised. R Mercedes me connect is available.
R You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is con‐
nected with the account.
% Remote access is not available for some charging stations. In this R The "Traffic Restriction Zones" service is available and activated in the
case use your RFID card to activate the charging process (if avail‐ Mercedes me Portal. The service is free of charge for three years after
able). registration.
# If required, enter the PIN for personalisation.
# Confirm the action.
572
Multimedia system: OVERVIEW OF THE RANGE ON MAP SERVICE (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 View THE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
# Activate Traffic restrictions. R The "Range on Map" service, which is subject to a charge, is available
The low emission zones along the route are shown on the digital map and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
and in the route overview. R The Range option is switched on (/ page 597).
Before you enter a low emission zone, you will be shown a notification in
the central display.
The fuel range (purple) and the electric range (white) are shown on the map as
Plug-in hybrid: the vehicle takes zones with traffic restrictions into
a closed line around the current vehicle position.
account and drives electrically in these zones. These are low emission
zones and in future also zero emission zones. IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THERE IS NO DISPLAY ON THE MAP:
ROUTE GUIDANCE IS ACTIVE:
R The overall range is very large.
R When the vehicle enters a low emission zone, it switches to the R If the fuel level is less than 10 %.
Electric drive program. Electrical energy is reserved for low emis‐
R If the electric range of the vehicle is less than 6 km.
sion zones ahead. Thus the vehicle can switch to the Hybrid drive
program when it exits a zone. SELECTING A ROUTE TYPE
Multimedia system:
ROUTE GUIDANCE IS NOT ACTIVE: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route
R When the vehicle enters a low emission zone, it switches to the TAKING TRAFFIC INFORMATION FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT
Electric drive program. # Select Dynamic route guidance r.
# Select one of the options.

% THE TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF: EXPLANATION OF THE OPTIONS:
R No low emission zones are shown on the map. R Automatic
R Plug-in hybrid: when the vehicle enters a low emission Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account
zone, there is no switch to another drive program. (/ page 586).
Live Traffic Information and FM home screen are not available in all
countries.
R After asking
573
A prompt appears when a new route is detected with a shorter journey SELECTING ROUTE OPTIONS
time based on traffic reports. You can continue to use the current route Multimedia system:
or use the dynamic route instead (/ page 574). 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid options
R Off
AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE SECTIONS, E.G. MOTORWAYS OR FERRIES
No traffic reports are taken into account for the route. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
CALCULATING ALTERNATIVE ROUTES Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids motorways, for example.
Multimedia system: Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes motorways into consider‐
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 View ation, for example.
# Switch on Overview of route after start.
Alternative routes are calculated for every route. % The selected route options cannot always be taken into account.
Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though
ACCEPTING A DETOUR RECOMMENDATION AFTER A PROMPT
the Avoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A message then appears
Requirements: and you will hear a corresponding message.
R After asking is switched on (/ page 573) in the Dynamic route guidance

menu. AVOIDING OR USING TOLL ROADS
The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll).
R There are traffic reports for the current route. # Select Toll roads r.
# Activate or deactivate Avoid all.
If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new If the option is activated, the route avoids toll roads.
routes will be shown. If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll roads into account.
If another application is active, a notification is hidden. or

# Confirm the notification. # Select an option for Payment by cash or card or Electronic billing.
# To accept the new route: select Accept. Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the selected method of payment.
Use: the route takes into account roads that require a toll corresponding
# To maintain the current route: select Keep to current route. with the payment type selected.
AVOIDING OR USING ROADS REQUIRING A SPECIAL TOLL STICKER
A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period.
574
# Select Avoid vignette roads r. SELECTING NOTIFICATIONS FOR THE ROUTE

# Activate or deactivate Avoid all. Requirements:
or R For an audible indication when approaching a personal POI: the USB
device contains personal POIs.
# Switch individual countries on or off in the list.
R The USB device is connected with the multimedia system.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids roads requiring a special
R The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated.
toll sticker in the selected countries.
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes into account roads in the
selected country which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Messages & tones
% These route options are not available in every country. SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF
# Activate Reduced messages.
AVOIDING OR USING AREAS WITH LOW EMISSION ZONES If a driving instruction is available for a simple change in direction, you
REQUIREMENTS: hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right in 200 m". The number of
driving instructions along the route is minimised.
R An active Internet connection is indicated in the status line on the media
display with the Q symbol. # Activate Detailed messages.
R The Traffic restrictions option is switched on . If a driving instruction is available and there is a complex driving situa‐
tion, you hear supplementary information, e.g. "In 200 m turn right and
continue to follow the major road". Additional driving instructions are
# Activate or deactivate Area with low emission zones. issued for the route, for example on turning major roads.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids all low emission zones # Activate Announce street names.
restricted for the vehicle. These are displayed in red on the map. The name of the street into which the vehicle should turn is announced.
Use: the option is deactivated. The restricted low emission zones for the
vehicle are passed through on the route. A warning is displayed before
you drive into a low emission zone.
% This option is not available in all countries and languages.
AVOIDING AREAS
SWITCHING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF
# Select Avoid areas r (/ page 594).
# Activate or deactivate Announce traffic warnings.
If available, traffic warnings are announced, e.g. before the end of traffic
jams that pose a risk.
575
AUDIBLE INDICATION WHEN APPROACHING A PERSONAL POI When route guidance is active, the destination and entered intermediate desti‐
# Select Personal POIs. nations are shown.
# Activate a category. DEPENDING ON THE ROUTE, TRAFFIC SITUATION AND AVAILABLE DATA,
FURTHER INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED:
When approaching a personal POI in the selected category an audible
indication will be issued. R Name, destination address
DISPLAYING A ROUTE OVERVIEW R Symbols for intermediate destination and destination
Requirements: R Phone number (if available)
R Web address (if available)
R A destination is entered.
R Traffic information
Multimedia system:
The route can include up to four intermediate destinations.
4 © 5 Navigation
# Select one of the options.
PLANNING ROUTES
Multimedia system:
# Enter the intermediate destination (/ page 45).
After entering the destination and new calculation of the route, the route
overview is shown again. The route contains a new intermediate destina‐
Example: route guidance is active tion.
1 Enters an address or POI
2 Destination and time of arrival % If there are already four intermediate destinations, delete an
beneath that the current distance to the destination and the chequered intermediate destination (/ page 577).
flag
3 Alternative routes
4 Searches for parking
5 Switches traffic information display on or off
6 Makes settings for View, Messages & tones and Route
576
EDITING A ROUTE WITH INTERMEDIATE DESTINATIONS

Requirements:
R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been

entered.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation Example: route list
1 Upcoming manoeuvre with turning arrow, distance to manoeuvre, street
CHANGING THE ORDER OF THE DESTINATIONS number, street name
# In the route overview, press and hold on a destination. Ì Switches on navigation announcements
. Switches off navigation announcements
# Move the destination with = or Ì.
Including the following route sections on the route to the destination
# Tap on ø. 2 Current vehicle position
The editing mode is ended. The route sections are displayed in the navigation window. The route list is
DELETING A DESTINATION updated during the journey.
# In the route overview, press and hold on a destination.
% Motorway information shows the available service facilities. After
# Tap on E.
selecting symbols, e.g. for car parks, service areas or motorway
The editing mode is ended. exits, the POI is adopted as an intermediate destination or desti‐
DISPLAYING THE ROUTE LIST nation.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation # Press the arrow at the bottom of the navigation window briefly.
# Tap on navigation window 7 on the digital map (/ page 562). # Swipe up or down.
# Select a route section.

The map section is displayed.
# To return to vehicle position: select Current position.
577
SELECTING AN ALTERNATIVE ROUTE R Driving time saved or lost compared with the original route
Requirements:
# When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in
R A route has already been created. the navigation window by swiping to the right or left.
R The Overview of route after start option is switched on (/ page 574).
CHANGING ROUTE TYPE
# Select Filter.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Other routes # Switching the route type on or off.
AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE OPTIONS
# Select Filter.
# Switch the route options on or off (/ page 574).
# Confirm the settings with Finished.
# To start route guidance to the alternative route: select Start.
Example: alternative routes # To select an alternative route on the map: touch any point on the
1 Original route is highlighted alternative route.
2 Alternative routes with indication of the difference in driving time The alternative route is highlighted.
ACTIVATING A COMMUTER ROUTE
% In 2 a faster route may also be shown that is considerably lon‐ Requirements:
ger.
R You have created a profile (/ page 525).
THE FOLLOWING ROUTE INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED: R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 526).
R The Commuter route option is switched on .
R Driving time
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show
R Time of arrival
destination suggestions.
R Distance to the destination R Routes have been learned for these destination suggestions.
R Avoid options based on the set route options R Route guidance is not active.
578
DRIVING SITUATION
% This commuter route is not available in all countries. The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level.
The following notification is shown on the central display: Fuel reserve Tap
Multimedia system:
here to search for filling stations..
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route
# Activate Commuter route. # Confirm the notification.
The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a The automatic filling station search begins. The available filling stations
commuter route. along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are dis‐
played.
For the daily commuter route, traffic incidents on the route are also
reported when driving without active route guidance. # Select a filling station.
# To select commuter route: select Start.
Route guidance begins without spoken driving instructions. # Calculate the route with the filling station as an ¦ intermediate desti‐
nation or as a ¥ destination (/ page 569).
# If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the

% A commuter route is suggested even with delays on the route.
prompt.
The selected filling station is entered in the route overview at position 1.
# To delete a commuter route: select ¨. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.
SWITCHING THE AUTOMATIC FILLING STATION SEARCH ON OR OFF STARTING THE AUTOMATIC SERVICE STATION SEARCH
Multimedia system:
Requirements
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
# Select Driving. R ATTENTION ASSIST is activated (/ page 404).
R You are driving on a motorway.
# Activate or deactivate Automatic filling station search.
R There are service stations along the route section ahead.
If Automatic filling station search is switched on, a notification appears in
which the search for filling stations is started.
DRIVING SITUATION
STARTING AN AUTOMATIC FILLING STATION SEARCH # Confirm the notification.
Requirements The service station search starts. The available service stations along the
route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.
R The automatic filling station search is activated (/ page 579).
579
# Select a service station. # Select Rename.
# Calculate the route with the service station as an ¦ intermediate des‐ # Enter the name.
tination or as a ¥ destination (/ page 569).
# Select OK.
# If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the RECORDING AND STORING A ROUTE
prompt.
Requirements:
The selected service station is entered in the route overview at position
1. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 655).
STARTING AND EDITING A STORED ROUTE
R A USB device with stored routes is connected with the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 655). # Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is
displayed.
R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format
(.gpx). # Select Stored routes.
STARTING RECORDING
Multimedia system: # Select Start recording.
A white rectangle is displayed.
# Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is
The route is stored on the USB device.
displayed.
STOPPING RECORDING
# Select Stored routes. # Press the white rectangle.
STARTING A SAVED ROUTE
# Select End recording.
# Select a route.
# Select Start: route guidance at start or Start: current location.

Route guidance begins.
RENAMING A ROUTE
# Press on a route until a menu is shown.
580
Route guidance R Traffic information, e.g. length of traffic jam, delay

R Motorway facilities
NOTES ON ROUTE GUIDANCE R Car park search
R Emergency corridors
& WARNING
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated
equipment while the vehicle is in motion
route, a new route is calculated automatically.
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This If, for example, the route is diverted or the direction of a one-way road has
could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. been reversed, driving instructions may deviate from the actual traffic situa‐
tion.
mits. Alternatives may be offered during route guidance, e.g. before passing a
motorway exit road. The additional driving time for the journey along the
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying motorway exit is shown.
ment with the vehicle stationary. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations
during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic conditions.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐ The route can differ from the ideal route, for example in the event of road‐
rently driving when operating the multimedia system. works or incomplete digital map data.
Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving NOTES ON SATELLITE RECEPTION
instructions. Driving instructions are, for example navigation announcements, The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things
changes in direction and lane recommendations. on reception of the satellite system used. In certain situations satellite recep‐
tion can be impaired, malfunction or even not be possible, e.g. in tunnels or in
Changes in direction and lane recommendations are shown in the navigation multi-storey car parks.
window.
CHANGING DIRECTION OVERVIEW
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS AND FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN CHANGES OF DIRECTION ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
THE NAVIGATION WINDOW, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Detailed image of the junction
R Route list
The display appears when you drive into a junction.
R Destination information
R 3D image
581
The display appears when driving on junction-free, multi-lane roads, for THERE ARE THREE PHASES WHEN CHANGING DIRECTION:
example at motorway exits and motorway interchanges.
R Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia
system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation
announcement is issued, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".
The navigation window shows: the direction information or the name of
the road which is to be turned into as well as the distance to the change
of direction.
R Announcement phase
Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direc‐ The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction,
tion e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 300 m".
1 Name of the street to turn into
When the Auto zoom map orientation is switched off (/ page 597), a
2 Change of direction arrow (also on the map) detailed representation of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming
3 Current vehicle position change in direction appears in the navigation window.
4 Current distance to the change of direction R Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the imminent change of direction, e.g.
by announcing "Now turn right".
Example of 3D image: when the distance to manoeuvre point 1 is
shown with 0 m and the symbol for current vehicle position 4 has
reached manoeuvre point 1 the change in direction is carried out.
Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction % Changes in direction are also displayed on the driver display and
1 Manoeuvre point head-up display.
2 Change of direction arrow (also on the map)
Larger map scales show change of direction points instead of change of
direction arrows.
3 Current distance to the change of direction
4 Current vehicle position
582
LANE RECOMMENDATIONS OVERVIEW

% Lane recommendations are also displayed on the driver display
and head-up display.
USING MOTORWAY INFORMATION

When driving on the motorway, upcoming motorway facilities and available
service facilities are shown in the route list. These include car parks, service
stations or motorway exits with service POIs, for example.
Example: lane recommendations The entries are sorted according to increasing distance from the current vehi‐
cle position.
1 Non-recommended lane (grey arrow)
2 Possible lane (white arrow) # Select an entry.
3 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue background)
# If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the
This display appears for multi-lane roads. list.
If the digital map contains the relevant data, lane recommendations are dis‐ The destination address and the map position are shown.
played in the navigation window.
# Calculate the route (/ page 569).
EXPLANATION OF THE DISPLAYED LANES: or
R Recommended lane # Search for a POI in the vicinity.

In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direc‐
or
tion and the one after that.
R Possible lane # Use other functions, e.g. store the destination address of the service
In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direc‐ facility.
tion.
DESTINATION REACHED
R Non-recommended lane Once the destination is reached, you will see the Í chequered flag. Route
In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction guidance will now be complete. The navigation menu is shown.
without changing lane.
When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the inter‐
mediate destination flag with the number of your Î intermediate destina‐
During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also tion. Route guidance is continued.
shown.
583
SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF # Select Audio.

SWITCHING OFF # Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
# During a navigation announcement, press the Ì button on the steer‐
ing wheel or controller in the centre console. # Activate or deactivate Driving recommendations during call.
The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message
# To leave the menu: select G.
appears.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS
or Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio
# In the route list for a driving manoeuvre select . (/ page 577).
5 Navigation & traffic announcements
The symbol changes to Ì.
# Select Driving recommendation vol..
SWITCHING ON
# Press the button on the steering wheel or on the controller in the centre # Set the volume.
console again.
or
ROUTE GUIDANCE IS ACTIVE
# In the navigation window, select Ì for an upcoming driving manoeu‐
# During a navigation announcement, adjust the volume on the steering
vre. wheel or on the controller in the centre console .
The current navigation announcement is played. SWITCHING AUDIO FADEOUT ON OR OFF DURING NAVIGATION
The symbol changes to .. ANNOUNCEMENTS
# Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.
SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF DURING A
PHONE CALL or
# Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.
# Tap on © in the media display.
or # Select Settings.
# Tap on © in the media display. # Select System.

# Select Settings.
# Select Audio.
# Select System.
# Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
584
# Activate or deactivate Audio fadeout during navigation announcements. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route
guidance continues as normal.
REPEATING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS
Destination
Requirements:
SAVING THE CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION
R A route has already been created. Multimedia system:
R Route guidance is active. 4 © 5 Navigation
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation # Select Store position.
# In the navigation window, select . for an upcoming driving manoeu‐ # To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite .
vre.
# To save as "Home" address: select Home .
# Select Ì.
The current navigation announcement is repeated.
# To save as "Work" address: select Work .
CANCELLING ROUTE GUIDANCE MANAGING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Multimedia system:
Requirements:
R A route has already been created. # Select Previous destinations.
# Select Ä for the last destination.
SAVING THE LAST DESTINATION AS A FAVOURITE
# Select ¤ in the navigation module (/ page 562).
# Press and hold on one of the previous destinations.
OVERVIEW OF OFF-ROAD STATUS DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE
A menu appears.
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data on
the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multime‐ # To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite .
dia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position
on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. Road not mapped will be shown. # To save as "Home" address: select Home .
Route guidance may be restricted.
# To save as "Work" address: select Work .
585
DELETING A PREVIOUS DESTINATION

% Delete a destination suggestion from the favourites
# Select Previous destinations.
(/ page 568).
# For a last destination, select Ä.
# Select Delete.
or Route guidance with current traffic reports

TRAFFIC INFORMATION OVERVIEW
# Select Delete all.
Current traffic reports are received with the Live Traffic Information subscrip‐
# Confirm the prompt. tion service.
When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for If the subscription has expired, then FM RDS-TMC is available in selected
example. countries.
EDITING DESTINATION SUGGESTIONS
Requirements: % Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries.
R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 542).

The service must be registered in the Mercedes me user account
R For the display of destination suggestions: the multimedia system has (/ page 587). This secures the free-of-charge period of three years.
gathered sufficient data.
The service updates the traffic situation via the Internet connection at short,
Multimedia system: regular intervals.
4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Mercedes-Benz AG.
# Select Suggestions. The data is immediately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG and for‐
warded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traffic reports relevant to
# Press and hold on a destination suggestion. the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for
A menu appears. the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports.
# To cancel a destination suggestion: select Do not suggest now or No

% There may be differences between the traffic reports received
longer suggest.
and the actual road and traffic conditions.
# To save a destination suggestion: select Save as favourite, Home or
Work.
586
IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO TRANSMIT THE VEHICLE POSITION, YOU HAVE # Register the vehicle using the vehicle identification number (VIN).
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
# Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account.
R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me user account. A code is sent to the multimedia system.
R You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# Enter the code into the multimedia system.
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.

% Further hazard warnings are received using the Car-to-X service
(/ page 590).
% Alternatively, you can have the connection completed at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
SHOWING INFORMATION FROM THE SERVICE PROVIDER FOR LIVE TRAF‐
FIC INFORMATION
EXTENDING A LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION SUBSCRIPTION
Requirements
Requirements:
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me 5 My services
# Call up the Mercedes me website.
# Select Live Traffic.
# Call up the Mercedes me user account.
When the subscription for Live Traffic Information has expired then in selected
countries FM RDS-TMC is available. # Switch to the Mercedes me Store via the linked vehicle.
REGISTERING LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION # Select Live Traffic Information.

Requirements: # Select the renewal period.
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. # Add the product to the shopping basket.
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.
# Create a Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes.me. A Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension
valid email address is required for this. period. Activation begins on the date of extension.
587
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.
Requirements: SHOWING TRAFFIC INCIDENTS ON THE ROUTE
R Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic are switched on (/ page 589). Requirements:
R The Traffic incidents display is switched on (/ page 589).

Multimedia system:
4©
Multimedia system:
# If necessary, move the map (/ page 593). 4 © 5 Navigation
THE MAP SHOWS THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC INFORMATION DEPENDING
If there are traffic incidents on the route, these are shown on the map and in
ON THE ACTIVATED SETTINGS:
the route overview.
R Traffic incidents
These are roadworks, road blocks and warning messages, for example. % With the MBUX Voice Assistant you can inform yourself about
When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be traffic incidents on your route. Ask, for example How is the traffic
shown in colour on the route. Off the route they are grey. on my route? or How is the traffic at home?. A voice output is
R Warning messages issued.
Warning messages are shown as the d symbol.

Traffic safety information can be shown, e.g. if there are people on the
carriageway.
If the vehicle approaches a danger area, for example the end of a traffic
jam in a dangerous position, the Ë symbol is shown on the map. If
Announce traffic warnings is switched on and a message has been issued,
an additional announcement is made.
R Traffic flow information:
Example: traffic incidents on the route
- Traffic jam (red line)
1 Total delay or message that there are no delays along the route
- Slow-moving traffic (orange line)
2 Switches traffic information display on or off
- Heavy traffic (yellow line)
3 Calls up settings for View, Messages & tones and Route
- Free-flowing traffic (green line)
R Display for traffic delays on the current route
588
IF THERE ARE ANY DELAYS ALONG THE ROUTE, THESE ARE SHOWN IN # To see all of the traffic incidents on the route, swipe to the right or left.
THE ROUTE OVERVIEW TOGETHER WITH THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: The route section is highlighted on the map.
R Traffic jam section: red bars # To show detailed information in the route overview: tap on a display
R Slow-moving traffic: orange bar in the route overview.
R Heavy traffic: yellow bar The detailed information is shown, for example the road section and the
R For each section: direction.
- The delay CALLING UP DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE MAP
- The length # Tap on traffic flow information on the map, e.g. a red line for a traffic jam
- The street name or the street number section.
The detail information is displayed.
# If several lines are shown on top of the other, then select an item of traf‐
% DURING ACTIVE ROUTE GUIDANCE, THE TOTAL DELAY ON
fic flow information from the list.
THE ROUTE IS ALSO DISPLAYED HERE:
SHOWING TRAFFIC INCIDENTS ON THE MAP
R in the navigation system in the navigation module # Tap on a traffic incident symbol.
R in other applications in the status line at the top The detail information is displayed.
Traffic incident symbols are shown in the route overview and in

# Several traffic incidents are in the immediate vicinity: tap on the top
the map. A traffic incident symbol is, for example Ò for road‐ traffic incident symbol and select from the list of traffic incidents.
works. SWITCHING THE TRAFFIC INFORMATION DISPLAY ON
In the map several traffic incidents may be shown on top of each Multimedia system:
other. The traffic incident symbol shows a plus sign. 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
If available, the street number can be replaced by a street name # Select View.
or both the name and number.
# Traffic .
% If a message about forming an emergency corridor has been # Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic.
issued, Emergency corridor is shown in the navigation window. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and
warning messages, are shown on the route.
589
Car-to-X-Communication by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount
of time has elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently.
CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS APPLY FOR THE CAR-TO-X-COMMUNI‐ % Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseu‐
CATION SERVICE: donymisation process. In this way, your identity is protected
against access by unauthorised third parties.
R The vehicle is equipped with an MBUX multimedia system with naviga‐
tion function.
DISPLAYING HAZARD WARNINGS
R There is a subscription for the Live Traffic Information service.
Multimedia system:
R The Car-to-X-Communication service is activated in your Mercedes me
4 © 5 Navigation
user account.
If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map.
The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.
% Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries. # Set the option via Z (/ page 589).
If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown.
The communication module automatically establishes an Internet connection
If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a
once the vehicle is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be
hazard warning.
provided shortly thereafter. Depending on the mobile phone connection, pro‐
vision takes place from within a second up to about a minute. THE FOLLOWING HAZARDS MAY BE SHOWN ON THE MAP:
BENEFITS OF CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION: R Accidents and breakdowns

R Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
R Dangers are automatically detected by the vehicle or can be reported by R Hazards reported manually
the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-Communication
R Vehicle with active hazard warning light
in the immediate vicinity.
R Roadworks
R If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's
current position are received. R Additional hazards (if available)
This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions.
% If Announce traffic warnings is switched off (/ page 575), voice
output can indicate a danger area.
The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehi‐
cle data to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudonymised
590
SENDING HAZARD WARNINGS camera image includes additional information, for example arrows indicating a
change of direction.
REPORTING HAZARDS MANUALLY
If the options are switched on and this additional information is available, road
% Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle. names and house numbers are displayed (/ page 592).
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position.

The Position menu is shown.
# Select Report traffic incident.

A prompt is shown.
# Select Yes.
1 House number
The Thank you for supporting accident prevention! message appears.
2 Street name
3 Change of direction arrow
Route guidance with augmented reality Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations,
e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digi‐
OVERVIEW OF ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY
tised.
& WARNING Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all countries.
Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect
depiction or wrong interpretation of the display
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a
guide for driving.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
# Avoid extended observation of the camera image.
During route guidance with augmented reality a camera image with the real
traffic scene is shown in the media display before a turning manoeuvre. The
591
ACTIVATING ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY # Activate Street names and House numbers.
During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional
& WARNING information in the camera image.
Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi‐
tional information
The additional information from the augmented reality display may be
Map and compass
inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the SETTING THE MAP SCALE
actual driving situation. Multimedia system:
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carry‐ 4 © 5 Navigation
ing out all driving manoeuvres. ZOOMING IN
# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the media
Multimedia system: display.
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z or
# Select View.
# Move two fingers apart on the media display.
# Select Augmented reality video.
ZOOMING OUT
# Activate or deactivate Augmented reality video.
# Tap with two fingers on the media display.
SHOWING PROPERTY INFORMATION FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUG‐ or

MENTED REALITY
# Move two fingers together on the media display.
Requirements:
R Augmented reality is activated (/ page 592). % You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale
(/ page 541).
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
# Select View.
# Select Augmented reality video.
592
MOVING THE MAP

Multimedia system: % The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deac‐
tivated as a favourite.
4 © 5 Navigation
# When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the
media display.
# Select View.
# Select POI symbols on map r.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
# Switch on Hide all points of interest.
R Selecting a destination on the map (/ page 568).
When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are
R Selecting a POI (/ page 565).
shown on the map according to the settings in the POI categories.
R Showing traffic incidents on the map (/ page 588).
% If the conditions are fulfilled, the POI symbols are shown with
# To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Centre . current online information (/ page 598).
SWITCHING THE ROUTE OVERVIEW AFTER START ON OR OFF
Multimedia system: SWITCHING DISPLAY OF CATEGORIES FOR QUICK-ACCESS ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z # Switch a category on or off in the menu.
# Select View. SELECTING CATEGORIES
# Activate D or deactivate E Overview of route after start. # In the menu, select Other categories r.
# Activate or deactivate Show all.
If the option is enabled, the map shows the full route after route guid‐
ance is started and, if available, all alternative routes. When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are
shown on the map.
SELECTING POI SYMBOLS FOR THE MAP DISPLAY
Multimedia system: or
# Select r the categories.
POIs include restaurants and hotels, for example. These are displayed as sym‐
bols on the map. Not all POIs are available in all countries. # Activate or deactivate the categories.
Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map.
example.
593
SELECTING PERSONAL POI CATEGORIES R Next junction

# In the menu, select Personal POIs r . If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route
guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be displayed in
# Select r a category. the navigation window.
# Activate or deactivate Display on the map. DISPLAYING THE MAP VERSION
Multimedia system:
# To issue a signal when approaching: activate Visual warning and Acous-
tic notification.
# Select View.
RESETTING THE POI SYMBOL DISPLAY
# In the menu, select Reset POIs. # Select Map data version.
The settings are reset to the standard settings. The detail information is displayed.
SELECTING THE DISPLAY OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE MAP
Multimedia system: % The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z be used to update the map data (/ page 44).
# Select View.
# Select Show additional information. % Information about new versions of the digital map can be
obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# Switch the options on or off.
OVERVIEW OF AREA AVOIDANCE ON THE ROUTE
R Current street You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid.
If the option is enabled, it will be displayed in the navigation window. Motorways or multi-lane expressways that pass through an area to be avoided
R Scale may be included in the route despite being blocked.
If the option is switched off, the map scale is only displayed on the map
when zooming. AVOIDING A NEW AREA FOR THE ROUTE
Multimedia system:
If the option is enabled, the map scale is permanently displayed on the
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
map.
The option also influences the display on the driver's display.
# Select Avoid new area.
R Altitude
594
STARTING USING THE MAP # Activate Avoid area.

# Select Using map. If route guidance is active, a new route is calculated.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoi‐ If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guid‐
ded. ance.
THE ROUTE CAN INCLUDE AN AREA THAT IS TO BE AVOIDED IN THE
# Move the map (/ page 593).
FOLLOWING CASES:
# Set the map scale (/ page 592).
R The destination is located in an area that is to be avoided.
# Select a. R The route includes motorways or multi-lane expressways which
pass through an area to be avoided.
The area is entered into the list.
R There is no practical alternative route.
STARTING USING DESTINATION SEARCH
DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED
# Select Via address entry.
Multimedia system:
# Enter the address (/ page 45). 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
# Select the destination in the list. DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED

The map appears. The area is saved. # Select an area in the list.
CHANGING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED # Select Delete.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
# Select an area in the list. DELETING ALL AREAS TO BE AVOIDED
# If at least two areas to be avoided are set, select Delete all.
# Select Edit.
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE AREA
# Select a. MAP DATA UPDATE OVERVIEW
As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a
The area is entered into the list.
negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation
TAKING THE AREA FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-
# Select the area in the list. Benz.
595
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car
DATA: > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage
medium.
R Online map update
R Updates from the Mercedes me Portal After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your
R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the
map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has
Additional costs can be incurred in this process.
been restarted, the updated map data is used.
ONLINE MAP UPDATE
OVERVIEW OF MAP DATA
REQUIREMENTS: If map data is reinstalled in a vehicle, no activation code needs to be entered.
R Mercedes me connect is available. For map data purchased as data media, the enclosed activation code must be
R You have a Mercedes me user account. entered after starting the installation.
R The Online Map Update service is available for your region.
Activation codes are only ever valid for one vehicle.
R The service has been activated.
IN THE EVENT OF THE FOLLOWING PROBLEMS, PLEASE CONTACT A
MERCEDES-BENZ SERVICE CENTRE:
% The Online Map Update service is only available in certain coun‐
R The multimedia system does not accept the activation code.
tries.
R You have lost the activation code.
Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update. DISPLAYING THE COMPASS
Multimedia system:
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the
4 © 5 Navigation
European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved.
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position until
The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle the Position menu is shown.
is switched on.
# Select Compass.
UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL
THE COMPASS DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with
your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/ R The current direction of travel with bearing (360° format) and com‐
pass direction
596
R Longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and sec‐ When the option is activated, no detailed display of the junction
onds or a 3D image is shown in the navigation window during an
R Number of satellites from which a signal can be received upcoming driving manoeuvre.
The information is not available in every country.

DISPLAYING THE SATELLITE MAP
DISPLAYING QIBLA Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
4 © 5 Navigation # Select View.
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position until
# Activate or deactivate Satellite map.
the Position menu is shown.
WHEN SATELLITE MAP IS SELECTED, THEY ARE DISPLAYED AT THE
# Select Alerts. FOLLOWING MAP SCALES:
The arrow on the compass shows the direction to Mecca in relation to
R On-board maps
the current direction of travel.
The satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km.
The number of satellites received is shown.
R Online maps
The satellite maps are displayed in high-resolution map scales
from 10 m.
SETTING THE MAP SCALE AUTOMATICALLY

When Satellite map is not selected, no satellite maps are displayed.
Multimedia system:
% The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all
# Select View.
countries.
# Activate D Auto zoom.
When the option is switched on, the map scale is set automatically DISPLAYING THE RANGE
depending on your driving speed and the type of road. Requirements:
R There is an Internet connection.

% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually.
After a few seconds, this is automatically reset. R Mercedes me connect is available.
597
R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted R You have a Mercedes me user account.
the Mercedes me connect terms of use. R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
R The Range on Map service, subject to a fee, is available and has been Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
activated. R The service is available and has been activated.
Multimedia system: Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
# Select View.
# Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.

Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g.
temperature or cloud cover.
The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather sym‐
bols.
1 Display of the total range

% The display of online map content is not available in all coun‐
# Select View.
tries.
# Activate Range.
When the lower reserve capacity is reached then the range display on the map
is switched off.
% The range display on the map is not available in all countries.
DISPLAYING ONLINE MAP CONTENTS

Requirements:
R There is an Internet connection.

R Mercedes me connect is available.
598
Parking service Multimedia system:

NOTES ON THE PARKING SERVICE # Switch on Parking.
The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are
* NOTE shown.
ble clearance height SELECTING PARKING OPTIONS
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance

height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged. * NOTE
Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height. parking conditions
The data is based on the information provided by the respective service
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
providers.
drive in.
Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information
# Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
provided in relation to the car park or parking area.
# Always observe the local information and conditions.
% This service is not available in all countries.

Requirements:
DISPLAYING PARKING OPTIONS ON THE MAP R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
Requirements:
R Parking is activated (/ page 599).
R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation
# Tap on j on the map.
or
# In the route overview, select j Parking spaces (/ page 576).
599
# Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and R Placing a call at the destination.
Multi-storey car parks. R Sharing the destination via the QR code.
The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings. R Calling up the web address.
# Select a parking option.
R Showing the destination on the map.
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED (IF AVAILABLE): PRIOR BOOKING OF A PARKING SPACE
Requirements:
R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and
arrival time R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R Information on the car park, e.g. R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
- Opening times R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of park‐
- Parking charges ing in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective
- Current occupancy contract partner.
- Maximum parking time R Parking is activated (/ page 599).
- Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by the parking service
does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir‐
% This option is not available in all countries.
cumstances.
R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, Multimedia system:
cards) 4 © 5 Navigation
R Details on parking tariffs # Select a parking option on the map.
R Number of available parking spaces
# If a parking space available to book has been selected, select Book park-
R Payment method (e.g. at parking meters)
ing space.
R Services/facilities at the parking option
R Telephone number # Select the desired booking period. Take note of the cancellation condi‐
tions.
# Calculate the route (/ page 569). If the parking space is available for the selected period, the price will be
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED (IF AVAILABLE): shown.
R Searching for POIs in the vicinity. # Press a to confirm.

R Saving the destination.
600
# In the booking overview, confirm with Book. R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of park‐
ing in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective
# If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN. contract partner.
The parking space will be booked in the background. R Parking is activated (/ page 599).
A booking confirmation including a car park ticket will be sent to your
registered email address.
MAKING USE OF OR CANCELLING THE BOOKING % This option is not available in all countries.
# Start the Mercedes me App on your smartphone.
Multimedia system:
# Open Menu.
4©
# Select My transactions. # Select a parking option on the map.
# Select Parking transactions. # If a car park that can be paid for has been selected, scroll down in the
parking details.
# Select the desired booking.
# To make use of the booking: select Show car park ticket. # Select Payment.
Once the vehicle has reached a parking position with payment function
or
and the vehicle is switched off, a message appears. Using this message
you can pay from the vehicle and start the payment process.
# To cancel the booking: select Cancel booking.
STARTING A PAYMENT PROCEDURE
% If possible, a parking space booking can be cancelled up to the
# Acknowledge the message.
stated time. If a booking cannot be cancelled, this will already be # Please note the maximum parking period displayed and any existing
shown to you during the booking procedure.
additional limitations. If required, a message will inform you about the
necessity of displaying information confirming the online payment for
PAYING PARKING CHARGES the parking space.
Requirements: # Select Start the payment process.
R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account. # If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
601
Dashcam
The successful start of your parking transaction is shown.
NOTES ON THE DASHCAM
# Complete the booking with OK.
# To cancel a parking transaction: after receiving the confirmation * NOTE

request, select Cancel. Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations
and data protection provisions
Minimum charges may be incurred.
You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam func‐
ENDING A PARKING TRANSACTION tions.
# Stop the active transaction using the Mercedes me app.
You receive a summary of the procedure and the costs. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam
can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated.
If an uncompleted parking transaction is detected for your vehicle as
you continue your journey, a message will appear asking whether you This function is not permitted in all countries.
would like to end it.
# Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal
# Acknowledge the message. regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in
When the parking transaction is stopped successfully, another message the respective country of use.
appears with the details about your completed parking.
# Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection
requirements.
% OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE OPERA‐

TION:
R Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.

R Use USB-IF certified USB storage devices.
USB-IF is a non-profit corporation and stands for USB
Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, USB-
IF certifies, for example, USB versions, corresponding
cables and plugs as well as energy supply processes via
the USB interface.
602
R USB storage devices may be damaged if often or perma‐ Multimedia system:

nently overwritten at high speed. Mercedes-Benz recom‐ 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
mends a high-quality external SSD drive.
# Select the USB symbol.
The abbreviation SSD stands for Solid State Drive.
# Select the USB device.
% The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limi‐ % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video
ted by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 files are not always displayed in the recording list.
formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one
example. partition.
When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you
receive a notification.
STARTING OR STOPPING A LOOP RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM
Requirements:
% THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE GAL‐
LERY APP: R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the
multimedia system (/ page 655).
R Switching write protection on or off R The vehicle is switched on.
R Deleting video files
Multimedia system:
Additional information about the Gallery app (/ page 636). 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
# If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select
SELECTING A USB DEVICE FOR A VIDEO RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM a USB device (/ page 603).
Requirements: If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when
recording starts.
R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system
(/ page 655). # To select recording mode: select Loop recording.
Loop recording continuously records short video files. When the memory
is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, the oldest video
file is written over.
603
# To start: select Start recording. Multimedia system:

The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select
message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. a USB device (/ page 603).
# To end: select End recording. If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when
recording starts.
% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are # To select recording mode: select Individual recording.
shown in the video image. Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.
inaccuracies.
# To start: select Start recording.
A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage
medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# To end: select End recording.
R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 605).
R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam
% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are
recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically
shown in the video image.
after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is dis‐
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater
played.
inaccuracies.
STARTING OR STOPPING INDIVIDUAL RECORDINGS WITH THE DASHCAM
Requirements A REPORT MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the R Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes
multimedia system (/ page 655). recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped
R The vehicle is switched on. imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video file.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
604
R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 605).

R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam
recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically
after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is dis‐
played.
CONFIGURING DASHCAM SETTINGS

Requirements:
R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 655).
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
# Select Z.
RECEIVING NOTIFICATIONS AFTER PASSING A BORDER CROSSING
# Switch on National border alert .
A message is shown if video is being recorded and the vehicle passes a
border.
STARTING AUTOMATIC VIDEO RECORDING

# Select Automatic loop recording.
# Switch on Automatic loop recording.

When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically.
605
MBUX multimedia system Telephone
Telephone
Telephony & WARNING

NOTES ON TELEPHONY Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
WARNING Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situa‐
&
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication tion. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
equipment while the vehicle is in motion # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle the vehicle is stationary.
when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices
only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger com‐
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ partment.
mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ rently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communica‐
ment with the vehicle stationary. tion equipment in the vehicle.
606
TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW

& WARNING

sudden change in direction. 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in mobile phone
such situations. 2 Bluetooth® device name of the other currently connected mobile phone/of
the mobile phone
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. 5 Options
6 Messages
7 Calls up devices
8 Numerical pad
9 Starts contact search
OBSERVE THE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON STOWING MOBILE COM‐
BLUETOOTH® PROFILE OVERVIEW
MUNICATIONS DEVICES CORRECTLY:
Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone Function
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 242)
R Stowing and securing the mobile phone (/ page 268) PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Contacts are automatically displayed in the
multimedia system
Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or
at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ MAP (Message Access Profile) Message functions can be used
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Wireless telephony is available
607
TELEPHONY OPERATING MODES OVERVIEW CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE

DEPENDING ON YOUR EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING TELEPHONY OPER‐ Requirements:
ATING MODES ARE AVAILABLE:
R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® operating instructions).
(/ page 608).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 539).
R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Blue‐
tooth® (two phone mode) (/ page 609).
Multimedia system:
- You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with both
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
mobile phones.
SEARCHING FOR A MOBILE PHONE
# Select Connect new device.
% Bluetooth®
Irrespective of this, audio functionality can by used
AUTHORISING A MOBILE PHONE
with any mobile phone (/ page 656).
# Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
INFORMATION ON TELEPHONY
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO THE CALL BEING DISCON‐ # If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.
NECTED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION:
R There is insufficient network coverage in the area % For older mobile phone models, enter a 1 to 16-digit number
code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for
R You move from one transmission/reception station to another and no
authorisation.
communication channels are free
R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the sec‐ % Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia
ond SIM card at the same time system.
Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically.
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech qual‐
ity. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone net‐
work provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . % The connected mobile phone can also be used as Bluetooth®
audio equipment (/ page 656).
Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.
608
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: CHANGING THE FUNCTION OF A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
CONNECTING A SECOND MOBILE PHONE (TWO PHONE MODE)
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
Requirements
ACTIVATING A FUNCTION
R At least one mobile phone is already connected to the multimedia sys‐ # Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile phone.
tem via Bluetooth®. The corresponding function is activated.
DEACTIVATING A FUNCTION
Multimedia system: # One function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices mobile phone.
# Select Connect new device. The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system.
# Select the mobile phone. # Several functions are active: de-select an active function in the line of
one of the mobile phones.
# In some cases, if the query appears, confirm the selection of the mobile
The corresponding function is deactivated.
phone pair with the Device name 1 + Device name 2 option.
The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. REPLACING MOBILE PHONES
Multimedia system:
INTERCHANGING MOBILE PHONES (TWO PHONE MODE) 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone NO AUTHORISED MOBILE PHONE AVAILABLE:
Both mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs.

# Select Connect new device.
# Select the tab with the desired mobile phone.

# Select a mobile phone.
# Newly authorised mobile phone: confirm the numerical code on the
Selecting the tab of a specific mobile phone displays the associated
mobile phone.
telephone contents.
Selecting the other tab switches the view to the other telephone. USING IN SINGLE TELEPHONE MODE
The submenus in the telephone menu (e.g. contacts, call lists, messages)
# Select Device name.
relate to the currently selected mobile phone with the exception of the A newly authorised mobile phone is connected in single telephone
telephone settings. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for mode.
both mobile phones. If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single
telephone mode, it is connected again in single telephone mode.
609
If a mobile phone is already authorised and has been connected in two USING A MOBILE PHONE WITH NEAR-FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC)
phone mode with another mobile phone, a query may come, whether the
Requirements:
mobile phone should in future be operated in single telephone mode or
connected with another mobile phone in two phone mode. R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions)
# If required, confirm the query about operating mode (single telephone or
two phone mode) by confirming the Device name option. R The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manu‐
facturer's operating instructions)
USING IN TWO PHONE MODE
# Select Device name 1 + Device name 2.
CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE
A newly authorised mobile phone is connected with the selected mobile
phone in two phone mode.
If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single
telephone mode, it will be connected in future with the selected mobile
phone in two phone mode.
If the mobile phone was previously connected with another mobile
phone, this connection is cancelled.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A MOBILE PHONE # Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operat‐
Multimedia system:
ing instructions) on mat 1 or place the mobile phone on mat 1 with
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
the display facing upwards.
DISCONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE
# Follow the additional prompts on the media display to connect the
# Select Disconnect. mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone in single telephone mode
If applicable, the mobile phone will be automatically reconnected when (/ page 608). Connect the mobile phone in two phone mode
the vehicle is next started. (/ page 609).
DELETING A MOBILE PHONE REPLACING A MOBILE PHONE
# Select Devices. # Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions) against NFC interface 1 in the front storage
# Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
compartment.
# Select Delete device. # Follow the additional prompts on the media display to replace the
The mobile phone is deleted from the system. mobile phone in single or two phone mode (/ page 609).
610
# If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manu‐ Further information on the recommended reception and transmission volume:
facturer's operating instructions). https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
SETTING THE RINGTONE

% If your mobile phone supports wireless charging, it can be Multimedia system:
charged on the mat (/ page 268).
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Ringtones
# Set the ringtone.
% If the mobile phone is not charging, switch off NFC on the mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). % If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you
will hear the ringtone of the mobile phone instead of that of the
vehicle audio system.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
SETTING THE RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION VOLUME STARTING OR STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION
Requirements: Requirements
R A mobile phone is connected (/ page 608). R At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system
(/ page 608).
Multimedia system: R The tab with the mobile phone for which voice recognition should be
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices started is selected (/ page 609).
This function ensures optimal language quality.
STARTING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION
% Please note that the respective mobile phone must be selected
# Press and hold the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel for
for adjustment of the reception and transmission volume. more than one second.
Voice recognition is started for the currently selected mobile phone.
# Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone. STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION
# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
# Select Volume.
# Set the reception and transmission volume using Reception volume and
Transmission volume.
611
# Select Ä in the line of the suggested contact.

% If a mobile phone is connected via Smartphone Integration, the
THE FOLLOWING OPTION IS AVAILABLE FOR SELECTION:
voice recognition of this mobile phone is always started or stop‐
ped. R Do not suggest now
NOTE ABOUT CONTACT SUGGESTIONS

The multimedia system can show contact suggestions based on frequently Calls
used contacts, outgoing calls and text messages. For this, the Allow contact
TELEPHONE OPERATION
suggestions option must be switched on (/ page 542).
Multimedia system:
When you open the call list or the message menu, contacts which you can call 4 © 5 Phone
or write to will be suggested to you. Suggestions will be shown in the Sugges-
MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING NUMBERS
tionstab.
# Select _.
% The multimedia system does not use the content of messages for # Enter a number.
suggestions.
# Select R.
The call is made.
SELECTING OPTIONS FOR CONTACT SUGGESTIONS
ACCEPTING A CALL
Requirements
# Select R Accept .
R The Allow contact suggestions option is switched on (/ page 542). REJECTING A CALL
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show # Select k Reject .
contact suggestions.
ANSWERING A CALL WITH A MESSAGE
# Select s Answer w SMS.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone ENDING A CALL
# Select Call list or Contacts.
# Select k.
PUTTING A CALL ON IN-CAR OFFICE'S TO-DO LIST
# Select Suggestions. # Select À Put call on In-Car Office's to-do list.
612
ACTIVATING FUNCTIONS DURING A CALL CONDUCTING A CONFERENCE CALL

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DURING A CALL: # Select Â Conference.
R k End call The new participant is included in the conference call.
R m Micro. off ENDING AN ACTIVE CALL
R _ Keypad (show to send DTMF tones) # Select k End call.
R Á Add call
R Hands-free % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as
Transfer the call, e.g. to Front, Rear or All seats. the active call is ended.
R Private mode
Transfer the call to the telephone or headphones, for example. ACCEPTING OR REJECTING A WAITING CALL
Requirements
# Select a function.
R There is an active call (/ page 612).
% Observe that the functions and symbols can vary depending on

the vehicle equipment. If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed.
Depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network provider you will
CONDUCTING CALLS WITH SEVERAL PARTICIPANTS hear a call waiting signal.
Requirements Alternatively, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call
goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone.
R There is an active call (/ page 612).
R Another call is being made. # Select R Accept.
The incoming call is active.
SWITCHING BETWEEN CALLS If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the
# Select the contact. previous call will be put on hold.
The selected call is active. The other call is on hold. If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in
two phone mode then the existing call is ended.
ACTIVATING A CALL ON HOLD
# Select the contact of the call on hold. or
613
# Select Answer w SMS. DEPENDING ON THE DATA SOURCE, IT IS POSSIBLE TO SAVE/LOAD THE
The incoming call is not accepted. FOLLOWING NUMBER OF CONTACTS:
You answer with a message. R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
or R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone: 5,000 entries per mobile phone
# Select k Reject. FROM THE CONTACTS MENU, YOU CAN PERFORM THE FOLLOWING
ACTIONS:
% The function and the behaviour depend on your mobile phone
R Make a call, for example call a contact (/ page 615)
network provider as well as on the mobile phone (see the manu‐
facturer's operating instructions). R Navigation (/ page 566)
R Compose messages (/ page 617)
USING THE INTERNATIONAL DIALLING CODE R Additional options (/ page 616)
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 _ Mobile phone contacts are automatically displayed when a mobile phone is
# Press and "0" until a "+" appears in the selection field. connected to the multimedia system (/ page 608).
# Enter the numbers of the country code, regional code and the telephone DOWNLOADING MOBILE PHONE FAVOURITE CONTACTS
number. If the mobile phone supports the function, the favourites of the mobile phone
are automatically loaded and appear in the overview of the phone menu.
# Select R.
CALLING UP CONTACTS
The call is made.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
Contacts THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS CAN BE USED TO SEARCH FOR CONTACTS:
INFORMATION ABOUT THE CONTACTS MENU R Searching by initials

The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. R Searching by name
mobile phone or data storage medium.
R Searching by phone number
# Enter characters into the search field.
614
# Select the contact. IMPORTING CONTACTS INTO THE CONTACTS MENU

A CONTACT CAN CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING DETAILS: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Contacts 5 Import contacts
R Phone numbers
# Select a mobile phone <device name>, from which the contacts should be
R Navigation addresses
imported.
R Internet address
R Email addresses
# Select an option.
R Relationship (if set) SAVING A MOBILE PHONE CONTACT
Multimedia system:
MANAGING THE FORMAT OF A CONTACT'S NAME 4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
Multimedia system:
# Select r in the line of the mobile phone contact.
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z
# Select Contacts. # Select Ä.
# Select Name format. # Select Save.

# Select an option.
# Select Yes.
OVERVIEW OF IMPORTING CONTACTS
The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the MBUX
IMPORTING CONTACTS INTO THE CONTACTS MENU symbol.
Source Requirements CALLING A CONTACT
Multimedia system:
° USB device The USB device is connected with the USB
port. 4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
# Select ª Search contacts.
Mobile phone A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth®.
# Enter characters into the search field.
Contacts are available.
# Select the contact.
% Note that the imported contacts remain in the vehicle and can be # Select the telephone number.
accessed at any time regardless of the connected mobile The number is dialled.
phones.
615
SELECTING FURTHER OPTIONS IN THE CONTACTS MENU # Select Delete contact.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
# Select Yes.
# Select r in the line of the contact.
# Select Ä.
Call list
OVERVIEW OF THE CALL LIST
# Select an option.
Depending on whether your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® pro‐
DELETING CONTACTS file or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of
Requirements the call list.
R The contacts are saved in the vehicle. IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
R To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the
vehicle. R The call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia sys‐
tem.
Multimedia system: R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the con‐
4 © 5 Phone nection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
DELETING ALL CONTACTS

# Select Z. IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS NOT SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS
ARE AS FOLLOWS:
# Select Contacts.
R The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as
# Select Delete all MBUX contacts. calls are made in the vehicle.
R The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone.
# Select an option.
MAKING A CALL FROM THE CALL LIST
DELETING A CONTACT
Multimedia system:
# Select Contacts.
4 © 5 Phone
# Select r in the line of the contact. # Select ª Call list.
# Select Ä.
616
# Select an entry. You can obtain further information about settings and supported functions of
The call is made. Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
SELECTING ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE CALL LIST
Multimedia system: Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the
4 © 5 Phone multimedia system to activate the messaging functionality (see manufacturer's
# Select ª Call list. operating instructions).
SETTING MESSAGE DISPLAYS

# For contacts that are in the address book: select options.
Multimedia system:
The contact details are called up.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 Z 5 Devices
# For contacts where only one number is shown (not in the address book): # Select Message display.
select ç.
# Select On or Off.
DELETING THE CALL LIST
Multimedia system: READING MESSAGES
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 Z 5 Devices Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
# Select Delete call list.
USING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION
# Select Yes. A message list is shown.
# To read aloud, select the ¬ symbol at a conversation.

% This function is only available if your mobile does not support
the PBAP Bluetooth® profile. The message is read aloud.
CREATING AND SENDING A NEW MESSAGE
Requirements
Text messages R There is an Internet connection.
OVERVIEW OF MESSAGE FUNCTIONS R At least one mobile phone with reception is connected.
In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send R If applicable, the message function must be activated on the mobile
them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. phone.
If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® MAP profile, the mes‐
sage functions can be used on the multimedia system.
617
Multimedia system: # Select r next to a contact.

4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç The messaging history with this contact is shown.
# Using the MBUX voice assistant, speak the voice command Send a mes- # Select Ä.
sage to, and name the desired contact (/ page 504).
DICTATING TEXT
# Select Call.
# Say the message. USING TELEPHONE NUMBERS, URLS OR EMAIL ADDRESSES FROM A TEXT
You are guided by the voice dialogue. MESSAGE
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE IN THE MESSAGING HISTORY Requirements

Multimedia system:
R An Internet connection is available to call up a URL.
A message list is shown.
Multimedia system:
# Select r next to a contact. 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
The messaging history with this contact is shown. You will be guided A message list is shown.
through the steps with the help of a voice dialogue.
# Select r next to a contact.
# Say the message. The messaging history with this contact is shown.
FORWARDING MESSAGES
# Select a telephone number or a URL in the message.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç If a URL is selected the web browser opens.
IF A TELEPHONE NUMBER IS SELECTED THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS
A message list is shown.
ARE AVAILABLE:
# Speak the voice command Forward message.
R Call
You are guided by the voice dialogue.
R New message
CALLING A MESSAGE SENDER
Multimedia system: or
# If In-Car Office and the email function are available: select an email
A message list is shown. address.
In-Car Office opens.
618
Creating appointments/reminders and tasks

% The availability of In-Car Office is country-dependent.
# Select an option. % Alternatively, you can record text contents via the MBUX voice
assistant or via the dictation function.
DELETING A MESSAGE
Further information on the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 505).
Multimedia system:
A message list is shown. % Please note that certain functions are only available when the
# Select a contact.
# Press and hold on a message. CALLING UP IN-CAR OFFICE

# To delete the message: select Delete. Requirements:

In-Car Office R The In-Car Office service is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R You have a user account with an online service, for example Office 365
IN-CAR OFFICE FUNCTIONS
or Gmail.
Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services to the multimedia
system. In this way, appointments, e-mails and tasks can be synchronised and
facilitated.
R Calendar Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Apps
Showing appointments and triggering actions, e.g. reading aloud, placing
a call, navigating # Select In-Car Office.
R E-mail Individual functions from In-Car Office can be called up.
Reading, reading aloud, creating, answering and forwarding e-mails LINKING A USER ACCOUNT
R Tasks and calls # Select the desired online service.
Managing tasks and pre-booked calls
# Scan the QR code.
R Voice input
619
# Follow the instructions on the device. THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
SELECTING CALENDAR FUNCTIONS IN IN-CAR OFFICE R Reading aloud .
Multimedia system:
R Placing a call R
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Calendar
This task function requires a telephone number.
# Select an appointment.
R Marking as completed O
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: In the current edit, an entry that has been marked as completed can be
marked as open again by removing the tick.
R . Read aloud R Deleting E
R R Call R Displaying details r
R Z Navigate
MARKING AN ENTRY AS COMPLETED IN TASKS & CALLS
R E Delete
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls
# Select a function.
# Select Tasks & calls.
An overview appears.
% Functions are available if corresponding appointment informa‐
tion is saved. # Select O.
EXAMPLES OF THIS ARE: READING AND MANAGING E-MAILS
Multimedia system:
R If a telephone number has been saved for the appoint‐
ment, Call is available. 4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail
R If a navigable address has been saved in the Online # Select an e-mail.
Account for the appointment, Navigate is available. The e-mail is opened.
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
SELECTING FUNCTIONS OF TASKS & CALLS IN "IN-CAR OFFICE"
R . Reading e-mails
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls
R e Answering e-mails (/ page 621)
R ¥ Forwarding e-mails (/ page 621)
# Select a function for an entry.
R E Deleting e-mails
620
CREATING NEW E-MAILS # Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad.
Multimedia system:
# Select Send.
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail
# Select W Create e-mail .
% Please note that e-mails can only be written when the vehicle is
# Select f. stationary.
# Enter an e-mail address directly via the keyboard.

FORWARDING E-MAILS
or Multimedia system:
# Select an e-mail address from the contacts. # Select an e-mail.
% Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked

# Select Forward.
online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information # To forward with attachment: select Forward with attachment.
about the contacts menu (/ page 614).
% Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked

% Please note that e-mails can only be written when the vehicle is
online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information
stationary.
about the contacts menu (/ page 614).
# Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the corresponding fields with
the keypad. % Forwarding with an attachment is only possible if an attachment
is available.
# Select Send.
ANSWERING E-MAILS
# To forward without attachment: select Forward without attachment.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail # Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad.
# Select an e-mail.
# Select Send.
# Select Reply.
621
OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT AND

DICTATION FUNCTION % Further information on operating the MBUX Voice Assistant
Multimedia system: (/ page 504).
The following are examples of some voice commands that you can use to
OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE DICTATION FUNCTION
operate In-Car Office.
The dictation function allows you to dictate text content, such as the subject
or text of an e-mail, instead of typing the content using the keyboard. # To write new e-mail: say the voice command I want to send an e-mail to
John Doe.
% The dictation function is not available everywhere with the full You are guided by the dialogue.
range of functions. For the first-time activation of the function it
may be necessary to accept the Mercedes me connect terms of # To reply to an e-mail: say the voice command Reply to e-mail.
use in your Mercedes me user account. You are guided by the dialogue.
# To forward an e-mail: say the voice command Forward e-mail.

The following is an example of how you can dictate the subject and text of an
e-mail. Dictate the text of the e-mail.
# Select W Create e-mail .

# To show tasks: say the voice command Show my tasks.
The tasks are shown.
# Add recipients using f.
# To create a calendar entry: say the voice command Create a calendar
# Select p. entry tomorrow at 9 a.m..
The dictation function is started. You are guided by the dialogue.
# Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail.
After the voice input has been processed, it is shown as text.
# Select Send.
OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT
With the voice control of the MBUX Voice Assistant you can operate various
functions of In-Car Office and speak in text contents.
622
Apple CarPlay® Also for use of Apple CarPlay® with two phone mode, only one additional
mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.
OVERVIEW OF APPLE CARPLAY®
As access to the iPhone® is restricted by MBUX when an Apple CarPlay® ses‐
sion is active, not all MBUX functions (e.g. dialling from the address book) can
& WARNING be fully provided for the connected device. In this case use Apple CarPlay®.
equipment The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay® is only available with an Internet
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐ connection.
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary according to the country.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and
mits. content connected to it.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
INFORMATION ON APPLE CARPLAY®
The Apple CarPlay® symbol in the status line switches within Apple CarPlay® to
the last active display.
iPhone® functions can be used via the multimedia system using Apple Car‐ If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route
Play®. They are operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or Siri® voice guidance is started on the mobile phone.
control. You can activate voice control by pressing and holding the £ but‐
ton on the multifunction steering wheel. CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (WIRED)
Requirements:
% By briefly pressing the £ button on the multifunction steering
R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 504).
Only one iPhone® at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay® with the mul‐
timedia system.
623
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the Apple CarPlay®
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the symbol in the status line.
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the parking brake applied.
CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (WIRELESS)
# Connect the iPhone® to a USB port on the multimedia system using a Requirements
suitable cable (/ page 655). R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
When the application is connected for the first time, a message about the manufacturer's operating instructions).
data protection regulations appears. R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating
# Select Accept & start if the application should be started. instructions).
R The device is "visible" for other devices.
or
# Open the device manager (/ page 609). % For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the
# Start Apple CarPlay® using the relevant symbol next to the device name. multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the parking brake applied.
% If applicable, a message about data protection regulations

Multimedia system:
appears.
# If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.

# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 608).
When the application is connected for the first time, a message about
EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®
data protection regulations appears.
# Select ©.
# Select OK, start Apple CarPlay if the application should be started.
or
# If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.
# Press the © button on the multifunction steering wheel (MBUX multi‐
media system).
% It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Blue‐
tooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) in the device list.
% If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐
624
% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®, % If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐
you can connect another iPhone® via Bluetooth® to use Apple connecting, the application starts in the background the next
CarPlay® via the device manager. time it is started automatically. You can call up Apple CarPlay®
using the relevant symbol in the status line.
EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®

# Select ©.
Android Auto
or
ANDROID AUTO OVERVIEW
# Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).
& WARNING
% If AppleCarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐ Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐ equipment
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the Apple CarPlay® If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
symbol in the status line. ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
CALLING UP APPLE CARPLAY® SOUND SETTINGS # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
Multimedia system: mits.
# Select the sound settings. attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ENDING APPLE CARPLAY® ment with the vehicle stationary.
# Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager (telephone,
media) that is next to the device name of the iPhone®.
% Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager in the Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android
telephone or media applications if Apple CarPlay® should be operating system on the multimedia system. They are operated using the
restarted. touchscreen, Touch Control or voice control. You can activate the voice control
system by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
625
R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be con‐
% By briefly pressing the £ button on the multifunction steering nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 608).
wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using
If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use
the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 504).
of the mobile phone with Android Auto.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Android Auto with the
multimedia system. % For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the
Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile
tionary with the parking brake.
phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.
The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet # Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on the multimedia system using
connection. a suitable cable (/ page 655).
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to When the application is connected for the first time, a message about
the country. data protection regulations appears.
The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and
# Select Accept & start if the application should be started.
content connected to it.
or
# Open the device manager (/ page 609).
INFORMATION ON ANDROID AUTO # Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol next to the device name.
The Android Auto symbol in the status line switches within Android Auto to the
EXITING ANDROID AUTO
last active display. # Select ©.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route
or
guidance is started on the mobile phone.
CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRED)

Requirements:
R The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0.

R The current version of the Android Auto app is installed on the mobile
phone.
626
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐ % Depending on the device configuration, the query whether
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐ Android Auto should be started may appear after connecting the
nected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto mobile phone via Bluetooth®. In this case, the query must be
symbol in the status line. answered with Yes.
CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRELESS) # Select Start Android Auto.
Requirements When the application is connected for the first time, a message about
data protection regulations appears.
R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Accept & start.
R The device supports the Android Auto function (wireless).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating % It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Blue‐
instructions). tooth® or Android Auto (wireless) in the device list.
R The device is "visible" for other devices.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 539)
% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®,
you can connect another mobile phone via Bluetooth® to use
Android Auto via the device manager.
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the
tionary with the parking brake. EXITING ANDROID AUTO
# Select ©.
% The Android Auto function (wireless) is not available in all coun‐ or

tries.
Multimedia system:
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 608). nected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto
symbol in the status line.
627
CALLING UP THE ANDROID AUTO SOUND SETTINGS The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehi‐
Multimedia system: cle and the mobile phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi‐
# Select the sound settings. fier is randomly generated.
ENDING ANDROID AUTO
This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is
# Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager (telephone,
deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 545).
media) that is next to the device name of the mobile phone.
THE FOLLOWING DRIVING STATUS DATA IS TRANSMITTED:
% Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager if Android
R Transmission position engaged
Auto should be restarted.
R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
R Day/night mode of the driver display
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐ R Drive type
connecting, the application starts in the background the next
time it is started automatically. You can call up Android Auto
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to corre‐
using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.
spond to the driving situation.
THE FOLLOWING POSITION DATA IS TRANSMITTED:

Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto R Coordinates
and Apple CarPlay® R Speed
R Compass direction
OVERVIEW OF TRANSFERRED VEHICLE DATA
R Acceleration direction
When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the
mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone
services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the naviga‐
tion (e.g. for continuity in a tunnel).
THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM INFORMATION IS TRANSMITTED:
R Software release of the multimedia system

R System ID (anonymised)
628
Mercedes me calls If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This
has priority over all other active calls.
MAKING A CALL VIA THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL
INFORMATION ABOUT THE MERCEDES ME CALL USING THE ME BUTTON
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me
% Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 629).
a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available
in your country. USING THE VOICE DIALOGUE SYSTEM YOU ACCESS THE DESIRED
SERVICE:
R Accident and Breakdown Management

R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehi‐
cle
YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING TOPICS:
R Activation of Mercedes me connect

R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
R Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz
1 me button for service or information calls
2 SOS button cover Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
3 SOS button (emergency call system) Centre (/ page 632).
Making a Mercedes me call CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE USING THE MULTIME‐
DIA SYSTEM
# Press me button 1.
Requirements
MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL
# To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it briefly. R Access to a GSM network is available.
R The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respec‐
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. tive region.
629
R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred R The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code
automatically. P54).
R The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated
Multimedia system: on Mercedes me connect.
4 © 5 Phone 5 ©
# Call Mercedes me connect. If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked
vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you
After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle
switch the vehicle on.
data. The data transfer is shown in the display.
The message informs you about the potentially affected area of the vehicle
Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the
and the strength of the collision.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide
CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE AFTER AUTOMATIC
shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few sec‐
ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN DETECTION
onds.
Requirements:
R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation % The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle.
(/ page 388).
R The vehicle is stationary. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a
R The hazard warning lights are switched on. prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
# Select Call.
R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Acci‐
dent and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circum‐ transferred automatically (/ page 634).
stances. R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises
the breakdown and accident assistance.
REQUIREMENTS FOR COLLISION DETECTION IN THE CONTEXT OF ACCI‐
DENT RECOVERY:
You may be charged for these services.
R The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
R The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882).
630
# To arrange a service appointment: select Call.

% Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emer‐
After your consent, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-
gency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active
Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The infor‐
calls (/ page 640).
mation is then sent to your desired service outlet.
This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary con‐
sult about the details.
% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics"
is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event
of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes- % If you select Call later after the service message appears, the
Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this message is hidden and reappears at a later time.
prompt can be ignored or declined.
GIVING CONSENT TO DATA TRANSFER DURING A MERCEDES ME CALL
% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Requirements
Customer Centre with Call later, the message will be hidden and R There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me
appear again later. button in the overhead control panel (/ page 629).
The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Tele‐
diagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being
declined, this will not be shown again.
% The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all coun‐
tries.
ARRANGING A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA A MERCEDES ME CALL
If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle
data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on
will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of Mercedes me, the Do you want to transfer your vehicle data and the vehicle's
your vehicle. position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre to improve the processing of your
request? message is shown.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management
service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time
% The exact phrase may differ depending on the multimedia sys‐
that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an
tem installed.
appointment.
631
# Select Yes.
% The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model
R The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically (/ page 632).
and vehicle equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is
or available at all times.
# Select No and confirm. DATA TRANSFER IF MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE NOT ACTIVA‐
R Only call control data is transmitted (/ page 632). TED
More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me IF NO MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE ACTIVATED AND THE DATA
PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN CONFIRMED THE FOLLOWING DATA IS
DATA TRANSFERRED DURING A MERCEDES ME CALL TRANSMITTED:
If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable
targeted advice and an efficient service. R Vehicle identification number
R Time of the call
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS MUST BE FULFILLED FOR THE TRANS‐
FER OF THE DATA: R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Confirmation of the data protection prompt
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone
R Set language for the multimedia system
network provider.
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehi‐
R The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.
cle
MULTI-STAGE TRANSFER DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

IF A CALL IS MADE FOR A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA THE SERVICE
R Reason for the initiation of the call REMINDER, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS ALSO TRANSMITTED:
R The available mobile phone transmission technology R Current mileage and maintenance data
R The activated Mercedes me connect services
R The service selected in the voice control system IF A CALL IS MADE AFTER AUTOMATIC ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN
DETECTION USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS
ALSO TRANSMITTED:
% A prompt for consent to the data transfer only occurs if the cor‐
responding Mercedes me connect service is not activated. R Current mileage and maintenance data
R Current vehicle location
632
IF ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT IS CALLED VIA THE VOICE partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Take note of the
CONTROL SYSTEM AND NO SERVICE HAS BEEN ACTIVATED, BUT THE data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://
DATA PROTECTION QUERY HAS BEEN CONFIRMED, THE FOLLOWING www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the
DATA CAN ALSO BE CALLED UP FROM THE VEHICLE BY THE MERCEDES- Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE:
R Current vehicle location % The recorded message is not available in every country.
IF THE DATA PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN REJECTED, THE FOLLOW‐

ING DATA IS TRANSMITTED TO ENABLE TARGETED ADVICE AND AN EFFI‐ Mercedes me connect
CIENT SERVICE:
INFORMATION ON MERCEDES ME CONNECT
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Rejection of the data protection prompt % Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect serv‐
R Country indicator of the vehicle ices are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-
R Set language for the multimedia system Benz service centre if these functions are available in your coun‐
try.
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehi‐
cle
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.
DATA TRANSFER IF MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE ACTIVATED
Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING SERVICES VIA THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. AND THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL, FOR EXAMPLE:
An overview of the data transferred is contained in the data protection infor‐ R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-depend‐
mation for the Mercedes me connect services. You can find these in your ent display in the multimedia system)
Mercedes me user account. R Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and
SOS button)
DATA PROCESSING
The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the process‐
ing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the
other activated Mercedes me connect services. Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.
The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐ The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead
tomer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service control panel (/ page 629).
633
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent
system (/ page 629). which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emer‐ R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics
gencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national
emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 74). recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly inter‐
preted and are available through the monitoring of components that are
Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection subject to diagnostics.
information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may
user account. be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system
INFORMATION ON MERCEDES ME CONNECT ACCIDENT AND BREAK‐ only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
DOWN MANAGEMENT
% Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the
country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of
whether this function is available in your country. the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some
circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the infor‐
mation to appear in the multimedia system.
THE ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT CAN INCLUDE THE FOL‐
LOWING FUNCTIONS:
Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 74) emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency number first or
If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 638).
centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Break‐
down Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the
countries. Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing DATA TRANSFERRED DURING MERCEDES ME CONNECT CALL SERVICES
away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
THE DATA TRANSFERRED DURING A MERCEDES ME CONNECT CALL
You may be charged for these services. DEPENDS ON:
R Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown
detection (/ page 630) R The reason for initiation of the call
R The service that is selected in the voice control system
634
R The activated Mercedes me connect services YOUR VEHICLE IS NOT LINKED TO THE USER ACCOUNT
You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the cur‐ % If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user account, you can cre‐
rently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection infor‐ ate one at: https://www.mercedes.me or in the Mercedes me
mation for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me App. A valid email address or phone number is required for this.
user account.
# Select ©.
Mercedes me Apps # Select Apps.
INFORMATION ABOUT MERCEDES ME # Select Mercedes me.
With a Mercedes me user account you have access to Mercedes-Benz services
and offers. # Follow the instructions on the display to link the user account with the
vehicle.
Availability is dependent both on the country and equipment.
You can obtain further information at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or in the % If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehi‐
Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com cle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.
Further information about on-demand features via Mercedes me can be found

in the "General notes" section (/ page 106). CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME SERVICES
Requirements:
% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated.
R The vehicle is connected with the user account.
CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME USER ACCOUNT

Multimedia system:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me
# Select My services.
VEHICLE IS LINKED TO USER ACCOUNT AND MERCEDES ME IS AVAILABLE
The Mercedes me connect services for which you have a valid licence
# Select Mercedes me ID. are displayed in alphabetical order.
Information about the linked user account appears.
ORDERING OR EXTENDING MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES
To order or renew Mercedes me connect services, use the Store.
635
# Select ©. THE FOLLOWING APPS ARE AVAILABLE, FOR EXAMPLE:
# Select Store. R Weather

DELETING A CONNECTION BETWEEN A USER ACCOUNT AND THE VEHICLE R Browser
R Additional apps, which are purchased or installed subsequently
Requirements
R The user profile of the user account that was first linked to the vehicle is
selected. % You can also access both of the first two apps via the quick
R The user profile is synchronised (/ page 528). access at Apps.
R A Mercedes me PIN has been set.
% The available features are country-dependent.

Multimedia system: Licence fees may be applicable.
# Select Mercedes me ID. THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR APPS, FOR EXAMPLE:
# Select Delete vehicle connection. R Search function
R Filter function, for displaying search results at the current vehicle posi‐
% Only the user, whose user account was first connected with the tion or at the destination
vehicle can delete the connection between all user accounts and R Display of detailed information
the vehicle. R Read-aloud function
R Setting functions
SELECTING APPS
USING THE GALLERY APP
R Depending on the app, the general terms and conditions are confirmed. 4 © 5 Apps
# Select Gallery.
Multimedia system: IMAGES AND VIDEO RECORDINGS ARE DISPLAYED FROM THE FOL‐
4 © 5 Apps LOWING SOURCES, FOR EXAMPLE:
# Select an app. R Dashcam video recordings
636
R Collision detection images # Select Add to favourites/Remove from favourites.

R Video recordings and images from other available sources A corresponding message appears.
R Favourites SWITCHING WRITE PROTECTION ON OR OFF
# Select a tab.
% Active write protection is not supported by every app.
FILTERING DISPLAYS
# Select Z.
# Press and hold on a file.
# Select an option.
# Activate D or deactivate E Write protection.
All files, all images or all video recordings are displayed.
PLAYING BACK A VIDEO RECORDING DELETING FILES
# Select 6.
# Select ´.
Playback starts. # To delete a single file: tap on a file.

# To continue playback in full screen mode: tap on the display. ø will appear.
# To pause playback: select 8.

# To delete all files: tap on /.
# To continue playback from the desired position: move the · posi‐

# To delete: select E.
tion on the timeline by sliding it. A prompt appears.
# To select the previous or next video recording: swipe to the right or # Select Yes.
left.
SCROLLING AND ZOOMING IMAGES % A single file can be deleted even after a long press on the file.
# To scroll: swipe on the image in one direction.
# To zoom: tap twice in quick succession on an image.
# To select the previous or next image: swipe to the right or left.

ADDING OR REMOVING A FILE FROM THE FAVOURITES
# Press and hold on a file.
637
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system THE FOLLOWING APPLIES FOR BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:
R The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both
INFORMATION ON AVAILABLE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" sec‐
TWO TYPES OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU IN tion (/ page 640).
THE VEHICLE:
R Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system vehicle and are activated at the factory.
R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) R The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.
R Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile
phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage.
The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries.
You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes- For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone
Benz emergency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.
extra/ecall/
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AND THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone net‐ R If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the system only logs in to
work. the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.
R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls
emergency call centre. directly to public coordination centres.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can‐
not be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out
automatically.
% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets % Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-
the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functional‐ Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant
ity of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on cir‐ to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appendix I). Other man‐
cumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This ufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certi‐
includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastruc‐ fied according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.
ture of the public reception centres in the respective countries.
638
There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make
and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the
local dealers. INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE
MERCEDES-BENZ RECOMMENDS THE ACTIVATION OF THE MERCEDES- MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:
BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM FOR THE FOLLOWING REASONS:
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call
R In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a lan‐ system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete
guage you speak. failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be trans‐
R Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of mitted.
the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission. The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the emer‐ gency call centre.
gency call and faster transfer of the accident data. The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can
Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is
quickly. switched on.
R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transfer‐ R G: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
red to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.
In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there
is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loud‐
public emergency call centre. speakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are
R If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is not available, the 112 faulty.
emergency call is carried out automatically. YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐
TEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency R A corresponding message will also appear in the driver dis‐
call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and play.
the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
an accident site in places that are difficult to access.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically

(/ page 640) or manually (/ page 640).
639
TRIGGERING AN AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY CALL R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle
immediately.
Requirements:
TRIGGERING A MANUAL EMERGENCY CALL
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. button at least one second long (/ page 629).
BOTH THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AS WELL AS THE or

112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL) AUTOMATICALLY INITIATE AN
EMERGENCY CALL:
# To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX voice assis‐
tant (/ page 509).
R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt ten‐ THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:
sioners after an accident
R A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.
THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:

R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do
so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
R A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre. R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is
R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call necessary to call rescue teams and the police to the accident site.
centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call
centre.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call
is finished. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a correspond‐
ing message appears in the display.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a correspond‐
ing message appears in the display. # Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call
number on your mobile phone.
# Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call
number on your mobile phone. EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER
For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emer‐
IF AN EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN INITIATED:
gency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
R If the traffic conditions and safety permit, remain in the vehicle until a gency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.
voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
Depending on the emergency call system (/ page 638) activated different
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is
data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.
necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
640
TRANSMITTED DATA ACCORDING TO ACTIVATED EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call
R Position data of the vehicle R Position data of the vehicle
R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
R Direction of travel R Direction of travel
R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle identification number
R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)
R Number of people detected in the vehicle R Number of people detected in the vehicle
R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
R Time of the accident R Time of the accident
R Language setting on the multimedia system
R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not

This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre if necessary.
% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in % For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information,
the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emer‐
emergency call centre. gency call.
FOR ACCIDENT CLARIFICATION PURPOSES, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION OF THE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
CAN BE TAKEN UP TO AN HOUR AFTER THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emergency call system every time
INITIATED: the vehicle is switched on. During this time, the SOS button lights up red con‐
tinuously for five seconds. In the event of a system failure, you will be
R The current vehicle position can be determined. informed via a text message on the driver's display and the red SOS NOT
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. READY indicator on the central display or media display.
R Emergency call data can be called up.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red
indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF,
this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.
641
STARTING/ENDING ERA-GLONASS TEST MODE The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for res‐
cue and recovery in the event of an accident.
Requirements
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has the right
R The vehicle is switched on. to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute. gency call system.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐

% THE TEST MODE IS CURRENTLY AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOW‐ gency call system are the local dealers.
ING COUNTRIES, FOR EXAMPLE: PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐
R Russia TEM (EU ECALL)
All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
R Belarus
corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the
R Kazakhstan protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data
R Armenia (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital inter‐
R Kyrgyzstan ests of the affected person in accordance with article 6, paragraph1, letter d of
the GDPR.
# To start the test mode: press and hold the ~ button on the multi‐ The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operat‐
function steering wheel for at least five seconds. ing the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.
The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test
DATA RECIPIENT
has been performed.
The recipients of data that is processed by the 112 emergency call system (EU
# To stop manual test mode: switch off the vehicle. eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals. These are configured
by the appropriate authorities of the respective country in which they are loca‐
The test mode is ended.
ted to first accept and subsequently process emergency calls to the standard
INFORMATION ON DATA PROCESSING European emergency call number 112.
PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY
CALL SYSTEM
All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the
protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data
(GDPR)".
642
ARRANGEMENTS FOR DATA PROCESSING

BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS ARE DESIGNED SO THAT THE FOLLOW‐
ING REQUIREMENTS ARE FULFILLED:
R The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the
system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
R Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continu‐
ous tracking in normal operation.
R The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continu‐
ously deleted.
R The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the sys‐
tem's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current loca‐
tions required for the normal function of the system are available.
R The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only
kept for as long as is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emer‐
gency call, and under no circumstances for more than 13 hours after the
time that an emergency call is initiated.
RIGHTS OF PERSONS AFFECTED BY THE DATA PROCESSING

The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right
to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or
barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does
not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring
carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to
which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infea‐
sible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.
The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the
appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their
rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.
Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeauf‐

tragter für den Datenschutz, Mercedes-Benz Group AG, HPC E600, D-70546
Stuttgart, Germany
643
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection & WARNING

INFORMATION ON CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
WARNING Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situa‐
&
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications tion. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
equipment # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐ the vehicle is stationary.
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices
only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger com‐
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ partment.
mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ rently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
ment with the vehicle stationary. DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT AND AVAILABILITY IN THE
COUNTRY, YOU CAN ESTABLISH AN INTERNET CONNECTION IN THE FOL‐
LOWING WAYS:
rently driving when operating the multimedia system. R Vehicles with a communication module:
- Using the communication module including data roaming
(/ page 645)
- Using Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone
R Vehicles without a communication module:
- Using Bluetooth® with a data-enabled mobile phone
644
- Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be ter‐
minated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prereq‐
uisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The avail‐
The Internet functions can only be used to a limited degree whilst driving.
ability of this option is dependent on the country.
SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION USING THE COMMUNICATION
If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can pur‐
MODULE
chase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.
Requirements
R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication % Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether it is
module. possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from
R A Mercedes me user account is available. a mobile phone network provider.
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.

R The Entertainment Package is active. % Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise the tethering func‐
R The Comfort Data Volume service is active. tion of a mobile phone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® to use the web
browser or Wi-Fi hotspot.
Multimedia system:
5 Manage Internet access % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP,
online software updates cannot be carried out via the external
# Select Acquired data package. Wi-Fi hotspot.
For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when pur‐
chasing the services. DISCONNECTING THE AUTOMATIC INTERNET CONNECTION VIA COMMU‐
NICATION MODULE
Additional data volume is required to use some functions, e.g. web browser or
Wi-Fi hotspot. Requirements:
If the data volume limit is reached, the availability of Mercedes me connect R Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® tethering are available in the vehicle.
services is limited.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package

directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To
be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a
645
Multimedia system: The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager
# Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol.
5 Manage Internet access
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager
# Select the Ä settings in the line of Acquired data package.
# Select Search for access.
# To disconnect the automatic connection: select the Delete entry
option. # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol.
It may take a few seconds until the device is found by the Wi-Fi search.
% The communication module is removed from the list of known # Log in to the Wi-Fi network (/ page 540).
hotspots, but can be reconnected manually at any time
(/ page 645). THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WI-FI IS RESTRICTED OR DOES NOT
FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
The Delete entry option permits the use of purchased data volume to be limi‐ R The mobile phone is switched off
ted. The system is prevented from automatically establishing a connection to R Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone
the communication module after this option has been activated. R The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multimedia system
SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WI-FI R The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the mobile phone
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone
Requirements:
R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 540). SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH®
R The Wi-Fi hotspot function is activated on the mobile phone (see the Requirements:
manufacturer's operating instructions).
R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® profile PAN (Personal Area
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating Network).
instructions).
R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®
(/ page 608).
Multimedia system:
R Internet access via Bluetooth® is activated (see the manufacturer's oper‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth ating instructions).
% This function is country-dependent.
646
Multimedia system: R Neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simulta‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth neous use of a telephone and an Internet connection
5 Manage Internet access R The mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Blue‐
tooth®
% This function is country-dependent. CANCELLING INTERNET ACCESS PERMISSION FOR A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
# Select the mobile phone with the \ Bluetooth® symbol. # Select options Ä next to the name of the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager
# Select Delete configuration.
# Select Search for access.
In the list displayed, all mobile phones already known to the multimedia # Select Yes.
system are shown. New devices can be set up using the phone applica‐
ESTABLISHING AN INTERNET CONNECTION
tion.
Multimedia system:
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 608). 4 © 5 Apps
# For example, select z Browser.
% If a new mobile phone is connected using Bluetooth®, this is also
used for the telephone application. If you select a function that requires an Internet connection and the system is
currently offline, a menu opens with a selection of possible Internet accesses
as well as all tethering devices that are within range.
THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH® IS RESTRICTED OR DOES
NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: # Select an Internet access from the list.
R The mobile phone is switched off The Internet connection is established.
R The mobile phone network coverage is insufficient
R Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone % The list of possible Internet connections can also be displayed
using the extended status line.
R The Bluetooth® function on the multimedia system is switched off and
the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth®
R The Bluetooth® function is switched off on the mobile phone and the
mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth®
647
R When connecting via a Bluetooth® device, the connection status, device

% Depending on the vehicle equipment and country availability, name, and network type are displayed.
you can establish an Internet connection via the communication
R In the case of a connection via the communication module the following
module or connected mobile phones.
status information can be shown:
- Type of network
% The availability of the web browser depends on the country. - Status (online, offline, data volumes available or used, limited
service)
R For vehicles with a communication module, the connection data of non-
user paid services can be displayed via Mercedes me connect.
Connection status
CONNECTION STATUS OVERVIEW
Web browsers
DEPENDING ON THE CONNECTION STATUS, THE FOLLOWING SYMBOLS
CAN APPEAR ON THE MEDIA DISPLAY IN THE STATUS LINE: CALLING UP A WEB PAGE
R ö: a Wi-Fi device is selected as Internet access.

& WARNING
R \: a Bluetooth® device is selected as Internet access. Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
R Mobile communications standard (e.g. 4G + double arrow symbol): the equipment
communication module is selected as the hotspot. If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS
Multimedia system:
4© # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
# Briefly press the status line. mits.
The extended status line is displayed. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
# Briefly press the Internet symbol in the symbol overview.
The current connection status is displayed.
NOTES ON DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS
R When connecting via Wi-Fi, the connection status and device name are rently driving when operating the multimedia system.
displayed.
648
Multimedia system: 5 Adds/removes bookmarks

4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 6 Options
CALLING UP A NEW WEB PAGE 7 Settings
# Select Search.
% UNDER Ä YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
# Entering a web address.
R Tabs
# Select OK.
R Bookmarks & history
R Reading mode
% The function is country-dependent.
R Share link
R Share content
% No web pages can be displayed on the multimedia system while R Request mobile website
driving.
CALLING UP WEB BROWSER OPTIONS
CALLING UP A WEBSITE FROM THE BROWSER HISTORY Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä 5 Bookmarks & history
# To call up the previous page from the history: select q.
WEB BROWSER OVERVIEW
R Bookmarks
R Browsing history
R Entered URLs
# Select an option.
# Change the settings.

1 Previous website
2 Next website
3 Update
4 URL
649
CALLING UP THE WEB BROWSER SETTINGS R Edit

Multimedia system: R Share
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Settings
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: # Select one of the options shown.
R Block popups MANAGING TABS
R Enable cookies Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä 5 Tabs
R Enable Javascript
OPENING A NEW TAB
# Switch a function on D or off E. # Select New tab.
DELETING BROWSER DATA CHANGING TAB

Multimedia system: # Select the icon for the desired tab.
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Browser data CLOSING A TAB
THE FOLLOWING SPECIFIC BROWSER DATA CAN BE DELETED: # Press and hold the icon of the tab to be closed until a menu appears.
R Cache # Select Close.
R Cookies The tab is closed.
R Form data
PRIVATE MODE
# Switch private mode on D or off E.
# Select one of the options shown.
If the private mode is switched on, an icon appears in the input line of
MANAGING BOOKMARKS the web browser.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä % In private mode, neither the history nor cookies are saved.
# Select Bookmarks & history. Bookmarks can also be created in private mode.
# Select Ä after the bookmark.
A menu with options opens.
R Delete entry
R Delete all
650
SHARING URLS FROM THE WEB BROWSER

TuneIn Radio
Requirements:
CALLING UP TUNEIN RADIO
R To share via QR code: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the
Requirements:
mobile device.
R There is a user account at https://www.mercedes.me.
Multimedia system: R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä R The TuneIn radio service is activated.
SHARING URLS VIA QR CODE R The data volume is available.
# Select Share link. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
A QR code appears.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
# Scan the displayed QR code with a mobile device.

SHARING URLS WITH ANOTHER DISPLAY % The functions and services are country-dependent. For more
information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# Select Share content.
# In the menu drag and drop a display to another display. Multimedia system:
The displayed web page opens on the other display. 4 © 5 Þ Radio
SETTING THE WEB BROWSER IN THE BACKGROUND # Select TuneIn Radio.
Multimedia system: The TuneIn Radio menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser
# Press ©. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone
Audio playback continues. reception.
651
OVERVIEW OF TUNEIN RADIO or
# Select the search field.

# Enter a station name.
% A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using

Internet Radio.
SAVING/DELETING A TUNEIN RADIO STATION AS A FAVOURITE

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 TuneIn Radio
SAVING FAVOURITES
1 Internet Radio provider
# Select a station.
2 Additional information on the currently selected station
3 Previous or next station # Press the symbol next to the station name.
4 Settings DELETING FAVOURITES
5 Additional options # Select a station.
6 Favourites
7 Controls playback
# Press the symbol next to the station name.
8 Station list SETTING INTERNET RADIO OPTIONS
9 Search Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 TuneIn Radio 5 Z 5 TuneIn
SELECTING AND CONNECTING TO TUNEIN RADIO STATIONS
Multimedia system: THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 TuneIn Radio R Select Stream: select the stream quality
# Select =. R Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your TuneIn user account
# Select a category. R Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn user account
# Select a station.
# Select an option.
The connection is established automatically.
652
MBUX multimedia system Media
Media
Information about media mode R Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32‑bit
address space).
INFORMATION ABOUT SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA R Due to the large variety of available music and video files
regarding encoders, sampling frequency and data transfer
WARNING rates, playback cannot be guaranteed.
&
Risk of distraction when handling data storage media R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the mar‐
If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is ket, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices.
diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose R Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported.
control of the vehicle. R Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back.
# Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is sta‐
R MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).
tionary.
R Files with the corresponding format can be played back
from the USB device in Dolby Atmos.
SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA:
Permissible file systems FAT32, exFAT, NTFS INFORMATION ON COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AND TRADEMARKS
Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media you
Permissible data storage USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio
media
make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many coun‐
devices
tries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the copy‐
Supported audio formats MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC right holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the applica‐
ble copyright regulations and that you comply with these.
Supported video formats MPEG, AVI, MKV, MP4, M4V, WMV
% OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000

files.
653
For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence

from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together
are registered trademarks, and DTS TruVolume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.©.
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 2020-2022 Dolby Laboratories. All
Rights Reserved.
DTS® Connected Radio™

For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS Connected Radio, and the DTS logo are regis‐
tered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and other
countries. © 2020 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Lyrics licensed and provi‐
ded by Lyric Find™. Content licensed and sourced from Radioplayer™.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID

and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
This product incorporates Spotify software which is subject to 3rd party licen‐
ces found here: https://www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses
654
8 Additional options
9 Additional categories
A Playlists and categories
B Timeline
C Media search
D Next track or fast forward
TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European E Controls playback
Union and other countries. F Previous track or fast rewind
Overview of the media menu Connecting the data storage medium to the
multimedia system
CONNECTING USB DEVICES
* NOTE
Damage caused by high temperatures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
# Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehi‐
cle.
1 Album cover
2 Active media source
3 Track and artist
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback
list
5 Repeat
6 Random playback
7 Settings
655
# Select an audio device.

Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and
on the mobile phone.
# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.
# Select No, only music.

The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia sys‐
tem.
CONNECTING PREVIOUSLY AUTHORISED BLUETOOTH® AUDIO EQUIP‐
MENT
A multimedia connection unit is found in the storage compartment under the # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list.
armrest and has two type C USB ports 1. Depending on the vehicle's equip‐
The connection is being established.
ment, additional USB ports can be found in the storage compartment of the
centre console and in the rear folding compartment.
# Connect the USB device to the USB port. Starting media playback
SEARCHING FOR AND AUTHORISING A BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE Requirements:
Requirements: R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment.
R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and Multimedia system:
AVRCP. 4 © 5 Media
R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. # Select a media source.
Multimedia system:
Controlling media playback
4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth
Multimedia system:
AUTHORISING A NEW BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE
4 © 5 Media
# Select Connect device.
# To pause playback: select 8.
Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.
656
# To continue playback: select 6.

Media search
# To repeat a track: select :.
NOTES ABOUT THE SEARCH FUNCTION IN CATEGORIES
FOR THE REPEAT FUNCTION THERE ARE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS: Under 5 you can search through all available media files. There are several
categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the con‐
R Select once: the active playlist is repeated.
nected device and data format.
R Select twice: the current track is repeated.
R Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated.
% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content
# To play back tracks in random order: select 9. has been read in and analysed.
Availability of the media search with Android devices may be
# To rewind or fast-forward a track: tap on the desired point on the limited.
timeline.
# To select the next track: select ü. STARTING A SEARCH IN CATEGORIES

Multimedia system:
# To select the previous track: select û. 4 © 5 Media 5 5
# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold û or ü.
# Select a category.
USING THE KEYWORD SEARCH
# To show the current track list: select 5. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media
Additional options for setting media playback You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.
Multimedia system: # Select ª.

4 © 5 Media A keyboard for character entry appears.
CALLING UP ADDITIONAL OPTIONS # Enter the term searched for.

# Select Ä.
The additional options are shown.
% The search begins with the first character entered. The more
# Select an option. characters entered the more concrete the search results become.
657
# Select the desired entry from the result list. ADDING MORE STREAMING PROVIDERS
If a list with several tracks is selected, then this is opened in the search. # Select Online music.
To playback all of the tracks in the list, select Ä and then Play now. The last active streaming provider is active.
# Select Z.
Music online # Select Music services.
REQUIREMENTS The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
R There is an account for the music streaming service.
# Select a streaming provider.
R A subscription for the music streaming service has been obtained.
A QR code is shown on the display.
R The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. # Scan the QR code with the mobile phone.
# Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.
LOGGING OUT FROM A STREAMING PROVIDER
% The functions and services are country-dependent. For more # Select Online music.
information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. The last active streaming provider is active.
# Select Z.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media # Select Music services.
ADDING A STREAMING PROVIDER THE FIRST TIME YOU START THE APPLI‐ The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
CATION
# Z next to the streaming provider.
# Select Online music.
The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. # Tap on Log out.
# Select a streaming provider. CALLING UP MUSIC ONLINE

Multimedia system:
A QR code is shown on the display.
4 © 5 Media
# Scan the QR code with the mobile phone. # Select Online music.
# Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.
658
Music playback can be controlled with the Touch Control or by using the media CALLING UP ONLINE MUSIC SETTINGS
application. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Online music
SEARCHING FOR MUSIC IN ONLINE MUSIC
Multimedia system: # Select Z.
4 © 5 Media 5 Online music # Select Music services.
SEARCHING FOR CATEGORIES IN ONLINE MUSIC
The media content of the streaming provider can be scanned through in the
# Select Z next to a streaming provider.
category search. The available categories and the symbol for the category # Select a setting.
search depend on the streaming provider.
# Start the category search. % Information about the linked accounts can be displayed using
The list of available categories appears. the Z gear icon next to the configured streaming provider. The
available information depends on what is offered by the provider
# Select a category. of the streaming service.
KEYWORD SEARCH IN ONLINE MUSIC
You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.
INFORMATION ABOUT DOLBY ATMOS®
# Select ª. The MBUX multimedia system enables playback of Dolby Atmos® content via
the Burmester® sound system, thereby providing an even more immersive
A keyboard for character entry appears.
three-dimensional sound experience.
# Enter the term searched for.
% The function is available with Apple Music® streaming or by using
a USB device with the corresponding file formats.
% The more characters entered when using the keyword search, the
more concrete the search results are.
% The availability of this function is equipment-dependent.
# Select the desired entry from the result list.
Depending on the selected hit, playback is started or a lower level in the SWITCHING DOLBY ATMOS® ON OR OFF
search is opened.
Requirements:
R An account for the Apple Music® music streaming service is available.
659
R A subscription for the Apple Music® music streaming service has been
obtained.
R Sufficient data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
% The functions and services are country-dependent. For more

information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media
# Select Online music.
The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
# Select Apple Music®.
# Select Z.
# Tap E to switch on Dolby Atmos®.
or
# Tap D to switch off Dolby Atmos®.

Tracks which are present or available in Dolby Atmos® will be played
appropriately by the sound system using this format.
660
MBUX multimedia system Radio
Radio
Switching on the radio 5 Settings

6 Sound settings
Multimedia system: 7 Switches on traffic reports
4 © 5 Þ Radio 8 Station list
# Start the application on the multimedia system home screen. 9 Search
The radio menu appears. You will hear the last station played on the last
frequency band selected.
Setting the frequency band
Radio overview Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select a frequency band or a favourite in the selection above the pre‐
view image.
Selecting a radio station

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station.
1 Preview image
2 Active frequency band
3 Station name, set frequency and additional information on the station
4 Previous or next station
661
Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Þ Radio
Multimedia system: # Select è.
4 © 5 Þ Radio
The recommended stations are shown.
# Select 4.
# Select a suggested station.
The station list appears.
The selected station is played.
# Swipe the station list up or down.
# Select a station. Storing radio stations

Multimedia system:
Searching for radio stations using station 4 © 5 Þ Radio
names or frequency entry # Select a radio station.
Multimedia system: # Select f.

4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select è.
Managing favourites
# Enter a station name or frequency.
Multimedia system:
# Select a station. 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Favourites
MOVING STATIONS
Selecting a recommended radio station # Press ·.
The list of favourites appears.
Requirements:
# Press Ä to the far right of the station name.
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show sta‐
tion suggestions. # Select Move.
# Move the station to the new position.
662
Setting station tracking via Internet radio # Press the station picture on the central display.
The image is enlarged.
Requirements
R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. Switching a slideshow on or off (FM/DAB
radio mode)
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z
# Select Z.
# Switch DAB Slideshow or Expanded Radio Slideshow on D or off E.
# Select Internet radio.
When both slideshows are switched on, the contents of both slideshows
# Activate or deactivate the Service Following function. alternate.
When the function is on, the station is searched for via Internet Radio.
If you are driving out of the station's coverage area and the station is Activating/deactivating the frequency fix
available via Internet radio, the Poor reception. Tap here to switch to Inter-
net radio. message appears on the central display.
function
Multimedia system:
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode) 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Active frequency band
# Activate or deactivate Frequency fix.
Multimedia system:
If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the recep‐
4 © 5 Þ Radio tion is poor.
The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an
image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news
or service information, for example.
% The slide show is available for DAB+ channels that broadcast

additional information.
663
Activating/deactivating traffic announce‐ % The radio announcements are not station-dependent.

ments
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z
Setting the traffic information service volume
# Select Radio announcements. increase
The traffic information is switched on or off. Multimedia system:
Activating/deactivating radio announcements # Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
Multimedia system: # Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.

4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z Increasing the volume of the traffic information service increases the
volume of traffic announcements.
# Switch on Radio announcements.
The selected radio announcements are played.
When Radio announcements are first switched on, Traffic information Displaying radio text
service (TA), Travel and Warning are preset.
Multimedia system:
or 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Active frequency band
# Activate or deactivate Radio text information.
# Switch off Radio announcements.
No radio announcements are played.
Showing or hiding lyrics
Selecting radio announcements
% The function is equipment-dependent.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Radio announcements
# Switch an announcement on O or off.
For example, Traffic information service (TA), Travel or Warning can be
selected.
664
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Ä
SHOWING LYRICS
# Select Show lyrics.
The lyrics, album cover, title and artist of the song currently playing on
the radio are displayed.
Swipe up or down to go to the bottom or top section of the lyrics.
If no lyrics are available for the song currently playing on the radio,
Show lyrics is greyed out.
HIDING LYRICS
# Select the cross at the top of the lyrics display.
or
# Select G.
The radio menu appears.
665
MBUX multimedia system Sound
Sound
Sound settings # Switch on one level.
or
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOUND SYSTEM
The sound system has a total output of 100 W and is equipped with six speak‐ # Switch off the loudness normalisation.
ers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
SETTING THE BALANCE AND FADER
Multimedia system:
% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Balance and Fader
Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU # In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the right and
Multimedia system: left speakers in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the right and left-hand speakers.
# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. ADJUSTING THE FADER
ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS # In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the front and
Multimedia system: rear speakers in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the front and rear speakers.
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION ON OR OFF Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Loudness normalisation INFORMATION ABOUT THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
The Burmester® surround sound system has a total output of 590 W and is
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between
equipped with 12 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this
media modes.
purpose. The currently set level is displayed.
The loudness normalisation can also be switched off.
666
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE AND FADER IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND

% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace SOUND SYSTEM
Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path. Multimedia system:
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND
SYSTEM
Multimedia system:
# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the
vehicle in the grid shown.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z
The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right
# Select one of the functions shown to make settings.
sides in the vehicle.
ADJUSTING THE TREBLE, MID AND BASS SETTINGS ON THE BURMESTER® ADJUSTING THE FADER
SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle
Multimedia system:
in the grid shown.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser
The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. the vehicle.
SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE BURMESTER® SUR‐
ROUND SOUND SYSTEM ON OR OFF % Setting 0 is recommended for high quality music and voice repro‐
Multimedia system: duction.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser 5 Loudness normalisation
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between SELECTING A SOUND PROFILE IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this SYSTEM
purpose. The currently set level is displayed. Multimedia system:
Loudness normalisation can also be switched off. 4 © 5 Media 5 Z
SETTING AN EXISTING SOUND PROFILE

# Switch on one level.
# Select a sound profile.
or
SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE
# Switch off loudness normalisation.
# Select Personal sound profile and Z.
# Select Reconfigure.
667
# Restart the set-up assistant.

Advanced sound system
SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE FOR THE FIRST TIME:
INFORMATION ABOUT THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
# Select Personal sound profile.
The Advanced sound system has a total output of 225 W and is equipped with
# Open the set-up assistant with Start. ten speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
# Observe the messages on the display and select the preferred settings.
% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
The personal sound profile is created with the selected settings and can Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.
be selected in the Sound profiles menu.
CHANGING INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS OF THE PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
AT A LATER DATE: Multimedia system:
# Select Personal sound profile and Z. 4 © 5 Media 5 Z
# Make the required adjustments. ADJUSTING SOUND SETTINGS
# Select one of the functions shown.
% The availability of a Personal sound profile is dependent on the ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS IN THE ADVANCED
equipment. SOUND SYSTEM
The set-up assistant is available when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z
ADJUSTING THE SOUND FOCUS IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND # Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
SYSTEM
Multimedia system: SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYS‐
TEM ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound focus
Multimedia system:
# Select a seat or row of seats for the sound focus. 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser 5 Loudness normalisation
The sound focus is activated.
SWITCHING OFF LOUDNESS NORMALISATION
or # Switch on one level.
# Select the seat or row of seats again. or
The sound focus is deactivated. # Switch off loudness normalisation.
668
SETTING THE BALANCE/FADER IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system:

# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the
vehicle in the grid shown.
The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right
sides in the vehicle.
ADJUSTING THE FADER
# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle
in the grid shown.
The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of
the vehicle.
Back to Contents669
Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care

ASSYST PLUS service interval display 671
Maintenance Management 673
Telediagnostics 674
Engine compartment 675
Cleaning and care 685

Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval Displaying the service due date
display Driver display:
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display provides 4 Service
information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due The next service due date is displayed.
date.
# To exit the display: press the back button G on the steering wheel.
You can hide this service display using the back button G on the steering
wheel.
Information on regular maintenance work
DEPENDING ON HOW THE VEHICLE IS USED, THE ASSYST PLUS SERVICE
INTERVAL DISPLAY MAY SHORTEN THE SERVICE INTERVAL, E.G. IN THE
FOLLOWING CASES: * NOTE
Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
R Mainly short-distance driving
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incom‐
R When the engine is often left idling for long periods pletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
R In the event of frequent cold start phases
# Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
R Vehicles with diesel particulate filters: in the event of frequently inter‐
rupted regeneration of the diesel particulate filter # Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
671
Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle.
Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operat‐
ing conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility
of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often
than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.
EXAMPLES OF ARDUOUS OPERATING CONDITIONS:
R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops

R Mainly short-distance driving
R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
R When the engine is often left idling for long periods
R Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation
mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter,
engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. Check the tyres
more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased stress. Further
information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date
only when the battery is connected.
# Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before
disconnecting the battery (/ page 671).
672
Maintenance and care Maintenance Management
Maintenance Management
Notes about Maintenance Management Data transferred when using Maintenance

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automat‐ Management
ically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.
When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to
The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and
entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will fault rectification.
then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your
Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the
vehicle.
Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".
% The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the mainte‐
nance request to the service partner is subject to technical limi‐
% Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the
tations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be
multimedia system are not available in every country.
perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this
case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment
with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the
multimedia system.
% Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the

multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function
is available in your country.
673
Maintenance and care Telediagnostics
Telediagnostics
Notes about Telediagnostics ommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and
the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working
on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on
% This service is not available in all countries. the country, vehicle model and equipment.
The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunc‐
tions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is activa‐ Data transferred when using Telediagnostics
ted, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault
conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to
transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and
depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to fault rectification.
the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at:
http://www.mercedes.me. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the
Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://
For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".
appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the cus‐
% The scope of the transmitted data depends on the vehicle model
tomer centre for assistance.
and its equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available
at all times.
% The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system
depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and
requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider
has no influence.
% Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. There‐

fore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and rec‐
674
Maintenance and care Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

OPERATION OF THE ACTIVE BONNET (PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION)
In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the
risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approx‐
imately 70 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated active bonnet yourself # With your hand flat, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the
(/ page 675).
hinges on both sides (arrows).
After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limi‐ In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and you may hear a hissing
ted. sound.
The engine bonnet must engage in position.
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored in a qualified special‐
ist workshop. # If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the
hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly.
RESETTING THE ACTIVE BONNET
& WARNING
ment
e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component

675
Opening and closing the bonnet & WARNING

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
& DANGER IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED
Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING
the charging process SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating flu‐
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging ids.
process.

& WARNING bonnet closed and call the fire service.
Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
& WARNING
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
Risk of injury due to moving parts
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked. Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start

& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet # Switch off the vehicle.
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. # Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of
movement. # Remove jewellery and watches.
# Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
bonnet's range of movement.
676
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury from touching components under voltage Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet
The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high volt‐ is open
age. You could receive an electric shock. If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you
could be trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Never touch ignition system or fuel injection system compo‐
nents when the vehicle is switched on. # Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if
you need to open the bonnet.
THE LIVE COMPONENTS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING, FOR EXAMPLE:

OPENING THE BONNET
R Ignition coils
R Fuel injectors
R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors
& WARNING
ment

# To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.
677
Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driv‐
ing style and even longer with an active driving style.
Driver display:
4 Service
The engine oil level is shown.
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER'S DIS‐

PLAY:
R Engine oil level Measuring now…: the engine oil level cannot be deter‐
mined yet.
# Push yellow handle 2 of the bonnet catch to the left as far as it will go
(palm downwards). Lift the bonnet until it is automatically raised by the
pneumatic spring. # Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
CLOSING THE BONNET R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level
# Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a height of approximately 20 cm. on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the
engine oil level is correct.
# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close
it with a little force until it engages correctly.
R Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine
oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
Engine oil
# Add 1 l of engine oil.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL USING THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY
Requirements R Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil
level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":
R The engine has been warmed up.
R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. # Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a
R The engine is running at idle speed. qualified specialist workshop.
R The bonnet is closed.
R For engine oil level, switch on vehicle
678
# Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.

& WARNING
R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
connected.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:
R Engine oil level System currently inoperative R You may come into contact with hot gases.
# Close the bonnet. ids.
TOPPING UP ENGINE OIL # Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
tem is under high voltage. & WARNING
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
process. unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

679
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐ Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or
ment additives
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to
e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service inter‐
vals.
parts described in the following. # Follow the instructions on the service interval display for
changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change
intervals.
& WARNING # Do not use additives.

Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine
compartment, it may ignite.
* NOTE
# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler open‐ Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil
ing. Excess engine oil can damage the engine or catalytic converter.
# Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist work‐
oil from component parts before starting the vehicle. shop.
% Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres

of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may also be higher than
this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high
engine speeds.
680
& WARNING
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

ids.

# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
# Top up the engine oil.
# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
# Check the oil level again (/ page 39).

& WARNING
Checking the coolant level Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
& DANGER Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐ # Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐
tem is under high voltage. nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging # Remove jewellery and watches.
process.
681
# Park the vehicle on a level surface.

& WARNING
Risk of scalding from hot coolant # Check the coolant temperature display on the driver's display.
If you open the cap, you could scald yourself. The coolant temperature must be below 40°C.
# Allow the engine to cool down before opening the cap. # Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release overpressure.
# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety # Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
glasses.
THE COOLANT LEVEL IS CORRECT IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2.
R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 1.5 cm above marker bar 2.
& WARNING
Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐ # If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-
ment Benz.
Topping up the windscreen washer system
& DANGER
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging

process.
682
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ment
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR: e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
R You may come into contact with hot gases. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating flu‐ parts described in the following.
ids.

& WARNING
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
bonnet closed and call the fire service. Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it
system.
& WARNING # Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out
Risk of injury due to moving parts next to the filler opening.
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start

683
# Remove cap 1 by the tab.
# Top up the washer fluid.
Keeping the air/water duct free

# Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits,
e.g. ice, snow or leaves.
684
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care
Cleaning and care
Information on washing the vehicle in a car * NOTE

wash Damage from automatic braking
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing R Active Brake Assist
the vehicle
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
R HOLD function
# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while pay‐ R Active Parking Assist
ing attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has
been fully restored. To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
towing or in the car wash.
* NOTE
Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is
suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the

underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular

the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
685
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH, THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS WILL BE ADJUSTED WHEN CAR WASH MODE
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND: IS ACTIVATED:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. R The outside mirrors will be folded in.
R the HOLD function is switched off. R To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically,
R the 360° Camera or the reversing camera is switched off. the rain sensor will be deactivated.
R the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The rear window wiper will be deactivated.
R the blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. R The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed.
R the windscreen wiper switch is in position g. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
R the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐ R Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be activated after
wise the tailgate could open unintentionally. approximately eight seconds.
R for car washes with a conveyor system:
- neutral i is engaged. If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind
the respective setting.
- If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make
sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is other‐ Car wash mode will automatically be deactivated above a speed of 20 km/h.
wise automatically engaged.
THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS WILL BE RESET WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS
DEACTIVATED:
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen
R The outside mirrors will be folded out.
and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise. R The rain sensor will be activated.
R The rear window wiper will be activated.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected set‐
Car wash mode ting.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed.
In car wash mode, the vehicle is configured in readiness for entering an auto‐ R Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be deactivated at
matic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated up to a speed of 20 km/h speeds above 18 km/h.
(/ page 687).
686
Switching Car Wash mode on/off Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

Requirements
& WARNING
R The vehicle is stationary. Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-
R The vehicle is switched on. spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.
Multimedia system:
Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving
# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.
ACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE
# Select Car wash mode. # Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.
# Select Activate.
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by a % next to USING A HIGH-PRESSURE CLEANER:
the respective setting.
R the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
wise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
% For an overview of the settings configured when you activate car
wash mode (/ page 686).
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a
decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-
DEACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner.
# Select Switch off. Move the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner around while cleaning. The
The settings of car wash mode will be reset. water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manu‐
facturer's operating instructions.
% Car wash mode will automatically be deactivated as soon as your
speed exceeds 20 km/h. R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive
parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or
louvres.
687
Washing the vehicle by hand R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth
soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
* NOTE R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
Engine damage due to water ingress
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air
R Wax: use silicone remover.
inlet grille below the bonnet.
R Do not attach stickers, foil or similar materials. Only have foil attached to
the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Do not use acid solutions and
hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays). acidic cleaners.
# Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). MATT FINISH
R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
R Do not attach stickers, foils or similar materials. Only have foil attached
# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment.
R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preserv‐
% Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 689).
ers, e.g.wax.
IN THE EVENT OF PAINTWORK DAMAGE:

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
care shop.
R Make sure the radar sensors are working (/ page 391).
To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance
systems, please observe the following notes:
PAINT
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas Observe the "Notes on paintwork / matt finish paintwork care" (/ page 688).
afterwards. They also apply to matt decorative films.
688
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage. R Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
CLEANING
R When cleaning with the high-pressure cleaner, maintain a distance of at Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused
least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a
of the high-pressure cleaner. qualified specialist workshop.
R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without addi‐
You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manu‐
tives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-
facturer.
Benz).
R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between
R Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative
damage the decorative film irreparably. film has been removed.
R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint
cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified
R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).
afterwards.
R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorb‐ Notes on cleaning and care of car parts
ent cloth after every car wash.
AVOIDING DAMAGE TO THE DECORATIVE FILM & WARNING

R The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by: Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while
- Sunlight the windscreen is being cleaned
- Temperature (e.g. hot air blower) If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the
- Weather conditions windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
- Stone chippings and dirt # Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle
- Chemical cleaning agents before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
- Oily products
R Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect
of shining the film-wrapped surface.
689
R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to

* NOTE clean the insides of windows.
Damage due to use of acidic cleaning agents
# Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Otherwise, the surfaces
could be damaged. % After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax,
clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recom‐
mended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling
following car parts: spots.
WHEELS AND RIMS
R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could
multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving
damage wheel bolts and brake components.
safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 391).
R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a
few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads
will warm up and dry out. WIPER BLADES
R Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 39).
WINDOWS R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
* NOTE
Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids
When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning % Note that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave
agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or
interior and cause damage to electronic components. clean them too often.
# Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
# Immediately absorb any excess fluids. R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car
shampoo).
R Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic
R Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a
lenses.
cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
690
VEHICLE SOCKET (HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY)

R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the vehicle socket.
Notes on care of the interior
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents, such as soap.
& WARNING
SENSORS Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐
R Clean the sensors in the front and rear part of the vehicle with car sham‐ vent-based care products
poo, plenty of water and a soft cloth (/ page 391).
Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in
R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic
30 cm. parts may break away.
CAMERAS # Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents

R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lenses. to clean the cockpit.
R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
TRAILER HITCH
R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's owner's & WARNING
manual. Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts
R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent. Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. with a wire brush).
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.
# Never bleach or dye seat belts.
% Before using trailers with anti-swerve coupling, note the manu‐

facturer's owner's manual.
691
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
Property damage due to disinfectants
R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact
The interior includes a number of sensitive surfaces such as displays, with the plastic trim.
plastics and leather.
REAL WOOD AND TRIM ELEMENTS
Disinfectants can contain alcohol and other substances that penetrate R Clean with a microfibre cloth.
and damage surfaces. Technology behind buttons and displays can also
R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
be damaged.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not use disinfectant on interior surfaces. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
ROOF LINING
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
care:
CARPET
SEAT BELTS R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-
R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. Benz.
R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
IMITATION LEATHER STEERING WHEEL
R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct sun‐
R Clean the entire steering wheel with a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap
light.
solution. Do not spot clean.
DISPLAY R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
R Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
care product (TFT-LCD).
R Do not use any other agents. STEERING WHEEL MADE OF GENUINE LEATHER OR DINAMICA
HEAD-UP DISPLAY NOTE

*
R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. Damage caused by wrong cleaners
R Do not use cleaning agents. # Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover
or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes.
PLASTIC TRIM
R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. Otherwise you may damage the finish.
692
R Clean with a damp cloth and a 1% soap solution and then wipe with a and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties
dry cloth. are special features of leather and not material defects. Further‐
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. more, leather is subject to a natural ageing process in which the
surface properties change.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for
Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress
Mercedes-Benz.
on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear
R Do not use a microfibre cloth. marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life
span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the
leather.
% Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface proper‐
ties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth DINAMICA SEAT COVERS
and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to
are special features of leather and not material defects. Further‐ clean.
more, leather is subject to a natural ageing process in which the
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
surface properties change.
IMITATION LEATHER SEAT COVERS
GENUINE LEATHER SEAT COVERS R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton
R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot
with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean clean.
the seat covers. R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes- R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
Benz aftercare. R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for
Mercedes-Benz. CLOTH SEAT COVERS
R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfibre
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. clean.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
% Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface proper‐

ties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth
Back to Contents693
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Emergency 695
Flat tyre 698
Battery (vehicle) 706
Tow-starting or towing away 714
Electrical fuses 720

Breakdown assistance Emergency
Emergency
Removing the safety vest % Remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest
unintentional slipping or make removing difficult.
Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.

There is a high-visibility waistcoat compartment on the door shelves of all
doors for storing a high-visibility waistcoat.
3 Do not bleach
# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2. 4 Do not iron
# Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest. 5 Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
# Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and place it in the safety vest
1. 7 Class 2 safety vest
# Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the lower edge of the armrest into the The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
safety vest compartment. Ensure that the loop 2 hangs out so that it is vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
easy to reach.
REPLACE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty
695
R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded # Fold the legs down and out to the side.
R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to
sunlight.
First-aid kit (soft sided) overview
DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:
R Please contact your local waste disposal company.
Warning triangle
REMOVING THE WARNING TRIANGLE
The first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located in the load compartment on the left
respective vehicle version.
Removing the fire extinguisher

The warning triangle is secured to the underside of the load compartment & WARNING
floor. Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
# Open the load compartment floor 1.
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
# Remove warning triangle 2.
Depending on the vehicle version, the warning triangle may be located in the
loading sill under the load compartment floor. The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other
vehicle occupants.
SETTING UP THE WARNING TRIANGLE # Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
# Fold the side reflectors upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top
using the upper press-stud. # Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.
696
# Pull the tab 1 upwards.
# Fold tab 1 down.
# Remove fire extinguisher 2.
697
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre
Flat tyre
Notes on flat tyres R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible
to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the
TIREFIT kit (/ page 700).
& WARNING R (/ page 629)Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call
Risk of accident due to a flat tyre for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a
A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as steering breakdown .
and braking. R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 739).
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics:
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. % (/ page 745)The emergency spare wheel is only available in
certain countries.
# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare
wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Run-flat tyres:
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended

tyres (run-flat tyres).
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILA‐

BLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:
R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey

for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on
MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (/ page 699).
698
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which
appears on the side wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: MOExtended tyres may
& WARNING
only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning sys‐
Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
tem.
Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the
vehicle. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only
be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.
# Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the
MOExtended tyres. IF A PRESSURE LOSS WARNING MESSAGE APPEARS IN THE DRIVER'S DIS‐
PLAY, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as
driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, R Check the tyre for damage.
in particular, to a loaded vehicle. R If driving on, observe the following notes.
# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:
DRIVING DISTANCE POSSIBLE IN EMERGENCY MODE AFTER THE PRES‐
R banging noise SURE LOSS WARNING:
R vehicle vibration
Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode
R smoke which smells like rubber
Partially laden 80 km
R continuous ESP® intervention
R cracks in the tyre sidewalls Fully laden 30 km
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the
# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a
driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use.
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you
# The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.
can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.
With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle
even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre
Storage location of the TIREFIT kit (not plug-
affected must not show any clearly visible damage. in hybrid)
The TIREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.
699
Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements
R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflation compressor are ready for use
(/ page 68).
R TIREFIT sticker is displayed.
1 Tyre sealant bottle R Gloves are at hand.
2 Tyre inflation compressor
Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm,
places under the load compartment floor. particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside
temperatures down to -20 °C.
% YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE POWER CATEGORY

(LK) AND/OR ELECTRICAL DATA ON THE BACK OF THE TYRE & WARNING
INFLATION COMPRESSOR: Risk of accident when using tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in
R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
the following cases:
AT A DISTANCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1 M TO THE TYRE INFLA‐ R there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage
TION COMPRESSOR AND APPROXIMATELY 1.6 M ABOVE THE previously mentioned)
GROUND, THE FOLLOWING SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS APPLY: R the wheel rims have been damaged
R after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
R Emission sound pressure level LPA 83 dB(A)
R Sound power level LWA 91 dB(A) # Do not continue driving.

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. In the event
of a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
700
Observe the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre sealant
& WARNING bottle.
Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced at a qualified specialist workshop every
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it
five years.
to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swal‐
low it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from chil‐ # Do not remove any foreign objects which have pierced the tyre.
dren.
Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:
# Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immedi‐
ately.
# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using
clean water immediately.
# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your # Remove sticker 1 from the tyre inflation compressor housing and affix
mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre
sealant immediately.
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immedi‐

ately.
* NOTE # Remove sticker 2 from the tyre sealant bottle and affix it near the valve
Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long on the wheel with the defective tyre.
# Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten
minutes without interruption.
701
# Remove the valve cap from the valve A on the faulty tyre.
# Screw the union nut 4 of the filling hose 3 onto the valve A.
# Pull the plug 7 with cable and filling hose 3 out of the tyre inflation
compressor housing.
# Insert the tyre sealant bottle 9 into the socket 6 of the tyre inflation
compressor so that the red arrow on tyre sealant bottle 9 aligns with # Insert the plug 7 into a 12‑V‑ socket in your vehicle.
the red arrow on the tyre inflation compressor.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Rotate the tyre sealant bottle 9 clockwise for a quarter of a turn.
# Press the on and off switch 8 on the tyre inflation compressor.
# Insert the plug of the filling hose 3 into the socket 5 of the tyre seal‐
ant bottle 9. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First,
tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to
# Rotate the filling hose 3 clockwise for a quarter of a turn. approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!
# Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for a maximum ten minutes.
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as
possible. It is preferable to use clean water.
702
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible
with perchloroethylene. * NOTE
Staining from leaking tyre sealant
IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI)
After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.
HAS NOT BEEN ATTAINED:
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that con‐
tained the TIREFIT kit.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI)
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.
HAS BEEN ATTAINED:
# Drive the vehicle forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately # Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
10 m.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
# Pump up the tyre again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
& WARNING
& WARNING
Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres
Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being
attained A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling charac‐
teristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.
If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time,
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
this instance.
# Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. been repaired using tyre sealant.
# Do not continue driving.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed
with tyre sealant.
703
# The sticker with details of the maximum permissible speed must be

affixed to the instrument cluster where it can be easily seen by the & WARNING
driver. Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being
attained
If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly dam‐
* NOTE aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
Staining from leaking tyre sealant
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.
After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.
# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that con‐
tained the TIREFIT kit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with
the telephone number, e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible
disposal # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. Refer to the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
INCREASING THE TYRE PRESSURE
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. # Switch on the tyre inflation compressor.
DECREASING THE TYRE PRESSURE
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warn‐
# Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflation compressor.
ing triangle. # Insert the filling hose into the socket of the tyre inflation compressor
# Pull away immediately. and rotate it clockwise a quarter of a turn.
# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure
using the tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
704
# Press the pressure release button C next to the manometer B.

WHEN THE TYRE PRESSURE IS CORRECT
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre
sealant bottle and filling hose replaced.
705
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries
which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
ALL VEHICLES EXCEPT VEHICLES WITH A LITHIUM-ION BATTERY

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery & WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. battery.
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up,
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.
R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehi‐ The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and
cle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions during starting assistance.
# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a

qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on.
# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 393)

R Further information on ESP®(/ page 394)
706
Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly.

& WARNING
Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
Battery acid is caustic. tery. Avoid creating sparks.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular
# Do not lean over the battery. gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.
# Do not inhale battery gases.
Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the
# Keep children away from the battery. battery to support a person in any way.
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of Wear safety glasses.
clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
Keep children away.
ALL VEHICLES
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF YOU DO NOT INTEND TO USE THE VEHICLE
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the OVER AN EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME:
household rubbish. R If available: activate standby mode (/ page 390).
#
R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by
Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect
manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
the battery.
workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist work‐

shop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batter‐
ies.
707
Notes on the 48 V battery + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
& WARNING Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ household rubbish.
tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a #
short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: Only have work on the 48 V battery carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehi‐ Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batter‐
cle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions ies.
# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is used improperly.
qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The surface of the 48 V battery may be hot.
# Do not drive on.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified spe‐
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
cialist workshop.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
R Further information on ABS (/ page 393) gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse off splashes of
R Further information on ESP®(/ page 394) electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean water. Consult a doctor imme‐
diately.
Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the
battery to support a person in any way.
Do not perform any work on the battery. Always have any work on the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not discon‐
708
nect the battery yourself. Do not remove the battery yourself. Do not Risk of explosion.
attempt to open the battery.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
Keep children away. tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Wear safety glasses. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
Observe this Owner's Manual. gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF YOU DO NOT INTEND TO USE THE VEHICLE Wear safety glasses.
OVER AN EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME:
Keep children away.
R If available: activate standby mode (/ page 390).
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Notes on the high-voltage battery
& DANGER
Notes on starting assistance and charging the
Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the 12 V battery
Always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment for
In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.
battery charging and starting assistance.
# Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual
odours, smoke or burn marks.
* NOTE
# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at Damage to the battery due to overvoltage
a sufficient distance. When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging
voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.
# Call the fire service.
# Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of
14.8 V.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 359).
709
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases
If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during
hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery. charging and starting assistance.
# Take care that the positive terminal of a connected battery # Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐
does not come into contact with vehicle parts. ded.
# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always # Do not stand over the battery.
observe the sequence of battery terminals described.
# During starting assistance, always take care to connect only

battery terminals of identical polarity. & WARNING
Risk of explosion from a frozen battery
# During starting assistance, observe the sequence described
A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or
for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
below freezing point.
# Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the
During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be
engine running.
released.
# Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing

starting assistance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument display do not light up in cold

temperatures, the discharged battery is very probably frozen. In this case you
must neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle.
The operating life of a thawed battery may be drastically shortened. The start‐
ing behaviour may deteriorate, especially in low temperatures.
It is recommended that a thawed battery be checked in a qualified specialist

workshop.
710
OBSERVE THE ADDITIONAL FOLLOWING POINTS DURING STARTING

* NOTE ASSISTANCE:
Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine R For starting assistance, only use batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the R The vehicles must not touch each other.
catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. R Petrol engine: only receive starting assistance when the engine is cold
and the exhaust system has cooled.
# Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS DURING STARTING ASSISTANCE AND

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V bat‐
BATTERY CHARGING: tery
R Only use undamaged jump leads/charging cables with a sufficient cross- STARTING ASSISTANCE/PREPARATION FOR CHARGING
section and insulated terminal clamps. # Secure the vehicle with the electric parking brake.
R Uninsulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact
with other metal parts while the jump leads/charging cables are connec‐
ted to the battery/jump-start connection point. # Switch the vehicle and all electrical consumers off.
R The jump leads/charging cables must not touch any parts that can move
when the engine is running. # Open the bonnet.
R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery are electrostatically
charged.
R Be absolutely sure to keep away from fire and naked flames.
R Do not lean over a battery.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL POINTS WHEN CHARGING THE

BATTERY:
R Only use chargers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
R Read the operating instructions for the charger before charging the bat‐
tery.
711
# Slide the cover 1 of the positive terminal 2 on the jump-start connec‐ Plug-in hybrid: if the vehicle has been jump-started, the electric drive system
tion point in the direction of the arrow. may not be available for around 30 minutes.
STARTING ASSISTANCE Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Connect the jump lead to the positive terminal of your vehicle.
CHARGING THE 12 V BATTERY
# Connect the jump lead to the positive terminal of the donor battery. # Connect the charging cable to the positive terminal of your vehicle.
# Run the engine of the assisting vehicle at idling speed. # Connect the charging cable to the positive terminal of the charger.
# Connect the jump lead to the negative terminal of the donor battery. # Connect the charging cable to the negative terminal of the charger.
# Connect the jump lead to the earth point 3 of your vehicle. # Connect the charging cable to the earth point 3 of your vehicle.
# Start the engine of your vehicle. # Start the charging procedure.
# Let the engine run for a few minutes.
When the charging procedure has been completed:
# Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch on an electrical consumer in
your vehicle, e.g. the rear window heating or lights. # Disconnect the charging cable from the earth point 3 of your vehicle.
# Disconnect the charging cable from the negative terminal of the charger.
When the starting assistance has been completed:
# Disconnect the charging cable from the positive terminal of your vehicle.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the earth point 3 of your vehicle.
# Disconnect the charging cable from the positive terminal of the charger.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the negative terminal of the donor bat‐
tery. # After removing the charging cables, close the cover 1 of the positive
terminal 2.
# Disconnect the jump lead from the positive terminal of your own vehicle.
Disconnect the jump lead from the positive terminal of the donor bat‐
Replacing the 12 V battery
#
tery.
# After removing the jump leads, close the cover 1 of the positive termi‐
# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 706).
nal 2. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
712
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE THE BAT‐

TERY YOURSELF:
R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific
vehicle requirements.
The vehicle is equipped with a fleece battery. Full vehicle functionality is
only guaranteed with a fleece battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested
and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R Use detachable parts such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal cov‐
ers from the battery which is to be replaced.
R Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening
on the side of the battery.
Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
R Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.
713
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away
Tow-starting or towing away
Overview of permissible towing methods (not & WARNING

plug-in hybrid) Risk of accident when towing with steering wheel lock
If the steering wheel lock is engaged, you will not be able to steer the
PERMITTED TOWING METHODS
vehicle.
* NOTE # When towing with a tow rope or tow bar, always switch on the
Damage from automatic braking vehicle.
* NOTE
R Active Brake Assist
Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
R HOLD function
R Active Parking Assist
Vehicles with automatic transmission
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
towing or in the car wash. Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a break‐
Rear axle raised Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
down, rather than towing it away.
For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not
use tow bar systems.
714
4MATIC vehicles For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not
use tow bar systems.
Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
Front axle raised No * NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
Rear axle raised No
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Overview of permitted towing methods (plug-

in hybrid)
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a break‐
down, rather than towing it away.
PERMITTED TOWING METHODS

Vehicle equipment/towing method
Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Plug-in hybrid Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
The steering wheel must be fixed in the centre
position with a steering wheel lock.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ONLY TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE IS Exception: If the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from
PERMITTED: the danger zone despite the display message or the display not working.
R The driver display is not working It must not be towed further than 50 m with both axles on the ground. A tow‐
or ing speed of 10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only trans‐
porting is permitted.
R The á Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual message is shown.
715
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the & WARNING

ground Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOW-STARTED OR TOWED AWAY IS HEAV‐
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods.
IER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN OCCUR:
R the towing eye may become detached.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE BATTERY IS DISCHARGED:
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
R the vehicle cannot be started
# Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be
R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission cannot be mass.
shifted to position i or j.
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the transmission can‐ must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
not be shifted to position i or if the display does not show any‐
# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found
thing, transport the vehicle (/ page 717). A towing vehicle with
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 810).
lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or
front passenger door; the transmission otherwise automatically shifts to
* NOTE position j.
Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over # Fit the towing eye (/ page 718).
long distances
# Fasten the towing device.
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high
speeds or over long distances.
# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. * NOTE

Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar
# A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded. # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
716
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 194).

* NOTE
# Do not activate the HOLD function. Damage due to excessive tractive power
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 213). If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the
vehicles could be damaged.
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 426).
# Pull away slowly and smoothly.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift to position i.
# Release the electric parking brake.

Loading the vehicle for transport
& WARNING
Plug-in hybrid: transportation of vehicles should only be carried out by pro‐
Risk of accidents due to restricted safety-related functions during
fessional recovery companies.
towing
SAFETY-RELEVANT FUNCTIONS ARE RESTRICTED OR NO LONGER # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 69).
AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
R The brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
R The power supply or the on-board electrical system is defective. % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
If your vehicle is being towed, considerably more force may be required

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmis‐
for steering and braking. sion to position i.
In addition, important vehicle display messages cannot be seen if the

driver display is faulty. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmis‐
sion may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the
# Use a tow bar.
electrical system. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical
# Before towing, ensure that the driver's display is operational system with power (/ page 64).
and the steering can move freely.
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
717
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmis‐ 4MATIC VEHICLES/VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
sion to position j.
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

VEHICLES WITH ADAPTIVE DAMPING ADJUSTMENT
& WARNING
Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with adaptive # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same trans‐
damping adjustment portation vehicle.
When transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment, the
vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. * NOTE
Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehi‐
# Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter. cle
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the
straps. transport vehicle.
* NOTE Towing eye storage location

Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly
The towing eye is under the load compartment floor.
# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is in a different position in
the load compartment.
# A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards
must be kept to the transport platform.
Fitting and removing the towing eye
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.
718
Tow-starting the vehicle

VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
# Observe the following note on material damage:
* NOTE
Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-
starting vehicles with automatic transmission.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

# Press the mark on the cover 1 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear
bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
# After removing the towing eye, engage the cover 1 in the bumper.
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or
trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehi‐
cle may be damaged in the process.
# Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow
start the vehicle.
# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle
during recovery.
719
Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment
(/ page 721).
& WARNING
* NOTE
Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to mal‐
with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.
function.
This could result in a fire.
# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can
# Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses contain‐ enter the fuse box.
ing the correct amperage.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is
positioned correctly on the fuse box.
* NOTE
Damage due to incorrect fuses If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or
systems or their functions being considerably restricted. ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:
# Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respec‐ R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
tive specified fuse rating. R All electrical consumers are switched off.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can
recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:
to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.
R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle,
when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 721)
720
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 722)

R Fuse box in the centre of the load compartment (/ page 723)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the

engine compartment
Requirements:
R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 66).

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
OPEN
# Loosen screws 1.
# Press clamps 2 and lift the fuse box lid up and out.
& WARNING
Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
is open
CLOSING
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you
# Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in the lid.
could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

opening the engine bonnet.
# Open the bonnet.
721
# Place the lid on the fuse box.
# Make sure that clamps 2 engage.
# Tighten screws 1.
# Close the bonnet.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front

passenger footwell
Requirements # Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 66). CLOSING
OPENING
# Lift carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Place the lid on the fuse box.
# Tighten screws 2.
# Fold back the carpet.
722
Opening and closing the fuse box in the load

compartment
Requirement
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 66).
# Open the load compartment floor.
Fuse box 1 is located underneath the load compartment floor.
Back to Contents723
Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres

Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐

725
acteristics
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and

726
tyres
Notes on snow chains 728
Tyre pressure 729
Wheel change 734
Emergency spare wheel 745

Wheels and tyres Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics
Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics

when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are
damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics.
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and
have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
725
Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident.
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any
damaged tyres immediately. On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.
MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐



726
Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

R Check the valve caps.
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across
the entire width.
4 mm.
727
Wheels and tyres Notes on snow chains
Notes on snow chains
R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.

& WARNING R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist
Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains when snow chains are fitted.
If you have fitted snow chains to the rear wheels, they may drag against
the vehicle body or chassis components.
% You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyres
# Never fit snow chains on the rear wheels.
(/ page 408).
# Only fit snow chains on the front wheels in pairs.
% You can deactivate ESP® to start off (/ page 398). This allows
the wheels to spin, achieving increased tractive power.
* NOTE
Damage to vehicle body or suspension components caused by fit‐
ted snow chains
On 4MATIC vehicles, if you fit snow chains on the rear wheels, you can
damage vehicle body or suspension components.
# On 4MATIC vehicles, only fit snow chains on the front wheels.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations.

You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the
same quality standard.
728
Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
Notes on tyre pressure R Cause increased tyre damage.

R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due
to aquaplaning.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure
UNDERINFLATED OR OVERINFLATED TYRES POSE IN PARTICULAR & WARNING
THE FOLLOWING RISKS: Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres
R The tyres can burst. The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking
characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
# Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the

# Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly: # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified
R monthly specialist workshop.
R when the load changes
R before embarking on a longer journey Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted
R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler
flap (/ page 730).
# Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appear‐
ance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.
TYRE PRESSURE WHICH IS TOO HIGH OR TOO LOW CAN:
R Shorten the service life of the tyres.
729
ONLY CORRECT TYRE PRESSURES WHEN THE TYRES ARE COLD. CONDI‐ The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres
TIONS FOR COLD TYRES: approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold
tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehi‐
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at cle.
least three hours.
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure
information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condi‐
tion.
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres
increases, so too does the tyre pressure. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre
pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel con‐
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tyre sumption may then increase slightly.
pressure in the driver's display (/ page 731).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual num‐
Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the ber of seats may differ from this.
tyre pressure table for increased load.
Tyre pressure table Tyre pressure monitoring system

The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. FUNCTION OF THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fit‐
ted to the vehicle by means of the tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature are displayed in the driver display.
In the event of significant pressure loss or excessive temperature of the tyres,

you are warned via display messages (/ page 892) or the warning lamp h
in the driver display (/ page 916).
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsi‐
bility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable
for the operating situation.
730
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update
the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can,
however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure
monitoring system manually (/ page 731).
SYSTEM LIMITS
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION PARTICULARLY
R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving: current val‐
R incorrect reference values were taught in. ues are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values
of each tyre are displayed as soon as they are known to the system.
R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for
example. R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet
complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
R there is a fault from another radio signal source.
CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSURE WITH THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR‐ # Compare the current tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure
ING SYSTEM for the current operating status (/ page 730). Additionally, observe the
Requirements notes on cold tyres (/ page 729).

% The values displayed in the driver display may deviate from
those of the tyre pressure gauge as they relate to sea level. At
Driver display: high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure
4 © 5 Service gauge are higher than those shown on the driver display.
RESTARTING THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS APPEARS:
Requirements
R Current tyre pressure of each wheel:
R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective oper‐
ating condition on each of the four wheels (/ page 729).
731
RESTART THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM IN THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM LIMITS
SITUATIONS: THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION PARTICULARLY
R The tyre pressure has changed.
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted. R incorrect reference values were taught in
R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for
Driver display: example
4 © 5 Service R an even pressure loss on more than one tyre occurs
# Press a to display the tyre pressure.
THE SYSTEM HAS A RESTRICTED OR DELAYED FUNCTION PARTICULARLY
# Press a again to display the options. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# Select Tyre pressure and confirm with a. R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
The driver display shows the message Use current tyre pressures as new R driving with snow chains
reference values?. R when adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or
# Select Yes and confirm the restart with a. sudden acceleration
The driver display shows the message Tyre pressure monitor restarted. R driving with a very heavy or large trailer
Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp R driving with a high load
goes out.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsi‐
current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre bility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable
pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. for the operating situation and to check it.
If the tyre pressure values are not within the prescribed range, the mes‐
sage Please correct tyre pressure appears. BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED SUB‐
JECTS:
Tyre pressure loss warning system R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 729)
R Display messages about the tyres (/ page 892)
FUNCTION OF THE TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING SYSTEM
The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display
messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss.
732
RESTARTING THE TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING SYSTEM

Requirements
R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective oper‐
ating condition on each of the four wheels (/ page 729).
RESTART THE TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING SYSTEM IN THE FOLLOW‐

ING SITUATIONS:
R The tyre pressure has changed.

R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.
Driver display:
4 © 5 Service
# Select Tyre pressure and confirm with a.
The driver display shows the message Run Flat Indicator active.
# Press the steering wheel button a to initiate the restart.

The driver display shows the message Are the current pressure values
OK?.
# Select Yes.
# Press the steering wheel button a to confirm the restart.

The driver display shows the message Run Flat Indicator restarted.
BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED TOPICS:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 729)
733
Wheels and tyres Wheel change
Wheel change
Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres & WARNING

Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing
& WARNING capacity or the permissible speed rating
Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre dam‐
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or age and could cause the tyres to explode.
components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your
damaged.
vehicle model.
# Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating
specifications of the original part.
required for your vehicle.
FOR WHEELS, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:
R Designation
R Type
FOR TYRES, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:
R Designation
R Manufacturer
R Type
734
* NOTE * NOTE
Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres
sizes Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded
been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. tyres.
THESE TYRES ARE SPECIALLY ADAPTED TO THE ACTIVE SAFETY For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.
SYSTEMS, SUCH AS ABS, ESP® AND 4MATIC, AND MARKED AS FOL‐
LOWS:
# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their
previous usage.
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for
certain wheels) NOTE
*
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles
Otherwise, certain properties, such as driving characteristics, vehicle Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decrea‐
noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Fur‐ ses, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over
thermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the obstacles increases.
body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
the tyre or the vehicle.
# Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps,
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and
manhole covers and potholes.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
# Avoid particularly high kerbs.
735
Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or
* NOTE which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.
Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in pot‐
holes BEFORE PURCHASING AND USING NON-APPROVED ACCESSORIES, VISIT
A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP AND ENQUIRE ABOUT:
Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres.
R Suitability
# Only park on level surfaces if possible.
R Legal stipulations
# Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking. R Factory recommendations
* NOTE & WARNING

Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fit‐ Risk of accident with sport tyres
ting tools The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre com‐
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic pound means that the risk of skidding or aquaplaning on wet roads is
component parts in the wheel. increased.
If tyre-fitting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature
components could be damaged. and tyre running temperature.
# Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
# Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. # Use i M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 7 °C.
# Only use tyres suitable for the intended use.
* NOTE
Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN SELECTING, FITTING AND REPLACING
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with sum‐ TYRES:
mer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre. R Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific
# At temperatures below 7 °C use i M+S tyres. tyre type for your vehicle.
R The use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation
can be advisable.
736
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist work‐
MOExtended tyres) and the same make. shop.
R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
VEHICLES WITH AN AMG DRIVER'S PACKAGE
It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat
tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
& WARNING
R Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the
Risk of accident caused by non-approved tyre types
tyres.
If you use tyre types that have not been adapted to changes made to
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalid‐
the factory speed limit, this can have the following consequences:
ate the vehicle's general operating permit.
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels R The tyres are not suitable for high speeds and the corresponding
must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure moni‐ driving dynamics.
toring system. R The tyres wear unevenly and affect the roadworthiness of the
R At temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked vehicle.
i M+S for all wheels. R ABS, ESP® and cruise control operation are restricted.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
This can jeopardise road safety.
R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. # Only use tyre types that have been approved for the maximum
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be permissible speed set and the vehicle.
indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐
tics: Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT
kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.
% You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyres
(/ page 408).
737
Notes on changing wheels Notes on storing wheels

WHEN STORING WHEELS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
& WARNING
Risk of injury through different wheel sizes R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving
characteristics. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be dam‐

aged. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
# Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a
tyres have the same dimensions. tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are
required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different
dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A
Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" WHEEL:
(/ page 734).
R Jack
THE WEAR PATTERNS ON THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS DIFFER: R Chock
R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder R Wheel wrench
R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre R Centring pin
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the sticker affixed to the jack.
wheels every 5000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please
of rotation is maintained for the wheels. contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 in the load compartment.
738
R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be loca‐
ted in other positions in the load compartment.
% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, con‐
sult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable
% When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately tools.
secured.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
# Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS:
# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the
R Jack wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
R Gloves # If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 739).
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 740).
R Folding chock
R Ratchet for jack Removing and fitting wheel trim/hub caps
Requirements
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 739).
Requirements
R The vehicle is not on a slope. PLASTIC HUB CAP

R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. Removal:
739
# Turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub
cap.
Fitting:
# Make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap has been turned anti-
clockwise.
# Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub
cap is felt and heard to engage.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements
R There are no persons in the vehicle. RULES OF CONDUCT WHEN THE VEHICLE IS RAISED:
R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 739). R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle.
R The wheel trims and hub caps have been removed (/ page 739). R Never lie under the vehicle.
R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
IMPORTANT NOTES ON USING THE JACK: R Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.
R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-

Benz to raise the vehicle.
R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short
time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under
the vehicle.
R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary,
use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support
point. # Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish
to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
740
Position of the jack support points
& WARNING
Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1.
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point
of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack sup‐
port point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the
vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically # Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the
under the jacking point of the vehicle. ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 741).
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to the jack Removing a wheel
If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for
this purpose, you could damage your vehicle. Requirements
# Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for R The vehicle is raised (/ page 740).
this purpose.
Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
# Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexa‐
gon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
741
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.

* NOTE
Damage to the ceramic brake disc when changing a wheel # Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store it in the load compartment.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal # Notes on removing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 745).
and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-
brake disc and damage it.
# Take particular care.

Fitting a new wheel
Requirements
# Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring
pin. R The wheel to be changed is removed and the centring pin is screwed in
(/ page 741).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake disks, as this
could impair the level of comfort when braking.
& WARNING
Risk of accident from losing a wheel
* NOTE
Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose,
as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads

replaced.
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 734).

# Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
742
For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the # Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rota‐ (/ page 734).
tion when fitting.
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by
Note on AMG vehicles: Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indica‐
* NOTE ted until they are finger-tight.
Damage to the ceramic brake disc when changing a wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal
# Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic- # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
brake disc and damage it.
# Lower the vehicle (/ page 743).
# Take particular care.
Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
#
pin.
Requirements
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. R The new wheel has been fitted (/ page 742).
# Observe the notes on fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 745).
# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack
so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.
& WARNING
Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised,
the jack could tip.
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on

the ground.
743
ted 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
ted 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 130 Nm.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not
tightened to the prescribed torque.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a quali‐
fied specialist workshop and have the tightening torque
checked immediately.
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if neces‐
sary.
% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency

spare wheel.
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning system: restart the tyre
pressure loss warning system (/ page 733).
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pres‐
sure monitoring system (/ page 731).
744
Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel % The deflated emergency spare wheel is secured in the emer‐
gency spare wheel bag in the load compartment and is secured
to the adjustable load compartment floor in the lower position.
& WARNING
Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON REMOVING AN EMERGENCY SPARE
or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency WHEEL:
spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteris‐
R Before stowing the emergency spare wheel, make sure there is no air left
tics of the vehicle.
in the tyre.
To prevent hazardous situations: If necessary, allow the air to escape.
R To release air from the tyre: remove the valve cap of the tyre.
# Drive carefully.
R Press down the metal insert in the valve using a pointed object, e.g. a
# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare pen.
wheel that differs in size. R Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
# Do not deactivate ESP®. % Vehicles with adjustable load compartment floor: always stow
the deflated emergency spare wheel in the lower position on the
# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different adjustable load compartment floor.
size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The
new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON FITTING AN EMERGENCY SPARE
WHEEL:
R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted

is 80 km/h.
R Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
745
R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regard‐
less of wear.
Inflating the emergency spare wheel
R Use the included wheel bolts for the emergency spare wheel.
R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel when fitted. Cor‐ * NOTE
rect the pressure as necessary. Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten
minutes without interruption.
% The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emer‐
gency spare wheel.
Requirements:
R The emergency spare wheel has been fitted correctly. (/ page 739)
% Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning system warning
system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure
loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the % Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of
system when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with the emergency spare wheel and on the tyre inflation compressor.
a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emer‐
gency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure monitoring system # Remove the sticker with the label 80 km/h from the tyre inflation com‐
cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency pressor housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's
spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pres‐ field of vision.
sure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system when the # Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
luggage compartment floor. (/ page 68)
BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED SUB‐

JECTS:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 729)

R Tyre pressure table (/ page 730)
R Notes on fitting tyres (/ page 734)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 739)
746
# Pull filler hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tyre inflation compressor hous‐ # When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on and off
ing. switch 4 on the tyre inflation compressor to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.
# Insert plug 7 of filler hose 1 in the socket on the tyre inflation com‐
pressor and then turn it until plug 7 engages. # Press the start/stop button to switch off the power supply.
# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emergency spare wheel. # If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure
release valve button 6 until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.
# Screw union nut 2 of filler hose 1 onto the valve.
# Unscrew union nut 2 of filler hose 1 from the valve.
# Make sure on and off switch 4 of the tyre inflation compressor is set to
0. # Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.
# Insert plug 3 in a socket in your vehicle. # Stow filler hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower section of the tyre inflation
compressor housing.
R Cigarette lighter socket
R 12 V socket: (/ page 264) # Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle.
R Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter in the Digital Owner's Manual
R Observe the notes on sockets: (/ page 264)
# Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply

(/ page 309).
# Press On/Off switch 4 on the tyre inflation compressor to I.

The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The
tyre pressure appears on manometer 5.
# Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.
% The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emer‐

gency spare wheel.
Back to Contents747
Technical data
Technical data
Notes on technical data 749
On-board electronics 750
Regulatory radio information 752
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine

810
number overview
Operating fluids 812
Vehicle data 824
Trailer hitch 829

Technical data Notes on technical data
Notes on technical data
The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data
stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain fur‐
ther information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the
COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are sup‐
plied when the vehicle is delivered.
749
Technical data On-board electronics
On-board electronics
Notes on tampering with the engine electron‐ & WARNING

ics Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromag‐
netic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in
* NOTE
the following situations, in particular:
Premature wear through improper maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. R The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection
aerial.
# Always have work on the engine electronics and related com‐
ponents carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
# Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.
Two-way radios # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect
NOTES ON INSTALLING TWO-WAY RADIOS them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electro‐
magnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehi‐
cle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic compo‐

nents carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
750
Technical data On-board electronics
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply
* NOTE and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufac‐
Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with turer's supplements when fitting.
the instructions for installation and use
TWO-WAY RADIO TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installa‐
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not
tion and use of two-way radios are not observed.
exceed the values in the following table.
# Only use approved frequency bands.
FREQUENCY BAND AND MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
# Observe the maximum permissible output power in these fre‐ Frequency band Maximum transmission output
quency bands.
2‑m‑ frequency band 50 W
# Only use approved aerial positions. 144 - 174 MHz
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 10 W

380 - 460 MHz
Two-way radio 2W
2G
Two-way radio 0.5 W

3G/4G/5G
THE FOLLOWING CAN BE USED IN THE VEHICLE WITHOUT RESTRICTIONS:
R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW

R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 -410 MHz fre‐
quency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)
1 Rear roof area
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
Fitting a roof aerial to vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof is not permit‐
ted.
THERE ARE NO RESTRICTIONS WHEN POSITIONING THE AERIAL ON THE
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installa‐ OUTSIDE OF THE VEHICLE FOR THE FOLLOWING FREQUENCY BANDS:
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting
two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
R 2G/3G/4G/5G
751
Technical data Regulatory radio information
Regulatory radio information
Specific information on wireless applications

in accordance with 2014/53/EU
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-
Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.
TYPE OF WIRELESS APPLICATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field strength level
decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz
Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitor‐ 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
ing
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP
752
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Compensator ECE DE003 and ECE DE004 GSM (E-GSM 900) < +33 dBm
GSM (E-GSM 1800) < +30 dBm
UMTS (I, III, VIII) < +23 dBm
LTE (B1, B3, B7, B8, B20) < +23 dBm
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz) < 20 dBm
Services) WLAN (5736-5833 MHz) < 14 dBm
GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +33 dBm (±2 dB)

GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1) < +30 dBm (±2 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2) < +27 dBm (±3 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2) < +26 dBm (± 3 dB/-4 dB)
UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
3)
753
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only
Further information and updates are available at the following web address:
https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
OVERVIEW OF MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer Manufacturer information
ADC ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems

GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau,
Regulatory radio identifiers and specific notes Germany
Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229

The tables and sections contain the following regulatory radio information: Leonberg, Germany
R Manufacturer information Continental Antenna Continental Advanced Antenna GmbH, Römer‐

ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
R Required regulatory radio identifiers, listed by country/region:
- Manufacturer's specifications Continental Automotive Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstraße
12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany
- Model designations
- Radio equipment approval numbers Continental Automotive Technologies Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH,
VDO-Straße 1, 64832 Babenhausen, Germany
R Specific information on wireless vehicle components
Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial
Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA
Harman Becker Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH,
https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en Becker-Goehring-Straße 18, 76307 Karlsbad,
Germany
HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75,

59552 Lippstadt, Germany
754
Manufacturer Manufacturer information Manufacturer Manufacturer information
Hirschmann Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH, Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsvägen 22,
Stuttgarter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlin‐ 44737 Vårgårda, Sweden
gen, Germany
WITTE-Velbert WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr.
Huf Baolong Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewer‐ 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany
bestraße 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany
ALGERIA
HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger
Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
KATHREIN KATHREIN Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Römer‐

Id ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
LEOPOLD KOSTAL LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11,
44227 Dortmund, Germany
MARQUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604

Rietheim-Weilheim, Germany
Meta System Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimberti 5, 42124

Reggio Emilia, Italy
Molex Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH, Märkische Straße

72, 15806 Zossen, Germany
Panasonic Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH,

Robert-Bosch-Straße 27, 63225 Langen, Ger‐
many
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ire‐ number
land, United Kingdom
Continental Antenna RKE223GNS (locking system) 71/H/ANF/2021
Sennheiser Sennheiser electronic GmbH & Co. KG, Am
Labor 1, 30900 Wedemark, Germany
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 122/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 136/H/ANF/2023
755
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 122/H/ANF/2021 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 3994/1.69-DA/2098/DT/DG/
tem) ARPT/17
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 123/H/ANF/2021 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/
sor) ARPT/17
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 106/H/ANF/2020
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 107/H/ANF/2020 sor) ARPT/17
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 133/H/ANF/2022 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 32/H/ANF/2021
tem)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 105/H/ANF/2022
ARGENTINA
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 172/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 188/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 189/H/ANF/2021

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 190/H/ANF/2021 number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 195/H/ANF/2021 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) C-18005
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 193/H/ANF/2021 ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) C-2377
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 194/H/ANF/2021 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) H-26206
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 186/H/ANF/2021 Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) H-24637
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 3681/1-73.OA 1639/DT/DG/ Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) H-24376
sor) ARPT/15
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) H-28998
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 652/1/DT/DG/ARPCE/2020
sor) Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ H-17929
tem)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 56/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) H-23974
756
number number
HELLA DM4 (locking system) H-17845 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) H-23166
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) H-15694 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-4788
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) H-15695
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-23292
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) H-28310 sor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ H-20027 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) H-25586
sor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) H-20495
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) H-28067
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-20959
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) H-15541 sor)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) H-11545 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ H-24664
tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) H-16874
AUSTRALIA
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) H-17689
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) H-21034
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) H-21035

Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) H-17598
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) H-17213
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) H-17212
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
757
Manufacturer Model designation Manufacturer Model designation
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head unit) BAHAMAS

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2014_082
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_167
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2017_184
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2017_157
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_195
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2020_068
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2023_028
758
number number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ URCA_TA/2017_119 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) URCA_TA_2020_141,
tem) URCA_TA_2022_228
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UCRA_TA/2016_009 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_031
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ UCRA_TA/2020_032 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_033
fier)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_250
HELLA DM4 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_078
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_TA/2015_009
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_053 sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_052 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_2019_101
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) URCA_TA/2022_043
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2021_001
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) URCA_TA_2022_057
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2020_046
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_2019_247
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087 sor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA/2017_094 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_169
sor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_168
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_081
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2021_027
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) URCA_TA_2017_042
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2015_063
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_128
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ URCA_TA_2020_056
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_129 tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_021
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_141
759
BELARUS
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
BOTSWANA
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication module)
number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2018/2026

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2020/5186

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4674

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2017/3788

760
number number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) BOCRA/TA/2019/4387 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4359
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ BOCRA/TA/2019/5050 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4360
fier)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4687
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5075
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2023/8144
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4980
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ BOCRA/TA/2019/4661
tem) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2021/6191
HELLA DM4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4662 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ BOCRA/TA/2020/5342
tem)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4724
BRAZIL
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4723
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2022/7099
These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) HUF13145 cause interference in properly approved systems.
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4664 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4593
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4389

number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4388
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 02217-14-06068
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4390
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) 06783-19-02496
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5135
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) 03691-15-05298
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 07359-21-12817
761
number number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 3691-15-5298 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 01392-11-02930
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 00325-20-02149 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 00616-17-02930
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 01334-23-02149 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 06218-19-02930
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 03189-17-02856 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 11149-20-02930
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 03149-19-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 04336-23-02149
nologies MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 03756-15-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 04338-23-02149 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 03757-15-02930
nologies
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 03034-20-07018
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 04337-23-02149 tem)
nologies unit)
Further specific information

HELLA DM4 (locking system) 04689-17-05364
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 1855-12-5762 Rear Seat Entertainment System:
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 1787-12-8058 This system is not protected against harmful interference and must not cause
interference in properly approved systems.
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) HUF13145
This product is approved by ANATEL in accordance with the procedures set
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 03627-15-06643 out in Resolution 242/2000 and complies with the relevant technical require‐
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 00053-13-06643
ments. Further information can be found on the https://www.anatel.gov.br
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 02712-15-03366
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 01333-17-02930
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 01395-11-02930
762
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure DTA-003757
number monitor control unit)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DTA-004005 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) DTA-017926
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DTA-004222 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DTA-006138
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DTA-011039 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DTA-000615
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DTA-006601 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) DTA-007245
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DTA-006678 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DTA-019403
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DTA-006665 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DTA-000068
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ DTA-004998 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DTA-000066
fier)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) LPD-38890
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DTA-005043
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DTA-003525
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) DTA-023993
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DTA-005850
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ DTA-017264
tem) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DTA-011312
HELLA DM4 (locking system) DTA-020187 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DTA-011313
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DTA-001661 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DTA-003662
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DTA-000794 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ LPD-29665
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) DTA-018051
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ LPD-29665
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-000310 sor)
sor)
763
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation

number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DRQ-D-JATI-07-2000-109000
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-001514
sor) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor DTA No. 003893 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
control unit)
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor DRQ-D-
control unit) MAJU-02-2011-111083
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DTA-004000

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DTA-003999

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DTA-010423

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DTA-006216

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ DTA-005628

tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)

EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION
HUF HUF13145 (locking system)

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor)
764
Manufacturer Model designation Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) GHANA

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
NCA APPROVED
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-152
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-152
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ZRO-M8-7E3-X53
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-225
fier)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-277

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 7M-7E7-X25-DSR

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ BR3-1M-GE2-16A

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
tem)

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 7M-7E7-X09-DSR
nologies
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 7M-7E7-X05-DSR
nologies
765
number number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 7M-7E7-X03-DSR Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 7E5-7M-X72-RDR
nologies unit)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ SRO-1M-7E4-X59
HELLA DM4 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE2-157 tem)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X45 INDONESIA

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X47 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 7E6-M1-X14-SRD Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) EX6-6M-GE2-16C
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 68676/SDPPI/2020
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X49 7163
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X50
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X51 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 90362/SDPPI/2023
7163
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE-129

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) 89748/SDPPI/2023
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ZRO-1H-7E3-26E 7163
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) SRO-1M-7E4-11B
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 74264/SDPPI/2021
7163
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 74267/SDPPI/2021
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-142 7163
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230
766
number number
Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) 74265/SDPPI/2021 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ 86957/ SDPPI/ 2022
7163 fier) 10325
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 74266/SDPPI/2021 han spesifikasi yang dapat
7163 menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 67882/SDPPI/2020

7163
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 87836/SDPPI/2023
7163
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ han spesifikasi yang dapat
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya menimbulkan gangguan fisik
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 76621/SDPPI/2021

7163
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 88721/SDPPI/2023
7163
menimbulkan gangguan fisik Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ han spesifikasi yang dapat
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya menimbulkan gangguan fisik
767
number number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 69379/SDPPI/2020 Continental Automotive NTG7 HIGH 70733/SDPPI/2020 7163
tem) 7163 (Headunit)

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ han spesifikasi yang dapat
han spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik
menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM 70731/SDPPI/2020 7163

Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) 66678/SDPPI/2020 7163 (Headunit)

Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS 70734/SDPPI/2020 7163

Continental Automotive NTG7 MID 70732/SDPPI/2020 7163 (Headunit)
(Headunit)
768
number number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 88477/SDPPI/2023 7163 Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID 64019/SDPPI/2019 7163
nologies (Headunit)
Production: Germany
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 88579/SDPPI/2023 7163 Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH 64018/SDPPI/2019 7163
nologies (Headunit)
Production: Germany
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 88478/SDPPI/2023 7163 Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID 63775/SDPPI/2019 7163
nologies unit) (Headunit)
Production: Hungary
769
number number
Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH 63774/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM 65543/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit) (Headunit)
Production: Hungary
Harman Becker NTG7 MID 65544/SDPPI/2020 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS 70512/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit) (Headunit)

Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH 70513/SDPPI/2020 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 RSU (control unit) 66387/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit)

770
number number
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 69378/SDPPI/2020 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 72974 /SDPPI/2021
7163 7163

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 72438/SDPPI/2021 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 82675/SDPPI/2022
sor) 7163 7163

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 71369 /SDPPI/2020 han spesifikasi yang dapat
7163 menimbulkan gangguan fisik
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 78368/SDPPI/2021
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya 7163

771
number number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 26742/SDPPI/2015 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 80676/SDPPI/2022
3533 7163

HUF HUF13145 (NFC reader) 83988/SDPPI/2022 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 80621/SDPPI/2022
7163

han spesifikasi yang dapat Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
menimbulkan gangguan fisik han spesifikasi yang dapat
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ menimbulkan gangguan fisik
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 41121/SDPPI/2018

5125 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 67372/SDPPI/2020
7163
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 67373/SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ menimbulkan gangguan fisik
han spesifikasi yang dapat dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
menimbulkan gangguan fisik hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
772
number number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 64126/SDPPI/2019 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 75285/ SDPPI/ 2021
7163 7163

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 90695/SDPPI/2023 7163 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 82980/SDPPI/2022
7163 7163

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 75282/ SDPPI/ 2021 Molex WCH-302b (control unit) 71668/SDPPI/2020 7163
7163

773
number number
Molex WCH-302d (control unit) 71220/SDPPI/2020 7163 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 75465/SDPPI/2021
sor) 7163

menimbulkan gangguan fisik Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 72765/SDPP/2021
7163
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 57058/SDPPI/2018

Molex WCH-302e (control unit) 71669/SDPPI/2020 7163
sor) 3612
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure 25626/SDPPI/2015

han spesifikasi yang dapat monitor control unit) 3612
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 62396/SDPPI/2020
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya sor) 7163
Panasonic DAIRSE (control unit) 63550/SDPPI/2019

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020
7163
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) 74749/SDPPI/2021
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya 7163
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 66830/SDPPI/2020
9338 7163
774
number number
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 78366/SDPPI/2021 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 55-08334
7163
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 55-08333
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 55-08395

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 66792/SDPPI/2020
7163 Bosch MBCI2LS3PR1 (head unit) 51-91228
Bosch MBCI2LS4PR1 (head unit) 51-91226
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 67233/SDPPI/2020 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 55-13929
tem) 10325
Continental Automotive D-WMI2017B (control unit) 51-75654
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Continental Automotive D-WMI2017A (control unit) 51-75367

menimbulkan gangguan fisik Continental Automotive D-WMI2016A (control unit) 55-08177
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) 55-08179
Continental Automotive RKE213E1 55-13929

(Antennenverstärker)
ISRAEL
Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS 51-70799
(Antennenverstärker)
number Continental Automotive CMKG1 51-87871
(Schließsystem)
Approval number of the Min‐
istry of Communications:
Continental Automotive CMKG2 51-92059
(Schließsystem)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 55-09697
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless 55-13749

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 55-07525
(Schließsystem)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 55-08783
775
number number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 51-90718 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 55-13847
nologies
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 55-12215
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 51-90717
nologies MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 55-12214
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 51-90719 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 51-85192
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 51-86840
Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH-IL 51-89476
(Headunit) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 55-14331
Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS-IL 51-89475 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 51-94449
(Headunit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 51-94450
HELLA DM4 55-14271
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-78338
(Schließsystem)
sor)
Hirschmann 920287A 51-62759

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-73152
(Schließsystem) sor)
Hirschmann 920287B 51-49357 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 51-77898

(Schließsystem)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-64111
Hirschmann 920702A 55-12320 sor)
(Schließsystem)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 55-09441
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 63-63571
sor) Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure 51-29611
monitor control unit)
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure 63-66757
monitor control unit) Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor 55-06040
control unit)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 55-14153
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor 51-79817
control unit)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 51-87872
776

number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 55-08176
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 55-08301
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 55-12216
tem) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
JAMAICA MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)



JAPAN
Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) number
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TMWK2211004648KR
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 003-230113
nologies
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 003-230112
nologies unit)
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) 201-190814 (R)

777
KUWAIT
number Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) 201-190815 (L)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Ref. 6716
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio 020-180077
Transmitter) Sennheiser M3IETW2 (Momentum True Ref. 4870
Wireless 2)
CANADA Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Ref. 4871

Transmitter)
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval MALAYSIA
number
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) IC: 7812D-CMKG2
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) IC: NTG7QMIDLF2
nologies Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) IC: NTG7QHIGLF2
nologies ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head IC: NTG7QPREF2 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
nologies unit)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2R
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2L
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IC:2099A-BTT100
Transmitter)
Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
Sennheiser M3IETW2 C (Charging Case) CAN ICS-3(B)/NMB-3(B)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) HIDF15000153
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ HIDF16000136

fier)
778
number number
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) HIDF15000153 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) RAAU/16B/1112/S(12-2053)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) HIDF15000153 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ CIDF15000578 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) RDDK/33A/0317/S(17-0669)
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0263)
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0264)
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) RGEZ/12A/1019/S(19-4128)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) RDDK/31A/0217/S(17-0405)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) RCCT/92G/0423/S(23-0350)
nologies MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) RDDK/25B/1019/S(19-0943)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) CCT/91G/0323/S(23-1291) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) RGLO/02A/0720/S(20-2580)
nologies
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) CIDF19000029
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head RGQB/05A/0323/S(23-1293)
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) CIDF19000029
HELLA DM4 (locking system) CIDF15000578

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) CIDF19000029
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) RAUU/63A/0311/S(11-0432)

Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection) RAVG/18Q/0212/S(11-2068)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) RAUU/22C/0615/S(15-1864)

Meta System MUW II (interior protection) RAVG/17Q/0212/S(11-2067)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) HIDF15000153

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RCDD/03A/0615/S(19-2094)
sor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ CIDF17000184
sor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RBEF/28A/0419/S/(19-1542)
sor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) RFBY/09A/0422/S(22-1843)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) RBEF/51A/0121/S/(20-5642)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) RAYN/25A/0715/S(15-2385)
779

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MR 9186 ANTR 2014-04-22
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MR 13900 ANTR 2017-05-04
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
control unit)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ MR 21174 ANTR 2019-10-14
control unit)
fier)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) HIDF15000153

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) HIDF15000153

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) MR 36542 ANRT 2023-02-01
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) HIDF15000153

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04
tem)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
HELLA DM4 (locking system) MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ RDDK/43B/0420/S(20-1749)
tem)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16
MOROCCO Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) MR 32214 ANTR 2022-03-08
number Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure moni‐ MR 14320 ANTR 2017-07-07
tor control unit)
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23 monitor control unit)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) MR 32395 ANRT 2022-03-24
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) MR 20575 ANRT 2019-07-29 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MR 5371 ANRT 2010 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05
2019-12-05
780
number number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03 Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure MR 6706 ANRT 2011-11-17
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) MR 6698 ANTR 2021-11-04
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MR 10436 ANRT 2015-05-25
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) MR 6699 ANTR 2021-11-04
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) MR 20097 ANRT 2019-06-14
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) MR 20149 ANRT 2019-06-19
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) MR 19199 ANTR 2019-03-25
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) MR 27966 ANRT 2021-03-29
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) MR 23805 ANRT 2020-04-22
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ MR 23310 ANRT 2020-03-10
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21 tem)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22 MEXICO
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure moni‐ MR 10216 ANRT 2015

tor control unit)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MR 19241 ANRT 2019 number
sor)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-1191
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) MR00026829ANRT2020
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor MR 19527 ANRT 2019-04-30
control unit) ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor MR 19527 ANRT 2019 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-0828
control unit)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-0922
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0598
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MR 16355 ANRT 2018-04-19
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) IFETEL: RLVKARK15-1741
781
number number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) IFETEL: RLVCORK19-2174 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHUHU15-1204
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPCOCM19-2315 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHUHU12-1587
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) IFETEL: COCOCM22-31003 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVKOKK15-0891
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-1827 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEDC17-0348
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) IFETEL: MECOCM22-17609
MARQUARDT DC12K (interior protection) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 12200
nologies MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS17-0222
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 11923 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS19-0449
nologies
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEMS20-0957
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 12204
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1042
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-0448

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1043
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPMA3319-0530

HELLA DM4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-10
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RCPSCAG15-0627

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9211-0472
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9212-0608

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVSCAG19-0705
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9222-2674
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCBG21-0750
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806
sor)
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCMF15-0959
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPHUHU22-2505

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCMF19-0777
782
number number
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCGG17-1665 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) A22000649
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) A22000674
sor)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) A19000400
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure IFETEL: RCPSCMR14-062
monitor control unit) MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) A19000371
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435-A1 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) A19000372
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) A18000289
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IFETEL: RCPSEBT18-1407 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) A19000516
Transmitter)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) A20000085
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ IFETEL: RCPWISD20-0943
tem)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) A19000374
MONGOLIA MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) A19000374
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) A19000401
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ A20000067

tem)
number
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) A19000633
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) A23000900
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ A18000328

tem)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) A18000329
783
NIGER NIGERIA
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 029/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 083/ARCEP/DG/19
tem) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 082/ARCEP/DG/19 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 097/ARCEP/DG/19 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 098/ARCEP/DG/19 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 053/ARCEP/DG/19 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 037/ARCEP/DG/19 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 010/ARCEP/DG/19 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 008/ARCEP/DG/19 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 009/ARCEP/DG/19 HELLA DM4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 014/ARCEP/DG/19 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) HOMO-0096/ARCEP/DG/2019 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 034/ARCEP/DG/19 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 035/ARCEP/DG/19 HUF HUF13145 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 015/ARCEP/DG/19 HUF HUF14632 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) HOMO-0095/ARCEP/DG/2019 HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
784
Manufacturer Model designation OMAN

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) number
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2016/14

D080134
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7769/19
D172338
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7983/19
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) D172338
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/1049/09
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/1849/14
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/4353/17
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA/TA-R/2715/15
D090258
Schrader MFR3 (control unit)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TRA/TA-R/8337/19
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) fier) D172338
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/8642/19
D172338
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/15164/23

D100428
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TRA/TA-R/4158/17

tem) D080134
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4548/17

D080134
785
number number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0210/11 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/7316/19
D080353 D172249
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0655/12 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/9324/20
D080353 D100428
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13300/22 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2848/15
D172338 D080353
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA/TA-R/4516/17 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2900/15
sor) D100428 D080353
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TTRA/TA-R/7506/19 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/7051/19
sensor) D172249
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13465/22 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TTRA R/2380/15
sor) D080134
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2665/15
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA R/7287/19

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0920/12
sor) D172338
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/3129/16
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/10694/20
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA/TA-RD/4056/17 D172338
D100428
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor TRA/TA-R/7464/19
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0227/11 control unit) D090258
D080353
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor TRA/TA-R/7467/19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0228/11 control unit) D090258
D080353
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/4686/17
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4136/17 D080134
D080134
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA/TA-R/5511/18
sor) D172249
786

number
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) TRA/TA-R/10988/21 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio TRA/TA-R/10976/21
Transmitter) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TAC NO: 9.100169/2019
fier)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2706/15
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TAC NO:9.100175/2019
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7706/19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.153/2023
D172338
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TAC NO: 9.213/2017
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7707/19 tem)
D172338
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) TAC NO: 9.9836/2019
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/11335/21
D172338 HELLA DM4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.409/2017
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TRA/TA-R/9150/20 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.845/2013
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.846/2013
PAKISTAN
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TAC NO. 9.412/2022
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO: 9.620/2017
sor)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.598/2015

number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.790/2013
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9014/2019

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.118/2016
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9389/2019

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.131/2017
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.198/2020

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.829/2013
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TAC NO: 9.142/2016

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TAC NO: 9.830/2013
787
PARAGUAY
number Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.133/2017
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.100171/2019
2019-05-I-0271
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TAC.NO: 9.774/2020

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.486/2015 2019-11-I-0602
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.497/2015 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO:9.039/2016 2019-11-I-0602

sor)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO:9.9167/2019
sor) 2019-09-I-0508
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.68/2021 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.538/2017 2017-06-I-0000162
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO: 9.789/2018 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
sor)
2019-05-I-000236
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9284/2019
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019
2021-02-I-00101 y 2016-02-
I-0000038
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.477/2021 fier)
2019-12-I-0656
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TAC NO: 9.527/2020
tem) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
2020-02-I-0110
788
number number
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
2023-03-I-0153 2017-12-I-0000409 y
2012-10-I-0178
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐
tem) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
2017-05-I-0000136 y
2015-06-I-0000181
2022-06-I-0388 y 2017-08-
I-0000261 2020-12-I-0898 y 2015-06-
I-0000181
2016-5-I-000134 y 2011-06-
I-0059 2021-05-I-0304; 2016-5-
I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067
2017-04-I-0000119 y
2012-05-I-0096 2021-05-I-0305; 2016-5-
I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068
2022-03-I-0149
2017-04-I-0000101
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐
sor) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
2017-09-I-0000328
2019-10-I-0581
2022-04-I-0235
2020-08-I-0604
2020-06-I-0284 y 2015-08-
I-0000226 2020-07-I-0390 y 2015-07-
I-0000200
789
number number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
2020-07-I-0391 y 2015-07- 2021-04-I-0188

I-0000201
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) tem)
2020-06-I-0326
2019-04-I-000216
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐
sor)
2015-04-I-0000150 Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ D-WMI2020A:

sor)
2019-05-1-000261 This vehicle is equipped with the following radio frequency component
approved by CONATEL - Paraguay: Wireless interface for mobile devices, Con‐
tinental brand, model D-WMI2020A, manufactured by Continental Automotive
2021-02-I-0063 GmbH.
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Radio equipment approval number: 2019-11-I-0600
2020-02-1-0044
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐
sor) DAIRSE:
2019-11-1-0632
Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaraníes, Asun‐
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) ción, Paraguay, (595 21) 569 7000, sac@condor.com.py
2020-07-I-0510
2019-07-I-0399
2019-07-I-0398
790
PHILIPPINES
number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval HUF HUF13145 (locking system) ESD-RCE-2229722
number
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) ESD-1511236C
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) ESD-1409466C
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ESD-1206521C
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ESD-1920226C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ESD-1510698C
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ESD-1920531C
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ESD-1714489C
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) ESD-1408917C
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ESD-1105216C
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ESD-1716172C
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ESD-1105215C
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ESD-1511856C
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) ESD-1715652C
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ ESD-1921015C
fier) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ESD-1919133C
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ESD-2021556C MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) ESD-2022426C
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) ESD-RCE-2332806 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ESD-1510644C
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ ESD-1714865C MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ESD-1510645C
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ESD-1919198C
HELLA DM4 (locking system) ESD-1715539C
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1715393C
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ESD-1105246C sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ESD-1206044C Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1919585C
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) ESD-RCE-2229632
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-RCE-2124846
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1715393C
sor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-1715977C
791
number number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1817081C MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/18
sor)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/9/30
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) ESD-1510921C
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/123
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ ESD-2022599C
tem) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/20
ZAMBIA MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/21
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/6
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/124
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval SERBIA

number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/11
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/3

tem)
number
HELLA DM4 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/4
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) И011 20
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/12
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) И011 19
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/11
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) И011 19
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/12/18
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) И011 19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/48
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) И011 17
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/16
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) И005 17
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/17
792
number number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) И005 21 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) И005 21
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ И005 22 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) И005 18
fier)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) И005 20
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) И005 20
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) И005 20
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) И005 23
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) И005 20
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ И005 20
tem) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) И011 17
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) И005 23 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) И005 19
nologies
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) И005 20
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) И005 23
nologies
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) И005 21
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head И005 23

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) И005 21
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) И005 22

HELLA DM4 (locking system) И005 20
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) И011 19

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) И005 18
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 15

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) И005 18
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) И005 22

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 15
sor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 20
sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) И005 20
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) И005 22

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) И005 17
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) И005 21
793

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DA103365
number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DA105282
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 18
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ DA107248
fier)
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure И011 11
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DA103365
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) И011 18

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) DB106440
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) И011 19

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ DA105282
tem)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) И011 19
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) DB107091
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) И038 21
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) DA103365
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ И005 20
tem)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) DA105282
nologies
SINGAPORE
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) DA105282
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION nologies
number Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head DA105282
nologies unit)
Complies with IMDA Stand‐
ards Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication DB107091
module)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) DA103365
HELLA DM4 (locking system) DA103365
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DA103365 N3308-22
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DA103365 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DA103365
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DA103365 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DA103365
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DA103365 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) DA105282
794
number number
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ DA30668 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA107968
sor) sor)
HUF Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure DA28467 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA103365
sensor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) DA105282
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DA105282
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA105282
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DA103365 sor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) DA103365 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DA103787 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DA103365 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DA103365 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DA103365
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) DA103787 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ DA107248
tem)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DA103787
SOUTH AFRICA
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DB107091
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DA103365
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DA103365

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DA103787 number
Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection) DA103365 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA-2014/1637
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) DA103365 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA-2019/1595
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA103787 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA-2019/1200
sor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TA-2014/212
795
number number
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TA-2017/2013 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TA-2022/0162
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TA-2009/464 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2017/1393
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TA-2015/1438
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TA-2019/1440
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) TA-2020/043 sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TA-2019/5405 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TA-2022/0375
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TA-2022/3611_CMKG2 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TA-2015/1077
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TA-2016/3500 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TA-2012/1543
tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TA-2015/595
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) TA-2021/3460
Meta System ITS Master (interior protec‐ TA-2011/1636
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) TA-2023/0091 tion)
nologies
Meta System ITS Sensor (interior protec‐ TA-2011/1227
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) TA-2023/0111 tion)
nologies
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) TA-2019/261
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head TA-2023/0090
nologies unit) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TA-2017/312
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ TA-2015/1386 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TA-2011/370
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TA-2012/1542
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TA-2017/2518
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TA-2016/3314
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TA-2011/374
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TA-2013/1262
796
number number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TA-2015/179 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA-2021/0150
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TA-2015/180 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TA-2020/055
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TA-2018/3985
SOUTH KOREA
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2015/072
sor) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2019-133

sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2020/773 number
Schrader MFR (control unit) TA-2019/273 Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) R-C-Ca3-RKE223E1
Schrader MFR3 (control unit) TA-2019-273 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) R-R-TeH-CMKG2
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2017/3884 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q LF2 (head unit) R-R-TeH- NTG7QLF2
nologies
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2017/2933
sor) Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ R-C-Ca3-RKE223E1
sor)
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure TA-2011/1370
monitor control unit) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MSIP-CRM-HHF-HUF-14632
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA-2015/2087 Schrader MFR (control unit) MSIP-REM-SRD-MFR
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA-2019/1380 Schrader MFR3 (control unit) KCC R-R-SRD-MFR3A
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA-2019/1382 Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure KCC-REM-SRD-MRXMC34MA4
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG5SP4

sor)
797

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) No. 088/19
number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) No. 041/19
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ R-C-SRD-AG3PF4
sor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) No. 060/19
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) R-C-SRD-BG3FP4

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) No. 055/19
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MSIP-CRM-SRD-GG4T

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) No. 057/19
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ R-CRM-SRD-DG6W2D4

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) No. 056/19
sor)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) No. 008/19

THAILAND
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) No. 101/19
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) No. 021/19
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) No. 022/19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 130111-23-0132
nologies unit) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) No. 016/20
UKRAINE
TOGO
number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) No. 024/19 number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ No. 040/19 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) UA RF: 1CONT0004
tem)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UKR.355-123/19
HELLA DM4 (locking system) No. 039/19
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ UA.R.TR.052.682-19
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) No. 089/19 fier)
798
number number
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) UA1.001.021175-20-TE MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.307-19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) UA.032.CT.0105-23 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.308-19
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ RTS.UKR.355-34/18 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.309-19
tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) UA1.001.019129-19-TE
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) UA.TR.052
nologies MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.528-19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) UA.TR.052 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 632.16-CET
nologies
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) UA1.001.019233-19-TE
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head UA.TR.052
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) UA1.001.019234-19-TE
HELLA DM4 (locking system) UA.TR.109

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) UA1.001.018888-19-TE
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) UKR.355-7/20

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA.TR. 032
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) UKR.355-8/20
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA-TR-001
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ UA 1.001.018568-19-TE sor)
sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA-TR-109
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure UA 1.001.019289-19-TE
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) UA.TR. 028
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) UKR.355-113/19

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA.TR. 028
sor)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) UKR.355-113/19
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ UA.R.TR.052.120-20
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) UA1.001.018653-19-TE tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 1O094.006682-19
799
UZBEKISTAN

Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA RTTE: Er558296/17,
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DA40068/15
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER77062/19,
DA40068/15
800
number number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER74533/19, Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ TRA ER41849/15,
DA36758/14 tem) DA35176/14
Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication TRA ER03601/21,

module) DA0028019/10
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA ER64693/18,
DA65993/17
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TRA ER76442/19, HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA ER56616/17,
fier) DA65993/17 DA44932/15
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA ER77964/20, Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA ER52213/17,
DA0018994/09 DA35219/14
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TRA ER17713/23, Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA ER42011/15,
DA36975/14 DA35219/14
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA ER10723/22,

DA35219/14
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TRA ER56005/17,
tem) DA44932/15 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER57806/17,
sor) DA36976/14
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) TRA ER11321/22,
DA36975/14 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TRA ER7307/19,
monitor control unit) DA0086237/12
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) TDRA ER17731/23,
nologies DA76163/18 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22,
DA36976/14
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) TDRA ER17730/23,
nologies DA76163/18 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA ER63716/18,
DA36976/14
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA ER55496/17,

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head TDRA ER17732/23, DA36976/14
nologies unit) DA76163/18
801
number number
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22 DA36976/14 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER96175/21,
DA0047074/10
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER57985/17,

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA ER62622/18, DA0047074/10
DA0105247/13
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER960528/18,
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA ER53465/17, sor) DA0047074/10
DA0018994/09
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure TRA ER37066/15,
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA ER0067828/11, monitor control unit) DA0047074/10
DA0018994/09
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) ER78231/20
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA ER0067829/11,
DA0018994/09 Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio ER64728/18
Transmitter)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA ER52668/17,
DA0018994/09 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER96352/21;
0020858/10
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TRA ER71616/19,
DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA ER80720/20, Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72324/19;
DA0018994/09 0020858/10
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA ER64145/18,

DA0018994/09
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72323/19;
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA ER64146/18, 0020858/10
DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TRA ER69280/19, 0018994/09

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER95775/21;
0020858/10
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER37156/15,
sor) DA0047074/10
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER70533/19,

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TRA ER79695/20,
sor) DA0047074/10
tem) DA0018994/09
802
UNITED KINGDOM

Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head unit)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):
D-WMI2016A, D-WMI2017A, D-WMI2017B:
803
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 10 cm Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):
between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or The charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) complies with
transmitter. FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environ‐
ment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum dis‐
D-WMI2020A: tance of 0 cm (in contact) between the source of radiation and your body. This
transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 0 cm time as another transmitter or antenna.
between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or Rear Seat Entertainment System:
transmitter.
USA: "This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada
UNITED STATES licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two con‐
ditions: (1) This device must not cause any harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
number Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) FCC ID: KR5CMKG2
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) FCC ID: NTG7QMIDLF2
This device must be installed and used at a distance of at least 6 cm from the
nologies body."
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) FCC ID: NTG7QHIGLF2 Canada: "This device complies with ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS stand‐
nologies
ard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head FCC ID: NTG7QPRELF2
must not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
nologies unit) received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2R
This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits established for
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2L
an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio FCC ID: DMOBTT100 with a minimum distance of 5 cm between the radiation source and your
Transmitter) body."
Information on installation clearances Radar sensors:
804
ARS4-C (ADC), ARS4-B (ADC), ARS4-A (ADC), FR5CPCCF (Bosch), MRR1REAR VIETNAM
(Bosch), MRREVO14F (Bosch), LRR3 (Bosch), 77V12BSM (Veoneer), 77V12CRN
(Veoneer), MMRV1 (Veoneer)
USA only: Information on exposure to high-frequency radiation:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits established for an number
uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated
with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited
body.
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the pany Limited
same time as another antenna or transmitter.
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
Canada only: This equipment should be installed and operated with a mini‐ pany Limited
mum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body.
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited
BT Audio Transmitter (BTT100):
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits estab‐ pany Limited
lished for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 9 cm between the radiation source and Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited
your body.
C0274151118AF04A2
This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
same time as another antenna or transmitter. fier) Company Limited
B1522011121AF04A3
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology

Company Limited
C0001070120AF04A2
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited
C0104060423AF04A3
805
number number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
tem) pany Limited Company Limited
B0748240419AF04A2 C0075210121AF04A3
HELLA DM4 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
pany Limited Company Limited
CO204030321AF04A3 C0913110821AF04A3
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
pany Limited Company Limited
B0424070422AF04A3 C0141140520AF04A2
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ C0112200717AF04A2 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
sor) Company Limited
C0049150121AF04A3
HUF HUF13145 (tyre pressure sen‐ C1071050922AF04A3
sor) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
C0050150121AF04A3
pany Limited
C0313140421AF0403 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0131030221AF04A3
Company Limited
C0208030321AF04A3 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0002050119AF042A
Company Limited
C0076210121AF04A3 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0120220519AF04A2
Company Limited
C0077210121AF04A3
806
Information about the specific absorption

rate (SAR)
number
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Suntech Vietnam Technology The values have been determined and tested in accordance with the
Company Limited Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline regarding the indication of the specific absorp‐
C0170191017AF04A2 tion rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0078070518AF04A2
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

tem) pany Limited
A0847130820AF04A3
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 compensators < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
D-WMI2020A 0.018 W/kg 4 W/kg
807
Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
Gen20x.i2 LS3+ 2,2 W/kg 4 W/kg
Gen20x.i2 LS4+ 2,5 W/kg 4 W/kg
SM-T230NZ tablet PC 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg
Importer information for regulatory radio Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1
components 34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul
FOR MOLDOVA ONLY: FOR UKRAINE ONLY:

Importer Importer
S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”
mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2 Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2
FOR TURKEY ONLY: 01004 Kyiv

Importer
Ukraine
Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.Ş. Genel Merkez
FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:
Importer
808
Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
England
Importer of Mercedes-Benz vans
Mercedes-Benz Vans UK Limited
Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics
England
809
Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE 3 Manufacturing date

4 Vehicle model
5 VIN
Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)

1 Vehicle manufacturer
2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
3 VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)
5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for
certain countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
1 Vehicle manufacturer 8 Paint code
2 Place of manufacture
810
Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
VIN AND ENGINE NUMBER
1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase

2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped into the crossmember
3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label at the lower edge of the
windscreen
Only for certain countries: the VIN as a label at the lower edge of windscreen
3 is only available in some countries. Further information can be obtained at
a qualified specialist workshop.
811
Technical data Operating fluids
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids R DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas aftertreatment
R lubricants
R Coolant
& WARNING
R Brake fluid
Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids
R windscreen washer fluid
Operating fluids can be toxic.
R climate control system refrigerant
# When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe
the imprints on the respective original containers.
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of
# Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container. products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
warranty or goodwill gestures.
# Always keep children away from operating fluids.
The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the fol‐
lowing inscriptions on the container:
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of oper‐ R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
ating fluids
Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to FURTHER INFORMATION ON APPROVED OPERATING FLUIDS:
the environment.
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the
# Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible designation
manner.
- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
R At a qualified specialist workshop
OPERATING FLUIDS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
R fuels
812
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are highly flammable. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐ # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes
ded. or clothing.
# Before and during refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fit‐ # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
ted, the stationary heater.
# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.
ing:

immediately.


with fuel.
FLEXIBLE-FUEL VEHICLES CAN BE REFUELLED WITH THE FOLLOWING

FUEL TYPES:
R unleaded petrol
R E85 fuel
813
R a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol

* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ
from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been
# Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine
approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside fuel.
of the fuel filler flap.
Spark ignition engine fuel can contain up to 25% ethanol by volume.
Fuel # See the information label in fuel filler flap for compatible fuels.
INFORMATION ON FUEL QUALITY FOR VEHICLES WITH PETROL ENGINES

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 812). Further information about compatible fuels can be obtained at a quali‐
fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
R Diesel
R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
814
The following compatibility marks for fuel may apply to your vehicle:
* NOTE
# Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine

fuel.
1 For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by volume Spark ignition engine fuel can contain up to 25% ethanol by volume.
2 For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by volume
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleas‐
ant odours.
mation label on the fuel filler flap.
fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
If the recommended fuel is not available, you may also temporarily use regular
unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may reduce
engine output and increase fuel consumption. R Diesel
Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON. R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified
INFORMATION ON FUEL QUALITY FOR MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:
815
* NOTE
Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions
occurring.
# Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz

to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.
3 For petrol with a maximum of 25% ethanol by volume In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Depos‐
its could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in con‐
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleas‐ sultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service
ant odours. centre), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.
The recommended octane number can be found on the information label on
the fuel filler flap (/ page 31). INFORMATION ON FUEL QUALITY FOR VEHICLES WITH DIESEL ENGINES
For maximum engine output: refuel only with super unleaded petrol that has GENERAL NOTES
an octane number of at least 98 RON. Alternatively, you can also refuel using Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 812).
premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 95 RON.
In exceptional cases, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also & WARNING
use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This Risk of fire from fuel mixture
may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is
Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.
# Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified
specialist workshop. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
INFORMATION ON ADDITIVES IN PETROL (VEHICLES WITH PETROL

ENGINE)
816
* NOTE
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter:
# Refuel using only sulphur-free diesel fuel.

In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only
1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty acid methyl ester by volume
low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less than
(bio-diesel)
50 ppm.
2 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty acid methyl ester by volume
(bio-diesel)
Vehicles without diesel particulate filter: 3 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 20% fatty acid methyl ester by volume
(bio-diesel)
# Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less
4 For paraffinic diesel fuel
than 500 ppm.
ACCORDING TO EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 16942, YOU CAN FIND THE
NEVER REFUEL WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS: COMPATIBILITY MARKS AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:
R Petrol R On the vehicle, on the information label on the fuel filler flap
R Marine diesel (/ page 31)
R Heating oil R On the fuel dispensers or pump nozzles suitable for your vehicle
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil throughout Europe
R Paraffin or kerosene Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified
TANK CONTENT AND FUEL RESERVE
# Do not switch on the vehicle. The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment.
Not for plug-in hybrid:
817
TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY FUEL TANK RESERVE

Model Model
GLA 180 43.0 litres Mercedes-AMG GLA (all models) 5.0 litres
GLA 180 d
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC 6.0 litres
GLA 200
GLA 200 d
All other models 51.0 litres

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
FUEL TANK RESERVE
NOTES ON ADBLUE®
Model Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 812).
All models 5.0 litres AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of die‐
sel engines.
Plug-in hybrid:
It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that
TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
uses no AdBlue® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this
Model Owner's Manual.
GLA 250 e 35.0 litres

* NOTE
FUEL TANK RESERVE (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue® or the use of additive-
Model enhanced AdBlue®
The function of the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment can be impaired by
GLA 250 e 5.0 litres
the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.
TANK CONTENT AND FUEL RESERVE (MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES) # Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY
# Do not dilute AdBlue® with water.
Model
# Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
Mercedes-AMG GLA (all models) 51.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC 60.0 litres
818
cialist workshop before making journeys outside Europe. Before a longer stay
* NOTE outside Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue®
ADBLUE® FILL LEVEL AND RANGE
CONSEQUENCES OF IMPURITIES IN ADBLUE®:
The AdBlue® fill level and range can be displayed via the on-board computer.
R increased emission values The AdBlue® range shown is highly dependent upon driving style and operating
R damage to the catalytic converter conditions. The actual range may therefore differ from the range currently dis‐
played on the on-board computer. The information supplied in the Owner's
R NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunctions
Manual regarding the reserve quantity at the first display warning and the min‐
imum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is empty is also to be understood as
# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.
guide values.
AdBlue® residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfa‐
ces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as Engine oil
soon as possible.
NOTES ON ENGINE OIL
When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 812).
escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the
AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
ADBLUE® FILLING CAPACITY AND CONSUMPTION

TOTAL CAPACITY OF ADBLUE® TANK
Model Total capacity
All models 23.8 litres
ADBLUE® CONSUMPTION
The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption.
Like fuel consumption, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent upon driving
style and operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consump‐
tion figures in day-to-day operating conditions may differ from the average
consumption figures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top
up AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply checked at a qualified spe‐
819
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (DIESEL ENGINES)

* NOTE
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or
additives All models 229.52, 229.61, 229.71, 229.72*
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which
meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service Plug-in hybrid:
intervals.
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve lon‐ Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
ger change intervals than prescribed.
GLA 250 e 229.71, 229.72, 229.81*
# Do not use additives.
* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscos‐
# Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. ity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE vis‐
cosity classes).
Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist
workshop. % If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may top
up with a maximum of 1.0 l of the following engine oils once
Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. only:
Vehicles with petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
ENGINE OIL QUALITY AND FILLING QUANTITY
229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or ACEA C5
Vehicles with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (PETROL ENGINES) 229.51 or ACEA C3

GLA 180 229.71, 229.72, 229.81*
GLA 200
All other models 229.71, 229.72*
820
ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+: use only engine oils of viscosity class
SAE 0W‑20.
Model Quantity
GLA 180 5.1 litres

% If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may top
GLA 200
up with a maximum of 1.0 l of engine oil with MB-Freigabe or
GLA 220 4MATIC 5.0 litres MB-Approval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or ACEA C5 once only.
GLA 250 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG GLA: Top up the oil level to the maximum before performing
All other models 6.5 litres
extreme changes of direction or using racetrack mode.
Plug-in hybrid:
ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY
ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Model Quantity
Model Quantity
Mercedes-AMG GLA 35 4MATIC 5.0 litres
GLA 250 e 4.5 litres Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+ 5.8 litres

The specified filling quantity refers to an oil change with the oil filter.
ENGINE OIL QUALITY AND FILLING QUANTITY (MERCEDES-AMG VEHI‐ The specified filling quantity refers to an oil change with the oil filter.
CLES)
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION Notes on brake fluid
Mercedes-AMG GLA 35 4MATIC 229.71, 229.72*
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+ 229.71
* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscos‐
ity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE vis‐
cosity classes).
821
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake Risk of fire‑ and injury from antifreeze
system If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers compartment, it may ignite.
the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour
pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied
# Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the anti‐
hard. freeze.
This impairs the braking effect.

# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler open‐
ing.
# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.
# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before
starting the vehicle.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe
or MB-Approval 331.0.
* NOTE
Damage caused by incorrect coolant
Coolant # Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required
antifreeze protection.
NOTES ON COOLANT
INFORMATION ON COOLANT IS AVAILABLE AT THE FOLLOWING
LOCATIONS:
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1

- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
R At a qualified specialist workshop
822
* NOTE * NOTE
Overheating at high outside temperatures Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently washer fluid
protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside tempera‐ Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of
tures. the exterior lighting.
# Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for
use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Operating Fluids 320.1.
* NOTE
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
PROPORTION OF ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATE IN THE COOLING SYSTEM:

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind‐
screen washer fluids.
R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C)
R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be
triggered erroneously.
Notes on windscreen washer fluid RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 812). R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
& WARNING
‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze con‐
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it tainer.
system. Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.
# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out

next to the filler opening.
823
Technical data Vehicle data
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

All models
THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING
FACTORS: Vehicle length 4412 mm
R Tyres Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2020 mm
R Load Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1834 mm

R Condition of the suspension
Vehicle height 1616 mm
R Optional equipment
Wheelbase 2729 mm
Plug-in hybrid:
HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEADROOM (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Model 1 Height when open 2 Headroom
GLA 250 e 2117 mm 1905 mm
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

1 Height when open
2 Height GLA 250 e Vehicle dimensions
Not for plug-in hybrid: Vehicle length 4412 mm
HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEIGHT Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2020 mm
Model 1 Height when open 2 Headroom Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1834 mm
All models 2119 mm 1907 mm
824
GLA 250 e Vehicle dimensions HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEIGHT

Model 1 Height when open 2 Headroom
Mercedes-AMG GLA (all mod‐ 2087 mm 1875 mm

Wheelbase 2729 mm
els)
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 2066 mm 1893 mm
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 4MATIC
VEHICLE LENGTH (MERCEDES-AMG GLA)

THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING
FACTORS: Model
R Tyres Mercedes-AMG GLA 35 4MATIC 4436 mm
R Load Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+ 4443 mm

R Condition of the suspension
R Optional equipment VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (MERCEDES-AMG GLA)
All models (Mercedes-AMG GLA)
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2020 mm
Vehicle width 1849 mm
Wheelbase 2729 mm
Mercedes-AMG GLB (example) VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (MERCEDES-AMG GLB)

1 Height when open
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC
2 Height
Vehicle length 4650 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2020 mm
Vehicle width 1850 mm
825
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC Weights and loads (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE
Wheelbase 2829 mm
DATA:
R Items of special equipment increase the kerb weight and reduce the pay‐
load.
Weights and loads R You will find vehicle-specific weight information on the vehicle identifi‐
cation plate (see the vehicle Owner's Manual).
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE
DATA: ROOF LOAD
R Items of special equipment increase the kerb weight and reduce the pay‐ Model Maximum roof load
load.
All models 75 kg
R Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identifi‐
cation plate (/ page 810).
Not for plug-in hybrid: Maximum design speeds

ROOF LOAD The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It
depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of
Model Maximum roof load
the tyres.
All models 75 kg
NOT FOR MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES:
Plug-in hybrid: Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
ROOF LOAD (PLUG-IN HYBRID) MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED
Model Maximum roof load Model
All models 75 kg All models
826
Maximum design speeds (Mercedes-AMG For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the
"Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 359).
vehicles)
The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It
depends on the operating conditions, the special equipment and the size of
the tyres.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The following values only apply to vehicles with the AMG Driver's Package.
1 Supply type: AC
Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
Standard: EN 62196-2
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED Design: type 2
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
Model
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
All models 2 Supply type: DC
Standard: EN 62196-3
Style: FF
High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid) Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
NOTES ON THE POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BAT‐
TERY 3 Supply type: DC
In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identifiers are Standard: EN 62196-3
located on the vehicle in the following places: Style: FF
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
R On the inside of the socket flap
Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
R On the charging cable connector
Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy

supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose
charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.
827
ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES

GLA 250 e
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy content 15.6 kWh
Range in all-electric mode
Charging time – mode 4 Approx. 25 min

with approx. 22 kW charging capacity
Charging time – mode 3 Approx. 1 h 15 min

with 11 kW charging capacity1)

with 3.7 kW charging capacity

with 1.8 kW charging capacity
1) Charging with 7.4 kW charging capacity (single phase) with a current of 32 A is possible leads to a longer
charging time.
Charging times – Mode 2 and charging times – Mode 3 apply to AC charging

from 0 % to 100 % of the usable energy content. Charging time –mode 4
applies to DC charging from 10 % to 80 % of the usable energy content.
The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the
battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The
charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current and the
type of power supply.
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information
label in the socket cover (/ page 359).
828
Technical data Trailer hitch
Trailer hitch
General notes on the trailer hitch Mounting dimensions of the trailer coupling
Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehi‐
cle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a trailer load
is specified in the vehicle documents.
Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
1 Attachment points
2 Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line
The overhang dimension and attachment points are valid for a trailer coupling
installed at the factory.
829
OVERHANG DIMENSION, LENGTH TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED

Model 2 Overhang dimension Model
All models 888 mm All models 750 kg
OVERHANG DIMENSION, LENGTH (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Plug-in hybrid:

Model 2 Overhang dimension TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
GLA 250 e 888 mm Model
GLA 250 e 1800 kg
Trailer load TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Model
% The tongue weight is not included in the trailer load.
The values for the trailer load, braked apply with a minimum GLA 250 e 750 kg
start-off climbing ability of 12 %.

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED The tongue weight is not included in the trailer load.
Model TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED (AT A MINIMUM START-OFF GRADEABILITY OF

12 %)
GLA 180 1600 kg
GLA 180 d Model Trailer load, braked
GLA 200 1800 kg Mercedes-AMG GLA 35 4MATIC 1800 kg
GLA 200 d Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC
GLA 220 4MATIC

Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+ 1500 kg
All other models 2000 kg
830
TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED LOAD CAPACITY

Model Trailer load, unbraked All models Maximum load capacity
All models 750 kg When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg
head
Maximum tongue weight‑ and load capacity

Maximum tongue‑ weight and load capacity
* NOTE
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Damage caused by the trailer coming loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. % OBSERVE THE INFORMATION:
# The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg. R On the maximum tongue weight and load capacity in the
vehicle's Owner's Manual (see "Technical Data" chapter).
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maxi‐ R On the maximum load capacity in the vehicle's Owner's
mum permissible tongue weight. Manual (see "Function of the bicycle rack" chapter).
TONGUE WEIGHT
* NOTE
Model Maximum tongue weight
Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC 100 kg
maximal load capacity should be observed.
Mercedes-AMG GLA 35 4MATIC 80 kg
# Do not exceed the permissible load capacity. Mercedes-AMG GLB 45 S 4MATIC
LOAD CAPACITY
Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 472). All models Maximum load capacity
TONGUE WEIGHT When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg

head
Model Maximum tongue weight
All models 80 kg
831
Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation) Permissible axle load, rear axle (Mercedes-
Not for plug-in hybrid: AMG vehicles)
AXLE LOAD WHEN TOWING TRAILER AXLE LOAD WHEN TOWING TRAILER
Model Axle load Model Axle load
GLA 180 1105 kg Mercedes-AMG GLA 35 4MATIC 1160 kg
GLA 200
Mercedes-AMG GLB 35 4MATIC 1210 kg
GLA 180 d 1120 kg

Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 S 4MATIC+ 1145 kg
GLA 200 d
GLA 220 4MATIC 1145 kg

GLA 250 4MATIC
GLA 200 d 4MATIC 1155 kg
GLA 220 d 4MATIC 1160 kg
Plug-in hybrid:
AXLE LOAD WHEN TOWING TRAILER (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Model Axle load
GLA 250 e 1245 kg
Back to Contents832
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages 834
Warning and indicator lamps 900

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages
Display messages
Introduction High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver display will show
these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message
INFORMATION ABOUT DISPLAY MESSAGES has been rectified.
Display messages appear on the driver display.
CALLING UP SAVED DISPLAY MESSAGES
Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual Driver's display:
and may differ from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display 4 Service
shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages will be The Message memory: XXmessage appears on the driver's display.
accompanied by a warning tone.
# Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards
Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional on the left-hand Touch Control.
notes in the Owner's Manual.
# To exit the display: press the G back button.
FOR SOME DISPLAY MESSAGES, SYMBOLS WILL ALSO BE SHOWN:
R Õ Further information
R ¨ Hide display message
You can select the respective symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand
Touch Control. Press Õ to display further information on the central display.
Press ¨ to hide the display message.
You can hide display messages to be acknowledged by pressing the back but‐
ton G or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then
be stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.
834
Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 137).
6
Restraint system malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
tem.
# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.
RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
835
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front left malfunction Consult workshop
& WARNING
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER
tem.
836
6
Front right malfunction Consult workshop
& WARNING
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER
tem.
837
6
Second row of seats, left Malfunction
& WARNING
Consult workshop
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER
tem.
838
6
Second row of seats, right Malfunction
& WARNING
Consult workshop
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER
tem.
839
6
Left window airbag malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Right window airbag malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front passenger airbag disabled See Own- * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to
er's Manual the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
840
& WARNING
‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 139).
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front passenger airbag enabled See Own- * THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WILL BE ENABLED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
er's Manual
TIONS:
R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat
R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
841
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena‐
bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 139).
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Occupant presence reminder inoperative * The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning
æ
* The occupant presence reminder suspects that there are persons or animals in the rear of the vehicle.
# Do not leave any persons or animals behind when leaving the vehicle.
Do not leave persons or animals in the
vehicle
842
Key
Á
* Have the key replaced.

Replace key
Á
* The key battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery (/ page 189).

Change key batteries
Á
* The key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

Key not detected (white display mes‐
# Try to start the vehicle.
sage)
# If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 311).
Á
* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.
IF THE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:
Key not detected (red display message)
R You can no longer start the vehicle.
R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.
If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:
843
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 311).
The key battery is weak or discharged.
Á
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.
# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being taught in Please wait
Place the key in the marked space See * Key detection is malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 311).
Lights
:
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See Owner's Manual * Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 66).
844
:
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.

Automatic driving lights inoperative
:
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.

Active Light System inoperative
:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.

Switch on headlamps
:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the Ã position.

Switch off lights
MULTIBEAM LED Functions limited * The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions of the MULTIBEAM LED system.
:
* The dynamic low beam is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Dynamic Light System.

Dynamic low beam inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Manual
The system limits have been reached (/ page 278).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will
appear.
845
# Drive on
# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inopera- * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.
tive
# Drive on
or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear.
# Drive on
# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
# Until then, operate the high beam manually.
846
:
* The front left parking light is malfunctioning.

Front left parking lights
:
* The front right parking light is malfunctioning.

Front right parking lights
:
* The left low beam is malfunctioning.

Left low beam
:
* The right low beam is malfunctioning.

Right low beam
:
* The left cornering light is malfunctioning.

Left cornering light
:
* The right cornering light is malfunctioning.

Right cornering light
:
* The left-hand front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Left fog lamp
847
:
* The right-hand front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Right fog lamp
:
* The left tail light is malfunctioning.

Left tail light
:
* The right tail light is malfunctioning.

Right tail light
:
* The left high beam is malfunctioning.

Left main beam
:
* The right high beam is malfunctioning.

Right main beam
:
* The left daytime running lights are malfunctioning.

Left daytime running lights
:
* The right-hand daytime running lights are malfunctioning.

Right daytime running lights
848
:
* The front left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Front left turn signal
:
* The rear left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear left turn signal
:
* The front right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Front right turn signal
:
* The rear right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear right turn signal
:
* The turn signal lamp on the left mirror is malfunctioning.

Left mirror turn signal
:
* The turn signal lamp on the right mirror is malfunctioning.

Right mirror turn signal
:
* The left brake light is malfunctioning.

Left brake lamp
849
:
* The right brake light is malfunctioning.

Right brake lamp
:
* The third brake light is malfunctioning.

Third brake lamp
:
* The reversing light is malfunctioning.

Reversing light
:
* The rear fog light is malfunctioning.

Rear fog light
:
* The number plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Number plate lamp
:
* The left turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer left turn signal
:
* The right turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer right turn signal
850
:
* The brake light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer brake lamp
:
* A tail light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer tail light
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
Inoperative indicator lamp in driver dis- * An indicator lamp on the driver's display is defective.
play. Consult workshop
Climate control
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
& # When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting
several minutes between each attempt.
inoperative See Owner's Man. (stationary
heater)
# If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
% The stationary heater cannot be activated if the outside temperature is above 15°C.
851
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
& The stationary heater has switched itself off.

Currently unavailable Battery low
# Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
& # Refuel the vehicle.

Currently unavailable Refuel
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
& # Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.
Currently unavailable High-voltage bat-
tery charging incomplete.
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
& # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 359).

Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage
battery
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched off.
& # Start the vehicle for ten seconds.

Pre-entry climate control via key available Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
again after starting vehicle
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
& # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 359).

Pre-entry climate control via key currently When the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.
unavailable. High-voltage battery low
852
Drive system
u
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Have the vehicle transported using only a transporter or trailer (/ page 715).
Towing not permitted See Owner's Man-
ual
ò
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road
users.
# Drive with particular care.

Acoustic presence indicator inoperative
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.
è # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

Charger cable connected
Not possible to unlock charging cable * The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehicle socket.
See Owner's Manual
# If the charging cable is under strain, relieve the strain on the charging cable connector by carefully pulling on the charging cable.
# Press the charging interruption button (/ page 371).
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed after that:
Vehicle not currently being charged * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
Charging station fault
# Start the charging process at a different charging station.
or
# Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.
853
Charging fault Please change charging * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
method See Owner's Manual
# Wait until the malfunction has passed.
or
or
Login failed Change authentication * Plug-and-Charge is not expected to be available at this charging station.
method or charging station
or
Only electric drive available Power limited * The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched off. The output of your vehicle is limited because you are driving in electric mode.
# Refuel immediately.
Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a distance of 50 km.
If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.
"Electric" drive program currently unavail- * The state of charge of the high-voltage battery or the environmental conditions are not sufficient for the Electric drive program.
able
# Drive on and observe the notes on plug-in hybrid operation (/ page 305).
or
# Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 359).
854
Reduced drive system performance See * The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.
Owner's Manual
# Drive on carefully.
* Plug-in hybrid: The high-voltage battery is overheated. There is a risk of fire.
Û # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out!
# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Outdoors if possible
% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
Û # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction
Û # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop
Without changing gear, consult workshop * The drive system cannot be restarted due to a malfunction.
If the transmission position is changed using the DIRECT SELECT lever, the drive system will be switched off in park position j or neutral i.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
855
Consult workshop without starting the * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
vehicle again
# Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.
d # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction
d # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving because the drive system
is automatically deactivated.
Stop Switch off the vehicle
# Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.
* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures.
d The output is severely restricted.

Performance severely limited
Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The display message will disappear.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.
* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel filler flap is opened. This pressure reduction can take up to 15 minutes.
6
Please wait Depressurising fuel tank
856
* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel filler flap opens.
6
Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refu-
elling
* Vehicles with petrol engines: There is a malfunction in the fuel system.
6 # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult
workshop
Vehicle
* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update.
The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.
& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver's display fails
If the driver's display fails or malfunctions, you may not be aware of any functional limitations to safety-critical sys‐
tems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle.
# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If the driver display fails, you may not recognise e.g. function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display. The operating safety of the
vehicle may be impaired (/ page 545).
# Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
857
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
occurs when locked or automatically in a
few minutes # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.
# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the
engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown * You are about to leave the vehicle and the engine is running.
occurs when locked or automatically in
XX mins The vehicle will switch off automatically in 20 minutes.
# To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, acknowledge the message on the central display of the multimedia system.
* You are in the vehicle. Park position j is engaged and the engine is running.
After a certain holding time, this display message will appear on the driver display. The vehicle will then switch off automatically after a total of 20 minutes of
holding time.
# To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, acknowledge the message on the central display of the multimedia system.
ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
Trailer coupling Check lock (white dis‐ & WARNING

play message) Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.
858
# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 51).
# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
# If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 51).
# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
# If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 51).
# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
Trailer coupling Check lock(red display

message)
859
& WARNING
Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 51).
# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
# If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 51).
# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
# If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 51).
# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
860
Head-up display currently unavailable See * THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Owner's Manual
R Malfunctions in the power supply
R Signal interference
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.
# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.
Ù
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
Steering malfunction Increased physical & WARNING

effort See Owner's Manual Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
861
Ù
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
Steering malfunction Stop immediately & WARNING

See Owner's Manual Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Ù
* The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
Steering malfunction See Owner's Manual & WARNING

Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
862
û
* The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering.

Before starting the engine, turn the steer-
# To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right.
ing wheel.
# Switch on the vehicle again.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
Manual
* At least one door is open.
C # Close all doors.
* The bonnet is open.
?
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
# Close the bonnet.
* The tailgate is open.
863
& DANGER
Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
# Never drive with the tailgate open.
# Close the tailgate.
Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction * The anti-theft alarm system is malfunctioning.
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
¥ # Top up the washer fluid (/ page 37).

Top up washer fluid
Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.
# Restart the vehicle.
If the display message still appears:
4matic currently unavailable * 4MATIC is currently unavailable.
864
4matic inoperative * 4MATIC is inoperative.
Engine
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/ * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3
times # Information about switching off the vehicle while it is being driven (/ page 310).
* The coolant level is too low.
+
Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual * NOTE
Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant (/ page 681).
# Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ÿ
* The coolant is too hot.
Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle
865
& WARNING
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPART‐
MENT, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down.
# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains
below 120°C.
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.
! # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Clean the fuel filter
ý
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

Replace air filter
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
æ # Refuel.
Reserve fuel
866
Drive system Malfunction Visit workshop * The drive system is malfunctioning.
Drive system malfunction Stop Switch off * The drive system is malfunctioning.
the vehicle
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
Transmission
Only select P when vehicle is stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
# Depress the brake pedal to stop.
# Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect P position * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position.
of P or N
# Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to engage D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.
867
# Select transmission position h or k.
Apply brake to engage R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.
# Select transmission position k.
Apply parking brake to park Visit work- * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
shop
# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
open Transmission not in P
The vehicle may roll away.
# Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
brake to park
# Park the vehicle safely.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
N permanently active Risk of vehicle roll- * Neutral i has been engaged while the vehicle is moving or while you are driving.
ing
# Depress the brake pedal to stop.
# Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
# To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.
868
Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.
# Engage park position j.
Consult workshop without changing the * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
transmission position
# If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears.
# Let the transmission cool down.
# If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired.
d # Drive at low engine speed.

Transmission oil overheated Drive on with
# Avoid sporty driving.
care
# Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
j # Park the vehicle safely.

Parking lock inoperative Apply the park-
ing brake
869
Teaching in transmission Operate selec- * The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away.
tor lever Brake for XX seconds Risk of
vehicle rolling # Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically during the teach-in process.
# Select park position j, transmission position k or neutral i.
Teaching in transmission complete * The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.
Transmission Malfunction Visit workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white dis‐ * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
play message)
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
message)
870
Brakes
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
! To apply:
Parking brake See Owner's Manual
# Switch the vehicle off and then back on
# Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 387).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 387).
or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 386).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
To apply:
871
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 387).
To release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the state of charge is too low:
# Charge the 12 V battery (/ page 64).
To apply:

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This
does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 387).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
872
To release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake man‐
ually (/ page 387).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
* The red ! indicator lamp is flashing.
! THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED WHILE YOU ARE DRIVING:

Release parking brake
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 386).
R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 388).
# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
! You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.
Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J
Check brake fluid level
873
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐
ing.
# Do not top up the brake fluid.
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual * The brakepads have reached the wear limit.

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
!÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See Owner's Man-
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
ual (ABS and ESP®)
874
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive
carefully.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
!÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS
and ESP®)
875
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
currently unavailable See Owner's Man-
ual (ESP®)
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive
carefully.
876
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP®)
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
switched off.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
T! Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD,
ABS and ESP®)
877
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.
ë # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 400).
Off
é
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 403).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!
h
* Cruise control cannot be activated because not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 406).

- - - km/h
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
878
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 404).
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
È
- - - km/h
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive mode (/ page 405).
È
passive
Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable * Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inoperative * Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
879
ð
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).
# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
# Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
# Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
or
ä
* The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h
ä
* AMG RIDE CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h
AMG Ride Control Function limited See * At least one of the main functions of AMG RIDE CONTROL is malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual
The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
880
* NOTE
The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side
during cornering.
# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
# Avoid sudden steering movements.
# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
# Avoid sudden steering movements.
î
* DSR is malfunctioning.

inoperative
î
* The maximum speed of 40 km/h for DSR has been exceeded.
# Drive more slowly.

Max. speed 40 km/h
î
* The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program.
# Change the drive program.

Not in curr. drive prog.
RACE START cancelled * POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R you released the accelerator pedal during RACE START.
881
R you depressed the brake pedal during RACE START.
# You can try RACE START again at the next start.
Driver assistance systems

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated because not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 411).
- - - km/h
ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 408).
suspended
ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically
(/ page 411).
Off
Active Distance Assist currently unavaila- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
ble See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 408).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
882
Active Distance Assist inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Emergency Stop Assist are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
or
Active Distance Assist available again * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
# Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 411).
Active Brake Assist Functions currently * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY
limited See Owner's Manual
UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE:
R Active Evasive Steering Assist
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
or
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY
Owner's Manual
UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE:
883
R Active Evasive Steering Assist
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
or
Active Steering Assist currently unavaila- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
# Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inoperative * Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
# Drive on
or
Ø
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 418).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Steering Assist currently unavaila- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
ble due to multiple emergency stops
884
# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop will be initiated (/ page 418).
# Make a deliberate steering movement.

Beginning emergency stop
# Accelerate or brake.
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 420).
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
or
Blind Spot Assist inoperative * Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when tow- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
ing a trailer See Owner's Manual
# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
885
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions * Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.
restricted See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
or
¸ð
* FRONT AND CORNER RADAR SENSORS (HEREAFTER "SENSORS") ARE MALFUNCTIONING. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R The sensors are dirty
çÓ R
R
Heavy rain or snow
Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to func‐
tion normally.
886
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will
be switched off.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Clean all sensor covers from the outside (/ page 391).
êð
* THE VIEW OF THE MULTIFUNCTION CAMERA IS RESTRICTED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
Ó¬ R
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
Mist on the inside or outside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside or outside of the windscreen during cold times
çÔ of year in particular.
Camera view restricted See Owner's Man-

ual % This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to func‐
tion normally.
# To remove mist from the outside, wipe once (/ page 283).
# To remove the mist from the inside, press ¬ (/ page 296).
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will
be switched off.
If the display message does not disappear even after a driving time of about 15 minutes:
887
# Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 391).
ð¸
* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.
# Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.
±
Restricted during trailer operation
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Man- * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
ual
Parking assistance systems

PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Manual
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual
888
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.
G # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative
Battery
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
# # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

12 V on-board electrical system Visit
workshop
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual
889
* NOTE
Possible engine damage if you continue driving
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
* The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
# #
#
Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
Drive for 30–60 mins.
Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V bat-
tery
or
# Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 64).
# Plug-in hybrid: Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 359).
* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
# # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge
# Leave the vehicle running
the 12 V battery
# If the display message disappears: drive on.
890
* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire.
Û # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out!
# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Outdoors if possible
% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.
Û Comfort functions, such as the air conditioning system, may be available only to a limited extent.
48 V battery See Owner's Manual
It is possible to drive on.
# If the display message remains active permanently, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was
Ý providing starting assistance.
The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Possible to start the vehicle again display message will be
Please wait 48 V battery charging
shown on the driver's display.
# Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.
If the Possible to start the vehicle again display message does not appear after a few minutes:
# Try to start the vehicle.
# If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
891
Possible to start the vehicle again * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.
# Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.
Tyre pressure monitor

Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring
system is temporarily unavailable.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
# Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoperative * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
pressure sensors
# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
892
é
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheel sensor(s) missing
é
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.

Check tyre(s)
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 729) and the tyres.
é
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.
# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (/ page 731).
893
é
* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
Warning tyre malfunction & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre
R The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Do not drive with a flat tyre.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi‐
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tyre.
# Observe the notes on flat tyres.
Notes on flat tyres (/ page 67).
# Check the tyres.
é
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
Tyre(s) overheated & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
# Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
894
é
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
Reduce speed & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
# Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
Tyre pressure loss warning system

Tyre pressure Check tyres * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.
& WARNING
895
# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 729) and the tyres.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 732).
Check tyre pressure, then restart Run * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 732).
Run Flat Indicator inoperative * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Exhaust gas aftertreatment

Ú
* The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range.
# Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®(/ page 35).

Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual
Ú
* The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction after the remaining distance displayed has been covered.
# Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 35).

Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual
Ú
* The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction from the speed displayed.
After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.
Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max.
XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km # Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®(/ page 35).
896
Ú
* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.
# Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 35).

Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on,
wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss # Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
¯ # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

AdBlue system malfunction Emergency
op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual
* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.

AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.:
max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.

AdBlue system fault Engine start not pos-
sible
897
Engine oil
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
5
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling * NOTE
Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 679).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 819).
* The engine oil level is too high.
5
Engine oil level Reduce oil level * NOTE
Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
* The engine oil level is too low.
5
Engine oil level Stop Switch off the vehicle * NOTE
Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
898
# Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 679).
# Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 819).
* The oil pressure is too low.
5
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off the * NOTE
vehicle Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure
# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
5 # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine oil level cannot be measured
899
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some
indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is 6 Restraint system (/ page 902)
non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if
ü Seat belt (/ page 902)
they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.
p Occupant presence reminder (white) (/ page 902)
The indicator and warning lamps are located in the highlighted display sec‐
tions. p Occupant presence reminder (yellow) (/ page 902)
STANDARD DRIVER DISPLAY
DRIVE SYSTEM
_ Reduced power (/ page 904)
Ú System error (/ page 904)
# Electrical fault (/ page 904)
WIDESCREEN COCKPIT DRIVER DISPLAY VEHICLE
ï Trailer hitch (/ page 905)
Ù Power steering (yellow) (/ page 905)
Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 905)
900
ENGINE å ESP® OFF (/ page 911)
ÿ Vehicles with widescreen cockpit: coolant temperature å ESP® OFF (/ page 911)
(/ page 906)
¤ ESP® OFF (/ page 911)
; Engine diagnostics (/ page 906)
Æ ESP® SPORT (/ page 911)
p Vehicles with petrol engine: engine operating temperature
(/ page 906) Û ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 911)
p Engine operating temperature (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ê Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 911)
(/ page 906)
ê Speed Limit Assist (/ page 911)
% Vehicles with diesel engine: preglow
L Distance warning (/ page 911)
# Electrical fault (/ page 906)
Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 911)
æ Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator (/ page 906)
ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 911)
BRAKES ä Indicator lamp inoperative
! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 909) ä AMG RIDE CONTROL (/ page 911)
! Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 909)
MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 909)
H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 916)
J Brakes (red) (/ page 909)
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

DRIVING AND DRIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
h Tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 916)
! ABS (/ page 911)
÷ ESP® (/ page 911)
901
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
T Side lights (/ page 272)
L Low beam (/ page 272)
K High beam (/ page 274)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 274)
N Front fog lamps (/ page 272)
R Rear fog light (/ page 272)
SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY

É Drive Away Assist (/ page 459)
L Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 460)
º Manoeuvring brake function (/ page 460)
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 137).
Restraint system warning lamp

& WARNING
902
Plug-in hybrid:
& DANGER
tem.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.
* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 137).

Seat belt warning lamp flashes
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.
ü In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.

The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 137).
903
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
p
* The white occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.
The occupant presence reminder is deactivated.
Occupant presence reminder warning

lamp (white)
p
* The yellow occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.
The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning

Occupant presence reminder warning
lamp (yellow)
Drive system
_
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.

Reduced-power warning lamp
* The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.
Ú There is a malfunction in the drive system.

System error warning lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
# There is a fault with the electrics.

Electrical fault warning lamp
904
Vehicle
ï
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
Trailer hitch warning lamp

& WARNING
Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
Ù
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)
Ù
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
Power steering warning lamp (red)
905
& WARNING
Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
Engine
ÿ
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Coolant warning lamp (red) R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
R The coolant level is too low
R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R The radiator fan is faulty
R The engine coolant pump is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.
906
& WARNING
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT,
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:
# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
# Check the coolant level (/ page 681).
# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains
below 120°C.
907
ÿ
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Coolant warning lamp (yellow) R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
; A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
Engine diagnostics warning lamp
# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.
# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.

If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
# There is a fault in the electrics.

Electrical fault warning lamp
p
* The blue warning lamp for engine operating temperature will remain lit until the engine operating temperature has been reached.
The engine output and engine torque will remain reduced until then.
# Take this into consideration in your driving style.

Engine operating temperature warning
lamp
p
* Vehicles with a petrol engine: after a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on.
Engine output and engine torque are reduced.
# Take this into consideration in your driving style.

Engine operating temperature warning
lamp
908
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
æ The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up
Brakes
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.
! The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.
Electric parking brake indicator lamp
(red)
!
Electric parking brake indicator lamp
(yellow)
* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
J WARNING
Brakes warning lamp (yellow) &
Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
909
# If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.
* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
J POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Brakes warning lamp (red) R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
910
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐
ing.

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
! ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.

ABS warning lamp
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
911
& WARNING
There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
÷ One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 394).
ESP® warning lamp flashes One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 395).
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
ESP® warning lamp lights up
912
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
switched off.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
å ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
& WARNING
Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
913
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 394).
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the vehicle is running.
å¤ ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 395).
* ESP® SPORT is activated while the vehicle is running.
åÆ When ESP® SPORT is activated, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
# Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.
914
# Observe the notes on activating ESP® SPORT(/ page 395).
Û
* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.
ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp
ê
* The Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp is lit.
Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp
ê
* The Speed Limit Assist warning lamp is lit.
Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.

Speed Limit Assist warning lamp
L
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Warning lamp for distance warning
# Be prepared to brake immediately.
# Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 422).
Ó
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.

Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.
This may be the case if another driving system has been activated.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
915
# Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 422).
ä
* The yellow AMG RIDE CONTROL warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the AMG RIDE CONTROL.

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

H
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.

warning lamp
Tyre pressure monitor

* The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
h The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure monitoring system warn‐

ing lamp flashes
916
& WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
h The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
Tyre pressure monitoring system warn‐

ing lamp lights up & WARNING
# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Back to Contents917
Index
Index
Searching for something specific? Click on the relevant initial letter here and look it up.
Incidentally, you can also use your PDF reader's search function at any time.
# 919 G 968 N 990 U 1027
A 920 H 970 O 992 V 1029
B 929 I 973 P 995 W 1033
C 933 J 976 Q 1000
D 943 K 977 R 1001
E 958 L 978 S 1008
F 964 M 982 T 1018

Index #
#
4MATIC 350
48 V on-board electrical system
Displays in the driver's display 496
Operating safety 107
# A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W
Index A
A
A/C function Accident Active Brake Assist
Activating/deactivating (operating
294 ERA-GLONASS test mode 642 Function 422
unit)
Switching on/off (MBUX) 294 Accident, emergency call 74 Setting 426
Activating/deactivating the acoustic

ABS 393 187 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
locking verification signal
Acceleration Active bonnet 675 Activate/deactivate variable limiter 411
Kickdown 348 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Activating/deactivating 411
Access data Resetting 675 Active Emergency Stop Assist 420
Setting (Bluetooth®) 646 Active Speed Limit Assist 414
Index A
Calling up a speed 411 Function 437 Parking 455
Function 408 Setting the sensitivity 439 Pausing 458
Increases/decreases the speed 411 Trailer operation 437 Active Service System PLUS 671
Route-based speed adaptation 415 Active light function 275 Active Speed Limit Assist 414
Storing a speed 411 Active Parking Assist Active Steering Assist
Active Emergency Stop Assist 420 Automatic braking function 459 Activating/deactivating 420
Active headlamps 275 Exiting a parking space 457 Active Emergency Stop Assist 420
Active Lane Keeping Assist Function 453 Function 418
Activating/deactivating 438 Manoeuvering brake function 460 Adaptive brake lights 402
Index A
Adaptive cruise control 415 Capacity 819 Engine oil 819
Adaptive Damping System Fill level 487 Fuel 816
Adjusting bass, mid-range and treble

Suspension 439 Notes 356
settings
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Purity 818 Advanced sound system 668
Adjusting mid-range, treble and bass

Activating/deactivating 278 Range 487
settings
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Topping up 35 Advanced sound system 668
Switching on/off 280 Additional door lock 191 Adjusting the balance/fader
AdBlue® Additives Advanced sound system 669
Additives 818 AdBlue® 35 Burmester® surround sound system 667
Index A
Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble Advanced sound system Calling up 294
Burmester® surround sound system 667 Adjusting the balance/fader 669 Climate control 294
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass

Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass 668 Stationary heater/ventilation 302
settings
Burmester® surround sound system 667 Calling up the sound menu 668 Air distribution
Adjusting the sound focus Information 668 Overview 295
Switching loudness normalisation

Burmester® surround sound system 668 668 Setting 291
on/off

After-sales service 671 Air inlet 684
settings
Advanced sound system 668 Air conditioning menu Air pressure 729
Burmester® surround sound system 667 Air distribution 295
Index A
Air vents Airflow AMG Performance
Setting 302 Setting 291 Information 28
Air/water duct 684 Alarm system 212 AMG Real Performance Sound 330
Airbag All-wheel drive 350 AMG RIDE CONTROL
Inflating 146 Alternative route 569 Selecting the suspension setting 440
Overview 154 Ambient lighting 281 Suspension 439
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 139 AMG DYNAMIC SELECT AMG steering wheel buttons
Warning lamp 137 Setting drive programs 339 Setting 332
Index A
AMG steering-wheel buttons Android Auto Anti-lock braking system 393
Function 331 Connecting a mobile phone (wired) 626 Anti-theft alarm system 212
Connecting a mobile phone (wire‐

AMG TRACK PACE 627 Anti-theft protection
less)
Configuring 551 Ending 628 Additional door lock 191
Drag Race 550 Information 626 Immobiliser 212
Anticipatory operating-mode strategy,

Function 547 Sound settings 628 330
Route-based
Telemetry display 551 Transferred vehicle data 628 Apple CarPlay®, Smartphone
Track Race 547 Android smartphone 625 Connecting an iPhone® (cable) 623
Animals 147 Connecting an iPhone® (wireless) 624
Index A
Ending 625 Ashtray 262 ATA
Notes 623 Assembly licence plate, front 111 Deactivating the alarm 212
Overview 623 Assistance system 392 Function 212
Sound settings 625 Assistant display Interior protection 214
Transferred vehicle data 628 Menu (driver display) 487 Interior protection function 213
Apps, Mercedes me ASSYST PLUS Tow-away protection 213
Mercedes me calls 629 Battery disconnection periods 672 Tow-away protection function 213
Mercedes me connect 633 Service interval display 671 ATTENTION ASSIST
Selecting (MBUX multimedia system) 636 Service requirements 671 Function 403
Index A
Setting 404 Automatic climate control 295 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 139
Attention assistant 403 Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Automatic measures after an accident 144
Augmented reality Function 142 Automatic mirror folding function 289
MBUX route guidance 591 Automatic distance control 408 Automatic seat adjustment 232
Authorisations Automatic driving lights 273 Automatic transmission
Setting 538 Automatic emergency call 640 DIRECT SELECT lever 340
Authorised workshop 121 Automatic engine start/stop 322 Drive programs 333
Automatic front passenger airbag shut‐

Automatic car wash 40 DYNAMIC SELECT button 333
off
Information (child restraint system

Automatic car wash mode 687 162 Engages neutral 342
on the front passenger seat)
Index A
Engaging drive position 345 Transmission position display 340
Engaging reverse gear 341 Transmission positions 340
Faulty gear shift 345 Autonomous braking 422
Gear shift 340 Axle load
Kickdown 348 Trailer operation 832
Trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG

Manual shifting 346 832
vehicles)
Oil temperature (driver's display) 488
Selecting park position 343
Steering wheel gearshift paddles 346
Index B
B
Battery (high-voltage on-board electri‐
Bag hook 253 Battery (12 V battery) 827
cal system)
Ball neck Charging 64 Battery (key) 189
Folding out/in 51 Notes 706 Battery (starter battery)
Notes (starting assistance and charg‐

Trailer coupling 468 709 Charging via Remote Online 313
ing)
BAS 394 Replacing 712 Battery operation 305
Basic information 134 Starting assistance 64 Belt
Battery Battery (48 V) Fastening 137
High-voltage battery 709 Notes 708 Notes on wearing correctly 136
Index B
Releasing 153 BlueTec Opening/closing 676
Bicycle rack AdBlue® 356 Resetting (active bonnet) 675
Boost pressure, current (driver's dis‐

Load capacity 831 Bluetooth® 488
play)
Load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

831 Connecting a mobile phone 14 Brake Assist
cles)
Trailer operation 472 Information 538 Active Brake Assist 422
Blind Spot Assist Setting up an Internet connection 646 Brake Assist System 394
Activating/deactivating 436 Switching on/off 539 Brake Assist System 394
Function 435 Bonnet Brake disks 314
Active bonnet 675 Brake fluid 821
Index B
Brake force distribution 400 Driving tips 316 Recuperation 327
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐

Brake lamps 400 Running-in notes 314
tion)
Adaptive brake lights 402 Electric parking brake 385 Braking assistance
Brake pads 314 Handbrake 385 Active Brake Assist 422
Brakes HOLD function 400 Brake Assist System 394
Limited braking effect (salt-treated

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 393 316 Breakdown
roads)
New/replaced brake pads/brake

Active Brake Assist 422 314 Flat tyre 67
discs
Adaptive brake lights 402 Parking brake 385 Overview of aids 93
BAS (Brake Assist System) 394 Post-collision brake 144 Tow-starting 719
Index B
Towing methods 69 Information 666
Transporting the vehicle 717 Selecting the sound profile 667
Wheel change 739
Burmester® surround sound system
Adjusting the balance/fader 667
Adjusting the sound focus 668

667
settings
Automatic loudness normalisation 667
Calling up the sound menu 667
Index C
C
Call list Calling up the sound menu Ending a call 612
Deleting 617 Advanced sound system 668 Incoming call during an existing call 613
Making a call 616 Burmester® surround sound system 667 Making 612
Overview 616 Calls, Telephone operation Mercedes me 629
Selecting options 617 Accepting 612 Telephone 612
Calling the customer centre for

629 Activating functions during a call 613 Using overhead control panel 629
Mercedes-Benz
Calling up a web page 648 Calls with several participants 613 Using the international dialling code 614
Declining 612
Index C
Camera Reversing camera 442 Car-to-X-Communication
360° camera 446 Select view 450 Display on map 590
Button 450 Car key 186 Overview 590
Care 689 Car wash Sending hazard warnings 591
Cleaning 689 Automatic car wash 40 Care
Function 446 Car wash mode 686 Air/water duct 684
Information 391 High-pressure cleaner 687 Automatic car wash 40
Off-road function 449 Washing by hand 688 Camera 689
Opening the camera cover (reversing

450 Car parts 689
camera)
Index C
Car wash mode 686 Roof lining 691 Care of the roof lining 691
Decorative foil 688 Seat belt 691 Care of the steering wheel 691
Display 691 Steering wheel 691 Caring for rims 689
Exterior lighting 689 Trailer hitch 689 Central display
Genuine wood/trim elements 691 Vehicle interior 691 Operating 518
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

Head-up display 691 689 Central locking system
battery
High-pressure cleaner 687 Washing by hand 688 Button 192
Paint 688 Wheels/rims 689 Key 187
Plastic trim 691 Care of the plastic trim 691
Index C
Centre console Charging station, mode 3 364 Notes on the high-voltage battery 709
Lower MBUX control panel 519 Configuring weekly profile 553 Rapid charging station, mode 4 365
Ending the charging process (alter‐

Charge level display 377 371 Recuperation 327
nating current, mode 2/3)
Ending the charging process (direct Starting the charging process (alter‐
Charge level/charge display 377 375 368
current, mode 4) nating current, mode 2/3)
Starting the charging process (direct

Charging Flexible charging system Pro 366 373
current, mode 4)
12 V battery 64 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 367 Stowing the charging cable 361
At time of departure 553 Mains socket, mode 2 362 USB port 54
Maximum charging current (mains

Charge level display 377 365 Wallbox, mode 3 364
socket)
Notes on charging the high-voltage

Charging cable control panel 366 359
battery
Index C
Brief overview of most important

Charging cable Checking tyre 156
points
Control panel 366 pressure 731 Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size 175
Flexible charging system Pro 366 Child safety lock Front passenger seat 162
Stowing 361 Rear door 180 Overview of warning stickers 161
Charging process Side window (rear) 182 Rearward-facing 165
Recommendations for child restraint

Paying 571 Child seat 166
systems
Charging settings 553 Adjusting the vehicle seat 174 Risks/dangers 159
Seats suitable for belt-secured child

Charging system 366 Approval categories 165 171
restraint systems
Seats suitable for i‑Size child

Checking the coolant level 681 Basic instructions 158 171
restraint systems
Index C
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child

170 Cigarette lighter Camera 689
restraint systems
Securing to the front passenger seat

178 Front centre console 262 Car parts 689
with the seat belt
Securing to the rear seat with the

178 City lighting 276 Car wash mode 686
seatbelt
Top Tether 177 Classic menu display content Decorative foil 688
Without automatic co-driver airbag

164 Selecting 482 Genuine wood/trim elements 691
shutoff
Children Clean varnish 688 High-pressure cleaner 687
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle 159 Cleaning Paint 688
Basic instructions 158 Air/water duct 684 Sensors 689
Chock 67 Automatic car wash 40 Vehicle interior 691
Index C
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

689 Air vents (front) 302 Overview of systems 291
battery
Pre-entry climate control for depar‐

Washing by hand 688 Air vents (rear) 303 298
ture time
Pre-entry climate control using the

Cleaning carpet 691 Automatic control 295 297
key
Resetting the climate control set‐

Cleaning the seat cover 691 Calling up the air conditioning menu 294 72
tings
Climate control, Air conditioning system, Closing/opening the windows (air-

71 Residual heat 296
Blower, Cooling recirculation button)
Activating/deactivating 294 Demisting the windscreen 291 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) 294
Activating/deactivating the A/C func‐

294 Demisting windows 296 Setting the air distribution 291
tion (control panel)
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐

295 Immediate pre-entry climate control 300 Setting the airflow 291
nisation function (control panel)
Setting the vehicle interior tempera‐

Air distribution settings 295 Notes 291 291
ture
Index C
Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER

Stationary heater/ventilation 300 142 Windscreen wipers 283
AIR BAG OFF
Switching air-recirculation mode

296 COC papers, Certificate of conformity 749 Comfort
on/off
Switching the A/C function on/off

294 Cockpit Information 27
(MBUX)
Switching the rear window heater

291 Dashboard 77 Communication module
on/off
Disconnecting automatically from

Synchronisation function 296 Coffee cup symbol 403 645
the Internet
Ventilation with comfort opening 205 Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting up an Internet connection 645
Climate control settings Setting 388 Commuter route 569
Resetting 72 Combination switch Compass 596
Clothes hook 253 Lights 274
Index C
Components subject to radio regula‐ Control element (MBUX multimedia sys‐

Importing (overview) 615
tions tem)
Declaration of conformity 112 Information 614 Setting acoustic feedback 518
Connection status Making a call 615 Control elements: 105
Displaying 648 Name format 615 Convenience closing 205
Overview 648 Note about suggestions 612 Convenience feature
Closing/opening the windows (air-

Contacts, Address book, Phone book Options 616 71
recirculation button)
Calling up 614 Selecting options for suggestions 612 Convenience opening 205
Deleting 616 Storing 615 Coolant
Importing 615 Notes 822
Index C
Copyright 132 Calling up a speed 406
Cornering light 275 Function 404
Correct use 123 Requirements: 406
Cover 207 Setting a speed 406
Cross traffic (warning) 460 Storing a speed 406
Cross Traffic Alert, Cross traffic warning 460 Cup holder
Crosswind Assist 398 Rear 261
Cruise control
activating/deactivating 406
Index D
D
Damage Starting/stopping loop recording 603 Online services 130
Limited protection 147 Data processing in the vehicle 128 Deactivating the alarm 212
Dashboard Data protection Dealership 121
Cockpit 77 Granting authorisations 538 Declaration of conformity
Components subject to radio regula‐

Dashcam Data protection rights 130 112
tions
Configuring settings 605 Data storage Electromagnetic compatibility 112
Selecting a USB device 603 Data protection rights 130 Jack 114
Starting/stopping individual record‐

604 Electronic control units 128 TIREFIT kit 116
ings
Index D
Decorative foil 688 Editing the previous destinations 585 Selecting from favourites 568
DeNOx agent Saving as a favourite 585 Selecting from the map 568
AdBlue® 356 Destination entry Selecting previous destinations 565
Deployed components Accepting a destination suggestion 565 Destination entry (multimedia system)
Limited protection 147 Entering a 3 word address 567 Notes 563
Deployment situations 146 Entering an intermediate destination 576 Selecting a POI 565
Destination Entering geo-coordinates 567 Detecting inattentiveness 403
Editing a suggestion 586 Selecting a contact 566 Diagnostics connection 119
Editing intermediate destinations 577 Selecting a received destination 569
Index D
Diesel Engaging park position automatically 343 Display (driver's display)
Notes 816 Engaging reverse gear 341 Overview of displays 498
Digital Owner's Manual 97 Function 340 Display (MBUX multimedia system)
Direct commands Gearshift recommendation 348 Settings 495
Voice commands for MBUX voice

512 Manual gearshifting 346 Display message
assistant
DIRECT SELECT lever Selecting park position 343 Calling up on driver display 834
Automatic transmission 340 Display Notes 834
Engages neutral 342 Care 691 Display messages
Engaging drive position 345 ç - - - km/h 882
Index D
¯ AdBlue system malfunction

È - - - km/h 879 Emergency op. in XXX km See Own‐ 897 è Charger cable connected 853
er's Manual
h - - - km/h 878 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when J Check brake fluid level 873
898
next refuelling
# 12 V on-board electrical sys‐

889 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a é Check tyre(s) 893
tem Visit workshop 878
break!
Û 48 V battery See Owner's Man‐

891 : Automatic driving lights inop‐ ! Clean the fuel filter 866
ual 845
erative
ò Acoustic presence indicator ÿ Coolant Stop Switch off the

853 Û Battery overheated Stop, 865
inoperative 855 vehicle
everybody out! Outdoors if possible
: Active Light System inopera‐ & Currently unavailable Battery

845 û Before starting the engine, 852
tive 863 low
turn the steering wheel.
¯ AdBlue system fault Engine & Currently unavailable Charge

897 852
start not possible Ø Beginning emergency stop 885 high-voltage battery
¯ AdBlue system fault See Own‐ & Currently unavailable High-

897 ê Camera view restricted See 852
er's Manual 887 voltage battery charging incomplete.
Owner's Manual
¯ AdBlue system malfunction

Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not 897 & Currently unavailable Refuel 852
Á Change key batteries 843
poss. in XXX km
Index D
! currently unavailable See 6 Front left malfunction Consult ÷ inoperative See Owner's Man‐
874 836 877
Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP®) workshop ual (ESP®)
÷ currently unavailable See

876 : Front left parking lights 847 G Inoperative 889
Owner's Manual (ESP®)
æ Do not leave persons or ani‐

842 : Front left turn signal 849 î inoperative 881
mals in the vehicle
6 Front right malfunction Con‐

: Dynamic low beam inoperative 845 837 Á Key being taught in Please wait 844
sult workshop
5 Engine oil level cannot be Á Key not detected (red display

899 : Front right parking lights 847 843
measured message)
5 Engine oil level Reduce oil Á Key not detected (white dis‐
898 : Front right turn signal 849 843
level play message)
5 Engine oil level Stop Switch off 6 Fuel tank is depressurised

898 857 : Left brake lamp 849
the vehicle Ready for refuelling
5 Engine oil pressure Stop ! inoperative See Owner's Man‐

899 875 : Left cornering light 847
Switch off the vehicle ual (ABS and ESP®)
T inoperative See Owner's Man‐

ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h 880 877 : Left daytime running lights 848
ual (EBD, ABS and ESP®)
Index D
! Parking brake Switch on vehi‐

: Left fog lamp 847 Û Malfunction 855 873
cle to release
j Parking lock inoperative Apply

: Left low beam 847 î Max. speed 40 km/h 881 869
the parking brake
: Left main beam 848 ð Maximum speed exceeded 880 È passive 879
: Left mirror turn signal 849 î Not in curr. drive prog. 881 d Performance severely limited 856
Ý Please wait 48 V battery

: Left tail light 848 : Number plate lamp 850 891
charging
6 Left window airbag malfunc‐ 6 Please wait Depressurising

840 Ø 884 856
tion Consult workshop fuel tank
: Malfunction See Owner's Man‐ & Pre-entry climate control via

844 ç Off 882 key available again after starting 852
ual
vehicle
Û Malfunction Visit workshop 855 ë Off 878 & Pre-entry climate control via
key currently unavailable. High-volt‐ 852
age battery low
! Parking brake See Owner's
d Malfunction 856 871
Manual
: Rear fog light 850
Index D
6 Restraint system malfunction

: Rear left turn signal 849 835 : Right mirror turn signal 849
Consult workshop
ð Restricted during trailer opera‐

: Rear right turn signal 849 888 : Right tail light 848
tion
6 Right window airbag malfunc‐

é Rectify tyre pressure 893 : Reversing light 850 840
tion Consult workshop
6 Second row of seats, left Mal‐

é Reduce speed 895 : Right brake lamp 850 838
function Consult workshop
Ú Refill AdBlue See Owner’s 6 Second row of seats, right Mal‐

896 : Right cornering light 847 839
Manual function Consult workshop
# Start the vehicle to charge the

! Release parking brake 873 : Right daytime running lights 848 890
12 V battery
Ù Steering malfunction
ý Replace air filter 866 : Right fog lamp 848 861
Increased physical effort See Own‐
er's Manual
Á Replace key 843 : Right low beam 847 Ù Steering malfunction See Own‐
862
er's Manual
æ Reserve fuel 866 : Right main beam 848 Ù Steering malfunction Stop
862
immediately See Owner's Manual
Index D
Ú Top up AdBlue Emergency op.

d Stop Switch off the vehicle 856 896 : Trailer left turn signal 850
in XXX km See Owner's Manual
# Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on Ú Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg.

890 : Trailer right turn signal 850
to charge the 12 V battery op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in 896
XXX km
# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐

889 + Top up coolant See Owner’s : Trailer tail light 851
ual 865
Manual
d Transmission oil overheated

ç suspended 882 869
¥ Top up washer fluid 864 Drive on with care
: Switch off lights 845 Ú Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch é Tyre(s) overheated 894
vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine 897
start not poss
: Switch on headlamps 845 é Warning tyre malfunction 894
u Towing not permitted See
853
Owner's Manual
6 Tank ventilation Malfunction
857 é Wheel sensor(s) missing 893
Consult workshop
: Trailer brake lamp 851
¸ temporarily unavailable Sen‐ "Electric" drive program currently

886 854
sors dirty ï Trailer coupling Check lock unavailable
858
(white display message)
: Third brake lamp 850 4matic currently unavailable 864
ï Trailer coupling Check lock
859
(red display message)
Index D
Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ AMG Ride Control Function limited
4matic inoperative 865 886 880
tive See Owner's Manual
Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐ Active Parking Assist and

863 PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐ 888 Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction 864
er's Manual
er's Manual
Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐ Apply brake and start vehicle to shift
883 Active Steering Assist currently 867
rently limited See Owner's Manual out of P or N
unavailable due to multiple emer‐ 884
gency stops
Active Brake Assist Functions limited
883 Apply brake to deselect P position 867
See Owner's Manual Active Steering Assist currently
884
Active Distance Assist available
883 Apply brake to engage D or R 867
again
Active Steering Assist inoperative 884
Active Distance Assist currently

882 Apply brake to engage R 868
unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently
846
Apply parking brake to park Visit
Active Distance Assist inoperative 883 868
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera‐ workshop
846
tive
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently Auxiliary battery malfunction (red
886 870
unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ display message)
rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ 845
ual
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions Auxiliary battery malfunction (white
886 870
restricted See Owner's Manual display message)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐
846
erative
Index D
Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐ Inoperative indicator lamp in driver

885 Cruise control inoperative 878 851
ble See Owner's Manual display. Consult workshop
Blind Spot Assist inoperative 885 Cruise control off 879 Limiter inoperative 879
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when Drive system malfunction Stop Login failed Change authentication
885 867 854
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual Switch off the vehicle method or charging station
Charging fault Please change charg‐ Drive system Malfunction Visit work‐
854 867 MULTIBEAM LED Functions limited 845
ing method See Owner's Manual shop
Check brake pads See Owner's Man‐ Front passenger airbag disabled See N permanently active Risk of vehicle
874 840 868
ual Owner's Manual rolling
Check tyre pressure, then restart Run Front passenger airbag enabled See Not possible to unlock charging
896 841 853
Flat Indicator Owner's Manual cable See Owner's Manual
Consult workshop without changing Hazard warning lamp system Mal‐ Occupant presence reminder inoper‐
869 851 842
the transmission position function ative
Consult workshop without starting Head-up display currently unavaila‐ Only electric drive available Power
856 861 854
the vehicle again ble See Owner's Manual limited
Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐ Only select P when vehicle is sta‐
879 Head-up display inoperative 861 867
tive tionary
Index D
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐

888 Run Flat Indicator inoperative 896 Transmission Malfunction 869
er's Manual
Place the key in the marked space

844 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h 879 Transmission Malfunction Stop 869
See Owner's Manual
Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ Transmission Malfunction Visit work‐

Possible to start the vehicle again 892 879 870
able See Owner's Manual shop
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Tyre press. monitor currently unavail‐

888 Speed Limit Assist inoperative 879 892
Manual able
RACE START cancelled 881 Teaching in transmission complete 870 Tyre press. monitor inoperative 892
Reduced drive system performance Teaching in transmission Operate

855 selector lever Brake for XX seconds 870 Tyre pressure Check tyres 895
See Owner's Manual
Risk of vehicle rolling
Reversing not poss. Consult work‐ Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No

868 To switch off the vehicle, press the 892
shop tyre pressure sensors
Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ 865
onds or 3 times
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown
868 occurs when locked or automatically 858
parking brake to park Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐
880 in a few minutes
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's
868 Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown
door open Transmission not in P
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative 880 occurs when locked or automatically 858
in XX mins
Index D
Vehicle not currently being charged

853 Information 659 Downhill Speed Regulation 416
Charging station fault
Wiper Malfunction 864 Door Drag Race, Drag race 550
Without changing gear, consult work‐

855 Additional door lock 191 Drinks holder 259
shop
Displaying road names/house numbers 592 Child safety lock (rear door) 180 Drive Away Assist 459
Distance control 408 Emergency key 194 Drive position 345
Distance warning 422 Opening (from the inside) 191 Drive program display 336
DISTRONIC 408 Unlocking (inside) 191 Drive programs
Dolby Atmos® Door control panel AMG DYNAMIC SELECT 339
Calling up Dolby Atmos® 659 Seat operation 90 Selecting 336
Index D
Driver display Navigation menu 491 Warning/indicator lamps 900
Track Pace menu 490 Notes 477 Driver's seat
Driver's display, Instrument cluster Off-road menu 491 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 220
48 V on-board electrical system 496 Operating 478 Adjusting (without seat comfort) 218
Assistant display 487 Service due date 671 Adjusting electrically 223
Classic menu 482 Service menu 487 Easy entry and exit feature 237
Head-up display 494 Status displays 498 Seat heating 233
Instrument cluster 82 Supersport menu 489 Driving abroad
Menus 480 Understated menu 482 Light adjustment low beam 42
Index D
Driving off-road 319 Cameras 391 Speed Limit Assist 427
Driving safety system Cruise control 404 STEER CONTROL 400
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 393 400 Traffic Sign Assist 430
tion)
Active Brake Assist 422 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 394 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist 462
Active Steering Assist 418 Hill Start Assist 402 Your responsibility 391
Adaptive brake lights 402 HOLD function 400 Driving system 392
ATTENTION ASSIST 403 Off-road ABS 393 Driving tips
BAS (Brake Assist System) 394 Overview 392 General driving tips 316
Light adjustment when driving

Blind Spot Assist 435 Radar and ultrasonic sensors 391 42
abroad
Index D
Off-road driving 319 Duplicate key 189 Displaying vehicle data 338
Recuperation 327 Dynamic handling control system 394 Drive program display 336
Running-in notes 314 Dynamic low beam Drive programs 333
Drowsiness detection 403 Activating/deactivating 276 Function 333
DSR Overview 275 Selecting the drive program 336
Activating/deactivating 417 DYNAMIC SELECT
Calling up the fuel consumption indi‐

Changing the target speed 417 339
cator
Function 416 Configuring drive program I 337
Notes 417 Displaying engine data 338
Index E
E
E-mails 511 Setting 238 ECO start/stop button
E10 814 EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution 400 Automatic engine start/stop 323
E25 814 ECO Assist ECO start/stop function
Easy entry feature 48 V on-board electrical system 325 Automatic engine start 322
Function 237 Activating/deactivating 330 Automatic engine stop 322
Conditions (automatic engine stop/

Setting 238 Plug-in hybrid 328 73
start)
Easy exit feature ECO display 324 Function 322
Function 237 Switching off/on 323
Index E
Electric drive 305 Electronic Stability Program 394 Emergency braking
Electric parking brake Emergency Active Brake Assist 422
Applying automatically 385 Emergency guide 75 Brake Assist System 394
Emergency braking 388 Fire extinguisher 62 Carrying out 388
Manually applying/releasing 387 First-aid kit (soft sided) 44 Electric parking brake/handbrake 385
Releasing automatically 386 Overview of aids 93 Emergency call
Electrical fuses 66 Safety vest 43 Automatic 640
Electromagnetic compatibility Warning triangle 696 Manual 640
Declaration of conformity 112
Index E
Emergency call system Emergency spare wheel Energy flow display
Mercedes me connect 74 Inflating 746 Function/notes 554
Emergency key Emergency stop assistant 420 Engine
Door 194 ENERGIZING Coach Emergency operation mode 311
Inserting/removing 188 Calling up 560 Engine number 810
Tailgate 202 Function 560 Starting assistance 709
Emergency operation mode ENERGIZING COMFORT switching off (start/stop button) 378
Start the vehicle 311 Overview of programmes 557 Tow-starting 719
Emergency shutoff (high-voltage on-

307 Starting the programme 558
board electrical system)
Index E
Checking the oil level using the

Engine data 39 Engine operating temperature
driver display
Displaying 338 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 820 Warning lamp 315
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
DYNAMIC SELECT 338 821 Engine output 315
Engine electronics 750 Quality 820 Engine output, current (driver's display) 488
Engine number 810 Quality (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 821 Engine sound 330
Engine oil, Oil Temperature (driver's display) 488 Engine starting
Additives 819 Topping up 679 Remote Online 313
Capacity 820 Engine oil temperature (driver's display) 488 Start/stop button 310
Capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 821 Engine torque 315
Index E
Entering characters ESP® Exit warning
Function/notes 534 Activating/deactivating 398 Blind Spot Assist 435
Handwriting recognition 536 Adjusting (steering-wheel button) 398 Exiting a parking space
On the touchscreen 534 Crosswind Assist 398 Active Parking Assist 453
Selecting the writing speed 536 ESP® SPORT 395 Drive Away Assist 459
Setting the keyboard language 536 Function 394 PARKTRONIC 450
Environmentally friendly driving 100 Trailer stabilisation 398 Exterior lighting
ERA-GLONASS test mode 642 EU type approval number 810 Care 689
Exhaust gas aftertreatment, diesel Light adjustment when driving

ESC, Electronic Stability Control 394 818 42
engine abroad
Index E
Exterior mirrors
Blind Spot Assist 435
Warning lamp 435
Index F
F
Factory settings Home address 568 Filling station search
MBUX reset function 545 Moving 530 Starting automatic search 579
Switching the automatic search

Fault message Overview 529 579
on/off
Driver's display 834 Renaming 529 Fire extinguisher 62
Favourites Work address 568 First aid
Adding a destination 568 Fill level First-aid kit (soft sided) 44
Calling up 529 AdBlue® 487 Fitting
Deleting 530 Snow chains 56
Index F
Tyres/wheels 742 TIREFIT kit 700 Frequencies
Fitting accessories Wheel change 739 Mobile phone 751
Limited protection 147 Flexible charging system Pro 366 Two-way radio 751
Fitting the licence plate (front) 111 Floor mats 270 Front airbag
Flat towing Foil covering Inflating 146
Pulling/towing 475 On camera/sensors 391 Front headlamps 272
Flat tyre Radar and ultrasonic sensors 391 Front passenger airbag
MOExtended 699 Free software 132 Disabling/enabling 141
Notes 67
Index F
Front passenger airbag shutoff Diesel 816 Reserve 817
Information (child restraint system

162 Diesel quality 816 Sulphur content 814
on the front passenger seat)
Front passenger seat E10 814 Tank content 817
Tank content (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 220 E25 814 818
cles)
Fuel reserve (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Adjusting (without seat comfort) 218 818 Fuel consumption indicator 339
cles)
Adjusting electrically 223 Petrol 814 Fuel reserve 817
Fuel Petrol quality 815 Function in the event of an accident 146
Additives 816 Quality (petrol) 814 Function seat 90
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in

355 Refilling 31
hybrid with petrol engine)
Index F
Fuses
Engine compartment 721
Front passenger footwell 722
Fuse assignment diagram 66
Load compartment 723
Notes 66
Index G
G
G-meter, Accelerometer 488 Garage door openers General driving tips 316
Gallery app Programming buttons 380 Genuine parts 103
Operating 636 Synchronising the rolling code 381 Glide mode 348
Garage door opener Gearshift Global search
Clearing the memory 384 DIRECT SELECT lever 340 Function 533
Open/close gate 384 Manual 346 Overview 532
Problem 382 Gearshift paddles Glove compartment 54
Steering wheel gearshift paddles 346 Grab handles 217
Index G
Gross mass 810
Index H
H
Handbrake 385 Hazard warnings Function 494
Handling characteristics Car-to-X-Communication 590 Memory function 240
Unusual 725 Head restraint Operating 495
HANDS-FREE ACCESS 200 Adjusting (rear) 231 Switching on/off 495
Hands-free system 606 Adjusting manually (front) 230 Headlamp flashing 274
Handwriting recognition 536 Removing/fitting (rear) 231 Headlamps 272
Hazard warning lights 62 Head-up display Heating
Care 691 Activating/deactivating 294
Index H
Seat 233 Charging cable control panel 366 General notes on charging 359
Stationary heater 60 Charging duration 827 Mains socket, mode 2 362
Maximum charging current (mains

Help call Charging station, mode 3 364 365
socket)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐

74 Configuring weekly profile 553 Notes 709
tem
High beam 274 Connection types 827 Range 827

High-pressure cleaner 687 371 Rapid charging station, mode 4 365
Ending the charging process (direct

High-voltage battery 375 Recuperation 327
current, mode 4)
Starting the charging process (alter‐

Charge level display 377 Energy flow display 554 368
Starting the charging process (direct

Charging at time of departure 553 Flexible charging system Pro 366 373
current, mode 4)
Index H
Stowing the charging cable 361 Hill Start Assist 402
Type 827 HOLD function
Voltage types 827 Function 400
Wallbox, mode 3 364 Switching on/off 401
High-voltage on-board electrical system Home screen
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 367 Central display 517
Manual switch-off 307 Hooking the luggage net 254
Operating safety 107
Hill descent control 416
Index I
I
i-Size child restraint system Implied warranty 126 Managing e-mails 620
Fitting 175 Importer information Marking a task as completed 620
Suitable seats 171 Regulatory radio information 808 Selecting functions (calendar entry) 620
Identification plate In-Car Office Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls) 620
Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occu‐

Engine 810 Answering e-mail 621
pants
Vehicle 810 Calling up 619 Limited protection 147
Immediate pre-entry climate control 300 Creating an e-mail 621 Increase in traffic information volume
Immobiliser 212 Forwarding e-mail 621 Setting 664
Index I
Indicator lamps/warning lamps Setting 281 Calling up the web browser settings 650
Driver's display 900 Switch-off delay time 282 Calling up web browser options 649
PASSENGER AIR BAG 139 Interior protection 214 Deleting a bookmark 650
Individual drive program Intermediate destination Deleting browser data 650
Configuring 337 Editing 577 Managing bookmarks 650
Starting an automatic filling station

Inside rearview mirror 287 579 Mercedes me connect 633
search
Starting the automatic service sta‐

Interior lighting 579 Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot 540
tion search
Ambient lighting 281 Internet Smartphone integration 28
MBUX reading light 523 Calling up a web page 648 Web browser in the background 651
Index I
Web browsers 649 Setting access data (Bluetooth®) 646
Internet connection Setting up (communication module) 645
Cancelling permission (mobile

647 Setting up (Wi-Fi) 646
phone)
Disconnecting automatically (com‐

645 Setup (Bluetooth®) 646
munication module)
Displaying the connection status 648 iPhone®
Establishing 647 Smartphone integration 623
Information 644 ISOFIX child restraint system
Overview of connection status 648 Fitting 175
Restrictions 644 Suitable seats 170
Index J
J
Jack
Declaration of conformity 114
Storage location 67
Jump-start connection 64
Index K
K
Key Key ring attachment 188 Unlocking setting 187
acoustic locking verification signal 187 Problem 189 Kickdown 348
Activating/deactivating pre-entry cli‐

297 Replacement key 189 Knee airbag 154
mate control
Battery 189 Unlocking setting 187
Deactivating a function 74 KEYLESS-GO
Emergency key 188 Deactivating 74
Energy consumption 74 Locking/unlocking the vehicle 192
Function 186 Problem 193
Index L
L
Lane Keeping Assist 437 Light adjustment Adaptive brake lights 402
Lane recognition Driving abroad 42 Adaptive Highbeam Assist 277
Active Lane Keeping Assist 437 Light switch 272 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 278
Language Lighting Automatic driving lights 273
Notes 541 Interior lighting 281 City lighting 276
Setting 541 Lights Combination switch 274
Activating/deactivating dynamic low

Last destinations 276 Cornering light 275
beam
Selecting 565 Active headlamps 275 Dynamic low beam 275
Index L
Hazard warning lights 62 Responsibility for lighting systems 272 Permanent setting 408
High beam 274 Switch-off delay time 280 Requirements: 406
Interior lighting 281 Turn signal light 274 Selecting 406

42 Limiter Setting a speed 406
abroad
Locator lighting 280 Activating/deactivating 406 Storing a speed 406
Motorway mode 275 Buttons 406 LINGUATRONIC
Off-road light 276 Calling up a speed 406 Radio voice commands 510
Reading lamp 281 Function 405 Live Traffic Information
Rear fog light 273 Passive mode 405 Displaying the traffic map 588
Index L
Displaying traffic incidents 588 Load compartment floor Roof luggage rack 47
Extending a subscription 587 Opening/closing 51 Tie-down eyes 53
Information from the service pro‐

587 Setting 256 Loading guidelines 242
vider
Registering on Mercedes me 587 Loading Loads 242
Adjusting the load compartment

Load capacity 256 Locator lighting 280
floor
Bicycle rack 831 Bag hook 253 Locking/unlocking
Load compartment cover Clothes hook 253 Additional door lock 191
Removing/fitting 250 Notes 242 Automatic locking (MMS) 193
Opening/closing the load compart‐

51 Doors (from the inside) 191
ment floor
Index L
Emergency key 194 Low emission zone
KEYLESS-GO 192 Avoiding/exiting 572
Drive program change (plug-in

Mercedes me connect 191 572
hybrid)
Loud sound lubricants 812
PRE-SAFE® Sound 143 Luggage
Low beam Luggage net 254
Activating/deactivating 272 Luggage rack 242

42 Lumbar support 226
abroad
Index M
M
Maintaining safe distance Manoeuvering brake function 460 Manual gearshifting
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 411 Manoeuvring Activating/deactivating 348
Maintenance 671 Manoeuvering brake function 460 Map, Traffic map
Maintenance Management Manoeuvring assistant Avoiding an area 594
Notes 673 Activating/deactivating 462 Avoiding an area (overview) 594
Transferred data 673 Drive Away Assist 459 Changing an area 595
Malfunction Manoeuvering brake function 460 Deleting an area 595
Restraint system 137 Displaying online map contents 598
Index M
Maximum permissible gross vehicle

Displaying Qibla 597 Route overview after start 593 810
mass
Displaying the compass 596 Selecting additional information 594 Maximum speeds 826
Displaying the map version 594 Selecting POI symbols 593 MBUX
Displaying the range 597 Setting the map scale 592 Dashcam 602
Displaying the satellite map 597 Setting the map scale automatically 597 MBUX Interior Assistant
Displaying the traffic map 588 Updating 44 Favourites 522
Displaying weather information 598 Map functions 592 Lasers and laser classification 519
Operating functions by proximity of

Map data 596 Massage programmes 233 521
your hand
Moving 593 Maximum full-stop braking 394 Overview 520
Index M
Reading light 523 Display settings 537 Mercedes me & Apps 29
Search light 523 Drive programs 337 Overview 515
ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes

Selecting settings 523 557 Set collision detection 388
(overview)
Setting keyboard and handwriting

Using the favourites pose 522 ENERGIZING seat kinetics 557 536
recognition
Setting route-based speed adapta‐

MBUX multimedia system Factory setting 545 416
tion
Activating/deactivating DSR 417 Global search 533 Standby mode function 390
Activating/deactivating standby Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT

390 Home screen 517 558
mode programme
Authorisations 538 Language settings 504 Switching the sound on/off 533
Configuring display settings 495 MBUX Interior Assistant 520 Touchscreen 518
Index M
MBUX reading light 523 Operable functions 505 Media mode
MBUX search light 523 Operating safety 503 Adding a favourite song 657
Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip‐

MBUX Voice Assistant Setting 505 656
ment
E-mails 511 Speech quality 507 Connecting USB devices 655
Function 504 Voice commands 509 Controlling media playback 656
Language setting 505 Voice prompting 504 Copyright and trademarks 653
Information about the search func‐

Media voice commands 510 Mecca 597 657
tion in categories
Online voice commands 512 Media Overview of the media menu 655
Online voice control 507 General information 27 Playing back similar music tracks 657
Index M
Removing a favourite song 657 Outside mirrors 240 Off-road 491
Starting a search in categories 657 Seat 240 Operating 481
Starting media playback 656 Menus (driver display) Service 487
Supported formats and data storage

653 Track Pace 490 Sport 488
media
Menus (driver's display), Steering-wheel

Surprise mix 657 Supersport 489
buttons
Using the keyword search 657 Assistant display 487 Understated menu 482
Medical aids 125 Classic menu 482 Mercedes me App
Memory function Navigation 491 Activating on-demand features 106
Head-up display 240 Notes 480 Calling up services 635
Index M
Calling up your user account 635 Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre 629 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Unlinking the user account 636 Transferred data 632 Automatic emergency call 640
Mercedes me Apps 29 Mercedes me Charge, Paying Data processing 642
Mercedes me calls Charging station display 571 Data transfer 640
Arranging a service appointment 631 Mercedes me connect ERA-GLONASS test mode 642
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Centre after automatic accident/ 630 Accident/Breakdown Management 634 Information 638
breakdown detection
Information 633 Manual emergency call 640

Calls via the overhead control panel 629
Transferred data 634 Overview 74

Consenting to the transfer of data 631
Self-diagnosis 641
Information 629
Index M
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 103 Overview 617 Outside mirrors 286
Mercedes-Benz service centre 121 Read-aloud function 617 Rear-view mirror 287
Message memory 834 Reading 617 Mobile phone
Cancelling permission for Internet

Messages, Short messages Replying 618 647
connection
Calling a message sender 618 Sending 617 Frequencies 751
Deleting 619 Setting the displayed text messages 617 Maximum transmission output 751
Dictating 617 Using a phone number or URL 618 Notes on wireless charging 267
Forwarding 618 Mirrors Smartphone integration 28
MBUX voice commands 511 Mirror folding function 289 Telephone 28
Index M
Model type 810 City lighting 276 Search function 659
Modification Cornering light 275
Limited protection 147 Motorway mode 275
MOExtended tyres, Run-flat tyres 699 Off-road light 276
Motorway mode 275 Music online
MULTIBEAM LED Adding providers 658
Active headlamps 275 Calling up 658
Adaptive Highbeam Assist 277 Calling up the settings 659
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 278 Requirements: 658
Index N
N
Navigation Navigation announcements Switching mobile phones 610
Activating 562 Activating/deactivating 584 Using a mobile phone 610
Destination entry 45 Adjusting the volume 584 Near-field communication
Information 24 Repeating 585 Activating/deactivating 539
MBUX voice commands 509 Switching audio fadeout on/off 584 Neutral 342
Menu (driver display) 491 Near Field Communication (NFC) NFC 539
Connecting a mobile phone to the

Overview 562 610 Notifications Centre
Updating the map data 44 Information 539 Calling up a notification 531
Index N
Editing a notification 532
Message types 530
Overview 530
Selecting actions 531
Index O
O
Objects in the vehicle interior Child seat 158 Off-road driving 319
Information on the child restraint

Limited protection 147 141 Off-road light 276
system
Information on the correct seat posi‐

Occupant presence reminder 135 Off-road menu
tion
Activating/deactivating 184 Occupant presence reminder 184 Overview 555
Function 184 Pets in the vehicle 147 Setting 555
Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® 143 On-board diagnostics interface 119
Airbag 154 Off-road 491 On-board electronics
Basic information 134 Off-road ABS 393 Engine electronics 750
Index O
Two-way radios 750 Opening the tailgate using your foot Fuel (petrol) 814
On-demand feature 106 HANDS-FREE ACCESS 200 Notes 812
Online services 130 Operating fluids Petrol 815
Open Source Software 132 AdBlue® 818 Windscreen washer fluid 57
Open/close garage door 384 Additives 816 Operating safety
Open/close gate 384 Brake fluid 821 48 V on-board electrical system 107
High-voltage on-board electrical sys‐

Opening angle Coolant 822 107
tem
Limiting (tailgate) 202 Diesel 816 Outside mirrors
Engine oil 819 Automatic anti-dazzle mode 287
Index O
Automatic mirror folding function 289
Folding in/out 286
Memory function 240
Parking position 288
Setting 286
Overhead control panel 88
Index P
P
Paint code 810 Parking Assist Parking assistance systems
Park position Active Parking Assist 453 Active Parking Assist 453
DIRECT SELECT lever 340 PARKTRONIC 450 Drive Away Assist 459
Parking Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Manoeuvering brake function 460
Active Parking Assist 453 Activating/deactivating 453 PARKTRONIC 450
PARKTRONIC 450 Adjusting warning tones 453 Parking brake 385
Prior booking 600 Function 450 Parking charges
Paying 601
Index P
Parking lights 272 Paying parking charges 601 PASSENGER AIR BAG
Status display, front passenger air‐

Parking option Prior booking of a parking space 600 139
bag
Displaying on the map 599 Selecting parking options 599 Pedestrian protection 675
Parking position Parking space Period out of use
Activating/deactivating standby
Outside mirrors 288 Finding 599 390
mode
Storing the front-passenger outside

72 Parking up 389 Permissible axle load 810
mirror using the memory button
Storing the position of the passenger

288 PARKTRONIC 450 Permitted towing methods
outside mirror using reverse gear
Parking service Partitioning net 251 Overview 714
Displaying a parking option on the

599 Petrol 814
map
Index P
Ending the charging process (direct

Pets in the vehicle 147 375 Notes on plug-in hybrid operation 305
current, mode 4)
Function of the recuperative brake

Photos 327 Operating safety 107
system
Gallery app 636 Functions of the energy flow display 554 Power meter 497
Route-based operating-mode strat‐

PIN protection Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 367 330
egy
Manually disconnecting the high-

System PIN protection 542 307 Sets recuperation 327
voltage on-board electrical system
Maximum charging current (mains Starting the charging process (alter‐

Plug-in hybrid operation 365 368
socket) nating current, mode 2/3)
Notes on charging (charging station, Starting the charging process (direct

Charging cable control panel 366 364 373
mode 3) current, mode 4)
Charging the high-voltage battery at Notes on charging (mains socket,

365 362 Stowing the charging cable 361
a rapid charging station (mode 4) mode 2)

371 Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3) 364
Index P
PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protec‐

POI Pre-entry climate control
tion
activating/deactivating for departure

Selecting 565 299 Function 143
time
POI symbols At departure time 298 PRE-SAFE® Sound 143
Selecting 593 At time of departure 298 Reversing measures 143
Preventative occupant protection sys‐

Post-collision brake 144 immediate 300 143
tem
Power supply When vehicle is unlocked 297 Programme 333
Start/stop button 309 Pre-entry climate control using the key Protection
Switching on (start/stop button) 309 Activating/deactivating 297 Limited 147
Function 297
Index P
Protection against collision
Manoeuvering brake function 460
Protection of the environment
Driving style 100
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 102
Pulling away
Hill Start Assist 402
Start-off assist 402
Index Q
Q
Qibla 597
QR code rescue card 64
Qualified specialist workshop 121
Index R
R
RACE START Radio Entering a frequency directly 46
Activating 441 Activating 661 Frequency fix 663
Activation conditions 441 Activating/deactivating radio text 664 Managing favourites 662
Information 440 Calling up a slide show 663 Menu 26
Racetrack mode Calling up the station list 662 Moving stations 662
AMG steering-wheel buttons 331 Deleting stations 662 Overview 661
Radar and ultrasonic sensors 391 Displaying radio text 664 Searching for a channel 46
Editing station presets 662 Setting a channel 661
Index R
Setting station tracking 663 Radio (audio system) Wireless applications 752
Setting station tracking (Internet Switching traffic announcements

663 72 Rain closing function
Radio) on/off
Setting the frequency band 661 Radio announcements Side windows 204
Setting the traffic information

664 Activating or deactivating 664 Sliding sunroof 210
service volume increase
Showing/hiding lyrics 664 Selecting 664 Rain sensor
Station suggestion 662 Radio regulations Side windows 204
Storing radio stations 662 Importer information 808 Sliding sunroof 210
Switching a slide show off/on 663 Regulatory radio identification 754 Windscreen wipers 283
Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) 510 Specific absorption rate 807
Index R
Range Rear seat Switching on/off 283
AdBlue® 487 Adjusting the backrest 228 Rear-view mirror
REACH regulation 124 Adjusting the backrest angle 249 Automatic anti-dazzle mode 287
Reading lamp Rear seat belt Rearward-facing child seat
Interior lighting 281 Status display 138 Information 165
Rear door (child safety lock) Rear window heater 291 Recuperation
Securing 180 Rear window wiper Function 327
Rear fog lamp 273 Automatically active 72 Setting 327
Rear fog light 273 Replacing wiper blade 285 Recycling 102
Index R
Reducing agent Remote Online Resetting
AdBlue® 35 Charging the starter battery 313 MBUX reset function 545
Refuelling Cooling/heating the vehicle interior 313 Residual heat 296
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in

355 Starting the vehicle 313 Responsibility
hybrid with petrol engine)
Fuel 31 Replacement key 189 Driving safety systems 391
Refuelling the vehicle 31 Reserve Restraint system
Topping up AdBlue® 35 Fuel 817 Basic information 134
Registration 122 Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 818 Basic instructions for children 158
Deployment situations 146
Index R
Functionality 137 Reverse gear Roller sunblind
Information on function 146 DIRECT SELECT lever 340 Sliding sunroof 207
Information on the correct seat posi‐

135 Reversing camera Roof load 826
tion
Limited protection 147 360° Camera 442 Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 826
Malfunction 137 Function 442 Roof load display
Protection 135 Opening the camera cover 450 Information 336
Self-test 137 Rocking free 346 Roof luggage rack
Warning lamp 137 Roll away protection 400 Loading 47
Securing 47
Index R
Route Low emission zone 572 Starting a saved route 580
Starting the automatic service sta‐

Accepting a detour recommendation 574 Navigation 562 579
tion search
Switching the automatic filling sta‐

Alternative route 569 Planning 576 579
tion search on/off
Calculating 569 Range on Map service 573 Route guidance
Calculating alternative routes 574 Recording 580 Cancelling 585
Commuter route 569 Saving a recorded route 580 Changing direction 581
Displaying destination information 576 Selecting a type 573 Destination reached 583
Displaying the route list 577 Selecting notifications 575 Lane recommendations 583
Editing a stored route 580 Selecting options 574 Motorway information 583
Index R
Notes 581 Route-based speed adaptation
Off-road 585 Function 415
Route guidance with augmented reality Setting 416
Activating 592 Run-flat characteristics 699
Activating/deactivating the traffic

434 Running-in notes 314
light view
Displaying road names/house num‐

592
bers
Overview 591
Route-based operating-mode strategy
Function 330
Index S
S
Safety system 392 Adjusting backrests (rear) 228 Folding the backrest forwards (rear) 48
Safety vest 43 Adjusting electrically 223 Locking the backrest (rear) 249
Satellite map 597 adjusting manually (rear) 226 Lumbar support 226
Saving a destination suggestion as a Adjusting the angle of the backrests

586 249 Memory function 240
favourite (rear)
Resetting settings (massage pro‐

Searching for a channel 46 Automatic adjustment 232 233
gramme)
Seat, Through-loading feature Correct driver's seat position 216 Settings 90
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 220 ENERGIZING seat kinetics 557 Side airbag 154
Adjusting (without seat comfort) 218 Folding back the backrest (rear) 49
Index S
Seat belt Seat belt adjustment Seat kinetics
Activating/deactivating seat belt

144 Activating/deactivating 144 Setting 557
adjustment
Automatic tightening 144 Function 144 Seat ventilation
Care 691 Seat belt tensioners Activating/deactivating 227
Fastening 137 Inflating 146 Second telephone
Notes on wearing correctly 136 Seat belt warning 138 Connecting 609
Rear seat belt status display 138 Seat heating Selecting a gear 346
Selecting a sound characteristic (steer‐

Releasing 153 Activating/deactivating 233 330
ing-wheel button)
Warning lamp 138
Index S
Selecting the sound profile Service Settings
Burmester® surround sound system 667 Menu (driver's display) 487 Information 29
Selector lever 340 Service centre 121 Shifting
Self-test Service due date 671 Automatic transmission 346
Automatic front passenger airbag

139 Service interval display 671 Gearshift recommendation 348
shutoff
Restraint system 137 Service station search Manual 346
Sensors Starting automatic search 579 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 346
Cleaning 689 Setting the date format 537 Shortening the braking distance
Information 391 Setting the distance unit 541 Brake Assist System 394
Index S
Shunting assistant 462 Side windows Opening with the key 205
Shunting support 460 Automatic function 204 Sliding sunroof, Panorama sliding sunroof
Side airbag 154 Child safety lock (rear) 182 Automatic functions 210
Side window Opening/closing 203 Opening/closing 207
Close with key 205 Problem 206 Problem 211
Convenience closing 205 Rain closing function 204 Rain closing function 210
Convenience opening 205 Skid chains 56 Smartphone integration
Opening with the key 205 Sliding roof Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto 28
Close with key 205 Snow chains 56
Index S
Socket PRE-SAFE® Sound 143 Specialist workshop 121
12 V (boot/load compartment) 264 Wheels/tyres 725 Specific absorption rate (SAR) 807
12 V (front centre console) 264 Sound settings Speed

115 V (rear passenger compartment) 264 666 Limit, Limiter 405
settings
Trailer operation 468 Automatic loudness normalisation 666 Save, cruise control 411
Socket flap 359 Calling up the sound menu 666 Save, DISTRONIC 411
SOS button 629 Setting the balance and fader 666 Save, Limiter 411
Sound Spare parts 103 Speed adjustment, route-based 415
AMG Real Performance Sound 330 Spare wheel 745
Index S
Speed control Standing lights 272 Start/stop function 322
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 408 Start-off assist Starter battery
Cruise control 404 Activating 402 Charging via Remote Online 313
Limiter 405 Function 402 Starting assistance 64
Speed limit Hill Start Assist 402 Starting the engine
Winter tyres 56 Start/stop button Emergency operation mode 311
Speed Limit Assist Parking the vehicle 378 Remote Online 313
Setting 429 Starting the vehicle 310 Start/stop button 310
Switching on the power supply /

System limits 427 309
vehicle
Index S
Starting-off aid Moving 662 Station tracking
Drive Away Assist 459 Setting 661 Setting 663
Hill Start Assist 402 Storing 662 Setting (Internet Radio) 663
Start-off assist 402 Station list Stationary heater/ventilation
Station Calling up 662 Activating/deactivating 60
Deleting 662 Station presets Operating 302
Entering a frequency directly 46 Editing 662 Status display
Frequency fix 663 Station suggestion Front passenger airbag 139
Managing favourites 662 Radio 662 Rear seat belt 138
Index S
Steer Assist Steering wheel heater 236 Stowage spaces
Active Steering Assist 418 Stop/start Armrest (front) 54
STEER CONTROL 400 ECO start/stop function 323 Centre console (front) 54
STEER CONTROL 400 Stopping Door 54
Steering wheel Parking the vehicle 378 Glove compartment 54
Driver's airbag 154 Stowage areas 54 Streaming online music 658
Stowage space underneath the load

Manually adjusting 235 Suggestions
compartment floor
Steering wheel heater 236 Opening/closing 51 Configuring 542
Steering wheel gearshift paddles 346 Deleting 543
Index S
Sulphur content 814 Switch-off delay time System PIN protection
Supersport menu display content Exterior 280 Activating/deactivating 542
Selecting 489 Interior 282 System settings
Activating/deactivating system PIN

Suspension Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 296 542
protection
Adaptive Damping System 439 Switching loudness normalisation on/off MBUX reset function 545
AMG RIDE CONTROL 439 Advanced sound system 668 Setting the distance unit 541
Selecting the suspension setting 440 Burmester® surround sound system 667 Setting the time zone 537
SVHC Synchronisation function Setting the time/date format 537
Activating/deactivating (control Switching near-field communication

Substances of very high concern 124 295 539
panel) (NFC) on or off
Index S
Transmission of the vehicle position 538
Index T
T
Tabs Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 102 Technical data
managing 650 Tank content Axle load (trailer operation) 832
Axle load (trailer operation),

Tailgate, Boot lid AdBlue® 819 832
Closing 198 Fuel 817 Fastening points of the trailer hitch 829
Emergency key 202 Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 818 High-voltage battery 827
HANDS-FREE ACCESS 200 Reserve 817 Information 749
Reserve (fuel), (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Limiting the opening angle 202 818 Maximum speeds 826
cles)
Mounting dimensions of a trailer

Opening 197 Tank filler cap / flap 31 829
hitch
Index T
Overhang dimension of the trailer

829 Vehicle dimensions 824 Changing a function 609
hitch
Radio frequencies 751 Telediagnosis Charging wirelessly (mobile phone) 268
Radio regulations 754 Diagnostic data 674 Connecting a mobile phone 14
Connecting a mobile phone (Near

Roof load 826 Telediagnostics 610
Field Communication (NFC))
Specific absorption rate (SAR) 807 Transferred data 674 Disconnecting a mobile phone 610
Tongue weight 831 Telemetry display 551 Emergency call 74
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

831 Telephone, Smartphone Importing contacts 615
cles)
Towing capacity 830 Activating functions during a call 613 Importing contacts (overview) 615
Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 830 Calls with several participants 613 Incoming call during an existing call 613
Index T
Information 23 Smartphone integration 28 Telephony operating modes
Switching mobile phones (Near Field

Interchanging mobile phones 609 610 Bluetooth® telephony 608
Communication (NFC))
MBUX voice commands 509 Telephone menu overview 607 Temperature
Setting the vehicle interior tempera‐

Notes 606 Telephone operation 612 291
ture
Notes on wireless charging (mobile Using Near Field Communication

267 610 Text messages 511
phone) (NFC)
Operating modes 608 Voice recognition 611 Tie-down eyes 53
Reception and transmission volume 611 Telephone (audio system) Time
Secure Simple Pairing 14 Replacing a mobile phone 609 Manual time setting 537
Setting the ringtone 611 Setting the time zone 537
Index T
Setting the time/date format 537 Torque (driver's display) 488 Tow bar system
TIREFIT kit, Tyre inflation compressor Touch Control Towing away 475
Declaration of conformity 116 Driver's display 478 Tow-away protection 213
Storage location 68 MBUX 517 Tow-starting 719
Tone settings Setting the sensitivity 518 Towing
Information 666 Touch-sensitive controls 105 Pulling/towing 475
Tongue weight 831 Touchscreen Towing methods 714
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 831 Entering characters 534 Towing eye
Top Tether 177 Storage location 718
Index T
Towing methods Traffic information Traffic light view
Both axles on the ground 69 Car-to-X-Communication 590 Activating/deactivating 434
Overview 714 Displaying the traffic map 588 Information 434
Track Pace Displaying traffic incidents 588 Traffic light warning/display 430
Extending a Live Traffic Information

Menu (driver display) 490 587 Traffic restrictions
subscription
Information on Live Traffic Informa‐

Track Race 547 587 Activating/deactivating 572
tion
Traffic announcements (audio system) Overview 586 Service 572
Switching on/off 72 Registering Live Traffic Information 587 Traffic Sign Assist
Function 430
Index T
Setting 434 Fastening points 829 Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 830
Trailer coupling 51 Folding the ball neck out/in 51 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist 462
Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing 475 General notes 829 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist
Trailer hitch Mounting dimensions 829 Function 462
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist, Manoeu‐

Axle load 832 Overhang dimension 829
vring assistant
Axle load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 832 Socket 468 Operation 463
Bicycle rack 472 Tongue weight 831 Trailer operation
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Care 689 831 Active Lane Keeping Assist 437
cles)
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 468 Towing capacity 830 Axle load 832
Index T
Bicycle rack 472 Apple CarPlay® 628 Overview 652
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 468 Transmission position display 340 Registering 652
Folding the ball neck out/in 51 Transmission positions Saving stations 652
Making settings 470 DIRECT SELECT lever 340 Selecting and connecting a station 652
Notes 465 Transporting Selecting stream 652
Socket 468 Vehicle 717 Setting options 652
Trailer stabilisation 398 TuneIn Turn signal indicator 274
Transferred vehicle data Deleting stations 652 Turn signal light 274
Android Auto 628 Logging out 652
Index T
Tyre pressure loss warning system,

Two-way radios 733 Tyre sealant 700
restarting
Frequencies 751 Tyre pressure table 730 Tyre tread 42
Installation 750 Tyre pressure loss warning system Tyre-change tool 67
Transmission output 751 Function 732 Tyre-change tool kit 67
Type approval number EG 810 Restarting 733 Tyres
Tyre pressure Tyre pressure monitoring system Breakdown 67
Notes 729 Function 730 Checking 42
TIREFIT kit 700 Restarting 731 Checking temperature 731

732 Tyre pressure table 730 Fitting 742
function
Index T
Interchanging 738 Storing 738
MOExtended 699 TIREFIT kit 700

Noise 725 732
function

Notes on fitting 734 733
restarting
Removing 741 Tyre pressure table 730
Removing/fitting hub cap 739 Unusual handling characteristics 725
Replacing 734
Selection 734
Snow chains 56
Index U
U
Understated menu display content Information 543 USB port (multimedia system)
Selecting 482 Performing 543 Connecting devices 655
Unfastening 153 URL User profiles, Personalisation
Units of measurement Sharing 651 Adding a user 525
Setting 541 USB port Notes 524
Unlocking setting 187 Rear 265 Overview 524
Updating software, System update,

Stowage compartments (front) 54 Requirements for use 524
Update
Error message 545 Selecting a user 528
Index U
Selecting options 526
Synchronising 528
User-specific content 524
Index V
V
Variable limiter 405 Emergency key 194 Locking/unlocking (from inside) 192
Vehicle, Switching on the ignition enabling, Remote Online 313 Lowering 743
High-voltage on-board electrical sys‐

48 V on-board electrical system 107 107 Medical aids 125
tem
Activating/deactivating standby
390 Implied warranty 126 Parking up 389
mode
Additional door lock 191 Information 28 QR code rescue card 64
Correct use 123 KEYLESS-GO 192 Raising 740
Data storage 128 lock automatically (MMS) 193 REACH regulation 124
Diagnostics connection 119 Lock/unlock (emergency key) 194 Registration 122
Index V
Rocking free 346 Switching on (start/stop button) 309 Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT 338
Set collision detection 388 Towing 475 Maximum speeds 826
Standby mode function 390 Towing away 714 Roof load 826
Starting (start/stop button) 310 Transporting 717 Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 826
starting, emergency operation mode 311 ventilate / comfort opening 205 Transferring to Android Auto 628
Voice commands for MBUX voice

Stopping 378 511 Transferring to Apple CarPlay® 628
assistant
SVHC/substances of very high con‐

124 Vehicle cameras 391 Vehicle height 824
cern
Vehicle height (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Switching off 378 Vehicle data 825
cles)
switching off (start/stop button) 378 Display, MBUX 338 Vehicle length 824
Index V
Vehicle length (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

825 Vehicle identification plate Vehicle key 186
cles)
Vehicle width 824 Axle load 810 Vehicle location
Vehicle width (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

825 EU type approval number 810 Switching transmission on/off 538
cle)
Wheelbase 824 Gross mass 810 Vehicle position
Wheelbase (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 825 Model type 810 Storing 585
Vehicle dimensions 824 Paint code 810 Vehicle sensors 391
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG

825 VIN 810 Vehicle socket
vehicles)
Vehicle emergency start 719 Vehicle interior Care 689
Cooling/heating (Remote Online) 313 Indicator lamps 367
Index V
Vehicle start Vents Vision
Emergency operation mode 311 Air vents 302 Demisting windows 296
Remote Online 313 Video recordings Voice assistant
Start/stop button 310 Gallery app 636 Voice prompting 504
Vehicle tool kit VIN, Vehicle identification number Voice recognition 611
TIREFIT kit 68 Engine compartment 810
Towing eye 718 Identification plate 810
Ventilation 205 Windscreen 810
Index W
W
Warning system 212 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red) 906 ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes 912
Warning triangle 44 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow) 908 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up 912
! Electric parking brake indicator æ Fuel reserve warning lamp

Warning/indicator lamp 909 909
lamp (red) lights up
! Electric parking brake indicator H Mercedes-Benz emergency call

! ABS warning lamp 911 909 916
lamp (yellow) system warning lamp
Ó Active Brake Assist warning p Occupant presence reminder

915 # Electrical fault warning lamp 904 904
lamp warning lamp (white)
Û ATTENTION ASSIST warning ; Engine diagnostics warning p Occupant presence reminder

915 908 904
lamp lamp warning lamp (yellow)
p Engine operating temperature Ù Power steering warning lamp

J Brakes warning lamp (red) 910 908 905
warning lamp (red)
Ù Power steering warning lamp

J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) 909 å ESP® OFF warning lamp 913 905
(yellow)
Index W
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐

_ Reduced-power warning lamp 904 916 Washing by hand 688
tem warning lamp flashes
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐

6 Restraint system warning lamp 902 917 Water tank 684
tem warning lamp lights up
L Warning lamp for distance

ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes 903 915 Wear
warning
ü Seat belt warning lamp lights

903 Warning/indicator lamps Limited protection 147
up
ê Speed Limit Assist warning

915 Driver's display 900 Weather information 598
lamp
ä Suspension warning lamp (yel‐

916 PASSENGER AIR BAG 139 Web browser
low)
Ú System error warning lamp 904 Washer fluid Calls up options 649
ê Traffic Sign Assist warning

915 Topping up 37 Deleting browser data 650
lamp
ï Trailer hitch warning lamp 905 Windscreen washer fluid 57
Index W
Web browsers What3words Wheel rotation 738
Destination entry with a 3 word

Calling up a web page 648 567 Wheels
address
Calling up the settings 650 Wheel change Breakdown 67
Deleting a bookmark 650 Fitting a new wheel 742 Care 689
Managing bookmarks 650 Lowering the vehicle 743 Checking 42
Setting in the background 651 Preparation 739 Checking tyre temperature 731
Sharing URLs 651 Raising the vehicle 740 Fitting 742
Tabs 650 Removing a wheel 741 Interchanging 738
Weight information 810 Removing/fitting hub caps 739 MOExtended 699
Index W
Noise 725 Tyre pressure 729 Widescreen cockpit driver's display
Notes on fitting 734 Tyre pressure monitoring system 730 Instrument cluster 85
Removing 741 Unusual handling characteristics 725 Window airbag 154
Removing/fitting hub cap 739 Wi-Fi Windows
Replacing 734 Activating/deactivating 540 Care 689
Selection 734 Information on connection 539 Convenience opening 205
Snow chains 56 Setting up a hotspot 540 Opening with the key 205
Storing 738 Setting up an Internet connection 646 Opening/closing 203
Opening/closing (air recirculation

TIREFIT kit 700 71
button)
Index W
Replacing wiper blades (rear win‐

Removing mist 296 285 Wipers 283
dow)
Windscreen Winter operation Wireless applications 752
Demisting 291 Snow chains 56 Wireless charging
Windscreen washer fluid 57 Winter tyres Mobile phone 268
Windscreen washer system 37 Limiter 56 Notes 267
Windscreen wipers Setting the permanent speed limit 56 Workshop 121
Activating/deactivating 283 Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades 39 Care 689
Replacing the wiper blades (wind‐

39 Replacing (windscreen) 39
screen)
Publication details
WEBSITE
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following
websites:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com
https://group.mercedes-benz.com
EDITORIAL TEAM
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you
may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical
editorial team at the following address:
Mercedes‑Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546

Stuttgart, Germany
© Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or oth‐
erwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written per‐
mission from Mercedes‑Benz AG.
VEHICLE MANUFACTURER
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart
Germany

Mercedes Gla Suv 2023 October h247 Mbux Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Gla Suv 2023 October h247 Mbux Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Gla Suv 2023 October h247 Mbux Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GLA

Digital – in the vehicle Digital – on the Internet

Apple® iOS AndroidTM

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with

Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.

MERCEDES-BENZ THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INTRODUCE

Symbols 7 Opening and closing 185 MBUX multimedia system 514

At a glance 76 Light and sight 271 Breakdown assistance 694

General notes 99 Driving and parking 304 Technical data 748

Display messages and warning/indicator

(/ page) Further information on a topic

# Observe environmental notes.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information

Quick start and Tips

Children in the vehicle 10 ENERGIZING Packages 17 At the filling station 31

MULTIBEAM LED 11 Driving Assistance package 18 Preparing for a holiday 42

Radio 12 Parking Package 19 Luggage and loading 47

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2

High-voltage battery direct current charg‐

MBUX Interior Assistant 15 Destination entry navigation 22 Expert tips 71

MBUX Voice Assistant 16 New multimedia system features 23

Children in the vehicle

# Approval categories for child restraint systems (/ page 165)

# Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

# Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems

# Fastening a Top Tether belt (/ page 177)

# Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

R Active headlamps (/ page 275)

# Activating or deactivating MULTIBEAM LED:

Operating radio R Select è.

# To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot R Security key

R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A CONNECTION:

Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

# Searching for a mobile phone:

# Authorising a mobile phone:

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

MBUX Interior Assistant

THE ASSISTANT OFFERS FUNCTIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING:

MBUX Voice Assistant

Operating the MBUX Voice Assistant

EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE VOICE COMMANDS:

R To operate the phone: Call my father.

Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

# To configure an ENERGIZING programme:

# To start Power Nap:

# To start a training programme:

Driving Assistance package

# Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent)

# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 408)

# Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 414)

# Route-based speed adaptation (country-dependent) (/ page 415)

# Active Brake Assist (/ page 422)

# Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 418)